2023 Subaru Crosstrek

(1,1)
Foreword
Foreword
SFWAA
Congratulations on choosing a SUBARU vehicle. This Owner’s
Manual has all the information necessary to keep your SUBARU in
excellent condition and to properly maintain the emission control
system for minimizing emission pollutants. We urge you to read this
manual carefully so that you may understand your vehicle and its
operation. For information not found in this Owner’s Manual, such
as details concerning repairs or adjustments, please contact the
SUBARU dealer from whom you purchased your SUBARU or the
nearest SUBARU dealer.
The information, specifications and illustrations found in this
manual are those in effect at the time of printing. SUBARU
CORPORATION reserves the right to change specifications and
designs at any time without prior notice and without incurring any
obligation to make the same or similar changes on vehicles
previously sold. This Owner’s Manual applies to all models and
covers all equipment, including factory installed options. Some
explanations, therefore may be for equipment not installed in your
vehicle.
Please leave this manual in the vehicle at the time of resale. The next
owner will need the information found herein.
SUBARU CORPORATION, TOKYO, JAPAN
“SUBARU” and the six-star cluster design are registered trademarks of SUBARU CORPORATION.
*
C Copyright 2022 SUBARU CORPORATION
北米Model "A1490BE-A" EDITED: 2021/ 9/ 24

(2,1)

(3,1)
Vehicle type
SFWAB
This manual describes the following vehicle type.

(2,1)

(3,1)
1
S00
Warranties & Warranties except for U.S.A. How to use this Owner’s 0
S00AA and Canada Manual
& Warranties for U.S.A. S00AA06
All warranty information, including details S00AB
S00AA01
SUBARU vehicles distributed by Subaru of of coverage and exclusions, is in the & Using your Owner’s Manual
S00AB01
America, Inc. and sold at retail by an “Warranty and Maintenance Booklet”. Before you operate your vehicle, carefully
authorized SUBARU dealer in the United Read these warranties carefully. read this manual. To protect yourself and
States come with the following warranties: extend the service life of your vehicle,
. SUBARU Limited Warranties follow the instructions in this manual.
. Federal Emission Control Systems Failure to observe these instructions may
Warranties result in serious injury and damage to your
. California Emissions Control Sys- vehicle.
tems Warranties This manual is composed of fourteen
All warranty information, including applic- chapters. Each chapter begins with a brief
ability, details of coverage and exclusions, table of contents, so you can usually tell at
is in the “Warranty and Maintenance a glance if that chapter contains the
Booklet”. Read these warranties carefully. information you want.
Chapter 1: Seat, seatbelt and SRS air-
& Warranties for Canada bags
S00AA05
SUBARU vehicles distributed by Subaru This chapter informs you how to use the
Canada, Inc. and sold at retail by an seat and seatbelt and contains precau-
authorized SUBARU dealer in Canada tions for the SRS airbags.
come with the following warranties: Chapter 2: Keys and doors
. SUBARU Limited Warranty This chapter informs you how to operate
. Emission Control System Warranty the keys, locks and windows.
Chapter 3: Instruments and controls
All warranty information, including applic-
This chapter informs you about the opera-
ability, details of coverage and exclusions,
tion of instrument panel indicators and how
is in the “Warranty and Service Booklet”.
to use the instruments and other switches.
Read these warranties carefully.
– CONTINUED –

(4,1)
Chapter 4: Climate control Chapter 12: Specifications WARNING

This chapter informs you how to operate This chapter informs you about dimen-
the climate control. sions and capacities of your SUBARU. A WARNING indicates a situation in
Chapter 5: Audio Chapter 13: Consumer information and which serious injury or death could
This chapter informs you about your audio Reporting safety defects result if the warning is ignored.
system. This chapter informs you about Uniform
Chapter 6: Interior equipment tire quality grading standards and Report-
ing safety defects. CAUTION
This chapter informs you how to operate
interior equipment. Chapter 14: Index A CAUTION indicates a situation in
Chapter 7: Starting and operating This is an alphabetical listing of all that’s in which injury or damage to your
This chapter informs you how to start and this manual. You can use it to quickly find vehicle, or both, could result if the
operate your SUBARU. something you want to read. caution is ignored.
Chapter 8: Driving tips For models with EyeSight system:
This chapter informs you how to drive your For details about the EyeSight system, NOTE
SUBARU in various conditions and ex- refer to the Owner’s Manual supplement A NOTE gives information or sugges-
plains some safety tips on driving. for the EyeSight system. tions how to make better use of your
Chapter 9: In case of emergency vehicle.
Depending on specifications, the vehicle
This chapter informs you what to do if you shown in the illustrations may differ from
have a problem, such as a flat tire or your vehicle in terms of equipment.
engine overheating.
Chapter 10: Appearance care & Safety warnings
This chapter informs you how to keep your S00AB02
SUBARU looking good. You will find a number of WARNINGs,

CAUTIONs and NOTEs in this manual.
Chapter 11: Maintenance and service
These safety warnings alert you to poten-
This chapter informs you when you need to tial hazards that could result in injury to you
take your SUBARU to the dealer for or others.
scheduled maintenance and informs you
how to keep your SUBARU running Please read these safety warnings as well
properly. as all other portions of this manual care-
fully in order to gain a better understanding
of how to use your SUBARU vehicle safely.

(5,1)
& Safety symbol & Abbreviation list Abbreviation Meaning

0
S00AB03 S00AB04
You may find several abbreviations in this LATCH Lower anchors and tethers for
manual. The meanings of the abbrevia- children
tions are shown in the following list. LED Light emitting diode
MIL Malfunction indicator light
Abbreviation Meaning
MMT Methylcyclopentadienyl man-
A/C Air conditioner ganese tricarbonyl
ALR/ELR Automatic locking retractor/ MT Manual transmission
Emergency locking retractor
OBD On-board diagnostics
ABS Anti-lock brake system
RAB Reverse Automatic Braking
AKI Anti knock index
RON Research octane number
ALR Automatic locking retractor
SI-DRIVE SUBARU Intelligent Drive
AWD All-wheel drive
You will find a circle with a slash through it Steering Responsive Head-
in this manual. This symbol means “Do Blind Spot Detection/Rear SRH light
BSD/RCTA Cross Traffic Alert
not”, “Do not do this”, or “Do not let this
SRS Supplemental restraint sys-
happen”, depending upon the context. CVT Continuously variable trans- tem
mission
TIN Tire identification number
DRL Daytime running light
Tire pressure monitoring sys-
Electronic brake force distri- TPMS tem
EBD bution
ELR Emergency locking retractor
GAW Gross axle weight
GAWR Gross axle weight rating
GPS Global positioning system
GVW Gross vehicle weight
GVWR Gross vehicle weight rating
INT Intermittent

(6,1)
Vehicle symbols Safety precautions when . The SRS airbags deploy with
S00AC driving considerable speed and force.
There are some of the symbols you may S00AD
Occupants who are out of proper
see on your vehicle. & Seatbelt and SRS airbag position when the SRS airbag
S00AD01 deploys could suffer very serious
For warning and indicator lights, refer to injuries. Because the SRS airbag
“Warning and indicator lights” �23. WARNING
needs enough space for deploy-
Mark Name . All persons in the vehicle must ment, the driver should always sit
fasten their seatbelts BEFORE upright and well back in the seat
WARNING the vehicle starts to move. Other- as far from the steering wheel as
wise, the possibility of serious practical while still maintaining
injury becomes greater in the full vehicle control and the front
CAUTION event of a sudden stop or acci- passenger should move the seat
dent. as far back as possible and sit
upright and well back in the seat.
Read these instructions care- . To obtain maximum protection in
fully the event of an accident, the For instructions and precautions, carefully
driver and all passengers must read the following sections.
Wear eye protection always wear seatbelts when in
the vehicle. The SRS (Supple- . For the seatbelt system, refer to “Seat-
mental Restraint System) airbag belts” �1-12.
Battery fluid contains sulfuric does not do away with the need to . For the SRS airbag system, refer to
acid “SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint Sys-
fasten seatbelts. In combination
with the seatbelts, it offers the tem airbag)” �1-42.
Keep children away best combined protection in case
of a serious accident.
Keep flames away Not wearing a seatbelt increases
the chance of severe injury or
death in a crash even when the
Prevent explosions vehicle has the SRS airbag.

(7,1)
& Child safety with considerable speed and They could accidentally injure 0
S00AD02
force and can injure or even kill themselves or others through
WARNING children, especially if they are not inadvertent operation of the ve-
restrained or improperly re- hicle. Also, on hot or sunny days,
. Never hold a child on your lap or strained. Because children are temperature in a closed vehicle
in your arms while the vehicle is lighter and weaker than adults, could quickly become high en-
moving. The passenger cannot their risk of being injured from ough to cause severe or possibly
protect the child from injury in a deployment is greater. fatal injuries to them.
collision, because the child will . NEVER INSTALL A CHILD RE- . When leaving the vehicle, close
be caught between the passen- STRAINT SYSTEM IN THE FRONT all windows and lock all doors.
ger and objects inside the vehi- PASSENGER’S SEAT. DOING SO
cle. RISKS SERIOUS INJURY OR For instructions and precautions, carefully
. While riding in the vehicle, infants DEATH TO THE CHILD BY PLA- read the following sections.
and small children should always CING THE CHILD’S HEAD TOO . For the seatbelt system, refer to “Seat-
be seated in the REAR seat in an CLOSE TO THE SRS AIRBAG. belts” �1-12.
infant or child restraint system . Always turn the child safety locks . For the child restraint system, refer to
which is appropriate for the to the “LOCK” position when “Child restraint systems” �1-26.
child’s age, height and weight. If children sit in the rear seat. . For the SRS airbag system, refer to
a child is too big for a child Serious injury could result if a “SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint Sys-
restraint system, the child should child accidentally opens the door tem airbag)” �1-42.
sit in the REAR seat and be and falls out. Refer to “Child
restrained using the seatbelts. safety locks” �2-27.
According to accident statistics,
children are safer when properly . Always lock the passenger’s win-
restrained in the rear seating dows using the lock switch when
positions than in the front seating children are riding in the vehicle.
positions. Never allow a child to Failure to follow this procedure
stand up or kneel on the seat. could result in injury to a child
operating the power window. Re-
. Place children in the REAR seat fer to “Windows” �2-27.
properly restrained at all times in
a child restraint system or in a . Never leave unattended children,
seatbelt. The SRS airbag deploys adults or animals in the vehicle.
– CONTINUED –

(8,1)
& Engine exhaust gas (carbon vehicle, have the problem sumed too much alcohol to drive safely
monoxide) checked and corrected as soon even if the level of alcohol in your blood is
S00AD03 as possible. If you must drive below the legal limit. The safest thing you
WARNING under these conditions, drive can do is never drink and drive. However if
only with all windows fully open. you have no choice but to drive, stop
. Never inhale engine exhaust gas. . Keep the rear gate closed while drinking and sober up completely before
Engine exhaust gas contains driving to prevent exhaust gas getting behind the wheel.
carbon monoxide, a colorless from entering the vehicle.
and odorless gas which is dan- & Drugs and driving
S00AD05
gerous, or even lethal, if inhaled.
. Always properly maintain the en- & Drinking and driving WARNING
S00AD04
gine exhaust system to prevent
engine exhaust gas from entering There are some drugs (over the
WARNING counter and prescription) that can
the vehicle.
Drinking and then driving is very delay your reaction time and impair
. Never run the engine in a closed your perception, judgment and at-
space, such as a garage, except dangerous. Alcohol in the blood-
stream delays your reaction time tentiveness. If you drive after taking
for the brief time needed to drive them, it may increase your, your
the vehicle in or out of it. and impairs your perception, judg-
ment and attentiveness. If you drive passengers’ and other persons’ risk
. Avoid remaining in a parked ve- after drinking – even if you drink just of being involved in a serious or fatal
hicle for a lengthy time while the a little – it will increase the risk of accident.
engine is running. If that is un- being involved in a serious or fatal
avoidable, then use the ventila- accident, injuring or killing yourself, If you are taking any drugs, check with
tion fan to force fresh air into the your passengers and others. In your doctor or pharmacist or read the
vehicle. addition, if you are injured in the literature that accompanies the medication
. Always keep the front ventilator accident, alcohol may increase the to determine if the drug you are taking can
inlet grille free from snow, leaves severity of that injury. impair your driving ability. Do not drive
or other obstructions to ensure after taking any medications that can make
Please don’t drink and drive. you drowsy or otherwise affect your ability
that the ventilation system al-
ways works properly. to safely operate a motor vehicle. If you
Drunken driving is one of the most frequent have a medical condition that requires you
. If at any time you suspect that causes of accidents. Since alcohol affects to take drugs, please consult with your
exhaust fumes are entering the all people differently, you may have con- doctor.

(9,1)
Never drive if you are under the influence & Modification of your vehicle regulations. In addition, damage or 0
of any illicit mind-altering drugs. For your S00AD07
performance problems resulting
own health and well-being, we urge you WARNING from modification may not be cov-
not to take illegal drugs in the first place ered under warranties.
and to seek treatment if you are addicted . Do not remove the SUBARU gen-
to those drugs. uine navigation and/or audio sys-
tem. If the SUBARU genuine & Use of cell phones/texting
& Driving when tired or sleepy navigation and/or audio system and driving
S00AD06
is removed, the rear view camera S00AD16
WARNING image and help lines (distance CAUTION

marker, dynamic guidelines and
When you are tired or sleepy, your vehicle width lines) will no longer Do not talk on a cell phone or text
reaction time will be delayed and be displayed. while driving; it may distract your
your perception, judgment and at- . For some models with Reverse attention from driving and lead to an
tentiveness will be impaired. If you Automatic Braking (RAB) sys- accident. If you use a cell phone to
drive when tired or sleepy, your, tem, even if the Reverse Auto- talk or text, first pull off the road and
your passengers’ and other per- matic Braking (RAB) system and park in a safe place. In some States/
sons’ chances of being involved in object detection warning is ON, Provinces, it may be lawful to talk on
a serious accident may increase. the visible alert of Reverse Auto- a phone while driving, but only if the
matic Braking (RAB) system will phone is hands-free.
Please do not continue to drive but instead not be displayed. However, the
find a safe place to rest if you are tired or audible alert and its function will
sleepy. On long trips, you should make operate. & Driving vehicles equipped
periodic rest stops to refresh yourself with navigation system
before continuing on your journey. When S00AD09
possible, you should share the driving with CAUTION
others. WARNING
Your vehicle should not be modified Do not allow the monitor to distract
other than with genuine SUBARU your attention from driving. Also, do
parts and accessories. Other types not operate the controls of the
of modifications could affect its navigation system while driving.
performance, safety or durability, The loss of attention to driving could
and may even violate governmental
– CONTINUED –

(10,1)
lead to an accident. If you wish to Check the tire pressure when the tires are . If it is necessary to attach an
operate the controls of the naviga- cold. Use a pressure gauge to adjust the accessory (such as an electronic
tion system, first take the vehicle off tire pressures to the values shown on the toll collection (ETC) device or
the road and stop it in a safe tire inflation pressure label. For detailed security pass) to the windshield,
location. information, refer to “Tires and wheels” consult your SUBARU dealer for
�11-21. details on the proper location.
. Do not connect any unauthorized
& Driving with pets WARNING accessories or devices to the
S00AD10
Unrestrained pets can interfere with your Driving at high speeds with data link connector (OBDII port).
driving and distract your attention from This connector should be used
driving. In a collision or sudden stop,
excessively low tire pressures only with compatible diagnostic
unrestrained pets or cages can be thrown can cause the tires to deform devices for inspection and main-
around inside the vehicle and hurt you or severely and to rapidly be- tenance by an authorized service
your passengers. Besides, the pets can be come hot. A sharp increase in technician using authorized ser-
hurt under these situations. It is also for temperature could cause tread vice tools. Connecting unauthor-
their own safety that pets should be ized devices, such as a driver-
properly restrained in your vehicle. Re-
separation, and destruction of behavior tracking device, may
strain a pet with a special traveling harness the tires. The resulting loss of adversely affect vehicle systems,
which can be secured to the rear seat with vehicle control could lead to including safety systems, or al-
a seatbelt or use a pet carrier which can be an accident. low others to access information
secured to the rear seat by routing a stored in your vehicle. The use of
seatbelt through the carrier’s handle. unauthorized devices may also
Never restrain pets or pet carriers in the & Attaching accessories cause unexpected malfunctions,
front passenger’s seat. For further infor- S00AD15 such as a drained battery, or may
mation, consult your veterinarian, local WARNING damage vehicle systems. The
animal protection society or pet shop. manufacturer’s warranty will not
. Do not attach any accessories, cover any part that malfunctions,
& Tire pressures labels or stickers (other than fails, or is damaged due to the
S00AD11
properly placed inspection stick- use of an unauthorized device
Check and, if necessary, adjust the pres-
ers) to the windshield. Such with the data link connector.
sure of each tire and the spare (if
equipped) at least once a month and items may obstruct your view.
before any long journey.

(11,1)
General information deployment or hitting a road obstacle, data vehicle or the EDR is needed. In addition
that will assist in understanding how a to the vehicle manufacturer, other parties,
0
S00AK
& California Perchlorate Advi- vehicle’s systems performed. The EDR is such as law enforcement, that have the
sory designed to record data related to vehicle special equipment, can read the informa-
S00AK03 dynamics and safety systems for a short tion if they have access to the vehicle or
Certain vehicle components such as air- period of time, typically 30 seconds or less. the EDR.
bag modules, seatbelt pretensioners and The EDR in this vehicle is designed to
keyless entry transmitter batteries may record such data as:
contain perchlorate material. Special
. How various systems in your vehicle
handling may apply for service or vehicle
were operating;
end of life disposal. See www.dtsc.ca.gov/
hazardouswaste/perchlorate. . Whether or not the driver and passen-
ger safety belts were buckled/fastened;
& Noise from under the vehicle . How far (if at all) the driver was
S00AK01 depressing the accelerator and/or brake
NOTE pedal; and,
You may hear a noise from under the . How fast the vehicle was traveling.
vehicle approximately 5 to 10 hours
after the ignition switch is turned to the These data can help provide a better
“LOCK”/“OFF” position. However, this understanding of the circumstances in
does not indicate a malfunction. This which crashes and injuries occur. NOTE:
noise is caused by the operation of the EDR data are recorded by your vehicle
fuel evaporation leakage checking sys- only if a non-trivial crash situation occurs;
tem and the operation is normal. The no data are recorded by the EDR under
noise will stop after approximately 15 normal driving conditions and no personal
minutes. data (e.g., name, gender, age, and crash
location) are recorded. However, other
parties, such as law enforcement, could
& Event data recorder combine the EDR data with the type of
S00AK04
This vehicle is equipped with an event data personally identifying data routinely ac-
recorder (EDR). The main purpose of an quired during a crash investigation.
EDR is to record, in certain crash or near
crash-like situations, such as an air bag To read data recorded by an EDR, special
equipment is required, and access to the

(2,1)
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
Left Page
Model "ALL_MODEL_MEMO" EDITED: 2017/ 11/ 6
(1,1)
Table of contents
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags 1

Keys and doors 2
Instruments and controls 3
Climate control 4
Audio 5
Interior equipment 6
Starting and operating 7
Driving tips 8
In case of emergency 9
Appearance care 10
Maintenance and service 11
Specifications 12
Consumer information and Reporting safety defects 13
Index 14

(14,1)
12
1) Engine hood (page 11-5)
Illustrated index 2) Windshield wipers (page 3-79)
S00AE 3) Headlights (page 3-69)
& Exterior 4) Replacing bulbs (page 11-38)
S00AE01
5) Moonroof (page 2-32)
6) Roof rails (page 8-13)
7) Outside mirrors (page 3-90)
8) Door locks (page 2-20)
9) Tire pressure (page 11-23)
10) Flat tires (page 9-5)
11) Snow tires (page 8-10)
12) Fog lights (page 3-76)
13) Tie-down hooks (page 9-13)
14) Towing hook (page 9-13)

(15,1)
13
1) Rear window defogger (page 3-91)
2) Fuel filler lid and cap (page 7-5) 0
3) Child safety locks (page 2-27)
4) Tie-down hole (page 9-13)
5) Replacing bulbs (page 11-38)
6) Rear gate (page 2-30)
7) Towing hook (page 9-13)
8) Rear window wiper (page 3-81)
– CONTINUED –

(16,1)
14
1) Lower anchorages for child restraint
& Interior system (page 1-37)
S00AE02
2) Seatbelt (page 1-12)
! Passenger compartment area
S00AE0201 3) Front seat (page 1-2)
4) Rear seat (page 1-2)
5) Buttons for SUBARU STARLINK
NOTE
For models with SUBARU STARLINK:
Refer to the Owner’s Manual supple-
ment for SUBARU STARLINK.

(17,1)
15
1) Power window switches (page 2-27)
2) Door locks (page 2-20) 0
3) Remote control mirror switch (page 3-91)
4) Glove box (page 6-6)
5) Front power supply socket (page 6-7)
6) Shift lever (MT models) (page 7-24)/
Select lever (CVT models) (page 7-26)
7) Seat heater switches (page 1-11)
8) Cup holder (page 6-6)
9) X-MODE switch (page 7-44)
10) Center console (page 6-6)
11) Parking brake lever (page 7-48)
– CONTINUED –

(18,1)
16
1) Steering Responsive Headlight off switch
& Instrument panel (page 3-75)
S00AE03
2) Illumination brightness control dial (page
3-12)
3) Combination meter (page 3-8)
4) Multi-function display (black and white)
(page 3-42)/Multi-function display (color
LCD) (page 3-49)
5) Audio and navigation system*
6) Hazard warning flasher switch (page 3-8)
7) Climate control (page 4-2)
8) USB power supply (page 6-9)
9) Tilt/Telescopic steering (page 3-92)
10) BSD/RCTA OFF switch (page 7-69)
11) Fuse box (page 11-36)
12) Auto Start Stop OFF switch (page 7-57)
13) Hood release knob (page 11-5)
14) Vehicle Dynamics Control OFF switch
(page 7-41)
*: For details about how to use the audio and
navigation system, refer to the separate
navigation/audio Owner’s Manual.
NOTE
For models with the EyeSight system:
Refer to the Owner’s Manual supple-
ment for the EyeSight system.

(19,1)
17
1) Audio control switches*
2) INFO button for multi-function display 0
(black and white) (page 3-42)/INFO
button for multi-function display (color
LCD) (page 3-49)
3) Cruise control switches (page 7-53)
4) Shift paddle (page 7-29)
5) SI-DRIVE switches (page 7-34)
6) VIEW monitor switch (page 6-17)
7) Heated Steering Wheel switch (page 3-
93)
8) SRS airbag (page 1-42)
9) Horn (page 3-94)
10) Combination meter display (color LCD)
control switches (page 3-34)
11) Talk switch for voice command system*/
Hands-free phone switches*
*: For details about how to use the switches,
refer to the separate navigation/audio
Owner’s Manual.
– CONTINUED –

(20,1)
18
1) Windshield wiper (page 3-78)
& Light control and wiper control levers/switches 2) Mist (page 3-79)
S00AE04
3) Windshield washer (page 3-80)
4) Rear window wiper and washer switch
(page 3-81)
5) Wiper intermittent time control switch
(page 3-80)
6) Wiper control lever (page 3-78)
7) Light control switch (page 3-68)
8) Fog light switch (page 3-76)
9) Headlight ON/OFF/AUTO (page 3-69)
10) Headlight flasher High/Low beam change
(page 3-71)
11) Turn signal lever (page 3-77)

(21,1)
19
1) Tachometer (page 3-8)
& Combination meter 2) Select lever/gear position indicator (page 0
S00AE05
3-30)
! U.S.-spec. models (type A)
S00AE0538 3) Trip meter and odometer (page 3-9)
4) Speedometer (page 3-8)
5) ECO gauge (page 3-10)
6) Fuel gauge (page 3-10)
The illustration above is a typical example. For some models, the combination meter may
be slightly different than that shown in the illustration.
– CONTINUED –

(22,1)
20
! U.S.-spec. models (type B) 2) Select lever/gear position indicator (page
S00AE0549
3-30)
(page 3-34)
4) Trip meter and odometer (page 3-9)

(23,1)
21
! Except U.S.-spec. models (type A) 2) Select lever/gear position indicator (page 0
S00AE0531
3-30)
5) ECO gauge (page 3-10)
– CONTINUED –

(24,1)
22
! Except U.S.-spec. models (type B) 2) Select lever/gear position indicator (page
S00AE0519
3-30)
(page 3-34)

(25,1)
23
& Warning and indicator lights Mark Name Page Mark Name Page
0
S00AE06
AT OIL TEMP warning LED headlight warning
Mark Name Page light (CVT models) 3-18 light (models with LED 3-31
headlights)
Seatbelt warning light 3-13 High beam indicator
ABS warning light 3-20 3-31
light
Front passenger’s 3-13
seatbelt warning light Brake system warning 3-20 High beam assist indi-
light (red) cator light (if equipped) 3-31
SRS airbag system 3-14 Automatic headlight

warning light / Door open warning 3-22
light beam leveler warning 3-31
light (models with LED
Front passenger’s headlights)
frontal airbag ON indi- 3-15 AWD warning light
cator (CVT models) 3-22 Steering Responsive
Headlight warning
Front passenger’s light/Steering Respon-
frontal airbag OFF in- 3-15 Power steering warn- sive Headlight OFF in- 3-31
dicator ing light 3-22
dicator light (if
equipped)
CHECK ENGINE Hill start assist warning
warning light/Malfunc- 3-15 light/Hill start assist 3-22
tion indicator light Front fog light indicator 3-32
OFF indicator light light (if equipped)
Coolant temperature Vehicle Dynamics
low indicator light/ 3-16 Control warning light/ Access key warning
Coolant temperature Vehicle Dynamics 3-23 indicator (if equipped) 3-24
high warning light Control operation indi-
cator light
Charge warning light 3-17 Security indicator light 3-29
Vehicle Dynamics
Control OFF indicator 3-24
light
Oil pressure warning Headlight indicator 3-32
light 3-17 light (if equipped)
Turn signal indicator 3-31
lights
Engine low oil level 3-18 Cruise control indica- 3-31
warning light tor light (if equipped)
– CONTINUED –

(26,1)
24
Mark Name Page Mark Name Page
Cruise control set indi- 3-31 Intelligent (I) mode in- 3-30
cator light (if equipped) dicator (if equipped)
BSD/RCTA warning 3-33

X-MODE indicator (if indicator (if equipped)
equipped) 3-33
BSD/RCTA OFF indi- 3-33
cator (if equipped)
Hill descent control in- 3-33
dicator (if equipped) RAB warning indicator 3-33
(if equipped)
Low fuel warning light 3-21 RAB OFF indicator (if

equipped) 3-34
Low tire pressure
warning light 3-18 Icy road surface warn-
(U.S.-spec. models) ing indicator (if 3-34
equipped)
Windshield washer 3-18 Engine hood open
fluid warning light warning light (if 3-16
equipped)
Auto Start Stop warn-
ing light/Auto Start
Stop OFF indicator 3-32
light (yellow) (if
equipped)
Auto Start Stop indica-
tor light (green) (if 3-32
equipped)
Auto Start Stop No
Activity Detected indi- 3-32
cator light (if equipped)
Sport (S) mode indica- 3-30

tor (if equipped)

(27,1)
25
Function settings 0
S00AF
& Function settings and adjustments on the combination meter display (color LCD)
S00AF01
If your vehicle is equipped with a combination meter display (color LCD), setting adjustments to the following items can be manually
changed within the display to meet your personal requirements.
NOTE
If your vehicle is not equipped with a combination meter display (color LCD), setting changes to the following items will need
to be performed by a SUBARU dealer. Refer to “Function settings and adjustments performed by a dealer” �28.
Item Page reference

Available settings Factory default setting for the vehicle
1st menu/vehicle system 2nd menu/adjustable
vehicle system setting
3rd menu/selectable ve-
hicle system setting
system opera-
tion
Welcome Screen — On/Off On 3-36
Good-bye Screen — On/Off On 3-36
Gauge Initial Movement — On/Off On 3-41
U.S.-spec. models:
Units — km, km/h, Liter/miles, miles, MPH, Gallon 3-41
Screen Settings MPH, Gallon Other models: km, km/h,
Liter
Tire Pressure Units (if — kPa/PSi PSi 3-41
equipped)
English/Español/Fran- U.S.-spec. models: Eng-

Languages — lish 3-41
çais/Japanese Other models: Français
– CONTINUED –

(28,1)
26
Item Page reference

Available settings Factory default setting for the vehicle
system opera-
tion
7-67 and 7-80
For details about
EyeSight sys-
Warning Volume* — — Max/Mid/Min Mid tem, refer to the
Owner’s Manual
supplement for
the EyeSight
system.
Rear Seat Reminder
(models with combina- — — On/Off On 1-26
tion meter display (color
LCD))
Lead Vehicle Acquisition — On/Off On
Sound
Lead Vehicle Moving — On/Off On
Monitor Function
Lv.4 (Dynamic)/Lv.3 Refer to the
EyeSight (models with Cruise Control Accel- — (Standard)/Lv.2 (Com- Lv.3 (Standard) Owner’s Manual
EyeSight system) eration Characteristics* fort)/Lv.1 (Eco) supplement for
the EyeSight
Lane Centering (U.S.- system.
spec. models and — On/Off On
Canada-spec. models)
Select Drive on Left/ — Drive on Left/Drive on Drive on Right
Drive on Right Right
RAB (if equipped) Sonar Audible Alarm — On/Off On 7-80

(29,1)
27
Item Page reference

for the vehicle 0
Available settings Factory default setting
system opera-
tion
Audible Signal (if On/Off On 2-13
equipped)
Hazard Warning Flasher On/Off On 3-41
Keyless Entry System Driver Door Unlock (if
equipped) Driver Door Only/All Driver Door Only 2-9
Rear Gate/Trunk Unlock Rear Gate/Trunk Only/ Rear Gate/Trunk Only 3-41
(if equipped) All
Defogger — 15 minutes/Continuous 15 minutes 3-91
Interior Light — 10 seconds/20 seconds/ 30 seconds 6-3

30 seconds/Off
Vehicle Speed/Shift Into
Vehicle Setting Auto Door Lock or Out of PARK (CVT Vehicle Speed 2-22
models)/Off
Auto Door Lock and Un-
lock Shift Into or Out of PARK
Auto Door Unlock (CVT models)/Ignition
OFF/Driver Door Open/ Driver Door Open 2-22
Off
Auto Light Sensor (if — Min/Low/Mid/Max Mid 3-69
equipped)
Approaching Time Set 30 seconds/60 seconds/ 30 seconds 3-70

Welcome Lighting (if 90 seconds/Off
equipped) 30 seconds/60 seconds/ 30 seconds
Leaving Time Set 90 seconds/Off 3-70
One-touch lane changer — On/Off On 3-78

Default Settings — — No/Yes — 3-42
*: You can also set this while driving.
– CONTINUED –

(30,1)
28
& Individual settings and adjustments excluding combination meter display (color LCD)
S00AF02
Item Function Available settings Factory default setting Page

Remote keyless entry system Audible signal Operation/Non-operation Operation 2-19
Alarm system Alarm system Operation/Non-operation Operation 2-26
& Function settings and adjustments performed by a dealer

S00AF03
A SUBARU dealer can change the setting adjustments of the following items to meet your personal requirements. Contact the nearest
SUBARU dealer for details.
Item Function Available settings Factory default setting
Audible signal volume Level 1 to 7 Level 5
Door unlock selection function (dri- Driver’s door only/All doors Driver’s door only
Keyless Access (if equipped) ver’s door unlock)
Door unlock selection function (rear Rear gate only/All doors Rear gate only
gate unlock)
Audible signal Operation/Non-operation Operation
Remote keyless entry system
Audible signal volume Level 1 to 7 Level 5
Key lock-in prevention Key lock-in prevention Operation/Non-operation Operation
Battery drainage prevention func- Battery drainage prevention func- Operation/Non-operation Operation
tion tion
Dome light, cargo area light, and ON/OFF OFF
map lights illumination
Alarm system Monitoring start delay time (after 0 seconds/30 seconds 30 seconds
closure of doors)
Alarm system Operation/Non-operation Operation
Auto dimmer cancel (if equipped) Sensitivity of the operation of the OFF/Min/Low/Mid/Hi/Max Mid
auto dimmer cancel
Seatbelt warning Sounds a chime while driving Operation/Non-operation Operation

(31,1)
29
Item Function Available settings Factory default setting

0
Auto on/off wiper-linked headlights Auto-on/off wiper-linked Operation/Non-operation Operation
(if equipped)
High beam assist function (if High beam assist function Operation/Non-operation Operation
equipped)
U.S.-spec. models: Non-operation
Reverse gear interlocked rear wiper Reverse gear interlocked rear wiper Operation/Non-operation Other models: Operation

(32,1)
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————

(33,1)
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags

Seats ........................................................................ 1-2 Safety tips for installing child restraint systems .... 1-28
S01 Where to place a child restraint system ................ 1-29
1
Safety tips ............................................................. 1-2
Front seats ............................................................ 1-5 Choosing a child restraint system......................... 1-31
Rear seats ............................................................. 1-6 Installing child restraint systems with ALR/ELR
Head restraints ...................................................... 1-8 seatbelt ............................................................. 1-31
Installing a booster seat or booster cushion ......... 1-36
Seat heater (if equipped) ...................................... 1-11
Installation of child restraint systems by use of
Safety precautions ................................................ 1-11 lower and tether anchorages (LATCH) ................ 1-37
Operation.............................................................. 1-11 Top tether anchorages .......................................... 1-41
Seatbelts ................................................................ 1-12 SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint System
Seatbelt safety tips ............................................... 1-12 airbag) ................................................................ 1-42
Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR)...................... 1-14 General precautions regarding SRS airbag
Automatic Locking Retractor/Emergency Locking system .............................................................. 1-43
Retractor (ALR/ELR)............................................ 1-14 General precautions regarding SRS airbag
Seatbelt warning light and chime .......................... 1-14 system for accessories and any objects............. 1-45
Fastening the seatbelt........................................... 1-14 General precautions regarding SRS airbag
Seatbelt maintenance............................................ 1-21 system and children .......................................... 1-47
Seatbelt pretensioners ......................................... 1-21 Components ......................................................... 1-50
Seatbelt with shoulder belt pretensioner................ 1-22 SUBARU advanced frontal airbag system.............. 1-52
Seatbelt with shoulder belt and lap belt SRS side airbag and SRS curtain airbag ............... 1-63
pretensioners...................................................... 1-22 SRS airbag system monitors................................. 1-71
System monitors................................................... 1-25 SRS airbag system servicing ................................ 1-72
System servicing .................................................. 1-25 Precautions against vehicle modification .............. 1-73
Precautions against vehicle modification............... 1-25 How to contact the vehicle manufacturer
Rear Seat Reminder (models with combination concerning modifications for persons with
meter display (color LCD)) ................................ 1-26 disabilities that may affect the advanced
airbag system.................................................... 1-74
Child restraint systems ........................................ 1-26
Safety precautions ................................................ 1-26

(34,1)
1-2 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/Seats
Seats upright position and a collision

S01AQ occurs, the risk of sliding under
& Safety tips the lap belt and of the lap belt
S01AQ01 sliding up over the abdomen will
! Safety tips for seat increase, and both can result in
S01AQ0101
serious injury or death.
WARNING . The SRS airbags deploy with
. Never adjust the seat while driv- considerable speed and force.
ing, as personal injury or loss of Occupants who are not sitting
vehicle control may occur. back and upright when the SRS
airbag deploys could suffer ser-
. Before adjusting the seat, ensure ious injury. Because the SRS
nothing is blocking the adjusting airbag needs enough space for
mechanism. deployment, the driver should
. After adjusting the seat, move it always sit upright and well back WARNING
back and forth to ensure the seat in the seat as far from the steer- Seat children in the rear seat prop-
is securely locked. If it is not, it ing wheel as practical while still erly restrained at all times. The SRS
may move suddenly or the seat- maintaining full vehicle control, airbag deploys with considerable
belt may not operate properly. and the front passenger should speed and force and can injure or
. Do not put objects under the front move the seat as far back as even kill children, especially if they
seats. They may interfere with the possible and sit upright and well are not restrained or improperly
front seat locking mechanism back in the seat. restrained. Because children are
and cause an accident. lighter and weaker than adults, their
. Seatbelts provide maximum re- risk of being injured from deploy-
straint when the occupant sits ment is greater. For that reason, we
back and upright in the seat. To strongly recommend that ALL chil-
reduce the risk of sliding under dren (including those in child seats
the seatbelt in a collision, the and those that have outgrown child
front seatbacks should always restraint devices) sit in the REAR
be used in the upright position seat properly restrained at all times
while the vehicle is running. If the in a child restraint device or in a
front seatbacks are not in the seatbelt, whichever is appropriate

(35,1)
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/Seats 1-3
for the child’s age, height and 1

weight. Secure ALL types of child
restraint devices (including forward
facing child seat) in the REAR seats
at all times.
NEVER INSTALL A CHILD SEAT IN
THE FRONT SEAT. DOING SO RISKS
SERIOUS INJURY OR DEATH TO
THE CHILD BY PLACING THE
CHILD’S HEAD TOO CLOSE TO
THE SRS AIRBAG.
children are safer when properly
restrained in the rear seating posi- WARNING WARNING
tions than in the front seating posi-
tions. For instructions and precau- To prevent the passenger from slid- Do not let rear passengers rest their
tions concerning child restraint sys- ing under the seatbelt in the event of feet between the front seatback and
tems, refer to “Child restraint sys- a collision, always put the seatback seat cushion. Doing so may interfere
tems” �1-26. in the upright position while the with the proper operation of the
vehicle is in motion. Also, do not following systems and could result
place objects such as cushions in serious injury.
between the passenger and the seat- . Occupant detection system
back. If you do so, the risk of sliding
under the lap belt and of the lap belt . SRS side airbag
sliding up over the abdomen will . Seat heater (if equipped)
increase, and both can result in . Power seat (if equipped)
– CONTINUED –

(36,1)
WARNING WARNING WARNING

Do not press your feet onto the Seatbelts provide maximum re- Never stack luggage or other cargo
instrument panel. Doing so may straint when the occupant sits back higher than the top of the seatback
prevent the occupant detection and upright in the seat. Do not place as it could tumble forward and injure
function of the SRS airbag system cushions or any other materials passengers in the event of a sudden
from functioning correctly, and may between occupants and seatbacks stop or accident.
result in serious injury or death in or seat cushions. By doing so, the
the event of an accident. risk of sliding under the lap belt and
of the lap belt sliding up over the
abdomen will increase, and both can
result in serious injury or death.

(37,1)
! Safety tips for head restraint & Front seats ! Reclining the seatback 1
S01AQ0102 S01AQ02 S01AQ020102
WARNING ! Manual seat (if equipped)

S01AQ0201
! Forward and backward adjust-

. Never drive the vehicle with the
ment
head restraints removed because S01AQ020101
they are designed to reduce the
risk of serious neck injury in the
event that the vehicle is struck
from the rear. Also, never install
the head restraints the opposite
way round. Doing so will prevent
the head restraints from function-
ing as intended. Therefore, when
you remove the head restraints,
you must reinstall all head re- Pull the reclining lever up and adjust the
straints correctly to protect vehi- seatback to the desired position. Then
cle occupants. release the lever and make sure the
seatback is securely locked into place.
. All occupants, including the dri- The seatback placed in a reclined position
ver, should not operate a vehicle Pull the lever upward and slide the seat to
the desired position. Then release the can spring back upward with force when
or sit in a vehicle’s seat until the the lever is pulled. While operating the
head restraints are placed in their lever and try to move the seat back and
forth to make sure that it is securely locked lever to return the seatback, hold the
proper positions in order to mini- seatback lightly so that it may be raised
mize the risk of neck injury in the into place.
back gradually.
event of a crash.
– CONTINUED –

(38,1)
! Seat height adjustment (driver’s ! Power seat (driver’s seat – if & Rear seats
S01AQ03
seat) equipped)
S01AQ020103 S01AQ0202 ! Armrest (if equipped)
S01AQ0301
1) When the lever is pushed down, the seat 1) Seat position forward/backward con-
is lowered. trol switch To lower the armrest, pull on the top edge
2) When the lever is pulled up, the seat To adjust the seat forward or backward, of the armrest.
rises. move the control switch forward or
backward. During forward/backward ad- WARNING
The height of the seat can be adjusted by justment of the seat, you cannot adjust
moving the seat adjustment lever up and the seat cushion height. To avoid serious injury, passengers
down. 2) Seat height control switch must never be allowed to sit on the
To adjust the seat height, pull up or push center armrest.
down the rear end of the control switch.
3) Seatback angle (reclining) control
switch
To adjust the angle of the seatback, move
the control switch.

(39,1)
! Folding down the rear seatback 1

S01AQ0302 WARNING
WARNING When returning the seatback to its
original position, observe the fol-
. When you fold down the seat- lowing precaution.
back, check that there are no
passengers or objects on the rear Failure to observe the precaution
seat. Not doing so creates a risk may damage the seatbelt, impairing
of injury or property damage if its effectiveness, and possibly re-
the seatback suddenly folds sult in a serious injury.
down. . When returning the seatback to
. Never allow passengers to ride its original position, pull the
on the folded rear seatback or in seatbelt out towards the vehicle
the cargo area. Doing so may Unlock the seatback by pulling the lock exterior so that it will not be
result in serious injury or death. release knob and then fold the seatback caught between the seatback
down. and the trim.
. Secure all objects and especially
long items properly to prevent ! Return the rear seatback
S01AQ0303
them from being thrown around
inside the vehicle and causing
serious injury during a sudden
stop, a sudden steering maneu-
ver or a rapid acceleration.
– CONTINUED –

(40,1)
of sudden braking, or objects may ! Front seats

S01AQ0401
move out from the cargo area. Both Both the driver’s seat and the front
could cause serious injury or death. passenger’s seat are equipped with head
restraints. Both head restraints are adjus-
table in the following ways.
& Head restraints
S01AQ04 ! Height adjustment
S01AQ040101
WARNING
The front seat head restraints are
designed to be installed into the
front seats only. The rear seat head
restraints are designed to be in-
Lock release knob stalled into the rear seats only. Do
1) Unlocked not attempt to install the front seat
2) Locked head restraints into the rear seats, or
A) Unlocking marker in red the rear seat head restraints into the
To return the seatback to its original front seats.
position, raise the seatback until it locks
into place and make sure that the unlock-
ing marker on the lock release knob is no
NOTE 1) Head restraint
longer visible. It is possible to adjust the angle of the 2) Release button
front seat head restraints only. When
installing the front seat head restraints, To raise:
WARNING
make sure that the angle of the head Pull the head restraint up.
When you return the seatback to its restraints can be adjusted. To lower:
original position, check that the Push the head restraint down while press-
unlocking marker on the lock re- ing the release button on the top of the
lease knob is not visible. Also, move seatback.
the seatback back and forth to To remove:
confirm that it is securely in place. While pressing the release button, pull out
If it is not securely fixed in place, it the head restraint.
may suddenly fold down in the event

(41,1)
To install: ! Angle adjustment ! Rear seats

S01AQ040102 S01AQ0402 1
Install the head restraint into the holes that Both the rear window side seats and the
are located on the top of the seatback until rear center seat are equipped with head
the head restraint locks. Press and hold restraints.
the release button to lower the head
restraint. ! Rear windows side seating posi-
tion
S01AQ040201
The angle of the head restraint can be

adjusted in several steps. While maintain-
ing a suitable driving posture, adjust the
head restraint to a position where the back
of your head is as close to the head
Each head restraint should be adjusted so restraint as possible.
that the center of the head restraint is 1) Head restraint
closest to the top of the occupant’s ears. To tilt: 2) Release button
Tilt the head restraint by hand to the To remove:
NOTE preferred position. A click will be audible
While pressing the release button, pull out
When the head restraint cannot be when the head restraint is locked.
the head restraint.
pulled out or installed due to insuffi- To return:
cient clearance between the head re- To install:
Tilt the head restraint once as far forward
straint and the roof, tilt the seat and Install the head restraint into the holes that
as it can go. The head restraint will
then perform the installation and re- are located on the top of the seatback until
automatically return to the fully upright
moval tasks. the head restraint locks. Press and hold
position. Then, adjust the head restraint
again to the preferred angle.
restraint.
– CONTINUED –

(42,1)
After installing the head restraint, make When the rear-center seating position is
sure it is securely locked. occupied, raise the head restraint to the
extended position. When the rear center
! Rear center seating position seating position is not occupied, lower the
S01AQ040202
head restraint to improve rearward visibi-
lity.
1) Head restraint
2) Release button
To raise:
1) Incorrect (retracted position) Pull the head restraint up.
2) Correct (extended position) To lower:
Push the head restraint down while press-
CAUTION ing the release button on the top of the
seatback.
The head restraint is not intended to To remove:
be used at the retracted position. While pressing the release button, pull out
Before sitting on the seat, raise the the head restraint.
head restraint to the extended posi- To install:
tion.
Install the head restraint into the holes that
are located on the top of the seatback until
the head restraint locks. Press and hold
restraint.

(43,1)
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/Seat heater 1-11
Seat heater (if equipped) NOTE & Operation 1

S01AB04
S01AB
Use of the seat heater for a long period
The seat heater is equipped in the front of time while the engine is not running
seats. can cause battery discharge.
The seat heater operates when the ignition
switch is either in the “ACC” or “ON”
position.
& Safety precautions

S01AB03
CAUTION
. People with delicate skin may
suffer slight burns even at low
temperatures if they use the seat
heater for a long period of time.
When using the heater, always be
sure to warn the persons con-
cerned.
. Do not put anything on the seat
which insulates against heat,
such as a blanket, cushion, or
similar items. This may cause the
seat heater to overheat.
. When the seat is warmed enough
or before you leave the vehicle,
1) HI – Rapid heating
be sure to turn off the seat heater. 2) LO – Normal heating
3) Off
A) Left-hand side
B) Right-hand side
– CONTINUED –

(44,1)
1-12 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/Seatbelts
To turn on the seat heater, push the “LO” or Seatbelts reversed. In an accident, this can
“HI” position on the switch, as desired, S01AE increase the risk or severity of
depending on the temperature. & Seatbelt safety tips injury.
Selecting the “HI” position will cause the S01AE01
. Keep the lap belt as low as
seat to heat up quicker. WARNING possible on your hips. In a colli-
To turn off the seat heater, lightly press the sion, this spreads the force of the
. All persons in the vehicle must lap belt over stronger hip bones
opposite side of the current position. fasten their seatbelts BEFORE instead of across the weaker
The indicator located on the switch illumi- the vehicle starts to move. Other- abdomen.
nates when the seat heater is in operation. wise, the possibility of serious
. Seatbelts provide maximum re-
injury becomes greater in the
straint when the occupant sits
event of a sudden stop or acci-
well back and upright in the seat.
dent.
To reduce the risk of sliding
. All belts should fit snugly in order under the seatbelt in a collision,
to provide full restraint. Loose the front seatbacks should be
fitting belts are not as effective in always used in the upright posi-
preventing or reducing injury. tion while the vehicle is running.
. Each seatbelt is designed to sup- If the front seatbacks are not
port only one person. Never use a used in the upright position in a
single belt for two or more per- collision, the risk of sliding under
sons – even children. Otherwise, the lap belt and of the lap belt
in an accident, serious injury or sliding up over the abdomen will
death could result. increase, and both can result in
. Replace all seatbelt assemblies serious injury or death.
including retractors and attach- . Do not put cushions or any other
ing hardware worn by occupants materials between occupants
of a vehicle that has been in a and seatbacks or seat cushions.
serious accident. The entire as- If you do so, the risk of sliding
sembly should be replaced even under the lap belt and of the lap
if damage is not obvious. belt sliding up over the abdomen
. Never use a belt that is twisted or will increase, and both can result
in serious injury or death.

(45,1)
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/Seatbelts 1-13
passenger when any of the SRS frontal, times.

side and curtain airbags deploy.
1
NEVER INSTALL A CHILD SEAT IN
! Infants or small children THE FRONT SEAT. DOING SO RISKS
S01AE0101
Use a child restraint system that is suitable SERIOUS INJURY OR DEATH TO
for your vehicle. Refer to “Child restraint THE CHILD BY PLACING THE
systems” �1-26. CHILD’S HEAD TOO CLOSE TO
THE SRS AIRBAG.
! Children
S01AE0102 According to accident statistics,
WARNING restrained in the rear seating posi-
Seat children in the rear seat prop- tions than in the front seating posi-
erly restrained at all times. The SRS tions. For instructions and precau-
airbag deploys with considerable tions concerning the child restraint
WARNING speed and force and can injure or system, refer to “Child restraint
even kill children, especially if they systems” �1-26.
Never place the shoulder belt under are not restrained or improperly
the arm or behind the back. If an restrained. Because children are If a child is too big for a child restraint
accident occurs, this can increase lighter and weaker than adults, their system, the child should sit in the rear seat
the risk or severity of injury. risk of being injured from deploy- and be restrained using the seatbelts.
ment is greater. For that reason, we According to accident statistics, children
strongly recommend that ALL chil- are safer when properly restrained in the
CAUTION dren (including those in child seats rear seating positions than in the front
and those that have outgrown child seating positions. Never allow a child to
Metallic parts of the seatbelt can stand up or kneel on the seat.
become very hot in a vehicle that has restraint devices) sit in the REAR
been closed up in sunny weather; seat properly restrained at all times If the shoulder portion of the belt crosses
they could burn an occupant. Do not in a child restraint device or in a the face or neck, move the child closer to
touch such hot parts until they cool. seatbelt, whichever is appropriate the belt buckle to help provide a good
for the child’s height and weight. shoulder belt fit. Care must be taken to
Your vehicle is equipped with a crash Secure ALL types of child restraint securely place the lap belt as low as
sensing and diagnostic module, which will devices (including forward facing possible on the hips and not on the child’s
record the use of the seatbelt by the front child seats) in the REAR seats at all waist. If the shoulder portion of the belt
– CONTINUED –

(46,1)
cannot be properly positioned, a child & Emergency Locking Retrac- the rear seats by the use of the seatbelt,
restraint system should be used. Never tor (ELR) the seatbelt must be changed over to the
place the shoulder belt under the child’s S01AE02 Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) mode.
arm or behind the child’s back. The driver’s seatbelt has an Emergency
Locking Retractor (ELR). When the child restraint system is re-
! Expectant mothers The emergency locking retractor allows moved, make sure that the seatbelt re-
S01AE0103
normal body movement but the retractor tracts fully and the retractor returned to the
locks automatically during a sudden stop, Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR)
impact or if you pull the belt very quickly mode.
out of the retractor. For instructions on how to convert the
retractor to the ALR mode and restore it to
& Automatic Locking Retractor/ the ELR mode, refer to “Installing child
Emergency Locking Retrac- restraint systems with ALR/ELR seatbelt”
tor (ALR/ELR) �1-31.
S01AE03
Each passenger’s seatbelt has an Auto- & Seatbelt warning light
matic Locking Retractor/Emergency Lock-
ing Retractor (ALR/ELR). The Automatic and chime S01AE04
Locking Retractor/Emergency Locking Refer to “Seatbelt warning light and chime”

Expectant mothers also need to use the Retractor normally functions as an Emer- �3-13.
seatbelts. They should consult their doctor gency Locking Retractor (ELR). The ALR/
for specific recommendations. The lap belt ELR has an additional locking mode & Fastening the seatbelt
should be worn securely and as low as “Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) S01AE06
mode” intended to secure a child restraint ! Front seatbelts

possible over the hips, not over the waist. S01AE0601
system. When the seatbelt is once drawn 1. Adjust the seat position according to
out completely and is then retracted even the following procedure.
slightly, the retractor locks the seatbelt in Driver’s seat: Adjust the seatback to the
that position and the seatbelt cannot be upright position. Move the seat as far from
extended. As the belt is rewinding, clicks the steering wheel as practical while still
will be heard which indicate the retractor maintaining full vehicle control.
functions as an ALR. When the seatbelt is
retracted fully, the ALR mode is released. Front passenger’s seat: Adjust the seat-
back to the upright position. Move the seat
When securing a child restraint system on as far back as possible.

(47,1)
2. Sit well back in the seat. ! Adjusting the front seat shoulder 1
3. Pick up the tongue plate and pull the belt anchor height
S01AE060101
belt out slowly. Do not let it get twisted.
. If the belt stops before reaching the
buckle, return the belt slightly and pull it
out more slowly.
. If the belt still cannot be unlocked, let
the belt retract slightly after giving it a
strong pull, then pull it out slowly again.
5. To tighten the lap part, pull up on the

shoulder belt.
6. Place the lap belt as low as possible on The shoulder belt anchor height should be
the hips, not on the waist. adjusted to the position best suited for the
driver/front passenger. Always adjust the
anchor height so that the shoulder belt
passes over the middle of the shoulder
without touching the neck.
To raise:
4. Insert the tongue plate into the buckle Pull the release knob and slide the anchor
until you hear a click. up.
To lower:
Pull the release knob and slide the anchor
down.
Pull down on the anchor to make sure that
it is locked in place.
– CONTINUED –

(48,1)
WARNING belts are retracted properly to avoid

catching the belt webbing in the door.
When wearing the seatbelts, make ! Rear seatbelts (except rear center
sure the shoulder portion of the seatbelt)
webbing does not pass over your S01AE0602
neck. If it does, adjust the seatbelt 1. Sit well back in the seat.
anchor to a lower position. Placing 2. Pick up the tongue plate and pull the
the shoulder belt over the neck may belt out slowly. Do not let it get twisted.
result in neck injury during sudden . If the belt stops before reaching the
braking or in a collision. buckle, return the belt slightly and pull it
out more slowly.
. If the belt still cannot be unlocked, let
! Unfastening the seatbelt
S01AE060102 the belt retract slightly after giving it a
strong pull, then pull it out slowly again. 4. To tighten the lap part, pull up on the
shoulder belt.
5. Place the lap belt as low as possible on
the hips, not on the waist.
1) Button
1. Push the button on the buckle.

3. Insert the tongue plate into the buckle
2. Retract the seatbelt slowly to prevent it
until you hear a click.
from getting tangled or twisted.
Before closing the door, make sure that the

(49,1)
! Unfastening the seatbelt ! Rear center seatbelt 1

S01AE060201 S01AE0603 WARNING
Fastening the seatbelt with the web-
bing twisted can increase the risk or
severity of injury in an accident.
When fastening the belt after it is
pulled out from the retractor, espe-
cially when inserting the connec-
tor’s tongue plate into the mating
buckle (on right-hand side), always
check that the webbing is not
twisted.
1) Button 1) Center seatbelt tongue plate

2) Anchor tongue plate
1. Push the button on the buckle. 3) Anchor buckle
2. Retract the seatbelt slowly to prevent it 4) Center seatbelt buckle
from getting tangled or twisted.
Before closing the door, make sure that the
belts are retracted properly to avoid
catching the belt webbing in the door.
– CONTINUED –

(50,1)
WARNING
. Be sure to fasten both tongue
plates to the respective buckles.
If the seatbelt is used only as a
shoulder belt (with the connec-
tor’s tongue plate not fastened to
the connector’s buckle on the
right-hand side), it cannot prop-
erly restrain the wearer in posi-
tion in an accident, possibly
resulting in serious injury or
death.
. The head restraint is not intended 1. Raise the head restraint to the ex- 3. After drawing out the seatbelt, pass it
to be used at the lowest position. tended position. Do not remove the head through the belt guide as follows: First
Before sitting on the seat, raise restraint. insert one edge of the belt into the open
the head restraint to the extended gap in the belt guide; then slide the rest of
position. Otherwise, in an acci- the belt in, so that the whole belt fits inside.
dent, serious injury or death
could result.
2. Remove the tongue plate from the belt

holder on the right side of the cargo area
and pull out the seatbelt slowly.

(51,1)
7. Place the lap belt as low as possible on

the hips, not on the waist.
1
! Unfastening the seatbelt

S01AE060301
4. After confirming that the webbing is not 5. Insert the center seatbelt tongue plate
twisted, insert the anchor tongue plate into the center seatbelt buckle marked
attached at the webbing end into the “CENTER” on the left-hand side until it
buckle on the right-hand side until a click clicks.
sounds. 1) Button
. If the belt stops before reaching the
buckle, return the belt slightly and pull it 1. Push the release button of the center
out more slowly. seatbelt buckle (on the left-hand side) to
unfasten the seatbelt.
. If the belt still cannot be unlocked,
give it a strong pull and let it retract NOTE
slightly, then pull it out slowly again. When the seatback is folded down for
greater cargo area, it is necessary to
disconnect the connector.
6. To tighten the lap part, pull up on the

shoulder belt.
– CONTINUED –

(52,1)
2. Insert a tongue plate or another hard

pointed object into the slot in the anchor CAUTION
buckle on the right-hand side and push it
. Do not allow the retractor to roll
in. The anchor tongue plate will then
up the seatbelt too quickly. Other-
disconnect from the buckle.
wise, the metal tongue plates
may hit against the trim, resulting
in damaged trim.
. Have the seatbelt fully rolled up
so that the tongue plates are
neatly stored. A hanging tongue
plate can swing and hit against
the trim during driving, causing
3. Allow the retractor to roll up the belt. damage to the trim.
You should hold the webbing end and
guide it back into the retractor while it is
rolling up. Insert the tongue plate into the
belt holder.

(53,1)
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/Seatbelt pretensioners 1-21
& Seatbelt maintenance Seatbelt pretensioners your SUBARU dealer. 1

S01AE07
To clean the seatbelts, use a mild soap and S01AF . When discarding seatbelt retrac-
lukewarm water. Never bleach or dye the The following seatbelts have a seatbelt tor assemblies equipped with
belts because this could seriously affect pretensioner. seatbelt pretensioners or scrap-
their strength. . Driver’s seatbelt ping the entire vehicle due to
. Front passenger’s seatbelt collision damage or for other
Inspect the seatbelts and attachments reasons, consult your SUBARU
including the webbing and all hardware dealer.
The seatbelt pretensioners are designed
periodically for cracks, cuts, gashes, tears,
to be activated in the event of an accident
damage, loose bolts or worn areas. Re-
involving a moderate to severe frontal and
place the seatbelts even if only minor
side collision and rollover accident. NOTE
damage is found. . Seatbelt pretensioners are not de-
WARNING signed to activate in minor impacts or
CAUTION in rear impacts.
. To obtain maximum protection, . Pretensioners are designed to func-
. Keep the belts free of polishes,
the occupants should sit in an tion on a one-time-only basis. In the
oils, chemicals and particularly
upright position with their seat- event that a pretensioner is activated,
battery acid.
belts properly fastened. Refer to both the driver’s and front passenger’s
. Never attempt to make modifica- “Seatbelts” �1-12. seatbelt retractor assemblies should
tions or changes that will prevent be replaced only by an authorized
. Do not modify, remove or strike
the seatbelt from operating prop- SUBARU dealer. When replacing seat-
the seatbelt retractor assemblies
erly. belt retractor assemblies, use only
equipped with seatbelt preten-
sioners or surrounding area. This genuine SUBARU parts.
could result in accidental activa- . If a seatbelt that has a seatbelt
tion of the seatbelt pretensioners pretensioner does not retract or cannot
or could make the system inop- be pulled out due to a malfunction or
erative, possibly resulting in ser- activation of the pretensioner, contact
ious injury. Seatbelt preten- your SUBARU dealer as soon as pos-
sioners have no user-serviceable sible.
parts. For required servicing of . If the seatbelt retractor assembly or
seatbelt retractors equipped with surrounding area has been damaged,
seatbelt pretensioners, consult contact your SUBARU dealer as soon
– CONTINUED –

(54,1)
1-22 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/Seatbelt pretensioners
as possible. . Side impact sensor ! In cases of rollover accident, frontal

. When you sell your vehicle, we urge . Front door impact sensor collisions or side collisions, the
you to inform the buyer that the vehicle . Rollover sensor following components will operate
is equipped with seatbelt preten- simultaneously
sioners. Also, notify the buyer of the If the sensor detects a certain predeter- S01AF0101
For details, refer to “In cases of rollover
contents in this section. mined amount of force during frontal or accident, frontal collisions or side colli-
side collisions or rollover accidents, any sions, the following components will oper-
& Seatbelt with shoulder belt seatbelt that has a seatbelt pretensioner is ate simultaneously” �1-24.
pretensioner quickly drawn back in by the retractor to
take up the slack so that the belt more
NOTE
S01AF01
effectively restrains the seat occupant.
& Seatbelt with shoulder belt
This section is applicable to the follow-
and lap belt pretensioners
S01AF02
The driver’s seatbelt pretensioner includes
ing components.
a tension reducing device which limits the
NOTE
. Driver’s seatbelt peak forces exerted by the seatbelt on the This section is applicable to the front
occupant in the event of a collision. passenger’s side seatbelt.
When a seatbelt pretensioner is activated,

an operating noise will be heard and a
small amount of smoke will be released.
These occurrences are normal and not
harmful. This smoke does not indicate a
fire in the vehicle.
Once the seatbelt pretensioner has been
activated, the seatbelt retractor remains
locked. Consequently, the seatbelt can not
be pulled out and retracted and therefore
must be replaced.
Front seatbelt pretensioner
The pretensioner sensor also serves as 1) Seatbelt retractor assembly (shoulder
follows. belt pretensioner and adaptive force
limiter)
. SRS frontal airbag sensor 2) Lap belt pretensioner

(55,1)
On the front passenger’s side, the

shoulder belt pretensioner is supplemen-
1
ted by a lap belt pretensioner, which is
located at the base of the center pillar. Like
the shoulder belt pretensioner, the lap belt
pretensioner instantaneously pulls in the
belt to eliminate slack if a certain level of
frontal collision force is detected. As a
result, the seatbelt restrains the front seat
occupant more effectively.
The front passenger’s seatbelt preten-
sioner includes a tension reducing device
which limits the peak forces exerted by the
seatbelt on the occupant in the event of a
collision.
The adaptive force limiter will select a
reducing load to the suit body size of
occupant as detected by the occupant
detection sensor.
When a seatbelt pretensioner is activated,
an operating noise will be heard and a
small amount of smoke will be released.
These occurrences are normal and not
harmful. This smoke does not indicate a
fire in the vehicle.
Once the seatbelt pretensioner has been
activated, the seatbelt pretensioner re-
mains locked. Consequently, the seatbelt
cannot be pulled out and retracted and
therefore must be replaced.
– CONTINUED –

(56,1)
1-24 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/Seatbelt pretensioners
! In cases of rollover accident, frontal collisions or side collisions, the following components will operate simultaneously
S01AF0201
Driver’s side Front passen- Front passen- SRS frontal SRS frontal
seatbelt pre- ger’s side ger’s side lap airbag for dri- airbag for front SRS curtain SRS side air-
tensioner shoulder belt belt preten- ver passenger airbags bags
pretensioner sioner
Rollover accidents * * — — — * —
both sides
Frontal collisions * * * * **1 — —
Offset frontal * * * * **1 * —
collisions both sides
Side collisions **3 **4 — — — * **2

impacted side impacted side
Rear impact — — — — — — —
Minor impact — — — — — — —
*: Activated
—: Not activated
*1: This does not operate if the occupant detection system deactivates airbag operation.
*2: When both the satellite safing sensor and any of the center pillar impact sensors/front door impact sensors sense an impact force.
*3: When both the satellite safing sensor and the driver’s side front door impact sensor sense an impact force.
However, when a center pillar impact sensor detects a signal faster than the front door impact sensor, or both sensors detect signals simultaneously,
the seatbelt pretensioner does not activate.
*4: When both the satellite safing sensor and the front passenger’s side front door impact sensor sense an impact force.
However, when a center pillar impact sensor detects a signal faster than the front door impact sensor, or both sensors detect signals simultaneously,
the seatbelt pretensioner does not activate.

(57,1)
& System monitors the seatbelt pretensioner, con- CAUTION 1

S01AF03
A diagnostic system continually monitors sult your nearest SUBARU deal-
the readiness of the seatbelt pretensioner er. Do not perform any of the following
with the ignition switch in the “ON” position. modifications. Such modifications
The seatbelt pretensioners share the can interfere with proper operation
control module with the SRS airbag CAUTION of the seatbelt pretensioners.
system. Therefore, if any malfunction For the locations of the sensors and . Attachment of any equipment
occurs in a seatbelt pretensioner, the SRS airbag control module, refer to (bush bar, winches, snow plow,
SRS airbag system warning light will “Components” �1-50. skid plate, etc.) other than genu-
illuminate. For details, refer to “SRS airbag ine SUBARU accessory parts to
system monitors” �1-71. If you need service or repair in the the front end.
areas where the sensors and SRS
airbag modules are stored, or near . Modification of the suspension
& System servicing the front seatbelt retractors, have system or front end structure.
S01AF04
the work performed by your author- . Installation of a tire of different
WARNING ized SUBARU dealer. size and construction from the
. When discarding a seatbelt re- tires specified on the vehicle
tractor assembly or scrapping placard attached to the driver’s
NOTE door pillar or specified for indivi-
the entire vehicle damaged by a
If the front or side part of the vehicle is dual vehicle models in this Own-
collision, consult your SUBARU
damaged in an accident to the extent er’s Manual.
dealer.
that the seatbelt pretensioner does not
. Tampering with or disconnecting operate, contact your SUBARU dealer
the system’s wiring could result as soon as possible.
in accidental activation of the
seatbelt pretensioner and/or
SRS airbag or could make the & Precautions against vehicle
system inoperative, which may modification
S01AF05
result in serious injury. Do not Always consult your SUBARU dealer if you
use electrical test equipment on want to install any accessory parts to your
any circuit related to the seatbelt vehicle.
pretensioner and SRS airbag sys-
tems. For required servicing of

(58,1)
1-26 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/Rear Seat Reminder (models with combination meter display (color LCD))
Rear Seat Reminder (models . This function detects the opening Child restraint systems
and closing of the rear doors. In this
with combination meter dis- situation, there is the possibility that
S01AG
play (color LCD)) & Safety precautions

the following phenomenon may occur. S01AG14
S01AT
– It may alert the driver even if there
This function prompts the driver to confirm are no passengers or cargo in the
the presence of passengers and cargo in rear seat.
the rear. – It may not alert the driver even if
This function will be activated when the there are passengers and cargo in
rear doors are opened and closed. the rear seat.
It alerts the driver by warning messages on . This function can be turned ON/OFF
the combination meter display (color LCD) using the meter customizing function.
and beeps when the ignition switch is Refer to “Function settings and adjust-
turned from the “ON” position to the “OFF” ments on the combination meter dis-
position. play (color LCD)” �25.
. The ON/OFF setting will not be
changed even if the ignition switch is Infants and small children should always
turned to the “OFF” position. be placed in an infant or child restraint
. The ON/OFF setting will be returned system in the rear seat while riding in the
to the default setting if the battery is vehicle.
removed.
You should use an infant or child restraint
system that meets Federal Motor Vehicle
Safety Standards or Canada Motor Vehi-
cle Safety Standards, is compatible with
your vehicle and is appropriate for the
child’s age and size.
All child restraint systems are designed to
NOTE be secured in vehicle seats by lap belts or
. This function does not directly de- the lap belt portion of a lap/shoulder belt
tect passengers and cargo in the rear (except those described in “Installation of
seat. child restraint systems by use of lower and

(59,1)
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/Child restraint systems 1-27
tether anchorages (LATCH)” �1-37). serious injury or death. 1

Children could be endangered in an
accident if their child restraint systems
are not properly secured in the vehicle.
When installing the child restraint system,
carefully follow the manufacturer’s instruc-
tions.
According to accident statistics, children
are safer when properly restrained in the
rear seating positions than in the front
seating positions.
All U.S. states and Canadian provinces Lock release knob
require that infants and small children be 1) Unlocked
restrained in an approved child restraint 2) Locked
system at all times while the vehicle is A) Unlocking marker in red WARNING
moving.
WARNING Never let a passenger hold a child on
his or her lap or in his or her arms
. Before installing a child restraint while the vehicle is moving. The
system, check that the unlocking passenger cannot protect the child
marker on the seatback lock (or infant) from injury in a collision,
release knob cannot be seen to because the child will be caught
confirm that the rear seatback is between the passenger and objects
securely locked in position. If the inside the vehicle.
rear seatback is not locked se- Additionally, holding a child in your
curely, serious injury may result. lap or arms in the front seat exposes
. Do not leave children in the car that child to another serious danger.
unattended. High interior tem- Since the SRS airbag deploys with
peratures may cause heat stroke considerable speed and force, the
and dehydration that result in child could be injured or even killed.
– CONTINUED –

(60,1)
1-28 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/Child restraint systems
& Safety tips for installing child tached. Otherwise it may cause
restraint systems death or serious injury to chil-
S01AG16 dren or other passengers in sud-
WARNING den braking, swerving, or acci-
dents.
. Child restraint systems and seat- . Do not leave an unsecured child
belts can become hot in a vehicle restraint system in your vehicle.
that has been closed up in sunny Unsecured child restraint sys-
weather; they could burn a small tems can be thrown around in-
child. Check the child restraint side of the vehicle in a sudden
system before you place a child stop, turn or accident; they can
in it. strike and injure vehicle occu-
. Do not use a seatbelt extender. If pants as well as result in serious
a seatbelt extender is used when injuries or death to the child.
WARNING installing a child restraint sys-
. Children should be properly re- tem, the seatbelt will not securely
strained at all times. Never allow hold the child restraint system. CAUTION
a child to stand up, or to kneel on Use of a seatbelt extender could
cause death or serious injury to When you install a child restraint
any seat. Unrestrained children system, follow the manufacturer’s
will be thrown forward during children or other passengers in
sudden braking, swerving, or instructions supplied with it. After
sudden stop or in an accident installing the child restraint system,
and can be injured seriously. accidents.
check to ensure that it is held
. Never allow a child to stand up or . Attach the child restraint system securely in position. If it is not held
to kneel on the front passenger’s to the anchors properly. tight and secure, the danger of your
seat, or never hold a child on your When using the LATCH anchors, child suffering personal injury in the
lap or in your arms. The SRS be sure that there are no foreign event of an accident may be in-
airbag deploys with considerable objects around the anchors. creased.
force and can injure or even kill Also, the seatbelts should not be
the child. caught behind the child restraint
system. Make sure the child re-
straint system is securely at-

(61,1)
& Where to place a child re- Some types of child restraint systems
1
straint system might not be able to be secured firmly
S01AG01 due to projection of the seat cushion.
The following descriptions are SUBARU’s
recommendations on where to place a In this seating position, you should use
child restraint system in your vehicle. only a child restraint system that has a
bottom base that fits snugly against the
WARNING contours of the seat cushion and can be
securely retained using the seatbelt.
. Several types of child restraint
C: Rear seat, center seating position
systems may conceal the buckle
of the neighboring seat. If the The ALR/ELR seatbelt and an upper
occupant of the neighboring seat anchorage (tether anchorage) are pro-
cannot correctly fasten the seat- vided in this position.
belt, that person must move to a A: Front passenger’s seat Some types of child restraint systems
different seat. If the seatbelt can- You should not install a child restraint might not be able to be secured firmly
not be correctly fastened, there is system (including a booster seat) due to due to projection of the seat cushion.
the risk of serious injury or death the hazard to children posed by the In this seating position, you should use
in the event of sudden braking or passenger’s airbag. only a child restraint system that has a
a collision. bottom base that fits snugly against the
B: Rear seat, window-side seating contours of the seat cushion and can be
. If the child restraint system can- positions
not be correctly installed be- securely retained using the seatbelt.
Recommended positions for all types of When you install a child restraint system in
cause it contacts the driver’s
child restraint systems. the rear seat’s center seating position,
seat, move the child restraint
system to a different seat. If it In these positions, the following equipment raise the center head restraint.
cannot be installed in a different is provided for installing a child restraint Lower anchorages (bars) for window-side
seat (other than the driver’s seat), system. seating positions may be used for a seat in
adjust the front seat so that . Automatic Locking Retractor/Emer- the center seating position if a child
contact does not occur. gency Locking Retractor (ALR/ELR) seat- restraint system manufacturer’s instruc-
belts tions permit and specify using anchors as
. Lower anchorages (bars) far apart as those in this vehicle.
. Upper anchorages (tether anchorages) If a child restraint system is not correctly
fixed in place (for example, if a child
– CONTINUED –

(62,1)
restraint system can be moved more than . Do not use lower anchorages SENGER’S SEAT. DOING SO
1 inch (2.5 cm) from side to side), you (bars) for a seat in the center RISKS SERIOUS INJURY OR
should install the child restraint system in a seating position unless a child DEATH TO THE CHILD BY PLA-
rear seat, window-side seating position. restraint system manufacturer’s CING THE CHILD’S HEAD TOO
instructions permit and specify CLOSE TO THE SRS AIRBAG.
WARNING using anchors spaced as far . Do not allow children to lean their
apart as those in this vehicle. heads or any other parts of their
. Even with advanced airbags, chil-
dren can be seriously injured by . Do not connect two or more lower bodies against the door or the
the airbag. Seat children in the hooks onto the same anchorage area of the seat, front and rear
rear seat properly restrained at (bar). pillars or roof side rails. The SRS
all times. The SRS airbag deploys side airbags and SRS curtain
with considerable speed and airbags deploy even if children
force and can injure or even kill are seated in the child restraint
children, especially if they are not system, and the impact could
restrained or improperly re- cause death or serious injury to
strained. Because children are the child.
lighter and weaker than adults, . To secure the child restraint sys-
their risk of being injured from tem, be sure to comply with all
deployment is greater. installation instructions provided
For that reason, be sure to secure by the child restraint system
ALL types of child restraint sys- manufacturer. Not doing so could
tems (including forward facing result in death or serious injury to
child restraint systems) in the children in a sudden stop or
REAR seats at all times. You accident.
should choose a restraint system WARNING
which is appropriate for the
child’s age, height and weight. . SINCE YOUR VEHICLE IS
According to accident statistics, EQUIPPED WITH A PASSEN-
children are safer when properly GER’S SRS AIRBAG, NEVER IN-
restrained in the rear seating STALL A CHILD RESTRAINT
positions than in the front seating SYSTEM IN THE FRONT PAS-
positions.

(63,1)
& Choosing a child restraint NOTE . When installing a child restraint 1

system Some sizes of child restraint systems
system in the rear center seating
S01AG02 position, set both seatbacks to
may not fit the vehicle seat. Before the original position. Otherwise,
purchasing a child restraint system, the child restraint system cannot
check whether it fits on the vehicle seat. be securely restrained, which
may result in death or serious
& Installing child restraint sys- injuries in the event of sudden
tems with ALR/ELR seatbelt stop, sudden steering maneuver
S01AG04 or an accident.
CAUTION
! Installing a rearward facing child
. When you install a child restraint restraint system
system, follow the manufac- S01AG0401
turer’s instructions supplied with WARNING

Choose a child restraint system that is it. After installing the child re-
appropriate for the child’s age and size straint system, check to ensure . NEVER INSTALL A CHILD RE-
(weight and height) in order to provide the that it is held securely in position. STRAINT SYSTEM IN THE FRONT
child with proper protection. The child If it is not held tight and secure, PASSENGER’S SEAT. DOING SO
restraint system should meet all applicable the danger of your child suffering RISKS SERIOUS INJURY OR
requirements of Federal Motor Vehicle personal injury in the event of an DEATH TO THE CHILD BY PLA-
Safety Standards for the United States or accident may be increased. CING THE CHILD’S HEAD TOO
of Canada Motor Vehicle Safety Standards CLOSE TO THE SRS AIRBAG.
for Canada. It can be identified by looking . Before installing a child restraint
for the label on the child restraint system or system, be sure to confirm that
the manufacturer’s statement of compli- the seatback is securely locked
ance in the document attached to the into place. Otherwise, in an acci-
system. dent, serious injury or death
Also it is important for you to make sure could result.
that the child restraint system is compa-
tible with the vehicle in which it will be 1. Place the child restraint system in the
used. rear seating position.
– CONTINUED –

(64,1)
WARNING
When you intend to install a child
restraint system in the rear center
seating position, if the child restraint
system does not fit snugly against
the contours of the rear center seat
cushion, install the child restraint
system in the window-side seating
position to be safe. For details, refer
to “Where to place a child restraint
system” �1-29.
4. Take up the slack in the lap belt. 6. Before having a child sit in the child
5. If using the seatbelt in the ALR mode is restraint system, try to move it back and
recommended by the manufacturer’s in- forth and right and left to check if it is firmly
structions supplied with the child restraint secured. Sometimes a child restraint
system, perform the following procedure. system can be more firmly secured by
(1) Pull out the seatbelt fully from the pushing it down into the seat cushion and
retractor to change the retractor over from then tightening the seatbelt. It should not
the Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR) to be possible to move the child restraint
the Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) system more than 1 in (2.5 cm) in any
mode. direction along the seatbelt path.
(2) Allow the belt to rewind into the 7. If the seatbelt has been set to the ALR
retractor. As the belt is rewinding, clicks mode in step 5, pull at the shoulder portion
will be heard which indicate the retractor of the belt to confirm that it cannot be
2. Run the lap and shoulder belt through functions as ALR. pulled out (ALR properly functioning).
or around the child restraint system follow-
ing the instructions provided by its manu-
facturer.

(65,1)
! Installing a forward facing child 1

restraint system
S01AG0402
WARNING
. NEVER INSTALL A CHILD RE-
STRAINT SYSTEM IN THE FRONT
PASSENGER’S SEAT. DOING SO
RISKS SERIOUS INJURY OR
DEATH TO THE CHILD BY PLA-
CING THE CHILD’S HEAD TOO
CLOSE TO THE SRS AIRBAG.
. Before installing a child restraint
8. To remove the child restraint system, system, be sure to confirm that 2. Adjust the head restraint as follows.
press the release button on the seatbelt the seatback is securely locked (Except for center seat)
buckle and allow the belt to retract into place. Otherwise, in an acci- (1) Remove the head restraint of the
completely. The belt will return to the dent, serious injury or death rear seating position where the child
ELR mode. could result. restraint system is to be installed.
(2) Store the removed head restraint
NOTE 1. Place the child restraint system in the in the cargo area.
When the child restraint system is no rear seating position.
longer in use, remove it and restore the CAUTION
ELR function of the retractor. That Do not place the head restraint in the
function is restored by allowing the passenger compartment to prevent
seatbelt to retract fully. it from being thrown around in the
passenger compartment in a sud-
den stop or a sharp turn.
– CONTINUED –

(66,1)
(For center seat) 3. Run the lap and shoulder belt through 5. Take up the slack in the lap belt.
Raise the head restraint to the extended or around the child restraint system follow- 6. Pull out the seatbelt fully from the
position. Do not remove the head restraint. ing the instructions provided by its manu- retractor to change the retractor over from
facturer. the Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR) to
WARNING – When a child restraint system is the Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)
installed on the rear center seating function. Then, allow the belt to rewind into
When you intend to install a child position, pass the rear center seatbelt the retractor. As the belt is rewinding,
restraint system on the rear center through the belt guide properly. For clicks will be heard which indicate the
seating position, if the child restraint details, refer to “Rear center seatbelt” retractor functions as ALR.
system does not fit snugly against �1-17.
the contours of the rear center seat
cushion, install the child restraint
system on the window-side seating
position to be safe. For details, refer
to “Where to place a child restraint
system” �1-29.

(67,1)
press the release button on the seatbelt

buckle and allow the belt to retract
1
completely. The belt will return to the
ELR mode.
If you have installed a child restraint
system for the rear center seating posi-
tion, when you remove the child restraint
system, the seatbelt may not be restored
to the ELR mode even if the seatbelt is
retracted. In this case, lower the head
restraint to the retracted position to allow
the seatbelt to retract moreover. The
seatbelt will return to the ELR mode.
7. Before having a child sit in the child 9. Latch the top tether hook onto the
restraint system, try to move it back and tether anchorage that is located behind the Remember that the head restraint is not
forth and right and left to check if it is firmly rear seat and tighten the top tether firmly. intended to be used at the lowest position
secured. Sometimes a child restraint For additional instructions, refer to “Top (retracted position). Therefore, when the
system can be more firmly secured by tether anchorages” �1-41. rear center seat is occupied (including
pushing it down into the seat cushion and when a child restraint system is installed)
then tightening the seatbelt. It should not next time, be sure to raise the head
be possible to move the child restraint restraint to the extended position.
system more than 1 in (2.5 cm) in any
direction along the seatbelt path. NOTE
8. Pull at the shoulder portion of the belt When the child restraint system is no
to confirm that it cannot be pulled out (ALR longer in use, remove it and restore the
properly functioning). ELR function of the retractor. That
function is restored by allowing the
seatbelt to retract fully.
10. To remove the child restraint system,

– CONTINUED –

(68,1)
& Installing a booster seat or 1. Adjust the head restraint as follows.

booster cushion
S01AG05 Window-side Center seating
seating position position
Boost- Remove Raise
er seat
Boost-
er Do not remove Raise
cush-
ion
. Remove the head restraint.

(1) Remove the head restraint of the
rear seating position where the child
restraint system is to be installed. 2. Place the booster seat/cushion in the
(2) Store the removed head restraint rear seating position and sit the child on it.
Booster seat in the cargo area. The child should sit well back on the
booster seat/cushion.
CAUTION 3. Run the lap and shoulder belt through
or around the booster seat/cushion and
Do not place the head restraint in the the child following the instructions pro-
passenger compartment to prevent vided by its manufacturer. For booster
it from being thrown around in the seat/cushion with a belt guide, use the
passenger compartment in a sud- seatbelt through the belt guide.
until you hear a click. Take care not to twist
. Raise the head restraint.
the seatbelt.
(1) Raise the head restraint to the
extended position. Do not remove the Make sure the shoulder belt is positioned
head restraint. across the center of child’s shoulder and
that the lap belt is positioned as low as
Booster cushion possible on the child’s hips.

(69,1)
effective in preventing or redu- & Installation of child restraint 1

cing injury. systems by use of lower and
. Place the lap belt as low as tether anchorages (LATCH)
S01AG07
possible on the child’s hips. A
high-positioned lap belt will in- ! Lower and tether anchorages
S01AG0701
crease the risk of sliding under
the lap belt and of the lap belt
sliding up over the abdomen, and
both can result in serious injury
or death.
. Make sure the shoulder belt is
positioned across the center of
child’s shoulder. Placing the
5. To remove the booster seat/cushion, shoulder belt over the neck may
press the release button on the seatbelt result in neck injury during sud-
buckle and allow the belt to retract. den braking or in a collision.
WARNING
. Never use a belt that is twisted or WARNING
reversed. In an accident, this can Attach the child restraint system to
increase the risk or severity of the anchors properly. When using
injury to the child. the LATCH anchors, be sure that
. Never place the shoulder belt there are no foreign objects around
under the child’s arm or behind the anchors. Also, the seatbelts
the child’s back. If an accident should not be caught behind the
occurs, this can increase the risk child restraint system. Make sure
or severity of injury to the child. the child restraint system is se-
. The seatbelt should fit snugly in curely attached. Otherwise it may
order to provide full restraint. cause death or serious injury to
Loose fitting belts are not as children or other passengers in
sudden braking, swerving, or acci-
– CONTINUED –

(70,1)
dents. ! Lower anchorages ! Tether anchorages

S01AG070101 S01AG070102
Some types of child restraint systems can

be installed on the rear seat of your vehicle
without use of the seatbelts. Such child
restraint systems are secured to the
dedicated anchorages provided on the
vehicle body. The lower and tether an-
chorages are sometimes referred to as the
LATCH system (Lower Anchors and
Tethers for CHildren).
The tether anchorages (upper an-

WARNING chorages) are provided at the locations
shown in the above illustration. For details,
Do not connect two or more lower refer to “Top tether anchorages” �1-41.
hooks onto the same anchorage
(bar).
Two lower anchorages (bars) are provided

for installing a child restraint system on the
rear seat window-side seating positions.
Your vehicle is equipped with four lower Lower anchorages (bars) for window-side
anchorages (bars) and three upper an- seating positions may be used for a seat in
chorages (tether anchorages) for accom- the center seating position if a child
modating such child restraint systems. restraint system manufacturer’s instruc-
tions permit and specify using anchors as
far apart as those in this vehicle. Each
lower anchorage is located where the seat
cushion meets the seatback.

(71,1)
! To install a child restraint system cushion to expose the anchorages (bars)

to be used for installation of the child
1
using lower and tether an-
chorages restraint system.
S01AG070103
To install a child restraint system using If it is hard to install the child restraint
lower and tether anchorages, perform the system because the anchorage cover
following procedure. returns to the original position, press the
anchorage cover to the seat cushion until it
WARNING is flat.
Before installing a child restraint

system, be sure to confirm that the
seatback is securely locked into
place. Otherwise, in an accident,
serious injury or death could result. 2. You will find marks “ ” at the bottoms
of the rear seatback. These marks indicate
1. Move the seatback back and forth to the positions of the lower anchorages
confirm that it is securely locked into place. (bars).
– Check that the red colored unlock-
ing marker which is attached to the
bottom of the lock release knob is
invisible. For details, refer to “Folding
down the rear seatback” �1-7. 3. Remove the rear seat head restraint.
For details, refer to “Rear seats” �1-9.
4. Store the head restraint that has been
removed in the cargo area.
CAUTION
Do not place the head restraint in the
passenger compartment to prevent
Peel off the anchorage cover completely it from being thrown around in the
from the selected side of the rear seat passenger compartment in a sud-
– CONTINUED –

(72,1)
6. If your child restraint system is a 8. Before having a child sit in the child
flexible attachment type (which uses tether restraint system, try to move it back and
5. While following the instructions sup- belts), push the child restraint system into forth and right and left to check if it is firmly
plied by the child restraint system manu- the seat cushion and pull both left and right secured. Sometimes a child restraint
facturer, connect the lower hooks onto the lower tether belts up to secure the child system can be more firmly secured by
lower anchorages located at “ ” marks on restraint system by taking up the slack in pushing it down into the seat cushion. It
the bottom of the rear seatback. When the the belt. should not be possible to move the child
hooks are connected, make sure the 7. Latch the top tether hook onto the restraint system more than 1 in (2.5 cm).
adjacent seatbelts are not caught. tether anchorage that is located behind the 9. To remove the child restraint system,
rear seat and tighten the top tether firmly. follow the reverse procedures of installa-
For additional instructions, refer to “Top tion.
tether anchorages” �1-41.
SUBARU recommends that you check
with a certified Child Passenger Safety
Technician to ensure the proper installa-
tion of your child restraint system. For
more information, and to locate the closest
inspection location in the U.S., refer to the
National Highway Traffic Safety Adminis-

(73,1)
tration (NHTSA) website. In Canada, ! Anchorage location ! To hook the top tether
check with Transport Canada. S01AG0901 S01AG0902
1
& Top tether anchorages CAUTION
S01AG09
Your vehicle is equipped with three top . Except for the center seating
tether anchorages so that a child restraint position, remove the head re-
system having a top tether can be installed straint when mounting a child
in the rear seat. When installing a child restraint system. Otherwise, it
restraint system using top tether, proceed might be possible that the top
as follows, while observing the instructions tether cannot be fastened tightly.
by the child restraint system manufacturer.
. Store the head restraint that has
Since a top tether can provide additional been removed in the cargo area.
stability by offering another connection Do not place the head restraint in
between a child restraint system and the the passenger compartment to
vehicle, we recommend that you use a top prevent it from being thrown
tether whenever one is required or avail- around in the passenger com-
able. partment in a sudden stop or a
sharp turn.
. For the center seating position,
raise the center head restraint to
the extended position when
mounting a child restraint sys-
tem. Otherwise, it will be impos-
sible to use the seatbelt guide
that is attached to the head
restraint correctly.
1) For left seat The seatbelt guide is essential for
2) For center seat routing the belt webbing at the
3) For right seat center seating position. For in-
formation about using the seat-
Three upper anchorages are installed on belt guide, refer to “Rear center
the back side of the rear seatback. seatbelt” �1-17.
– CONTINUED –

(74,1)
1-42 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint System airbag)
SRS airbag (Supplemental

Restraint System airbag)
S01AH
The Supplemental Restraint System

(SRS) name is used because the airbag
system supplements the vehicle’s seat-
belts.
This vehicle is equipped with a supple-
mental restraint system which consists of
seven airbags.
The configurations are as follows.
1) Seatbelt guide . Driver’s and front passenger’s frontal
1. Attach the top tether hook to the airbags
appropriate upper anchorage. 2) Seatbelt of the center seating position
3) Top tether . Driver’s and front passenger’s side
For the center seating position, route airbags
the top tether under the head restraint as 2. Tighten the top tether securely. . Curtain airbags (for driver, front pas-
illustrated below. SUBARU recommends that you check senger, and window-side rear passen-
with a certified Child Passenger Safety gers)
Technician to ensure the proper installa- . Knee airbag for driver
tion of your child restraint system. For
more information, and to locate the closest These SRS airbags are designed only
inspection location in the U.S., refer to the as a supplement to the primary protec-
National Highway Traffic Safety Adminis- tion provided by the seatbelt.
tration (NHTSA) website. In Canada, The system also controls front seatbelt
check with Transport Canada. pretensioners. For operation instructions
and precautions concerning the seatbelt
pretensioner, refer to “Seatbelt preten-
sioners” �1-21.

(75,1)
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint System airbag) 1-43
& General precautions regard- help avoid injuries that can result as possible and sit upright and well 1
ing SRS airbag system when an occupant is not seated back in the seat.
S01AH10 in a proper upright position.
WARNING
. To obtain maximum protection in
the event of an accident, the
driver and all passengers must
always wear seatbelts when in
the vehicle. The SRS airbag is
designed only to be a supplement
to the primary protection pro-
vided by the seatbelt. It does not
eliminate the need to fasten seat-
belts. In combination with the
seatbelts, it offers the best pro-
tection in case of a serious acci-
dent. WARNING
Not wearing a seatbelt increases WARNING
. Do not sit or lean close to either
the chance of severe injury or The SRS airbags deploy with con- front door. The SRS side airbags
death in a crash even when the siderable speed and force. Occu- are stored in both front seat
vehicle has the SRS system. pants who are not seated in proper seatbacks next to the door, and
For instructions and precautions upright position when the SRS air- they provide protection by de-
concerning the seatbelt system, bag deploys could suffer serious ploying rapidly in the event of a
refer to “Seatbelts” �1-12. injury. Because the SRS airbag side impact. However, the force
. The SRS side airbags and SRS needs enough space for deploy- of SRS side airbag deployment
curtain airbags are designed only ment, the driver should always sit can injure an occupant whose
to be a supplement to the primary upright and back in the seat as far body is too close to an SRS
protection provided by the seat- from the steering wheel as practical airbag.
belt. They do not eliminate the while still maintaining full vehicle . Since your vehicle is equipped
need to fasten seatbelts. It is also control, and the front passenger with SRS curtain airbags, do not
important to wear your seatbelt to should move the seat as far back
– CONTINUED –

(76,1)
sit or lean close to the front or bruises to the face or arms, CAUTION
rear door on either side. Do not because of the SRS airbag de-
put body parts out of the window. ployment force. . When the SRS airbag deploys,
The SRS curtain airbags on both some smoke will be released.
sides of the cabin are stored in This smoke could cause breath-
the roof side (between the front ing problems for people with a
pillar and a point behind the rear history of asthma or other breath-
quarter glass), and they provide ing trouble. If you or your pas-
protection by deploying rapidly sengers have breathing pro-
in the event of a side impact, blems after SRS airbag deploys,
rollover or an offset frontal colli- get fresh air promptly.
sion. However, the force of its . A deploying SRS airbag releases
deployment can injure an occu- hot gas. Occupants could get
pant whose body is too close to burned if they come into direct
an SRS airbag. contact with the hot gas.
. Do not sit or lean unnecessarily
close to the SRS airbag. Because
the SRS airbag deploys with NOTE
considerable speed and force to WARNING . When you sell your vehicle, we urge
protect in high speed collisions, . Keep arms away from either front you to inform the buyer that the vehicle
the force of an airbag can injure door or its internal trim. They is equipped with SRS airbags. Also,
an occupant whose body is too could be injured in the event of notify the buyer of the applicable sec-
close to the SRS airbag. SRS side airbag deployment. tion in this Owner’s Manual.
It is also important to wear seat- . If the SRS airbag deploys, fuel
. Do not place any objects over or supply will be cut off to reduce the risk
belt to help avoid injuries that can near the SRS airbag cover or
result when the SRS airbag con- of fire caused by leaking fuel. For
between you and the SRS airbag. details about restarting of the engine,
tacts an occupant not in their If the SRS airbag deploys, these
proper position. refer to “If your vehicle is involved in an
objects could interfere with its accident” �9-20.
Even when properly positioned, proper operation and could be
there remains a possibility that propelled inside the vehicle,
an occupant may suffer minor causing injury.
injury, such as abrasions and

(77,1)
& General precautions regard- WARNING 1

ing SRS airbag system for
accessories and any objects . Do not put any objects (including
S01AH13
straps or cords) over the steering
wheel pad, column cover, or
dashboard.
– These objects could be en-
tangled with the steering
wheel, preventing the SRS
frontal airbag, etc. from oper-
ating properly.
– If the SRS frontal airbag de-
ploys, these objects could be
propelled inside the vehicle, WARNING
causing injury.
Do not attach accessories to the
. Do not put any objects under the
windshield, or fit an extra-wide mir-
driver’s side of the instrument
ror over the inside rear view mirror. If
panel. If the SRS knee airbag
the SRS airbag deploys, those ob-
deploys, those objects could in-
jects could become projectiles that
terfere with its proper operation
could seriously injure vehicle occu-
and could be propelled inside the
pants.
vehicle, causing injury.
. The key must not be attached to
heavy, sharp or hard acces-
sories, or another key. If the SRS
knee airbag deploys, those ob-
jects could interfere with its
proper operation and could be
propelled inside the vehicle and
cause injury.
– CONTINUED –

(78,1)
accessory in such a location tain airbags.

could be propelled through the Before hanging clothing on the coat
cabin with great force by the hooks, make sure there are no sharp
curtain airbag, or it could prevent objects in the pockets. Hang cloth-
correct deployment of the curtain ing directly on the coat hooks with-
airbag. In either case, the result out using hangers.
could be serious injuries.
WARNING
. Do not attach accessories to the
door trim or near either SRS side
airbags and do not place objects
near the SRS side airbags. In the
event of SRS side airbag deploy-
ment, they could be propelled
dangerously toward the vehicle’s
WARNING
WARNING
occupants and cause injuries. . Do not put any kind of clothes or
. Do not attach a hands-free micro- Do not hang coat hangers or other other objects over either front
phone or any other accessory to hard or pointed objects on the coat seatback and do not attach labels
a front pillar, a center pillar, a rear hooks. If such items were hanging or stickers to the front seat sur-
pillar, the windshield, a side win- on the coat hooks during deploy- face on or near the SRS side
dow, an assist grip, or any other ment of the SRS curtain airbags, airbag. They could prevent prop-
cabin surface that would be near they could cause serious injuries by er deployment of the SRS side
a deploying SRS curtain airbag. A coming off the coat hooks and being airbag, reducing protection avail-
hands-free microphone or other thrown through the cabin or by able to the front seat’s occupant.
preventing deployment of the cur-

(79,1)
. Do not install a seat cover unless airbag deploys with considerable 1

it is a genuine SUBARU seat speed and force and can injure or
cover exclusively designed for even kill children, especially if they
use with the SRS airbag. Even are not restrained or improperly
when using a genuine SUBARU restrained. Because children are
seat cover, the SRS side airbag lighter and weaker than adults, their
system may not function nor- risk of being injured from deploy-
mally if the seat cover is not ment is greater.
installed correctly. For that reason, we strongly recom-
mend that ALL children (including
those in child seats and those that
& General precautions regard- have outgrown child restraint sys-
ing SRS airbag system and tems) sit in the REAR seat properly
children restrained at all times in a child
S01AH14
restraint device or in a seatbelt, WARNING
whichever is appropriate for the NEVER INSTALL A CHILD RE-
child’s age, height and weight. STRAINT SYSTEM IN THE FRONT
Secure ALL types of child restraint SEAT. DOING SO RISKS SERIOUS
systems (including forward facing INJURY OR DEATH TO THE CHILD
child seats) in the REAR seats at all BY PLACING THE CHILD’S HEAD
times. TOO CLOSE TO THE SRS AIRBAG.
restrained in the rear seating posi-
tions than in the front seating posi-
tions.
For instructions and precautions
WARNING concerning the child restraint sys-
tem, refer to “Child restraint sys-
Place children in the rear seat prop- tems” �1-26.
erly restrained at all times. The SRS
– CONTINUED –

(80,1)
WARNING WARNING
Never allow a child to stand up or Never hold a child on your lap or in
kneel on the front passenger’s seat. your arms. The SRS airbag deploys
The SRS airbag deploys with con- with considerable force and can
siderable force and can injure or injure or even kill the child.
even kill the child.

(81,1)
WARNING 1
. Never allow a child to do the
following.
– Kneel on any passenger’s seat
facing the side window.
– Wrap his/her arms around the
front seat seatback.
– Put his/her head, arms or
other parts of the body out of
the window.
In the event of an accident, the
force of SRS side airbag and/or
SRS curtain airbag deployment
could injure the child seriously
because his/her head, arms or
other parts of the body are too
close to the SRS side airbag and/
or SRS curtain airbag.
. Since your vehicle is also
equipped with a front passen-
ger’s SRS frontal airbag, children
should be placed in the rear seat
anyway and should be properly
restrained at all times.
– CONTINUED –

(82,1)
& Components The SRS airbags are stowed in the

S01AH11 following locations.
Driver’s SRS frontal airbag: in the center
portion of the steering wheel
A “SRS AIRBAG” mark is located at the
pad of the airbag.
Front passenger’s SRS frontal airbag:
near the top of the dashboard under the
“SRS AIRBAG” mark
SRS side airbag: in the door side of each
front seat seatback which bears an “SRS
AIRBAG” label
SRS curtain airbag: in the roof side
(between the front pillar and a point behind
the rear quarter glass)
“SRS AIRBAG” marks are located at the
top of each center pillar.
SRS knee airbag: under the steering
column
A “SRS AIRBAG” mark is located at the
door of the airbag.
1) Driver’s SRS frontal airbag

2) Front passenger’s SRS frontal airbag
3) SRS side airbag
4) SRS curtain airbag
5) SRS knee airbag

(83,1)
11) Seatbelt pretensioner (driver’s side)
12) Seatbelt pretensioner and adaptive force 1
limiter (front passenger’s side)
13) Curtain airbag sensor (rear wheel house
right-hand side)
14) Curtain airbag sensor (rear wheel house
left-hand side)
15) Curtain airbag module (right-hand side)
16) Curtain airbag module (left-hand side)
17) Seatbelt buckle switch (front passenger’s
side)
18) Knee airbag module (driver’s side)
19) Front passenger’s occupant detection
system sensors
20) Front passenger’s occupant detection
control module
21) Front passenger’s frontal airbag ON and
OFF indicator
22) SRS airbag system warning light
23) Satellite safing sensor (under the rear
center seat)
24) Front door impact sensor (left-hand side)
25) Front door impact sensor (right-hand
side)
26) Lap belt pretensioner (front passenger’s
side)
1) Airbag control module (including impact 6) Side airbag module (driver’s side)
sensor and rollover sensor) 7) Side airbag module (front passenger’s
2) Frontal airbag module (driver’s side) side)
3) Frontal airbag module (front passenger’s 8) Side airbag sensor (center pillar left-hand
side) side)
4) Front sub sensor (left-hand side) 9) Side airbag sensor (center pillar right-
5) Front sub sensor (right-hand side) hand side)
10) Airbag wiring
– CONTINUED –

(84,1)
& SUBARU advanced frontal ADVANCED AIR BAGS” and a tag at- of impact.
airbag system tached to the glove box lid beginning with
S01AH02 the phrase “Even with Advanced Air
Your vehicle is equipped with a SUBARU Bags”. Make sure that you carefully read
advanced frontal airbag system that com- the instructions on the warning labels and
plies with the new advanced frontal airbag tag.
requirements in the amended Federal
Motor Vehicle Safety Standard (FMVSS) Always wear your seatbelt. The SUBARU
No. 208. advanced frontal airbag system is a
supplemental restraint system and must
The SUBARU advanced frontal airbag be used in combination with a seatbelt. All
system automatically determines the de- occupants should wear a seatbelt or be
ployment force of the driver’s SRS frontal seated in an appropriate child restraint
airbag at the time of deployment as well as system.
whether or not to activate the front
passenger’s SRS frontal airbag and, if For the locations of the SRS airbags, refer
to “Components” �1-50. SRS airbag system warning light
activated, the deployment force of the SRS
frontal airbag at the time of deployment. If the SRS airbag system warning light
In a moderate to severe frontal collision,
illuminates, immediately stop the vehicle in
the following components deploy.
a safe place, and consult a SUBARU
. SRS frontal airbag for driver dealer. Unless a technician checks and
. SRS frontal airbag for front passenger repairs the system as needed, the seatbelt
. SRS knee airbag for driver pretensioners and/or the SRS airbag may
. SRS curtain airbag*1 not operate properly in the event of a
*1: When an offset frontal collision that is severe collision, which could result in serious
enough to deploy the front airbag occurs. injury or death.
These components supplement the seat- NOTE

belts by reducing the impact to the The driver’s SRS side airbag and SRS
occupant’s head, chest and knees. curtain airbag are not controlled by the
SUBARU advanced frontal airbag sys-
! Driver’s SRS frontal airbag
S01AH0201 tem.
Your vehicle has warning labels on the The driver’s SRS frontal airbag uses a dual
driver’s and front passenger’s sun visors stage inflator. The inflator operates in
beginning with the phrase “EVEN WITH different ways depending on the severity

(85,1)
! Front passenger’s SRS frontal air- airbag deploys. This is normal. In this seat.
case, although the front passenger’s SRS
1
bag . Do not place anything (shoes,
S01AH0202
The front passenger’s SRS frontal airbag frontal airbag does not operate, the front umbrella, etc.) under the front
uses a dual stage inflator. The inflator passenger’s seatbelt pretensioner oper- passenger’s seat.
operates in different ways depending on ates with the driver’s seatbelt preten-
sioner. For details about the seatbelt . Do not place any objects (books,
the severity of impact. etc.) around the front passen-
pretensioner, refer to “Seatbelt preten-
sioners” �1-21. ger’s seat.
. Do not use the front passenger’s
CAUTION seat with the head restraint re-
moved.
Observe the following precautions.
Failure to do so may prevent the . Do not leave any articles on the
SUBARU advanced frontal airbag front passenger’s seat or the
system from functioning correctly seatbelt tongue and buckle en-
or cause the system to fail. gaged when you leave your vehi-
cle.
. Do not apply any strong impact to
the front passenger’s seat such . Do not put sharp object(s) on the
as by kicking. seat or pierce the seat uphols-
tery.
1) Occupant detection system sensors . Do not let rear passengers rest
their feet between the front seat- . Do not place a magnet near the
The occupant detection system sensors back and seat cushion. seatbelt buckle and the seatbelt
are installed between the seat and seat retractor.
. Do not spill liquid on the front
rails, and monitor the physique and pos- . Do not use front seats with their
passenger’s seat. If liquid is
ture of the front passenger. Using this forward-backward position and
spilled, wipe it off immediately.
information, the occupant detection sys- seatback not being locked into
tem determines whether the front passen- . Do not remove or disassemble place securely. If any of them are
ger’s SRS frontal airbag should be de- the front passenger’s seat. not locked securely, adjust them
ployed or not. . Do not install any accessory again. For adjusting procedure,
(such as an audio amplifier) other refer to “Forward and backward
The occupant detection system may not
than a genuine SUBARU acces- adjustment” �1-5 and “Reclining
inflate the front passenger’s SRS frontal
sory under the front passenger’s the seatback” �1-5.
airbag even when the driver’s SRS frontal
– CONTINUED –

(86,1)
to your SUBARU dealer. ! Occupant detection system

S01AH0209
NOTE
The front passenger’s SRS side airbag
and SRS curtain airbag are not con-
trolled by the SUBARU advanced fron-
tal airbag system.
! Passenger’s frontal airbag ON and
OFF indicators
S01AH0203
SRS airbag system warning light

If the seatbelt buckle switch and/or front 1) Occupant detection system sensors
passenger’s occupant detection system
have failed, the SRS airbag system warn- The occupant detection system sensors
ing light will illuminate. If the SRS airbag are installed between the seat and seat
system warning light illuminates, immedi- rails, and monitor the physique and pos-
ately stop the vehicle in a safe place, and ture of the front passenger. Using this
consult a SUBARU dealer. Unless a information, the occupant detection sys-
technician checks and repairs the system tem determines whether the front passen-
as needed, the seatbelt pretensioners ger’s SRS frontal airbag should be de-
and/or the SRS airbag may not operate : Front passenger’s frontal airbag ON ployed or not.
indicator
properly in the event of a collision, which
could result in serious injury or death.
: Front passenger’s frontal airbag OFF WARNING
indicator
If your vehicle has sustained impact, this Do not kick the front passenger seat
may affect the proper function of the Refer to “Front passenger’s frontal airbag
ON and OFF indicators” �3-15. or subject it to severe impact. Other-
SUBARU advanced frontal airbag system. wise, the SRS airbag system warn-
Have your vehicle inspected at your ing light may illuminate to indicate a
SUBARU dealer. Do not use the front malfunction of the front passenger
passenger’s seat while driving the vehicle occupant detection system. In this

(87,1)
case, contact your SUBARU dealer 1

immediately.
CAUTION
Electrical devices, such as cell
phones, laptops, portable music
players, or electronic games, espe-
cially when connected to the acces-
sory power outlet and placed on the
front passenger’s seat or used by
the person sitting in the front pas-
senger’s seat, may affect the opera- SRS airbag system warning light : Front passenger’s frontal airbag ON
tion of the occupant detection sys- indicator
If the front passenger’s seat cushion is
tem. If either of the following situa- : Front passenger’s frontal airbag OFF
wet, this may adversely affect the ability of indicator
tions occurs when using an electro-
the system to determine deployment.
nic device in the vehicle, at first try If the front passenger’s frontal airbag ON
Wipe off liquid from the seat, let the seat
to relocate that device to avoid it and OFF indicators do not work properly
dry naturally and then check the SRS
creating any interference. even when the front passenger’s seat is
airbag system warning light.
. The SRS airbag system warning dry, do not allow anyone to sit on the front
light illuminates. passenger’s seat and have the occupant
. The front passenger’s frontal air- detection system checked by your
bag ON and OFF indicators oper- SUBARU dealer.
ate erratically.
If the device continues to cause
interference, the use of that device
in the vehicle should be discontin-
ued.
– CONTINUED –

(88,1)
! Conditions in which front passen- front passenger’s SRS frontal airbag

ger’s SRS frontal airbag is not deploy. REAR seats are the safest
activated place for children.
S01AH0204
The front passenger’s SRS frontal airbag
will not be activated when any of the
following conditions are met regarding CAUTION
the front passenger’s seat: When the front passenger’s seat is
. The seat is empty. occupied by an infant in an appro-
. The seat is equipped with an appropriate child restraint system, ob-
priate child restraint system and an infant serve the following precautions.
or a child is restrained in it. (See WARN- Failure to do so may interfere with
ING that follows.) the proper operation of the occupant
: Front passenger’s frontal airbag ON . The front passenger’s occupant detec- detection system, activating the
indicator tion system is malfunctioning. front passenger’s SRS frontal airbag
: Front passenger’s frontal airbag OFF even though that seat is occupied by
indicator WARNING the infant in the child restraint
Also, if luggage or electronic devices are system.
NEVER INSTALL A CHILD RE-
placed on the front passenger’s seat, this . Do not place any article (includ-
STRAINT SYSTEM IN THE FRONT
may adversely affect the ability of the ing electronic devices) on the
SEAT EVEN IF THE FRONT PASSEN-
system to determine deployment. This seat other than the infant in the
GER’S SRS FRONTAL AIRBAG IS
may prevent the front passenger’s frontal child restraint system.
DEACTIVATED. Be sure to install it in
airbag ON and OFF indicators from work- the REAR seat in a correct manner. . Do not place more than one infant
ing properly. Check that the indicators Also, it is strongly recommended in the child restraint system.
work properly. that any forward facing child seat or
When the OFF indicator turns off and the booster seat be installed in the
ON indicator illuminates, the front passen- REAR seat, and that even children
ger’s frontal airbag may deploy during a who have outgrown a child restraint
collision. Remove luggage and electronic system be also seated in the REAR
devices from the front passenger’s seat. seat. This is because children sitting
in the front passenger’s seat may be
killed or severely injured should the

(89,1)
! If the front passenger’s frontal system. depending on the occupant’s seating

airbag ON indicator illuminates posture. Children should always wear a
1
4. Turn the ignition switch to the “ON”
and the OFF indicator turns off position and make sure that the front seatbelt when sitting in the seat irre-
even when an infant or a small passenger’s frontal airbag ON indicator spective of whether the airbag is deac-
child is in a child restraint sys- turns off and the OFF indicator illuminates. tivated or activated. If the front passen-
tem (including booster seat) ger’s SRS frontal airbag is activated
S01AH020401
If still the ON indicator remains illuminated (the ON indicator remains illuminated
while the OFF indicator turns off, take the while the OFF indicator turns off), take
following actions. the following action.
. Ensure that no article is placed on the . Ensure that no article is placed on
seat other than the child restraint system the seat other than the occupant.
and the child occupant. If the ON indicator still remains illumi-
. Ensure that the backward-forward po- nated while the OFF indicator turns off
sition and seatback of front passenger’s despite the fact that the actions noted
seat are locked into place securely by above have been taken, seat the child/
moving the seat back and forth. small adult in the rear seat and imme-
diately contact your SUBARU dealer for
If the ON indicator still remains illuminated
an inspection. Even if the system has
while the OFF indicator turns off after
: Front passenger’s frontal airbag ON
passed the dealer inspection, it is
taking relevant corrective actions de-
indicator recommended that on subsequent trips
scribed above, relocate the child restraint
: Front passenger’s frontal airbag OFF the child/small adult always take the
system to the rear seat and immediately
indicator rear seat.
contact your SUBARU dealer for an
1. Turn the ignition switch to the “LOCK”/ inspection. Children who have outgrown a child
“OFF” position. restraint system should always wear the
2. Remove the child restraint system from
NOTE seatbelt irrespective of whether the airbag
the seat. When a child who has outgrown a child is deactivated or activated.
restraint system or a small adult is
3. By referring to the child restraint
seated in the front passenger’s seat,
manufacturer’s recommendations as well
the SUBARU advanced frontal airbag
as the child restraint system installation
system may or may not activate the
procedures in “Child restraint systems”
front passenger’s SRS frontal airbag
�1-26, correctly install the child restraint
– CONTINUED –

(90,1)
! Conditions in which front passen- ! If the passenger’s frontal airbag 3. Turn the ignition switch to the “ON”
ger’s SRS frontal airbag is activated OFF indicator illuminates and the position.
S01AH0205
The front passenger’s SRS frontal airbag ON indicator turns off even when
the front passenger’s seat is If the OFF indicator remains illuminated
will be activated for deployment upon while the ON indicator remains off, take the
impact when any of the following condi- occupied by an adult
S01AH020501 following actions.
tions are met regarding the front passen- 1. Turn the ignition switch to the “LOCK”/
ger’s seat. “OFF” position.
. When the seat is occupied by an adult. 2. Make sure that the front passenger
. When certain items (e.g. jug of water) does not use a blanket, seat cushion, seat
are placed on the seat. cover, seat heater or massager, etc.
3. If wearing excessive layers of clothing,
the front passenger should remove any
unnecessary items before sitting in the
front passenger’s seat, or should sit in a
rear seat.
position and wait 6 seconds to allow the
: Front passenger’s frontal airbag ON system to complete self-checking. Follow-
indicator ing the system check, both indicators turn
: Front passenger’s frontal airbag OFF off for 2 seconds. Now, the ON indicator
indicator should illuminate while the OFF indicator
This can be caused by the adult incorrectly remains off.
sitting in the front passenger’s seat.
If the OFF indicator still remains illumi-
1. Turn the ignition switch to the “LOCK”/ nated while the ON indicator remains off,
“OFF” position. ask the occupant to move to the rear seat
2. Ask the front passenger to set the and immediately contact your SUBARU
seatback to the upright position, sit up dealer for an inspection.
straight in the center of the seat cushion,
correctly fasten the seatbelt, position his/
her legs out forward, and adjust the seat to
the rearmost position.

(91,1)
! Operation The SRS airbags can function only when

S01AH0207
the ignition switch is in the “ON” position.
1
The SUBARU advanced frontal airbag
system is designed to determine the
activation or deactivation condition of the
front passenger’s SRS frontal airbag de-
pending on the characteristic of item(s) or
person on the front passenger’s seat
monitored by the front passenger’s occu-
pant detection system sensor. For this
reason, only the driver’s SRS frontal
airbag may deploy in the event of a
collision, but this does not mean failure of
the system.
If the following sensors detect a predeter-
mined amount of force during a frontal
collision, the control module sends signals
to the airbag module(s) (only driver’s
module or both driver’s and front passen-
ger’s modules) instructing the module(s) to
inflate the SRS frontal airbag(s).
. The front sub sensors
. The impact sensors in the airbag
control module
On the driver’s side, the SRS knee airbag
A) Driver’s side also inflates with the SRS frontal airbag.
B) Passenger’s side
1) SRS AIRBAGs deploy as soon as a collision occurs.
2) After deployment, SRS AIRBAGs start to deflate immediately so that the driver’s vision is not
obstructed.
– CONTINUED –

(92,1)
The driver’s and front passenger’s SRS CAUTION would not protect the occupant in those
frontal airbags use dual stage inflators. situations.
The two inflators of each airbag are Do not touch the SRS airbag system
triggered either sequentially or simulta- SRS airbag deployment depends on the
components around the steering
neously, depending on the severity of level of force experienced in the passen-
wheel and dashboard with bare
impact, in the case of the driver’s SRS ger compartment during a collision. That
hands right after deployment. Doing
frontal airbag and depending on the level differs from one type of collision to
so can cause burns because the
severity of impact and the characteristic another, and it may have no bearing on the
components can be very hot as a
of item(s) or person on the seat in the case visible damage done to the vehicle itself.
result of deployment.
of the front passenger’s SRS frontal air- ! Example of accident in which the
bag. driver’s/driver’s and front pas-
! Example of the type of accident
! After deployment S01AH0211 senger’s SRS frontal airbag(s)
S01AH0210 The driver’s SRS frontal airbag and front
After deployment, the SRS airbag imme- will most likely deploy
passenger’s SRS frontal airbag are de- S01AH021101
diately starts to deflate so that the driver’s signed as follows.
vision is not obstructed and the driver’s . To deploy in the event of an accident
ability to maintain control of the vehicle is involving a moderate to severe frontal
not impaired. The time required from collision
detecting impact to the deflation of the . To function on a one-time-only basis
SRS airbag after deployment is shorter
than the blink of an eye. The driver’s SRS frontal airbag and front
Both when only the driver’s SRS frontal passenger’s SRS frontal airbag are not
airbag deploys and the driver’s and front designed as follows.
passenger’s SRS frontal airbags deploy, . To deploy in most lesser frontal im-
the driver’s and front passenger’s seatbelt pacts*1
pretensioners operate at the same time. . To deploy in most side or rear impacts
or in most rollover accidents*2
When the SRS airbag deploys, a sudden, A head-on collision against a thick con-
*1: Because the necessary protection can be
fairly loud inflation noise will be heard and crete wall at a vehicle speed of 12 to 19
achieved by the seatbelt alone. mph (20 to 30 km/h) or higher activates
some smoke will be released. These
occurrences are a normal result of the *2: Because deployment of only the driver’s only the driver’s SRS frontal airbag or both
deployment. This smoke does not indicate SRS frontal airbag or both the driver’s and driver’s and front passenger’s SRS frontal
a fire in the vehicle. front passenger’s SRS frontal airbags airbags. The airbag(s) will also be acti-

(93,1)
vated when the vehicle is exposed to a ! Examples of the types of acci- Only the driver’s SRS frontal airbag or both
frontal impact similar in fashion and driver’s and front passenger’s SRS frontal
1
dents in which it is possible that
magnitude to the collision described the driver’s/driver’s and front airbags may be activated when the vehicle
above. passenger’s SRS frontal sustains a hard impact in the undercar-
airbag(s) will deploy riage area from the road surface (such as
S01AH021102 when the vehicle plunges into a deep ditch,
is severely impacted or knocked hard
against an obstacle on the road such as
a curb).
– CONTINUED –

(94,1)
1) The vehicle strikes an object, such as a

! Examples of the types of accidents in which deployment of the driver’s/ telephone pole or sign pole.
driver’s and front passenger’s SRS frontal airbag(s) is unlikely to occur 2) The vehicle slides under the load bed of a
truck.
S01AH021103
3) The vehicle sustains an oblique offset
frontal impact.
4) The vehicle sustains an offset frontal
collision.
5) The vehicle strikes an object that can
move or deform, such as a parked
vehicle.
There are many types of collisions which
might not necessarily require deployment
of driver’s/driver’s and front passenger’s
SRS frontal airbag(s). In the event of
accidents like those illustrated, the dri-
ver’s/driver’s and front passenger’s SRS
frontal airbag(s) may not deploy depend-
ing on the level of accident forces involved.

(95,1)
! Examples of the types of acci- frontal airbags are not designed to deploy once either or both of the driver’s and front
in most of the following cases. passenger’s SRS frontal airbags is/are
1
dents in which the driver’s/dri-
ver’s and front passenger’s SRS . If the vehicle is struck from the side or activated on the first impact, it/they will
frontal airbag(s) are not de- from behind. not be activated on the second impact.
signed to deploy in most cases . If the vehicle rolls onto its side or roof. & SRS side airbag and SRS
S01AH021104
. If the vehicle is involved in a low-speed curtain airbag
frontal collision. S01AH03
! SRS side airbag

1) First impact S01AH0302
2) Second impact The SRS side airbag is stored in the door

side of each front seat seatback, which
In an accident where the vehicle is bears an “SRS AIRBAG” label.
impacted more than once, the driver’s
and/or front passenger’s SRS frontal In a moderate to severe side impact
airbag(s) will deploy only once on the first collision, the SRS side airbag on the
impact. impacted side of the vehicle deploys
between the occupant and the door panel
Example: In the case of a double collision, and supplements the seatbelt by reducing
first with another vehicle, then against a the impact on the occupant’s chest and
The driver’s and front passenger’s SRS concrete wall in immediate succession, waist. The SRS side airbag operates only
– CONTINUED –

(96,1)
for front seat occupants. ! Operation

S01AH0301
! SRS curtain airbag The SRS side airbag and SRS curtain
S01AH0303
Your vehicle is equipped with a SUBARU airbag can function only when the ignition
SRS curtain airbag system that complies switch is in the “ON” position.
with the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety The following airbags deploy indepen-
Standard (FMVSS) No. 226. dently of each other since each has its
The SRS curtain airbag on each side of the own impact sensor.
cabin is stored in the roof side (between . Driver’s SRS side airbag
the front pillar and a point over the rear
. Front passenger’s SRS side airbag
seat). An “SRS AIRBAG” mark is located
at the top of each center pillar. . SRS curtain airbag (right-hand side)
In a moderate to severe side impact . SRS curtain airbag (left-hand side)
collision, the SRS curtain airbag on the Therefore, they may not both deploy in the
impacted side of the vehicle deploys same accident. Also, the SRS side airbag
between the occupant and the side win- and SRS curtain airbag deploys indepen-
dow and supplements the seatbelt by dently of the driver’s and front passenger’s
reducing the impact on the occupant’s SRS frontal airbags in the steering wheel
head. and instrument panel.
In a rollover, SRS curtain airbags on both
sides of the vehicle deploy between the An impact sensor, which senses impact
occupant and the side window and supple- force, is located in each of the following
ment the seatbelt by reducing the impact to locations.
the occupant’s head. . In the left and right front doors
. In the left and right center pillars
In an offset frontal collision, SRS curtain
airbags on both sides of the vehicle deploy . In the left and right rear wheel houses
between the occupant and the side win- . Under the rear center seat
dow and supplement the seatbelt by A rollover sensor is also located inside the
reducing the impact to the occupant’s airbag control module.
head and chest.

(97,1)
! In cases of rollover accident or side collisions, the following components will operate simultaneously 1
S01AH0306
SRS side airbags SRS curtain airbags Seatbelt pretensioner

(shoulder belt pretensioner only)
Impact sensors affected
Impacted side Non-impacted Impacted side Non-impacted Impacted side Non-impacted
side side side
Impact sensor in
Both of the sen- front doors
sors together * — * — * —
sense an impact Impact sensor
force under rear cen-
ter seat
Impact sensor in
Both of the sen- center pillars
sors together * — * — — —
sense an impact Impact sensor
ter seat
Impact sensor in
Both of the sen- rear wheel
sors together houses
sense an impact — — * — — —
Impact sensor
ter seat
Rollover sensor in airbag control — — * * * *
module
*: Activated
—: Not activated
– CONTINUED –

(98,1)
! After deployment After deployment, do not touch any experienced in the passenger compart-
S01AH0304
After the deployment, the SRS side airbag part of the SRS curtain airbag sys- ment during a side impact collision. That
immediately starts to deflate. The time tem (from the front pillar to the part level differs from one type of collision to
required from detection of an impact to of the roof side over the rear seat). another, and it may have no bearing on the
deflation of an SRS side airbag after Doing so can cause burns because visible damage done to the vehicle itself.
deployment is shorter than the blink of an the components can be very hot as a
! Example of the type of accident in
eye. result of deployment.
which the SRS side airbag will
The SRS curtain airbag remains inflated most likely deploy
! Example of the type of accident S01AH030501
for a while following deployment then S01AH0305
slowly deflates. The SRS side airbag and SRS curtain
airbag are designed as follows:
The SRS side airbag and SRS curtain . To deploy in the event of an accident
airbag deploy even when no one occupies involving a moderate to severe side impact
the seat on the side on which an impact is collision
applied. . To function on a one-time-only basis
When the SRS side airbag and SRS The SRS side airbag and SRS curtain
curtain airbag deploy, a sudden, fairly loud airbag are not designed to deploy in the
inflation noise will be heard and some following cases:
smoke will be released. These occur-
rences are a normal result of the deploy- . In most lesser side impact
ment. This smoke does not indicate a fire . In most frontal or most rear impacts
in the vehicle. (because the SRS side airbag and SRS 1) A severe side impact near the front seat.
curtain airbag deployment would not pro-
CAUTION tect the occupant in those situations)
Do not touch the SRS side airbag The SRS curtain airbags are also de-
system components around the signed to deploy when the vehicle is in an
front seat seatback with bare hands extremely inclined state such as during a
right after deployment. Doing so can rollover. They are not designed to deploy in
cause burns because the compo- most lesser inclined state.
nents can be very hot as a result of SRS side airbag and SRS curtain airbag
deployment. deployment depend on the level of force

(99,1)
1) The vehicle is involved in a severe side
! Examples of the types of accidents in which the SRS curtain airbag will most impact near the front seat or the rear seat. 1
likely deploy 2) The vehicle rolls onto its side or the roof.
S01AH030502
3) The angle of vehicle tip-up is marginal or
the skidding vehicle’s tires hit a curbstone
laterally.
4) An offset frontal collision that is severe
enough to deploy the front airbag.
– CONTINUED –

(100,1)
1) Hitting a curb, edge of pavement or hard

! Examples of the types of accidents in which it is possible that the SRS side surface
airbag and the SRS curtain airbag will deploy 2) Falling into or jumping over a deep hole
S01AH030503
3) Landing hard or vehicle falling
It is possible that the SRS side and curtain
airbags will deploy if a serious impact
occurs to the underside of your vehicle.
Some examples are shown in the illustra-
tion.

(101,1)
1) The vehicle is involved in an oblique side-
! Examples of the types of accidents in which the SRS side airbag is unlikely to on impact. 1
deploy 2) The vehicle is involved in a side-on
impact in an area outside the vicinity of
S01AH030504
the passenger compartment.
3) The vehicle strikes a telephone pole or
similar object.
4) The vehicle is involved in a side-on
impact from a motorcycle.
5) The vehicle rolls onto its side or the roof.
might not necessarily require SRS side
airbag deployment. In the event of acci-
dents like those illustrated, the SRS side
airbag may not deploy depending on the
level of accident forces involved.
– CONTINUED –

(102,1)
1) The vehicle is involved in an oblique side-

! Examples of the types of accidents in which the SRS curtain airbag is unlikely on impact.
to deploy 2) The vehicle is involved in a side-on
impact in an area outside the vicinity of
S01AH030505
the passenger compartment.
3) The vehicle strikes a telephone pole or
similar object.
4) The vehicle is involved in a side-on
impact from a motorcycle.
might not necessarily require SRS curtain
airbag deployment. In the event of acci-
dents like those illustrated, the SRS
curtain airbag may not deploy depending
on the level of accident forces involved.

(103,1)
! Examples of the types of acci- ary). same direction, once the SRS side airbag
2) The vehicle is struck from behind. and SRS curtain airbag are activated on
1
dents in which the SRS side
3) The vehicle pitches end over end. the first impact, they will not be activated
airbag and SRS curtain airbag
are not designed to deploy in In the event of accidents like those on the second.
most cases illustrated, the SRS side airbag and SRS
S01AH030506
curtain airbag are not designed to deploy & SRS airbag system monitors
S01AH04
in most cases.
SRS airbag system warning light

1) First impact A diagnostic system continually monitors
2) Second impact the readiness of the SRS airbag system
A) SRS curtain airbag (including front seatbelt pretensioners)
B) SRS side airbag
with the ignition switch in the “ON” position.
In an accident where the vehicle is struck The SRS airbag system warning light will
from the side more than once, the SRS show normal system operation by illumi-
side airbag and SRS curtain airbag deploy nating for approximately 6 seconds when
only once on the first impact. the ignition switch is turned to the “ON”
position.
Example: In the case of a double side
impact collision, first with one vehicle and
1) The vehicle is involved in frontal collision immediately followed by another from the
with another vehicle (moving or station-
– CONTINUED –

(104,1)
The following components are monitored WARNING . The SRS airbag has no user-
by the indicator: serviceable parts. Do not use
. Front sub sensor If the warning light exhibits any of electrical test equipment on any
. Airbag control module (including im- the following conditions, immedi- circuit related to the SRS airbag
pact sensor and rollover sensor) ately stop the vehicle in a safe place, system. For required servicing of
. Frontal airbag module and consult a SUBARU dealer. Un- the SRS airbag, consult your
– Driver’s side less a technician checks and repairs nearest SUBARU dealer. Tamper-
the system as needed, the seatbelt ing with or disconnecting the
– Front passenger’s side
pretensioners and/or the SRS airbag system’s wiring could result in
. Knee airbag module (driver’s side) accidental inflation of the SRS
will not operate properly in the event
. Side airbag sensor of a collision, which may result in airbag or could make the system
. Front door impact sensor injury. inoperative, which may result in
. Side airbag module . Flashing or flickering of the warn- serious injury.
. Curtain airbag sensor ing light
. Curtain airbag module . No illumination of the warning CAUTION
. Satellite safing sensor (under the rear light when the ignition switch is
center seat) first turned to the “ON” position If you need service or repair in areas
. Seatbelt pretensioner (driver’s side) . Continuous illumination of the indicated in the following list, have
. Seatbelt pretensioner and adaptive warning light the work performed by an author-
force limiter (front passenger’s side) ized SUBARU dealer. The SRS air-
. Illumination of the warning light bag control module, impact sensors
. Lap belt pretensioner (front passen- while driving
ger’s side) and airbag modules are stored in
. Seatbelt buckle switch (front passen- these areas.
ger’s side) & SRS airbag system servicing . Under the center of the instru-
. Front passenger’s occupant detection S01AH05 ment panel
system sensor WARNING . On both the right and left sides at
. Front passenger’s occupant detection the front of the vehicle
control module . When discarding an airbag mod- . Steering wheel and column and
. Front passenger’s frontal airbag ON ule or scrapping the entire vehi- nearby areas
and OFF indicator cle damaged by a collision, con-
sult your SUBARU dealer. . Bottom of the steering column
. All related wiring and nearby areas

(105,1)
. Top of the dashboard on front frontal airbag, or either roof side (from wheels
passenger’s side and nearby the front pillar to a point over the rear
1
. Attachment of additional trim ma-
areas seat) is scratched, cracked, or other- terials to the dashboard
. Each front seat and nearby area wise damaged.
. The center pillar, front door, rear . Installation of custom seats
. Inside each center pillar wheel house or rear sub frame, or an . Replacement of seat fabric or
. Inside each front door area near these parts, was involved in leather
. In each roof side (from the front an accident in which the SRS side . Installation of additional fabric or
pillar to a point over the rear seat) airbag and SRS curtain airbag did not leather on the front seat
deploy.
. Between the rear seat cushion . Attachment of a hands-free mi-
. The fabric or leather of either front
and rear wheel house on each crophone or any other accessory
seatback is cut, frayed, or otherwise
side to a front pillar, a center pillar, a
damaged.
. Under the rear center seat rear pillar, the windshield, a side
. The rear part of the vehicle was
window, an assist grip, or any
involved in an accident in which no
In the event that the SRS airbag is other cabin surface that would be
SRS airbag was deployed.
deployed, replacement of the system near a deploying SRS curtain
should be performed only by an author- airbag.
ized SUBARU dealer. When the compo- & Precautions against vehicle . Installation of additional electri-
nents of the SRS airbag system are modification cal/electronic equipment such as
S01AH06
replaced, use only genuine SUBARU a mobile two-way radio on or near
parts. WARNING the SRS airbag system compo-
nents and/or wiring is not advi-
NOTE To avoid accidental activation of the sable. This could interfere with
In the following cases, contact your system or rendering the system proper operation of the SRS air-
SUBARU dealer as soon as possible. inoperative, which may result in bag system.
. The front part of the vehicle was serious injury, no modifications
involved in an accident in which only should be made to any components
the driver’s SRS frontal airbag or both or wiring of the SRS airbag system. CAUTION
driver’s and front passenger’s SRS This includes following modifica-
frontal airbags did not deploy. tions. Do not perform any of the following
. The pad of the steering wheel, the modifications. Such modifications
. Installation of custom steering can interfere with proper operation
cover over the front passenger’s SRS
– CONTINUED –

(106,1)
of the SRS airbag system. & How to contact the vehicle <Guam>
. Attachment of any equipment manufacturer concerning Shen’s Corporation dba Prestige Automo-
(bush bar, winches, snow plow, modifications for persons biles
skid plate, etc.) other than genu- with disabilities that may af- 491 East Marine Corps Drive,
ine SUBARU accessory parts to fect the advanced airbag Dededo, Guam 96929
the front end. system 671-633-2698
S01AH15
. Modification of the suspension Changing or moving any parts of the front <Puerto Rico>
system or front end structure. seats, rear seat, seatbelts, front bumper, Trebol Motors
. Installation of a tire of different front side frame, radiator panel, instrument 296 Marginal JF Kennedy, San Juan,
size and construction from the panel, combination meter, steering wheel, Puerto Rico
tires specified on the vehicle steering column, tire, suspension or floor 787-793-2828
placard attached to the driver’s panel can affect the operation of the
door pillar or specified for indivi- SUBARU advanced airbag system. If you <Canada>
dual vehicle models in this Own- have any questions, you may contact the Subaru Canada, Inc.
er’s Manual. following SUBARU distributors. Consumer Support Department
. Attachment of any equipment <Continental U.S., Alaska and the District 560 Suffolk Court, Mississauga, Ontario
(side steps or side sill protectors, of Columbia> L5R 4J7
etc.) other than genuine SUBARU 1-800-894-4212
Subaru of America, Inc.
accessory parts to the side body.
Customer Advocacy Department There are currently no SUBARU distribu-
Always consult your SUBARU dealer if you One Subaru Drive tors in any other U.S. territories. If you are
want to install any accessory parts on your P.O. Box 9103 in such an area, please contact the
vehicle. Camden, NJ 08101-9877 SUBARU distributor or dealer from which
1-800-SUBARU3 (1-800-782-2783) you bought your vehicle.
<Hawaii>
Subaru Hawaii
2850-A Pukoloa St.,
Honolulu, HI 96819
877-215-0338

(109,1)
Keys and doors

Keys ......................................................................... 2-2 Replacing the battery............................................ 2-19
S02
Key number plate................................................... 2-2 Replacing lost transmitters ................................... 2-19
Keyless access with push-button start system Certification for remote keyless entry system........ 2-19
Door locks............................................................. 2-20 2
(if equipped) ......................................................... 2-2
Safety precautions ................................................. 2-3 Locking and unlocking from the outside ............... 2-20
Locking and unlocking by holding the access Locking and unlocking from the inside ................. 2-22
key fob ................................................................ 2-6 Automatic door locking/unlocking......................... 2-22
Unlock using PIN Code Access ............................. 2-10 Key lock-in prevention function ............................ 2-23
Power saving function .......................................... 2-11 Battery drainage prevention function .................... 2-23
Power saving function of access key fob .............. 2-12 Alarm system ........................................................ 2-24
Disabling keyless access function......................... 2-12 Alarm system operation........................................ 2-24
Selecting audible signal operation......................... 2-13 Arming the system ............................................... 2-25
Warning chimes and warning indicator.................. 2-13 Disarming the system ........................................... 2-26
When access key fob does not operate properly ... 2-14 Alarm system setting............................................ 2-26
Replacing battery of access key fob ...................... 2-14 If you have accidentally triggered the alarm
Replacing access key fob ..................................... 2-14 system .............................................................. 2-26
Certification for keyless access with push-button Valet mode ........................................................... 2-27
start system........................................................ 2-14 Child safety locks ................................................. 2-27
Immobilizer ............................................................ 2-15 Windows................................................................ 2-27
Security indicator light .......................................... 2-15 Power window operation....................................... 2-28
Key replacement ................................................... 2-15 Initialization of power window with one-touch
Certification for immobilizer system ...................... 2-16 auto up/down function ....................................... 2-30
Remote keyless entry system.............................. 2-17 Rear gate ............................................................... 2-30
Locking the doors................................................. 2-18 Lock/unlock.......................................................... 2-31
Unlocking the doors.............................................. 2-18 Open/close ........................................................... 2-31
Unlocking the rear gate ......................................... 2-18 Moonroof (if equipped)......................................... 2-32
Vehicle finder function .......................................... 2-18 Moonroof switches ............................................... 2-32
Sounding a panic alarm ........................................ 2-19 Sunshade ............................................................. 2-33
Setting audible signal operation (models
without “keyless access with push-button start
system”) ............................................................. 2-19

(110,1)
2-2 Keys and doors/Keys
Keys NOTE Keyless access with push-

S02AA
Locking/unlocking using the remote button start system (if
NOTE keyless entry system can also be con- equipped)
For models with “keyless access with trolled with the buttons on the key. For S02AP
push-button start system”, refer to detailed information, refer to “Remote The following access key fobs are pro-
“Keyless access with push-button start keyless entry system” �2-17. vided with the vehicle.
system” �2-2.
The following keys are provided with the CAUTION
vehicle.
Do not attach a large key holder or
key case to either key. If it bangs
against your knees while you are
driving, it could turn the ignition
switch from the “ON” position to
the “ACC” or “LOCK” position,
thereby stopping the engine.
& Key number plate

S02AA01
The key number is stamped on the key 1) Access key fob
number plate attached to the key set. Write 2) Key number plate
down the key number and keep it in
The keyless access with push-button start
1) Master key another safe place, not in the vehicle. This
system allows you to perform the following
2) Sub key number is needed to make a replacement
functions when you are carrying the
3) Key number plate key if you lose your key or lock it inside the
access key fob.
vehicle. Refer to “Key replacement” �2-
A key can be used in the following 15. . Locking and unlocking of the doors and
locations. rear gate. Refer to “Locking and unlocking
. Ignition switch by holding the access key fob” �2-6.
. Driver’s door . Starting and stopping the engine. For
. Glove box detailed information, refer to “Starting and
stopping engine (models with push-button

(111,1)
Keys and doors/Keyless access with push-button start system 2-3
start system)” �7-12. & Safety precautions

S02AP11
. Arming and disarming the alarm sys-
tem. For detailed information, refer to WARNING
“Alarm system” �2-24. 2
If you wear an implanted pacemaker
NOTE or an implanted defibrillator, stay at
. Locking/unlocking using the remote least 8.7 in (22 cm) away from the
keyless entry system can also be con- transmitting antennas installed on
trolled with the buttons on the access the vehicle.
key fob. For detailed information, refer The radio waves from the transmit-
to “Remote keyless entry system” �2- ting antennas on the vehicle could
17. adversely affect the operation of
. Carefully store the key number plate implanted pacemakers and im-
supplied with the access key fob. It is 1) Release button planted defibrillators.
necessary for vehicle repair and addi- 2) Emergency key
tional registration of access key fobs. If you wear electronic medical equip-
While pressing the release button of the ment other than an implanted pace-
For details, refer to “Key replacement” access key fob, take out the emergency
�2-15. maker or an implanted defibrillator,
key. before using the keyless access
An emergency key is attached to each The emergency key is used for the follow- with push-button start system, refer
access key fob. ing operations. to “Radio waves used for the key-
. Locking and unlocking the driver’s door less access with push-button start
. Locking and unlocking the glove box system” mentioned later, and con-
tact the electronic medical equip-
NOTE ment manufacturer for more infor-
The glove box can be kept locked when mation. The radio waves from the
you leave your vehicle and the access transmitting antennas on the vehicle
key fob (with the emergency key re- could adversely affect the operation
moved) at a parking facility. of the electronic medical equipment.
“Radio waves used for the keyless

access with push-button start sys-
tem”
– CONTINUED –

(112,1)
2-4 Keys and doors/Keyless access with push-button start system
. The keyless access with push- CAUTION

button start system uses radio
waves of the following fre- . Never leave or store the access
quency* in addition to the radio key fob inside the vehicle or
waves used for the remote key- within 6.6 ft (2 m) around the
less entry system. The radio vehicle (e.g., in the garage). The
waves are periodically output access key fob may be locked
from the antennas installed on inside the vehicle, or the battery
the vehicle as shown in the may discharge rapidly. Note that
following illustrations. the push-button ignition switch
* Radio frequency: 134 kHz may not turn on in some cases
depending on the location of the
access key fob.
. The access key fob contains
electronic components. Observe
the following precautions to pre-
vent malfunctions.
– It is recommended to have the
access key battery replaced at
an authorized SUBARU dealer
to avoid the risk of damage.
– Do not get the access key fob
wet. If the access key fob gets
wet, wipe it off immediately
and let it dry completely.
1) Antennas
– Do not apply strong impacts to
the access key fob.
– Never leave the access key
fob in direct sunlight or any-
where that may become hot,
such as on the dashboard. It

(113,1)
may damage the battery or the operation of the airplane. and power transmission lines
cause circuit malfunctions. When carrying the access key – When products that transmit
– Do not wash the access key fob in a bag, take measures to radio waves are used, such as an
prevent the buttons from being access key fob or a remote trans- 2
fob in an ultrasonic washer.
pressed accidentally. mitter key of another vehicle
– Do not leave the access key
– When carrying the access key fob
fob in humid or dusty loca-
of your vehicle together with the
tions. Doing so may cause NOTE access key fob or the remote trans-
malfunctions. . The operational/non-operational mitter of another vehicle
– Keep the access key fob away setting for the keyless access function – When the access key fob is
from magnetic sources. can be changed. For the setting proce- placed near wireless communica-
– Do not leave the access key dure, refer to “Disabling keyless action equipment such as a cell phone
fob near a personal computer cess function” �2-12. – When the access key fob is
or home electrical appliance. . For detailed information about the placed near a metallic object
operation method for the push-button – When metallic accessories are
– Do not leave the access key
ignition switch while the keyless ac- attached to the access key fob
fob near a battery charger or
cess function is switched to the non-
any electrical accessories. – When carrying the access key fob
operational mode, refer to “Access key
– Do not apply metallic window with electronic appliances such as a
fob – if access key fob does not operate
tint or attach metallic objects laptop computer
properly” �9-17.
to the windows. . The keyless access with push-but- – When the battery of the access
ton start system uses weak radio key fob is discharged
– Do not fit non genuine acces-
sories or parts. waves. The status of the access key . The access key fob is always com-
fob and environmental conditions may municating with the vehicle and is
. If the access key fob is dropped, continuously using the battery.
the integrated emergency key in- interfere with the communication be-
tween the access key fob and the Although the life of the battery varies
side may become loose. Be care- depending on the operating conditions,
ful not to lose the emergency key. vehicle under the following conditions,
and it may not be possible to lock or it is approximately 1 to 2 years. If the
. When traveling in an airplane, do unlock the doors or start the engine. battery becomes fully discharged, re-
not press the button of the ac- – When operating near a facility place it with a new one.
cess key fob. If any button of the where strong radio waves are trans- . If an access key fob is lost, it is
access key fob is pressed, radio mitted, such as a broadcast station recommended that all of the remaining
waves are emitted and may affect access key fobs be reregistered. For
– CONTINUED –

(114,1)
reregistration of an access key fob, – On the instrument panel ! Operating ranges

contact a SUBARU dealer. – On the floor S02AP2001
. For a spare access key fob, contact a – Inside the glove box
SUBARU dealer. – Inside the door trim pocket
. Up to 7 access key fobs can be – On the rear seat
registered for one vehicle. – In the cargo area
. Do not leave the access key fob in
the storage spaces inside the vehicle, If you do, the following situations
such as the door pocket, dashboard, may occur.
inside the corner of the cargo area. – The access key fob is mistakenly
Vibrations may damage the key fob or locked inside the vehicle.
turn on the switch, possibly resulting in – A false warning issues although
a lockout. no malfunction actually occurs.
. After the vehicle battery is dis- – No warning issues even when
charged or replaced, initialization of any malfunction occurs. 1) Antennas
the steering lock system may be re- 2) Operating range (approximately 16 to 32
quired to start the engine. In this case, in (40 to 80 cm))
perform the following procedure to & Locking and unlocking by
initialize the steering lock. holding the access key fob
S02AP20
(1) Turn the push-button ignition When the access key fob is carried within
switch to the “OFF” position. For the operating range, the doors and the rear
details, refer to “Switching power gate can be locked/unlocked just by
status” �3-7. touching the door handle.
(2) Open and close the driver’s
door. NOTE
(3) Wait for approximately 10 sec- The vehicle can also be locked/un-
onds. locked with the remote keyless entry
system. For details, refer to “Remote
When the steering is locked, the initi- keyless entry system” �2-17.
alization is completed.
. Do not leave the access key fob in 1) LED indicator
the following places.

(115,1)
When the access key fob is within either of function when the access key fob is . Unlock and lock the rear gate.
the operating ranges of the front doors, the inside the vehicle. However, depending
LED indicator on the access key fob on the status of the access key fob and NOTE
flashes. When the keyless access func- the environmental conditions, the ac- . It is not possible to lock the doors 2
tions are disabled, the LED indicator does cess key fob may be locked inside the and rear gate using the keyless access
not flash unless a button on the access key vehicle. Before locking the vehicle, function when the push-button ignition
fob is pressed. make sure that you have the access switch is in the “ACC” or “ON” position.
key fob. Refer to “Switching power status” �3-
NOTE . When the battery of the access key 7.
. If the access key fob is placed too fob is discharged, or when operating it . If the door handle is gripped with a
close to the vehicle body, the keyless in a location with strong radio waves or gloved hand, the door lock may not be
access functions may not operate noise (e.g., near a radio tower, power released.
properly. If they do not operate prop- plant, broadcast station or an area . If the door lock sensor is touched
erly, repeat the operation from further where wireless equipment is used), or three times or more repeatedly, the
away. while talking on a cell phone, the system will ignore the sensor opera-
. If the access key fob is placed near operating ranges may be reduced, or tion.
the ground or in an elevated location the keyless access function may not . When performing the locking proce-
from the ground, even if it is in the operate. dure too quickly, locking may not have
indicated operating range, the keyless In such a case, perform the procedure been completed. After performing the
access function may not operate prop- described in “Locking and unlocking” locking procedure, it is recommended
erly. �9-18. to pull the REAR door handle to confirm
. When the access key fob is within . The doors may lock or unlock when that the doors have been locked.
the operating range, it is possible for the car is being washed or exposed to a . If any of the doors (or the rear gate)
anyone, even someone who is not significant amount of water that con- are not fully closed, the following will
carrying the access key fob, to operate tacts the door handle while the key fob occur to alert you that the doors (or the
the keyless access function. Note that is still in the operating range. rear gate) are not properly closed.
the keyless access function can be – An electronic chirp sounds five
operated only by the door handle, door ! How to lock and unlock times.
S02AP2002
lock sensor, rear gate opener button or It is possible to perform the following – The hazard warning flashers
rear lock button in the operating range operations when you are carrying the flash five times.
in which the access key fob is detected. access key fob. . It is possible to lock the doors even
. It is not possible to lock the doors . Lock and unlock the doors. when one of the doors is open. After
and rear gate using the keyless access
– CONTINUED –

(116,1)
performing the locking procedure, ! Locking with the door lock sensor ! Locking with the rear lock button
close the opened door or rear gate to S02AP200201 S02AP200202
lock it.
. Within 3 seconds after locking the
doors and the rear gate by using the
keyless access function, it is not pos-
sible to unlock doors and/or the rear
gate by using the keyless access func-
tion.
. When locking, be sure to carry the
access key fob to prevent locking the
access key fob in the vehicle.
. The setting of the hazard warning
flasher operation and the volume of the
audible signal can be changed by your 1) Door lock sensor 1) Rear lock button
SUBARU dealer. Contact your SUBARU
dealer for details. Also, for models with Carry the access key fob, close all doors Carry the access key fob, close all doors
the combination meter display (color including the rear gate, and touch the door including the rear gate and press the rear
LCD), the setting of the hazard warning lock sensor on the door handle. All doors lock button. The rear gate and all doors will
flasher operation can be changed by including the rear gate will be locked. Also, be locked. Also, an electronic chirp will
operating the combination meter dis- an electronic chirp will sound once and the sound once and the hazard warning
play (color LCD). For details, refer to hazard warning flashers will flash once. flashers will flash once.
“Keyless Entry System” �3-41.

(117,1)
! Unlocking ! Unlocking rear gate ! Door unlock selection function

S02AP200203 S02AP200204 S02AP2003
When the door is unlocked using the
keyless access function, only the doors 2
that were set can be unlocked.
The settings can be changed with the
following methods.
. The setting can be changed by operat-
ing the combination meter display (color
LCD) (if equipped). Refer to “Keyless Entry
System” �3-41.
. The setting can be changed by a
SUBARU dealer.
Carry the access key fob, and grip the 1) Rear gate opener button
following door handle. Carry the access key fob, and press the
. The driver’s door handle: rear gate opener button. Either only the
Either only the driver’s door will unlock, or rear gate will unlock, or all doors will
all doors will unlock. unlock. Also, an electronic chirp will sound
. The front passenger’s door handle: twice and the hazard warning flashers will
All doors and rear gate will be unlocked. flash twice.
Also, an electronic chirp will sound twice

and the hazard warning flashers will flash
twice.
– CONTINUED –

(118,1)
& Unlock using PIN Code Ac- ! Preparation for registering a PIN ! Registration for a PIN code
S02AP2102
cess code
S02AP2101
For example, to register “32468” as the
S02AP21
When all doors including the rear gate are 1. Turn off the ignition switch. PIN code, perform the following proce-
locked, you can unlock the doors (includ- 2. Close all doors (including rear gate). dure.
ing rear gate) without a key by pressing the 3. Press and hold the “ ” button on the 1. Press the rear lock button three times.
rear lock button. access key fob. Then all doors (including 2. After a chirp sounds once, press the
rear gate) will be locked. rear lock button twice.
4. Keep the “ ” button pressed, and 3. After a chirp sounds once, press the
press the rear lock button within 5 seconds rear lock button four times.
after step 3. 4. After a chirp (ding) sounds once, press
5. Press and hold the rear lock button for the rear lock button six times.
more than 5 seconds. Confirm a chirp 5. After a chirp (ding) sounds once, press
sound. the rear lock button eight times.
6. Release the “ ” button and rear lock 6. Perform steps 1 to 5 again within
button. approximately 30 seconds after the chirp
7. Press the “ ” button on the access key starts sounding intermittently.
fob while the chirp sounds. 7. All doors will be unlocked and locked.
Then the chirp will stop and the prepara- Then the PIN code will be registered.
1) Rear lock button tion is complete.
NOTE
NOTE NOTE . Press the rear lock button ten times
PIN Code Access will be helpful if the Press the “ ” button within 30 seconds to enter “0”.
key fob is accidentally left in the of step 6 to end the preparation mode . Change the PIN code frequently to
vehicle. It is recommended that a 5- and move on to the registration stage. protect your vehicle from theft.
digit security code (PIN code) be regis- Unless the “ ” button is pressed within . If you have lent your vehicle to
tered. 30 seconds after step 6, the PIN code another person, confirm that the PIN
registration will be canceled. code has not been changed or deleted.
If the PIN code has been changed or
deleted, reregister a new PIN code.
. If you make an error during the
registration procedure, press the “ ”

(119,1)
or “ ” button on the access key fob. ! Unlocking Operate one of the following items to
Then, start over from the procedure S02AP2103
Perform steps 1 to 5 described in “Regis- recover the keyless access function:
described in “Preparation for register- tration for a PIN code”. – Unlock the doors by operating any
ing a PIN code”. procedure other than gripping the front 2
. To protect your vehicle from theft, NOTE passenger’s door handle.
you cannot register a string of the same . You cannot unlock by PIN Code – Lock the doors.
five numbers together, such as Access in the following cases. – Open a door and then close it.
“00000”, nor “12345” as a PIN code. – The access key fob is within the
. Do not register your vehicle license operating ranges. . Case 2: When the access key fob has
plate number or simple numbers such been left in the operating range for 10
– The ignition switch is in the
as “11122” or “12121” as a PIN code. minutes or longer while all doors are
“ACC” or “ON” position.
Doing so will increase the risk of locked.
vehicle theft. . If you make an operation error dur-
. When you try to register “22222”, the ing the unlocking procedure, start over Operate one of the following items to
registered PIN code will be deleted. You with the unlocking procedure after recover the keyless access function:
cannot unlock the doors by PIN Code waiting for 5 seconds or longer. – Unlock the doors by gripping the
Access until a new code is registered. . To protect your vehicle from theft, a door handle.
. After registering a new PIN code, buzzer will sound if incorrect PIN codes – Unlock the doors by pressing the
make sure that you can unlock the are entered five times continuously. If rear gate opener button.
doors using the PIN code. this occurs, you cannot unlock the – Lock the doors by touching the door
. The PIN code cannot be deleted doors by PIN Code Access for 5 lock sensor.
while the keyless access function is minutes. – Lock or unlock the doors by using
disabled by operating the access key the remote keyless entry system.
& Power saving function
fob. S02AP23 – Lock or unlock the doors by using
. Reregister the PIN code in the fol- The keyless access function will be dis- the power door locking switch.
lowing case. abled in the following cases to protect the – Open either of the front doors.
– When you forget the PIN code access key fob battery and the vehicle
– When you want to change the PIN battery.
code . Case 1: When the keyless access
function and the remote keyless entry
system have not been used for 2 weeks
or longer while all doors are locked.
– CONTINUED –

(120,1)
& Power saving function of ac- & Disabling keyless access ! Disabling functions
S02AP0701
cess key fob function
S02AP22 S02AP07 ! By operating the access key fob
This function stops the access key fob S02AP070102
from receiving signals and helps minimize WARNING If you have registered a PIN code for PIN
the battery consumption of the access key Code Access, you can disable the keyless
fob. If you wear an implanted pacemaker access function by operating the access
or an implanted defibrillator, per- key fob. For details about registering a PIN
1. Press the “ ” button twice while hold- code, refer to “Preparation for registering a
form the procedure described in
ing the “ ” button. PIN code” �2-10.
“By operating the driver’s door”
�2-13 to disable the keyless access 1. Open the driver’s door.
function. If you perform the proce- 2. Rotate the lock lever toward the lock
dure described in “By operating the position.
access key fob” �2-12, the opera-
tion of an implanted pacemaker or
implanted defibrillator may be af-
fected by the radio waves from the
transmitter antenna.
When the vehicle is not going to be used

for a long time, or when you choose not to
use the keyless access function, the key-
less access function can be disabled.
1) LED indicator
2. Confirm that the LED indicator blinks 4

NOTE
times to notify that the setting is complete. . The locking and unlocking function
by the remote keyless entry system is
When the access key fob is in the power 3. Press and hold the “ ” button and “ ”
not disabled.
save mode, the keyless access function button on the access key fob simulta-
. To start the engine while the func-
and push-button start system will not be neously for more than 5 seconds.
tions are disabled, perform the proce-
available.
dure described in “Starting engine” A chirp sound will be heard, and the
To cancel the power save mode, press one �9-18.
of the buttons on the access key fob. function will be disabled.

(121,1)
! By operating the driver’s door door once. – When disabling by operating the
S02AP070101
8. Within 5 seconds after step 7 is access key fob: A chirp will be
1. Sit in the driver’s seat, and close the heard.
performed, close the door.
door. 2
A chirp sound will be heard, and the & Selecting audible signal op-
functions will be disabled. eration
S02AP12
NOTE Using an electronic chirp, the system will
In steps 4 and 6, press the power door give you an audible signal when the doors
locking switch slowly. If the switch is lock and unlock. If desired, you may turn
pressed quickly, the functions may not the audible signal off. For more details,
be disabled. contact a SUBARU dealer.
! Enabling functions NOTE

S02AP0702 For models with the combination meter
When the procedure to disable the func-
display (color LCD), the setting can be
tions is performed again, a chirp sound will
changed by operating the combination
be heard, and the functions are enabled.
meter display (color LCD). For details,
2. Push “ ” of the power door locking NOTE refer to “Vehicle Setting” �3-41.
switch.
. The keyless access function will be
3. Within 5 seconds after step 2 is
performed, open the driver’s door.
enabled only if you perform the proce- & Warning chimes and warning
4. Within 5 seconds after step 3 is
dure in the same manner you disabled indicator
the function (for example, when dis- S02AP06
performed, push “ ” of the power door The keyless access with push-button start
abling by operating the driver’s door,
locking switch twice while the door is open. system sounds a warning chime and
the function will not be enabled even if
5. Within 10 seconds after step 4 is flashes the access key warning indicator
you operate the access key fob).
performed, close and open the driver’s on the combination meter in order to
. Press the push-button ignition
door twice. minimize improper operations and help
switch if you do not know the proce-
protect your vehicle from theft.
6. Within 10 seconds after step 5 is dure in which the keyless access func-
performed, push “ ” of the power door tion was disabled. For details, refer to “Warning chimes and
locking switch twice while the door is open. warning indicator of the keyless access
– When disabling by operating the
with push-button start system” �3-24.
7. Within 10 seconds after step 6 is driver’s door: A chirp will not be
performed, close and open the driver’s heard.
– CONTINUED –

(122,1)
& When access key fob does the user’s authority to operate the . Canada-spec. models
not operate properly equipment.
S02AP08
Refer to “Access key fob – if access key
fob does not operate properly” �9-17. NOTE
This device complies with part 15 of the
& Replacing battery of access FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the
key fob following two conditions: (1) This de-
S02AP09
Refer to “Replacing battery of access key vice may not cause harmful interfer-
fob” �11-46. ence, and (2) this device must accept
any interference received, including
& Replacing access key fob interference that may cause undesired
Access key fobs can be replaced at
S02AP13 operation.
SUBARU dealers. For more details, con-
tact a SUBARU dealer.
& Certification for keyless ac-

cess with push-button start
system
S02AP14
. U.S.-spec. models
FCC ID: HYQ14AHK
FCC ID: Y8PFJ16-1
FCC ID: Y8PSSPIMB02
CAUTION
FCC WARNING
Changes or modifications not ex-
pressly approved by the party re-
sponsible for compliance could void

(123,1)
Keys and doors/Immobilizer 2-15
Immobilizer NOTE
S02AB
. To protect your vehicle from theft,
The immobilizer system is designed to please pay close attention to the follow- 2
prevent an unauthorized person from ing security precautions:
starting the engine. Only keys registered – Never leave your vehicle unat-
with your vehicle’s immobilizer system can tended with its keys inside.
be used to operate your vehicle. If engine – Before leaving your vehicle,
start is attempted with an unregistered close all windows and the moon-
access key fob or key, the engine will not roof, and lock the doors and rear
start. Even if the engine does start, it will gate.
stop after a few seconds. This system, – Do not leave spare keys or any
however, is not a 100% anti-theft guaran- record of your key number in the
tee. vehicle.
CAUTION . The vehicle has a maintenance-free
type immobilizer system.
. Do not place the key under direct
sunlight or anywhere it may be- & Security indicator light
come hot. S02AB02
Refer to “Security indicator light” �3-29.
. Do not get the key wet. If the key
gets wet, wipe it dry with a cloth & Key replacement
immediately. S02AB03
Your key number plate will be required if
. Do not modify or remove the you ever need a replacement key made.
system. If modified or removed, Any new key must be registered for use
the proper operation of the sys- with your vehicle’s immobilizer system
tem cannot be guaranteed. before it can be used. The maximum
number of keys that can be registered for
use with one vehicle is as follows.
. Four (models without “keyless access
with push-button start system”)
– CONTINUED –

(124,1)
2-16 Keys and doors/Immobilizer
. Seven (models with “keyless access CAUTION – Canada-spec. models

with push-button start system”)
FCC WARNING
One key that has already been registered
is required in order to register a new key. Changes or modifications not ex-
NOTE sponsible for compliance could void
If you lose a key, the lost key’s ID code the user’s authority to operate the
still remains in the memory of the equipment.
vehicle’s immobilizer system. For se-
curity reasons, the lost key’s ID code NOTE
should be erased from the memory. To
erase the lost key’s ID code, all keys This device complies with part 15 of the
that will be used are required. FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions: (1) This de-
For details about new key registration vice may not cause harmful interfer-
and erasing the lost key’s ID code, ence, and (2) this device must accept
contact your SUBARU dealer. any interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired
& Certification for immobilizer operation.
system
S02AB05
. For models with “keyless access
with push-button start system”:
Refer to “Certification for keyless access
with push-button start system” �2-14.
. For models without “keyless access
– U.S.-spec. models
FCC ID: Y8PFJ16-2

(125,1)
Keys and doors/Remote keyless entry system 2-17
Remote keyless entry system

S02AQ
CAUTION 2
. Do not expose the remote trans-
mitter to severe shocks, such as
those experienced as a result of
dropping or throwing.
. Do not take the remote transmit-
ter apart except when replacing
the battery.
. Do not get the remote transmitter
Access key fob Transmitter
wet. If it gets wet, wipe it dry with
1) Lock/arm button 1) Lock/arm button
a cloth immediately.
2) Unlock/disarm button 2) Unlock/disarm button
. When you carry the remote trans- 3) Rear gate unlock button 3) Rear gate unlock button
mitter on an airplane, do not 4) PANIC button 4) PANIC button
press the button of the remote
transmitter while in the airplane. The remote keyless entry system has the
When any button of the remote following functions.
transmitter is pressed, radio . Locking and unlocking the doors (and
waves are sent and may affect rear gate)
the operation of the airplane. . Unlocking the rear gate
When you carry the remote trans- . Sounding a panic alarm
mitter in a bag on an airplane, . Arming and disarming the alarm sys-
take measures to prevent the tem. For detailed information, refer to
buttons of the remote transmitter “Alarm system” �2-24.
from being pressed.
The operable distance of the remote key-
less entry system is approximately 30 feet
(10 meters). However, this distance will
vary depending on environmental condi-
– CONTINUED –

(126,1)
2-18 Keys and doors/Remote keyless entry system
tions. The system’s operable distance will & Locking the doors button (for unlocking of all of the doors
be shorter in areas near a facility or S02AQ01
Press the lock/arm button to lock all doors and the rear gate) is extremely short,
electronic equipment emitting strong radio and rear gate. An electronic chirp will the system may not respond.
waves such as a power plant, broadcast sound once and the hazard warning
station, TV tower, or remote controller of flashers will flash once. & Unlocking the rear gate
home electronic appliances. S02AQ05
If any of the doors (or the rear gate) are not Press the rear gate unlock button to unlock
NOTE fully closed, the following will occur to alert the rear gate.
. For models with “keyless access you that the doors (or the rear gate) are not An electronic chirp will sound twice and the
with push-button start system”, the properly closed. hazard warning flashers will flash twice.
remote keyless entry system will not . An electronic chirp sounds five times.
be activated when the push-button . The hazard warning flashers flash five & Vehicle finder function
S02AQ07
ignition switch is in any position other times. Use this function to find your vehicle
than the “OFF” position. parked among many vehicles in a large
. For models without “keyless access When you close the door, it will automati- parking lot. Provided you are within 30 feet
with push-button start system”, the cally lock and then the following will occur. (10 meters) of the vehicle, pressing the
remote keyless entry system will not . An electronic chirp sounds once. lock/arm button three times in a 5-second
be activated when the key is inserted in . The hazard warning flashers flash period will cause your vehicle’s horn to
the ignition switch. once. sound once and its hazard warning
. The hazard warning flashers will flashers to flash three times.
flash once or twice when the access & Unlocking the doors
key fob/transmitter button is pressed in
Press the unlock/disarm button to unlock
S02AQ02 NOTE
the following cases. If the interval between presses is too
the driver’s door. An electronic chirp will
– When locking the doors short when you press the lock/arm
sound twice and the hazard warning
– When unlocking the doors flashers will flash twice. To unlock all doors button three times, the system may
– When unlocking the rear gate and the rear gate, briefly press the unlock/ not respond to the signals from the
disarm button a second time within 5 remote transmitter.
Operation of the hazard warning
flashers in the above cases can be set seconds.
to “On” or “Off” by a SUBARU dealer. NOTE
Consult your SUBARU dealer for de-
If the interval between the first and
tails.
second presses of the unlock/disarm

(127,1)
Keys and doors/Remote keyless entry system 2-19
& Sounding a panic alarm & Replacing the battery

S02AQ08 S02AQ12
To activate the alarm, press the “PANIC” Refer to “Replacing key battery” �11-45.
button once. 2
The horn will sound and the hazard & Replacing lost transmitters
S02AQ13
warning flashers will flash. If you lose a transmitter or want to
To deactivate the panic alarm, press any purchase additional transmitters (up to
button on the remote transmitter. Unless a four can be programmed), your transmit-
button on the remote transmitter is ters should be reprogrammed for security
pressed, the alarm will be deactivated reasons. For details, contact your
after approximately 30 seconds. SUBARU dealer and have the transmitters
programmed into the remote keyless entry
& Setting audible signal opera- system.
tion (models without “keyless 2. Hold down “ ” of the power door
access with push-button start locking switch. & Certification for remote key-
system”) 3. While holding down “ ” of the power less entry system
S02AQ09 S02AQ18
Using an electronic chirp, the system will door locking switch, pull the key out and re- ! U.S.-spec. models
give you an audible signal when the doors insert it into the ignition switch at least 6 S02AQ1801
times within 10 seconds after Step 2. FCC ID: CWTB1G077

lock and unlock. If desired, you may turn
the audible signal off. 4. Open and close the driver’s door once FCC ID: CWTD1G141
within 10 seconds after Step 3.
Perform the following steps to deactivate CAUTION
the audible signal. You can also use the 5. The hazard warning flashers flash 3
same steps to restore the function. times to indicate completion of the setting. FCC WARNING
1. Sit in the driver’s seat and shut all Your SUBARU dealer can perform the Changes or modifications not ex-
doors and the rear gate. above procedure for you. Also, for models pressly approved by the party re-
with a combination meter display (color sponsible for compliance could void
LCD), the setting can be changed using the user’s authority to operate the
the display. For details, refer to “Vehicle equipment.
Setting” �3-41.
– CONTINUED –

(128,1)
2-20 Keys and doors/Door locks
NOTE ! Canada-spec. models

S02AQ1802
Door locks
S02AC
FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the
& Locking and unlocking from
following two conditions: (1) This de- the outside
S02AC01
vice may not cause harmful interfer- NOTE
ence, and (2) this device must accept If you unlock the driver’s door with a
any interference received, including key (including an emergency key) and
interference that may cause undesired open the door while the alarm system is
operation. armed, the alarm system is triggered
and the vehicle’s horn sounds. In this
case, perform any of the following
operations:
. Models with “keyless access with
push-button start system”:
– Press any button on the access
key fob (except when the access
key fob battery is discharged).
– Press the push-button ignition
switch to “ACC”.
– Carry the access key fob and
perform either of the following pro-
cedures.
– Grip the front door handle.
– Press the rear gate opener
button.
. Models without “keyless access
– Press any button on the remote
transmitter (except when the trans-
mitter battery is discharged).

(129,1)
Keys and doors/Door locks 2-21
– Insert the key into the ignition direction that the grooved side is facing ! Locking using power door lock-
switch and turn the ignition switch and insert it again. ing switch
to “ON”. S02AC010202
! How to lock the vehicle without 2
For details about the alarm system, using the key
S02AC0102
refer to “Alarm system” �2-24. To lock the door from outside without the
! How to lock and unlock the vehicle key, the following methods are available.
by using the key ! Locking using lock lever
S02AC0101 S02AC010201
1) Press the lock side of the power door

locking switch.*
2) Close the door.
*: For details about the power door locking
switch, refer to “How to operate the power
door locking switches” �2-22.
1) Rotate the key toward the front to lock. 1) Rotate the lock lever forward.
2) Rotate the key toward the rear to unlock.
In this case, all closed doors and the rear
2) Close the door.
gate are locked at the same time.
In this case, only the driver’s side door is In this way, only the door that was operated
locked. will be locked. NOTE
Make sure that you do not leave the key
NOTE inside the vehicle when locking the
Models with “keyless access with doors from the outside without the key.
The emergency key is directional. If the
key cannot be inserted, change the
– CONTINUED –

(130,1)
2-22 Keys and doors/Door locks
& Locking and unlocking from seatbelts and child restraints,

the inside locking the doors reduces the
S02AC02 chance of being thrown out of
! How to use the lock lever the vehicle in an accident.
S02AC0202
It also helps prevent passengers
from falling out if a door is
accidentally opened, and intru-
ders from unexpectedly opening
doors and entering your vehicle.
. Do not pull the front door handle
from inside while driving. The
door could open even if it is
locked. Example
1) Press to lock.
! How to operate the power door 2) Press to unlock.
locking switches
S02AC0203
1) Rotate the lock lever rearward to unlock. All doors and the rear gate can be locked NOTE
2) Rotate the lock lever forward to lock. and unlocked using the power door locking Make sure that you do not leave the key
Always make sure that all doors and the switches located at the driver’s side and inside the vehicle before locking the
rear gate are closed before starting to the front passenger’s side doors. doors from the outside using the power
drive. door locking switches.
The red mark on the lock lever appears

when the door is unlocked. & Automatic door locking/un-
locking
S02AC08
WARNING All doors are automatically locked or
unlocked under the following conditions.
. Keep all doors locked when you . For automatic door locking
drive, especially when small chil-
– When the vehicle speed reaches 12
dren are in your vehicle.
mph (20 km/h) or higher (factory
Along with the proper use of default setting).

(131,1)
Keys and doors/Door locks 2-23
– When the select lever is shifted into lever then the door is opened and ! Non-operation of key lock-in pre-
a position other than the “P” position closed, the Key lock-in prevention vention function
(CVT models). function will be triggered. All doors will S02AC0602
When the system is set so that it does not
. For automatic door unlocking be unlocked, the Key lock-in prevention 2
operate, the doors are locked by the
– When the driver’s door is open warning indicator “ ” will appear and following operation.
(factory default setting). the warning chime will also sound.
. If the lock lever is turned to the front
– When the ignition switch is turned to (“LOCK”) position with the driver’s door
the “OFF” position. & Key lock-in prevention func- open and the driver’s door is then closed
– When the select lever is shifted into tion with the lock lever in that position, the
the “P” position (CVT models). S02AC06
driver’s door is locked.
Under the following conditions, all the
NOTE doors will not lock when the power door . If the spare key is used to lock the
locking switch is pushed with the front door driver’s door from the outside of the
. The automatic door locking/unlock- vehicle, the door is locked.
ing function can be changed by a open.
SUBARU dealer. Consult your SUBARU . The key is still in the ignition switch
dealer for details. Also, for models with (models without “keyless access with & Battery drainage prevention
a combination meter display (color push-button start system”). function
S02AC03
LCD), the setting can be changed using . The ignition switch is in the “ACC” or If a door or the rear gate is not completely
the display. For details, refer to “Auto “ON” position (models with “keyless ac- closed, the interior lights will remain
Door Lock and Unlock” �3-42. cess with push-button start system”). illuminated as a result. However, several
. When locking the door by operating lights are automatically turned off by the
the power door locking switches, auto- NOTE battery drainage prevention function to
matic door locking will not operate. . When leaving the vehicle, make sure prevent the battery from discharging. The
. When unlocking the door by operat- you are holding the key before locking following interior lights are affected by this
ing the power door locking switches, the doors. function.
automatic door unlocking will not oper- . The factory setting (default setting)
ate. for this function is set as “operational”. Item Switch Automatically turning
This function’s operational/non-opera- position off
. When getting out of the vehicle from
a rear door, make sure to unlock all the tional setting can be changed by a Map lights DOOR Approximately 20
doors by pushing the unlock side of the SUBARU dealer. Contact a SUBARU minutes later
power door locking switch. If a rear dealer for details. Approximately 20
Dome light DOOR minutes later
door is unlocked from the inside door
– CONTINUED –

(132,1)
2-24 Keys and doors/Alarm system
Item Switch Automatically turning Alarm system & Alarm system operation
position off S02AF01
S02AF When the alarm system is armed, it is
Ignition Approximately 20 triggered by opening any of the doors, rear
switch light — minutes later The alarm system helps to protect your
vehicle and valuables from theft. The horn gate or engine hood.
Cargo area DOOR Approximately 20 sounds and the hazard warning flashers The alarm system will activate the follow-
light minutes later
flash if someone attempts to break into ing alarms when triggered.
Rear gate your vehicle.
light (if DOOR
Approximately 20 . The vehicle’s horn will sound for 30
minutes later seconds.
equipped) For models with “keyless access with
push-button start system”: . The hazard warning flashers will flash
NOTE The system can be armed or disarmed for 30 seconds.
. The default setting for this function with the keyless access function or access If any of the doors, rear gate or engine
is set as “operational”. The operational/ key fob. hood remains open after the 30-second
non-operational setting of this function The system will not be activated when the period, the horn will continue to sound for a
can be changed by a SUBARU dealer. push-button ignition switch is in the “ACC” maximum of 3 minutes. If the door, rear
Contact your SUBARU dealer to or “ON” position. gate or engine hood is closed while the
change the setting. horn is sounding, the horn will stop
. When leaving the vehicle, please For models without “keyless access
with push-button start system”: sounding with a delay of up to 30 seconds.
make sure that all doors and the rear
gate are completely closed. The system can be armed or disarmed NOTE
. The battery drainage prevention with the remote transmitter. The alarm system can be set to trigger
function does not operate while the The system will not be activated when the the illumination of the following interior
key is in the ignition switch. key is inserted into the ignition switch. lights.
Your vehicle’s alarm system has been set . Map lights (illuminates only when
for activation at the time of shipment from the door interlock switch is in the
the factory. You can set the system for “DOOR” position)
deactivation yourself or have it done by . Dome light (illuminates only when
your SUBARU dealer. the dome light switch is in the “DOOR”
position)
. Cargo area light (illuminates only
when the cargo area light switch is in
the “DOOR” position)

(133,1)
Keys and doors/Alarm system 2-25
The notifications regarding the map When the system is in surveillance state,
lights, dome light and cargo area light
NOTE the security indicator light will then flash
are deactivated as the factory setting. A slowly (twice approximately every 2 sec-
SUBARU dealer can activate the sys- onds), indicating that the system has been 2
tem. Contact your SUBARU dealer for armed for surveillance.
details.
NOTE
. The system can be armed even if the
& Arming the system windows and/or moonroof are open.
S02AF04
The alarm system becomes armed when Always make sure that they are fully
the following operation is performed. closed before arming the system.
1. Close all windows and the moonroof (if . The 30-second standby time can be
equipped) and turn the ignition switch to eliminated if you prefer. Have it per-
the “OFF” position. formed by your SUBARU dealer.
2. Carry the key and get out of the . If any of the following actions is
vehicle. Security indicator light
done during the standby period, the
3. Make sure that the engine hood is system will not switch to the surveil-
closed. . All doors and the rear gate will lock, lance state.
4. Lock the doors using any of the an electronic chirp will sound once, the – Doors (including the rear gate)
following methods. hazard warning flashers will flash once, are unlocked using the access key
. Locking using the remote keyless and the security indicator light will start fob/remote transmitter.
entry system. For details, refer to flashing rapidly. – Doors (including the rear gate)
“Remote keyless entry system” �2-17. . If any of the doors or the rear gate is are unlocked using the keyless
. Locking using the keyless access not fully closed, an electronic chirp access function (models with “key-
function (if equipped). For details, refer sounds five times, the hazard warning less access with push-button start
to “Locking with the door lock sensor” flashers flash five times to alert you that system”).
�2-8. the doors (or the rear gate) are not – Any door (including the rear gate)
properly closed. When you close the is opened.
. Locking using the power door lock-
door, doors will automatically lock. – The ignition switch is turned to
ing switch. For details, refer to “Locking
using power door locking switch” �2- 5. Approximately 30 seconds later, the the “ON” position (models without
21. system will enter surveillance state. “keyless access with push-button
start system”).
– CONTINUED –

(134,1)
2-26 Keys and doors/Alarm system
– Push-button ignition switch is ignition switch from the “LOCK”/“OFF” to . Type A combination meter
turned to the “ACC” position (mod- the “ON” position with a registered key/
els with “keyless access with push- access key fob. Setting Combination Horn
status meter display
button start system”).
NOTE Activate ALon Once
& Disarming the system For models with “keyless access with Deactivate ALoF Twice
S02AF05
Perform either of the following procedures. push-button start system”, if the ac-
. Briefly press a button (for less than 2 cess key fob battery is discharged, . Type B combination meter
seconds) on the access key fob/remote perform the procedure described in
transmitter. “Switching power status” �9-18. In Setting Combination Horn
such a case, replace the battery im- status meter display
. Carry the access key fob and perform
mediately. Refer to “Replacing battery Activate AL ON Once
either of the following procedures (models
of access key fob” �11-46. Deactivate AL OFF Twice
with “keyless access with push-button
start system”).
– Grip the front door handle. & Alarm system setting NOTE
S02AF11
– Press the rear gate opener button. To change the setting of your vehicle’s You may have the above setting change
– Unlock using the PIN code access. alarm system for activation or deactiva- done by your SUBARU dealer.
tion, do the following.
The flashing of the security indicator light 1. Disarm the alarm system. Refer to & If you have accidentally trig-
will then change slowly (once approxi- “Disarming the system” �2-26. gered the alarm system
mately every 3 seconds from twice ap- S02AF03
2. Sit in the driver’s seat and shut all ! To stop the alarm
proximately every 2 seconds), indicating
doors, rear gate and engine hood. S02AF0301
that the alarm system has been disarmed. Do any of the following operations:
! Emergency disarming position. . Press any button on the access key fob/
S02AF0501
If you cannot disarm the system using the 4. Hold down “ ” of the driver’s power remote transmitter.
access key fob/transmitter (i.e. the trans- door locking switch, open the driver’s door . Turn the ignition switch to the “ON”
mitter is lost, broken or the transmitter within the following 1 second, and wait 10 position (models without “keyless access
battery is too weak), you can disarm the seconds without releasing the switch. The with push-button start system”).
system without using the access key fob/ setting will then be changed as follows. . Turn the push-button ignition to the
remote transmitter. “ACC” position (models with “keyless
The system can be disarmed if you turn the access with push-button start system”).

(135,1)
Keys and doors/Child safety locks 2-27
NOTE Child safety locks Windows

S02AG S02AH
Only registered keys will stop the
alarm. If the immobilizer transponder WARNING 2
is not registered, the alarm will not
stop. To avoid serious personal injury
caused by entrapment, always con-
& Valet mode form to the following instructions
S02AF06
When you choose the valet mode, the without exception.
alarm system does not operate. In valet . When operating the power win-
mode, the remote transmitter is used only dows, be extremely careful to
for locking and unlocking the doors and prevent anyone’s body parts or
rear gate and panic activation. any other objects from being
caught in the window.
To enter the valet mode, change the
setting of your vehicle’s alarm system for . Always lock the passengers’ win-
Each rear door has a child safety lock. dows using the lock switch when
deactivation mode. Refer to “Alarm system When the child safety lock lever is in the
setting” �2-26. The security indicator light children are riding in the vehicle.
lock position, the door cannot be opened
will continue to flash once every 3 seconds from inside. The door can only be opened . Always carry the key when you
indicating that the system is in the valet from the outside. leave the vehicle for safety rea-
mode. sons and never allow an unat-
WARNING tended child to remain in the
To exit valet mode, change the setting of vehicle. Failure to follow this
your vehicle’s alarm system for activation Always turn the child safety locks to procedure could result in injury
mode. Refer to “Alarm system setting” �2- the “LOCK” position when children to a child operating the power
26. sit in the rear seat. Serious injury window.
could result if a child accidentally
opens the door and falls out.
NOTE
. If the power window system detects
resistance, an impact or abnormality,
the window operation may be automa-
tically stopped to prevent further jam-
– CONTINUED –

(136,1)
2-28 Keys and doors/Windows
ming, entrapment or malfunction. & Power window operation . Passenger’s side power window
– The closing window slides down S02AH07 switches:
slightly and stops. ! Power window switches
S02AH0701
– The opening window stops slid- . Driver’s side power window switches:
ing down.
. The power window system may
detect resistance, an impact or an
abnormality in the following cases.
– A substantial sized object is
caught between the window and
the window frame.
– A foreign object is caught be-
tween the window and the window
frame.
– The vehicle drives over a deep
pothole. Each passenger’s window can be con-
. The window cannot be closed for a trolled by the power window switch located
few seconds after the window is auto- 1) For front left window (with one-touch auto on the door.
up and down feature)
matically stopped by the system. The switch illuminates when activated.
2) For front right window (with one-touch
auto up and down feature)
3) For rear left window
4) For rear right window
5) Lock switch
All door windows can be controlled by the

power window switch cluster at the driver
side door.
The switch illuminates when activated.

(137,1)
Keys and doors/Windows 2-29
! Operating the window . Without one-touch auto up and down not initialized, the one-touch auto up/
S02AH0702
. With one-touch auto up and down feature: down function will not operate. Refer to
feature: “Initialization of power window with
one-touch auto up/down function” 2
�2-30.
! Anti-entrapment function (windows
with one-touch auto up/down func-
tion)
S02AH0703
While closing the window automatically, if
the window senses a substantial enough
object trapped between the window and
the window frame, it automatically moves
down slightly and stops.
If a foreign object is caught while the
1) Close window is opening automatically, the
2) Open window will stop.
1) Automatically close*
2) Close
3) Open NOTE CAUTION
4) Automatically open* Avoid the following. . Never attempt to test the power
*: To stop the window halfway, operate the . Continuously operating a switch in
switch to opposite side. window operation using body
the same direction after the window is parts.
fully closed or fully opened.
. The anti-entrapment function
. Continuously operating three or
may not operate properly if some
more switches all at once in the same
object gets trapped just before
direction after the windows are fully
the window fully closes.
closed or fully opened.
Either of the operations described
above may cause the power window NOTE
breaker to operate making it impossible . If a window detects an impact similar
to open or close the window. Be sure to to that caused by trapping an object (for
initialize the power windows. If they are example, when the vehicle encounters
– CONTINUED –

(138,1)
2-30 Keys and doors/Rear gate
a deep pothole), the anti-entrapment the driver’s side switches. The passen- Rear gate
function may operate. ger’s side switches and the rear seat side S02AJ
. The window cannot be operated for a switches are not operational either.
few seconds after the anti-entrapment When the indicator on the window WARNING
function operates. switches does not illuminate, the window
switch cannot be operated. . To prevent dangerous exhaust
! Off delay function (windows with gas from entering the vehicle,
one-touch auto up/down function) always keep the rear gate closed
S02AH0705 & Initialization of power window
The windows can be operated for approxi- while the engine is running.
with one-touch auto up/down
mately 40 seconds even after the ignition . Do not attempt to shut the rear
switch is turned to the “ACC” or “OFF”
function
S02AH06 gate while holding the recessed
position. If a front door is opened within 40 If the power window automatic function grip. Also avoid closing the rear
seconds, the off delay function is can- (one-touch auto up and down function) gate by pulling on the recessed
celed. does not operate properly, operate each grip from inside the cargo space.
window according to the following proce- There is a danger of your hand
! Locking the passengers’ windows dure in order to initialize the power window
S02AH0704 being caught and injured.
system.
1. Close the door.
2. Turn the ignition switch to the “ON” CAUTION
position.
3. Open the window completely and then When loading and unloading cargo,
press and hold down the power window be careful not to come in contact
switch for approximately 1 second. with the hot engine exhaust gas or
the exhaust pipe, because they
4. Close the window completely and then could burn you.
pull and hold the power window switch for
approximately 1 second.
NOTE
If the rear gate cannot be unlocked due
1) Lock to a discharged vehicle battery, a mal-
2) Unlock function in the door locking/unlocking
When the lock switch is in the lock position, system or other causes, the rear gate
the rear windows cannot be operated by can be unlocked by manually operating

(139,1)
Keys and doors/Rear gate 2-31
the rear gate lock release lever. & Open/close To close:

For the procedure, refer to “Rear gate – S02AJ03 Lower the rear gate slowly and push down
if the rear gate cannot be opened” �9- firmly until the latch engages.
19. The rear gate can be lowered easily if you 2
pull it down holding the recessed grip.
& Lock/unlock
S02AJ02 CAUTION
The rear gate can be locked and unlocked
using any of the following systems. . Do not jam a plastic bag in or
. Power door locking switch: Refer to place cellophane tape on the rear
“How to operate the power door locking gate stays or scratch the stays
switches” �2-22. while loading or unloading cargo.
. Keyless access with the push-button Doing so could cause leakage of
start system (if equipped): Refer to “Key- gas from the stays, which may
less access with push-button start system” result in their inability to hold the
1) The rear gate opener button
�2-2. rear gate open.
. Remote keyless entry system: Refer to To open: . Be careful not to hit your head or
“Remote keyless entry system” �2-17. First unlock the rear gate lock then push face on the rear gate when open-
. Automatic door locking/unlocking: Re- the rear gate opener button. ing or closing the rear gate and
fer to “Automatic door locking/unlocking” when loading or unloading cargo.
�2-22.

(140,1)
2-32 Keys and doors/Moonroof
Moonroof (if equipped) vehicle. Failure to follow this & Moonroof switches
S02AK02
S02AK procedure could result in injury
to a child operating the moon- ! Tilting moonroof
S02AK0201
WARNING roof.
. Never try to check the anti-en-
Never let anyone’s hands, arms, trapment function by deliberately
head or any objects protrude from placing part of your body in the
the moonroof. A person could be moonroof.
seriously injured if any of the follow-
ing conditions occur.
. The vehicle stops suddenly. CAUTION
. The vehicle turns sharply. . Do not sit on the edge of the open
. The vehicle is involved in an moonroof.
accident. . Do not operate the moonroof if
. Body parts protruding from the falling snow or extremely cold
vehicle are struck by outside conditions have caused it to 1) Up
objects. freeze shut. 2) Down
To avoid serious personal injury . The anti-entrapment function To raise the moonroof, press and hold the
caused by entrapment, always con- does not operate when the moon- switch in the up side and release. To lower
form to the following instructions roof is being tilted down. Be sure the moonroof, press and hold the switch in
without exception. to confirm that it is safe to do so the down side.
. Before closing the moonroof, before tilting the moonroof down.
NOTE
make sure that no one’s hands, . If the moonroof does not close,
arms, head or other objects will Release the switch after the moonroof
have the system checked by a
be accidentally caught in the has been raised or has been lowered
SUBARU dealer.
moonroof. completely. Pressing the switch con-
tinuously may cause damage to the
. Always carry the key when you The moonroof has both tilting and sliding
moonroof.
leave the vehicle for safety rea- functions.
sons and never allow an unat- The moonroof operates only when the
tended child to remain in the ignition switch is in the “ON” position.

(141,1)
Keys and doors/Moonroof 2-33
! Sliding moonroof . For the sake of safety, it is recom- & Sunshade

S02AK0202
mended that you avoid driving with the S02AK05
moonroof fully opened.

2
! Anti-entrapment function
S02AK0203
When the moonroof senses a substantial
enough object trapped between its glass
and the vehicle’s roof during closure, it
automatically moves back to the fully open
position and stops there. The anti-entrap-
ment function may also be activated by a
strong shock on the moonroof even when
there is nothing trapped.
1) Open
CAUTION
The sunshade can be slid forward or
2) Close Never attempt to test this function backward by hand while the moonroof is
To open or close the moonroof using the using fingers, hands or other parts closed.
automatic function, press and hold the of your body. If the moonroof is opened, the sunshade
switch toward the open/close side and also moves back.
release.
To stop the moonroof halfway, press a
switch on the moonroof switch.
NOTE
. After washing the vehicle or after it
rains, wipe away water on the roof prior
to opening the moonroof to prevent
drops of water from falling into the
passenger compartment.

(142,1)
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————

(143,1)
Instruments and controls

Ignition switch (models without “keyless Engine hood open warning light (if equipped) ....... 3-16
S03
access with push-button start system”) ............ 3-4 Coolant temperature low indicator light/Coolant
Key positions......................................................... 3-4 temperature high warning light .......................... 3-16
Key reminder chime ............................................... 3-5 Charge warning light ............................................ 3-17
Ignition switch light (if equipped) ........................... 3-5 Oil pressure warning light..................................... 3-17
Push-button ignition switch (models with Engine low oil level warning light.......................... 3-18 3
“keyless access with push-button start Windshield washer fluid warning light................... 3-18
system”) ............................................................... 3-6 AT OIL TEMP warning light (CVT models).............. 3-18
Safety precautions ................................................. 3-6 Low tire pressure warning light (U.S.-spec.
models) ............................................................. 3-18
Operating range for push-button start system ........ 3-6
ABS warning light................................................. 3-20
Switching power status .......................................... 3-7
Brake system warning light (red) .......................... 3-20
When access key fob does not operate properly .... 3-8
Low fuel warning light .......................................... 3-21
Hazard warning flasher .......................................... 3-8 Hill start assist warning light/Hill start assist
Meters and gauges ................................................. 3-8 OFF indicator light............................................. 3-22
Speedometer ......................................................... 3-8 Door open warning light ....................................... 3-22
Tachometer............................................................ 3-8 All-Wheel Drive warning light (CVT models) .......... 3-22
Odometer............................................................... 3-9 Power steering warning light ................................ 3-22
Double trip meter ................................................... 3-9 Vehicle Dynamics Control warning light/Vehicle
Fuel gauge............................................................ 3-10 Dynamics Control operation indicator light ........ 3-23
ECO gauge (if equipped) ....................................... 3-10 Vehicle Dynamics Control OFF indicator light ....... 3-24
Combination meter settings .................................. 3-11 Warning chimes and warning indicator of
Illumination brightness control............................ 3-12 the keyless access with push-button start
Auto dimmer cancel function (if equipped) ............ 3-12 system (if equipped) .......................................... 3-24
Warning and indicator .......................................... 3-12 Security indicator light.......................................... 3-29
SI-DRIVE indicator light (if equipped) .................... 3-30
Initial illumination for system check ...................... 3-12
Select lever/gear position indicator ....................... 3-30
Seatbelt warning light and chime .......................... 3-13
Turn signal indicator lights ................................... 3-31
SRS airbag system warning light........................... 3-14
High beam indicator light...................................... 3-31
Front passenger’s frontal airbag ON and OFF
indicators ........................................................... 3-15 High beam assist indicator light (if equipped) ....... 3-31
CHECK ENGINE warning light/Malfunction Cruise control indicator light (if equipped) ............ 3-31
indicator light ..................................................... 3-15 Cruise control set indicator light (if equipped)....... 3-31

(144,1)
Automatic headlight beam leveler warning light Multi-function display (black and white)............. 3-42
(models with LED headlights).............................. 3-31 Driving information display ................................... 3-43
LED headlight warning light (models with LED Outside temperature indicator............................... 3-47
headlights).......................................................... 3-31 X-MODE indicator (if equipped) ............................. 3-48
Steering Responsive Headlight warning light/ Clock.................................................................... 3-48
Steering Responsive Headlight OFF indicator
light (if equipped)................................................ 3-31 Climate control screen.......................................... 3-48
Front fog light indicator light (if equipped) ............ 3-32 Multi-function display (color LCD)
Headlight indicator light (if equipped).................... 3-32 (if equipped) ....................................................... 3-49
Auto Start Stop warning light/Auto Start Stop Features ............................................................... 3-49
OFF indicator light (yellow) (if equipped) ............. 3-32 Welcome screen ................................................... 3-49
Auto Start Stop indicator light (green) Self-check screen ................................................. 3-49
(if equipped) ....................................................... 3-32 Interruption screen ............................................... 3-50
Auto Start Stop No Activity Detected indicator Basic operation .................................................... 3-51
light (if equipped)................................................ 3-32 Basic screens....................................................... 3-51
X-MODE indicator (if equipped) ............................. 3-33 Setting screen ...................................................... 3-58
Hill descent control indicator (if equipped) ............ 3-33 How to get the source code using the open
BSD/RCTA warning indicator (if equipped)............. 3-33 source............................................................... 3-65
BSD/RCTA OFF indicator (if equipped) .................. 3-33 Clock...................................................................... 3-66
RAB warning indicator (if equipped) ...................... 3-33 Setting the clock manually.................................... 3-66
RAB OFF indicator (if equipped)............................ 3-34 Setting the clock automatically ............................. 3-67
Icy road surface warning indicator (if equipped) .... 3-34 Regulatory information ......................................... 3-68
Combination meter display (color LCD) Light control switch ............................................. 3-68
(if equipped) ....................................................... 3-34 Precautions and tips............................................. 3-68
Basic operation..................................................... 3-35 Headlights ............................................................ 3-69
Welcome screen (opening animation) and High/low beam change (dimmer) ........................... 3-71
Good-bye screen (ending animation) ................... 3-36 Headlight flasher .................................................. 3-71
Warning screen..................................................... 3-36 High beam assist function (if equipped) ................ 3-72
Telltale screen....................................................... 3-37 Daytime running light system ............................... 3-74
Basic screens ....................................................... 3-38 Steering Responsive Headlight (SRH)
Menu screens ....................................................... 3-40 (if equipped) ....................................................... 3-75

(145,1)
Headlight beam leveler (models with LED Inside mirror......................................................... 3-82

headlights).......................................................... 3-76 Auto-dimming mirror/compass (if equipped).......... 3-82
Fog light switch (if equipped) .............................. 3-76 Auto-dimming mirror/compass with HomeLink®
Turn signal lever ................................................... 3-77 (if equipped) ...................................................... 3-83
One-touch lane changer ........................................ 3-78 Outside mirrors .................................................... 3-90
Wiper and washer ................................................. 3-78 Defogger and deicer (if equipped) ...................... 3-91 3
Windshield wiper and washer switches ................. 3-79 Tilt/telescopic steering wheel .............................. 3-92
Rear window wiper and washer switch .................. 3-81 Heated Steering Wheel system (if equipped) ......... 3-93
Mirrors ................................................................... 3-82 Horn ....................................................................... 3-94

(146,1)
3-4 Instruments and controls/Ignition switch (models without “keyless access with push-button start system”)
Ignition switch (models with- CAUTION NOTE

out “keyless access with . Keep the ignition switch in the
Do not attach a large key holder or
push-button start system”) key case to either key. If it banged “LOCK” position when the engine is
S03AA
against your knees or hands while not running.
you are driving, it could turn the . Using electrical accessories for a
WARNING long time with the ignition switch in the
ignition switch from the “ON” posi-
tion to the “ACC” or “LOCK” posi- “ON” or “ACC” position can cause the
. Never turn the ignition switch to
tion, thereby stopping the engine. battery to go dead.
the “LOCK” position while the
Also, if the key is attached to a key . If the ignition switch will not move
vehicle is being driven or towed
holder or to a large bunch of other from the “LOCK” position to the “ACC”
because that will lock the steer-
keys, centrifugal force may act on it position, turn the steering wheel
ing wheel, preventing steering
as the vehicle moves, resulting in slightly to the left and right as you turn
control. And when the engine is
unwanted turning of the ignition the ignition switch.
turned off, it takes a much greater
effort than usual to steer. switch.
. Before leaving the vehicle, al-
& Key positions
S03AA11
ways remove the key from the
ignition switch for safety and Position Description
never allow an unattended child The key can only be inserted
to remain in the vehicle. Failure to or removed in this position.
LOCK The ignition switch will lock
follow this procedure could re- the steering wheel when you
sult in injury to a child or others. remove the key.
Children could operate the power In this position the electrical
windows, the moonroof or other accessories (audio, acces-
ACC sory power outlet, etc.) can be
controls or even make the vehicle
move. used.
This is the normal operating
ON position after starting the en-
gine.
The ignition switch has four positions: The engine is started in this
START position.
LOCK, ACC, ON and START.

(147,1)
Instruments and controls/Ignition switch (models without “keyless access with push-button start system”) 3-5
CAUTION . The engine may not start in the der.

following cases: – The key is near or touching
Do not turn the ignition switch to the another transmitter.
“START” position while the engine
is running. & Key reminder chime
S03AA05 3
The reminder chime sounds when the
NOTE driver’s door is opened and the ignition
switch is in the “LOCK” or “ACC” position.
The chime stops under the following
conditions.
. The ignition switch is turned to the “ON”
position.
. The key is removed from the ignition
switch.
– The key grip is touching another
. The driver’s door is closed.
key or a metallic key holder.
& Ignition switch light (if
equipped)
S03AA06
For easy access to the ignition switch in
the dark, the ignition switch light illumi-
. To turn the key from the “ACC” to nates when the driver’s door is opened or
“LOCK” position, the select lever must when the driver’s door is unlocked using
be in the “P” position (CVT models) and the remote keyless entry transmitter.
the key must be pushed in and turned. The light remains illuminated for several
. If your registered key fails to start tens of seconds and then gradually turns
the engine, pull out the key once (the off under the following conditions.
security indicator light will blink), and . The driver’s door is closed.
then insert the key again and turn it to
– The key is near another key that . The doors are unlocked using the
the “START” position again to restart
contains an immobilizer transpon- remote keyless entry transmitter.
the engine.
– CONTINUED –

(148,1)
3-6 Instruments and controls/Push-button ignition switch (models with “keyless access with push-button start system”)
The light turns off immediately under the Push-button ignition switch cannot be operated.
following conditions. . Even when the access key fob is
(models with “keyless access outside the vehicle, if it is placed too
. The ignition switch is turned to the “ON”
position.
with push-button start sys- close to the glass, it may be possible to
. All doors and the rear gate are locked tem”) switch the power or to start the engine.
using the remote keyless entry transmitter. S03BG . Do not leave the access key fob in
& Safety precautions the following places. It may become
S03BG04
Refer to “Safety precautions” �2-3. impossible to operate the push-button
ignition switch and the engine start. It
& Operating range for push- may also cause a false warning to issue
button start system although no malfunction actually oc-
S03BG01 curs, or not to issue a warning when
any malfunction occurs.
– On the instrument panel
– On the floor
– Inside the glove box
– Inside the door trim pocket
– On the rear seat
– In the cargo area
. When operating the push-button
ignition switch or starting the engine,
if the access key fob battery is dis-
charged, perform the procedure de-
scribed in “Access key fob – if access
1) Antennas key fob does not operate properly” �9-
2) Operating range 17. In such a case, replace the battery
immediately. Refer to “Replacing bat-
NOTE tery of access key fob” �11-46.
. If the access key fob is not detected
within the operating range of the anten-
nas inside the vehicle, the push-button
ignition switch and the engine start

(149,1)
Instruments and controls/Push-button ignition switch (models with “keyless access with push-button start system”) 3-7
& Switching power status illuminates in orange. with oil or other contaminants. It
S03BG02
may cause a malfunction.
Power . If the push-button ignition switch
status Indicator color Operation
does not operate smoothly, stop
Power is turned the operation. Contact a SUBARU
OFF Turned off off. dealer immediately. 3
The following . If the push-button ignition switch
systems can be does not illuminate even when
ACC Orange used:
audio and ac- the instrument panel illumination
cessory power is turned on, have the vehicle
outlet. inspected at a SUBARU dealer.
Orange . If the vehicle was left in the hot
(while engine is sun for a long time, the surface of
stopped) All electrical
1) Operation indicator ON systems can be the push-button ignition switch
Turned off used. may get hot. Be careful not to
2) Push-button ignition switch (while engine is
running) burn yourself.
The power is switched every time the
push-button ignition switch is pressed.
1. Carry the access key fob, and sit in the CAUTION NOTE
driver’s seat. . When operating the push-button
. When the push-button ignition ignition switch, firmly press it all the
2. Shift the select lever (CVT models)/the switch is left in “ON” (while the way.
shift lever (MT models) into the “P”/“N” engine is not running) or “ACC” . If the push-button ignition switch is
position. for a long time, it may result in pressed quickly, the power may not
3. Press the push-button ignition switch vehicle battery discharge. turn on or off.
without depressing the brake pedal. Every . Do not spill drinks or other liquids
time the button is pressed, the power is on the push-button ignition
switched in the sequence of “OFF”, “ACC”, switch. It may cause a malfunc-
“ON” and “OFF”. When the engine is tion.
stopped and the push-button ignition
switch is in “ACC” or “ON”, the operation . Do not touch the push-button
indicator on the push-button ignition switch ignition switch with a hand soiled
– CONTINUED –

(150,1)
3-8 Instruments and controls/Hazard warning flasher
. If the indicator light on the push- Hazard warning flasher Meters and gauges
button ignition switch flashes in green S03AB S03AD
when the push-button ignition switch is NOTE
pressed, steering is locked. When this
occurs, press the push-button ignition Some of the meters and gauges on the
switch while turning the steering wheel combination meter use liquid-crystal
left and right. displays. You will find their indications
hard to see if you wear polarized
! Battery drainage prevention func- glasses.
tion
S03BG0201
When the push-button ignition switch is left & Speedometer
in the “ACC” or “ON” position for approxi- S03AD03
The speedometer shows the vehicle
mately 1 hour, the push-button ignition
speed.
switch will be automatically switched to
“OFF” to prevent the battery from going
dead. & Tachometer
The hazard warning flasher is used to warn S03AD06
other drivers when you have to park your The tachometer shows the engine speed
& When access key fob does in thousands of revolutions per minute.
not operate properly vehicle under emergency conditions. The
S03BG03 hazard warning flasher works regardless
Refer to “Access key fob – if access key of the position of the ignition switch.
CAUTION
fob does not operate properly” �9-17.
To turn on the hazard warning flasher, Do not operate the engine with the
push the hazard warning flasher switch on pointer of the tachometer in the red
the instrument panel. All the turn signal zone. In this range, fuel injection will
lights and the turn signal indicator lights be cut by the engine control module
will flash. To turn off the flasher, push the to protect the engine from overrev-
switch again. ving. The engine will resume run-
ning normally after the engine speed
NOTE is reduced below the red zone.
When the hazard warning flasher is on,
the turn signals do not work.

(151,1)
Instruments and controls/Meters and gauges 3-9
& Odometer closed.

S03AD04
& Double trip meter

S03AD05
To set the trip meter to zero, select the A 3

trip or B trip meter by pressing the TRIP
RESET switch and keep the knob pressed
for more than 2 seconds.
CAUTION
To ensure safety, do not attempt to
change the function of the indicator
during driving, as an accident could
1) TRIP RESET switch result.
2) Type A combination meter
3) Type B combination meter
1) TRIP RESET switch
2) Type A combination meter
NOTE
This meter displays the odometer when
the ignition switch is in the “ON” position. 3) Type B combination meter . If the connection between the com-
bination meter and battery is broken for
The odometer shows the total distance This meter displays the two trip meters any reason such as vehicle mainte-
that the vehicle has been driven. when the ignition switch is in the “ON” nance or fuse replacement, the data
position. recorded on the trip meter will be lost.
NOTE The trip meter shows the distance that the . If you press the TRIP RESET switch
If you press the TRIP RESET switch vehicle has been driven since you last set when the ignition switch is in the
when the ignition switch is in the it to zero. “LOCK”/“OFF” or “ACC” position, the
“LOCK”/“OFF” or “ACC” position, the
The display can be switched as shown in odometer/trip meter will light up. It is
odometer/trip meter will light up.
the following sequence by pressing the possible to switch between the A trip
The indicators will turn off when: meter and B trip meter indications while
. The TRIP RESET switch is not oper- TRIP RESET switch.
the odometer/trip meter is lit up.
ated for approximately 10 seconds. In addition, it is possible to reset the trip
. The driver’s door is opened and then meter by pressing and holding the TRIP
– CONTINUED –

(152,1)
3-10 Instruments and controls/Meters and gauges
RESET switch. to fuel level movement in the tank. & ECO gauge (if equipped)
S03AD12
The indicators will turn off when:
– The TRIP RESET switch is not NOTE
operated for approximately 10 sec- . You will see the “ ” sign in the fuel
onds. gauge. This indicates that the fuel filler
– The driver’s door is opened and lid is located on the right side of the
then closed. vehicle.
. If you press the TRIP RESET switch
while the ignition switch is in the
& Fuel gauge “LOCK”/“OFF” or “ACC” position, the
S03AD07
fuel gauge will light up and indicate the
amount of fuel remaining in the tank.
The indicators will turn off when:
– The TRIP RESET switch is not
operated for approximately 10 sec- 1) Type A combination meter
onds. 2) Type B combination meter
– The driver’s door is opened and
The ECO gauge shows the difference
then closed.
between the current rate of fuel consump-
tion and the average rate of fuel consump-
tion since the trip meter was last reset.
If the ECO gauge moves towards the +
side, this indicates better fuel efficiency.
2) Type A combination meter NOTE
3) Type B combination meter
. The ECO gauge shows only an
The fuel gauge is displayed when the approximate indication of fuel effi-
ignition is in the “ON” position, and it shows ciency.
the approximate amount of fuel remaining . After resetting the trip meter, the
in the tank. average rate of fuel consumption is not
shown until you have driven for 1 mile
The gauge indication may change slightly (or 1 km). Before that time, the ECO
during braking, turning or acceleration due

(153,1)
Instruments and controls/Meters and gauges 3-11
gauge does not operate. edly until the item you want to change is
NOTE displayed.
. If you switch the units on the combi- 3. Press and hold the TRIP RESET
& Combination meter settings nation meter, the units on the multi-
S03AD16 switch while the item to be changed is
Meter and vehicle settings can be set on function display (black and white) also displayed, the setting of the item will be
the combination meter. switches accordingly. switched. 3
. If either of the following conditions
! Type A combination meter is met, the combination meter setting
S03AD1601
Various adjustments can be made, such ! Type B combination meter
mode will be canceled. S03AD1602
as switching units shown on the combina- – The driver’s door is opened. Meter and vehicle settings can be set on
tion meter and adjusting the warning tone the combination meter display (color
– The TRIP RESET switch is not
volume. LCD). Refer to “Menu screens” �3-40.
operated for approximately 10 sec-
While the ignition switch is in the “OFF” onds or more.
position, each press of TRIP RESET
switch results in items shown in the table ! Switching method
S03AD160101
below being switched. 1. Push the ignition switch in the “OFF”
Combination Possible position.
Item meter display settings
A trip —
B trip —
Gauge
needle On/Off
sweep
function
Changing mile/km
the unit*
Warning Lv. 1/Lv. 2/Lv. 3
volume* 1) TRIP RESET switch
*: If available 2. Press the TRIP RESET switch repeat-

(154,1)
3-12 Instruments and controls/Illumination brightness control
Illumination brightness con- To brighten, turn the control dial upward. Warning and indicator
trol To darken, turn the control dial downward. S03AE
& Initial illumination for system
S03AJ
NOTE check
. When the control dial is turned fully S03AE29
Several of the warning and indicator lights
upward, the illumination brightness
becomes the maximum and the auto- illuminate when the ignition switch is
matic dimming function does not work initially turned to the “ON” position. This
at all. permits checking the operation of the
. The brightness setting is not can- bulbs.
celed even when the ignition switch is Apply the parking brake and turn the
turned to the “LOCK”/“OFF” position. ignition switch to the “ON” position. For
the system check, several of the following
& Auto dimmer cancel function lights illuminate and then turn off after
(if equipped) several seconds or after the engine has
S03AJ01 started.
When the ambient light is bright, the
The illumination brightness of the instru- illumination brightness is set to the max- : Seatbelt warning light: The seatbelt
ment panel illuminates under the following imum regardless of the position of the warning light turns off only when the
conditions. control dial. In this case, you cannot adjust driver fastens the seatbelt.
For models without “AUTO” position: the illumination brightness by using the : Front passenger’s seatbelt warning
. The light switch is in the “ ” or “ ” control dial. When the ambient light is dark, light: The seatbelt warning light turns
position. you can dim the illumination brightness as off only when the front seat passenger
described above. fastens the seatbelt.
For models with “AUTO” position:
. The light switch is in the “ ” or “ ” The operational/non-operational setting : SRS airbag system warning light
position when the ambient light is dark. and sensitivity of the auto dimmer cancel
function can be changed by your SUBARU : Front passenger’s frontal airbag ON
. The light control switch is in the “AUTO” indicator
position and the headlights illuminate dealer. Contact your SUBARU dealer for
automatically. details. : Front passenger’s frontal airbag
OFF indicator
You can adjust the illumination brightness
for better visibility.

(155,1)
Instruments and controls/Warning and indicator 3-13
: CHECK ENGINE warning light/Mal- : Vehicle Dynamics Control OFF indicator

function indicator light light
: Coolant temperature low indicator : Auto Start Stop warning light/Auto Start
light/Coolant temperature high warn- Stop OFF indicator light (yellow) (if
ing light equipped) 3
: Charge warning light : Auto Start Stop indicator light (green) (if
equipped)
: Oil pressure warning light
: Auto Start Stop No Activity Detected
: Engine low oil level warning light indicator light (if equipped)
: Windshield washer fluid warning light If any lights fail to illuminate, it indicates a
: AT OIL TEMP warning light burned-out bulb or a malfunction of the
Driver’s warning light
(CVT models) corresponding system.
Consult your authorized SUBARU dealer
: Low tire pressure warning light for repair.
(U.S.-spec. models)
/ : ABS warning light & Seatbelt warning light
and chime S03AE01
/ : Brake system warning light (red)
Your vehicle is equipped with a seatbelt
: Low fuel warning light warning device at the driver’s and front
: Hill start assist warning light/Hill start passenger’s seat, as required by current
assist OFF indicator light safety standards.
With the ignition switch turned to the “ON”
: AWD warning light (CVT models) position, this device reminds the driver and
: Power steering warning light front passenger to fasten their seatbelts by
illuminating the warning lights in the loca- Front passenger’s warning light
: Vehicle Dynamics Control warning light/ tions indicated in the following illustration
Vehicle Dynamics Control operation and sounding a chime.
indicator light
– CONTINUED –

(156,1)
3-14 Instruments and controls/Warning and indicator
! Operation If there is no passenger on the front the following actions.

S03AE0101
If the driver and/or front passenger have/ passenger’s seat, the seatbelt warning . Ensure that no article is placed on the
has not yet fastened the seatbelt(s) when device for the front passenger’s seat will seat other than a child restraint system and
the ignition switch is turned to the “ON” be deactivated. The front passenger’s its child occupant, although we strongly
position, the seatbelt warning light(s) will seatbelt warning system monitors whether recommend that all children sit in the rear
flash for several seconds, to warn that the or not there is a passenger on the front seat properly restrained.
seatbelt(s) is/are unfastened. If the driver’s passenger’s seat. . Ensure that there is no article left in the
seatbelt is not fastened, a chime will also Observe the following precautions. Failure seatback pocket.
sound simultaneously. to do so may prevent the device from . Ensure that the backward-forward po-
functioning correctly or cause the device to sition and seatback of front passenger’s
NOTE fail. seat are locked into place securely by
. If the driver’s and/or front passen- . Do not install any accessory such as a moving the seat back and forth.
ger’s seatbelt(s) are/is still not fastened table or TV onto the seatback.
6 seconds later, the seatbelt warning . Do not store a heavy load in the If still the seatbelt warning device for front
device operates as follows according seatback pocket. passenger’s seat does not function cor-
to the vehicle speed. . Do not allow the rear seat occupant to rectly after taking relevant corrective ac-
– At speeds lower than approxi- place his/her hands or legs on the front tions described above, immediately con-
mately 9 mph (15 km/h) passenger’s seatback, or allow him/her to tact your SUBARU dealer for an inspec-
The warning light(s) for unfastened pull the seatback. tion.
seatbelt(s) will alternate between . Do not use front seats with their back-
steady illumination and flashing at & SRS airbag system
ward-forward position and seatback not
15-second intervals. The chime will being locked into place securely. If any of warning light S03AE02
not sound. them are not locked securely, adjust them
– At speeds higher than approxi- again. For adjusting procedure, refer to
WARNING
mately 9 mph (15 km/h) “Manual seat” �1-5. If the warning light exhibits any of
The warning light(s) for unfastened
If the seatbelt warning device for the front the following conditions, immedi-
seatbelt(s) will alternate between
passenger’s seat does not function cor- ately stop the vehicle in a safe place,
flashing and steady illumination at
rectly (e.g., it is activated even when the and consult a SUBARU dealer. Un-
15-second intervals and the chime
front passenger’s seat is empty or it is less a technician checks and repairs
will sound while the warning light(s)
deactivated even when the front passen- the system as needed, the seatbelt
is/are flashing.
ger has not fastened his/her seatbelt), take pretensioners and/or the SRS airbag
will not operate properly in the event

(157,1)
of a collision, which may result in & Front passenger’s frontal air- airbag determined by the SUBARU ad-
injury. bag ON and OFF indicators vanced frontal airbag system monitoring.
. Flashing or flickering of the warn-
S03AE03 If the front passenger’s SRS frontal airbag
ing light is activated, the passenger’s frontal airbag
ON indicator will illuminate while the OFF
. No illumination of the warning 3
indicator will remain off.
light when the ignition switch is
first turned to the “ON” position If the front passenger’s SRS frontal airbag
is deactivated, the passenger’s frontal
. Continuous illumination of the airbag ON indicator will remain off while
warning light the OFF indicator will illuminate.
. Illumination of the warning light With the ignition switch turned to the “ON”
while driving position, if both the ON and OFF indicators
remain illuminated or off simultaneously
For details about the components mon- even after the system check period, the
itored by the warning light, refer to “SRS system is malfunctioning. Contact your
airbag system monitors” �1-71. : Front passenger’s frontal airbag ON SUBARU dealer immediately for an in-
indicator spection.
: Front passenger’s frontal airbag OFF
indicator & CHECK ENGINE warn-
The front passenger’s frontal airbag ON ing light/Malfunction
and OFF indicators show you the status of indicator light S03AE04
the front passenger’s SRS frontal airbag.
The indicator is displayed near the map CAUTION
lights.
When the ignition switch is turned to the If the CHECK ENGINE light illumi-
“ON” position, both the ON and OFF nates while you are driving, have
indicators illuminate for 6 seconds during your vehicle checked/repaired by
which time the system is checked. Follow- your SUBARU dealer as soon as
ing the system check, both indicators turn possible. Continued vehicle opera-
off for 2 seconds. After that, one of the tion without having the emission
indicators illuminates depending on the control system checked and re-
status of the front passenger’s SRS frontal paired as necessary could cause
– CONTINUED –

(158,1)
serious damage, which may not be ized SUBARU dealer immediately. & Engine hood open
covered by your vehicle’s warranty. ! If the light is blinking warning light (if
S03AE0402
If the light is blinking while driving, an equipped) S03AE98
If this light illuminates steadily or blinks
while the engine is running, it may indicate engine misfire condition has been de- The warning light illuminates if the engine
that there is at least one problem or tected which may damage the emission hood is not fully closed. This function is
potential problem somewhere in the emis- control system. effective even if the ignition switch is in the
sion control system. To prevent serious damage to the emis- “LOCK”/“OFF” or “ACC” position (all mod-
sion control system, you should do the els) or the key is removed from the ignition
! If the light illuminates steadily following. switch (models without “keyless access
S03AE0401
If the light illuminates steadily while driving . Reduce vehicle speed. with push-button start system”). Always
or does not turn off after the engine starts, . Avoid hard acceleration. make sure this light is not illuminated
an emission control system malfunction . Avoid steep uphill grades. before you start to drive.
has been detected.
. Reduce the amount of cargo, if possi-
You should have your vehicle checked by ble. & Coolant temperature
an authorized SUBARU dealer immedi- low indicator light/
. Stop towing a trailer as soon as
ately. Coolant temperature
possible.
NOTE high warning light S03AE48
The CHECK ENGINE warning light may
This light also illuminates when the fuel stop blinking and illuminate steadily after
filler cap is not tightened until it clicks.
CAUTION
several driving trips. You should have your
If you have recently refueled your vehicle, vehicle checked by an authorized . After turning the ignition switch
the cause of the CHECK ENGINE warning SUBARU dealer immediately. to the “ON” position, if this
light/malfunction indicator light illuminating indicator light/warning light be-
could be a loose or missing fuel filler cap. haves in any of the following
Remove the cap and retighten it until it ways, the electrical system may
clicks. Make sure nothing is interfering with be malfunctioning. Contact your
the sealing of the cap. Tightening the cap SUBARU dealer immediately for
will not make the CHECK ENGINE warn- an inspection.
ing light turn off immediately. It may take – It remains blinking in RED.
several driving trips. If the light does not
– It remains illuminated in RED
turn off, take your vehicle to your author-
for more than 2 seconds.

(159,1)
– It remains blinking in RED and . Illumination in RED indicates overheat- often blinks in RED, the electrical system
BLUE alternately. ing condition of the engine may be malfunctioning. Contact your
. While driving, if this indicator SUBARU dealer for an inspection.
For a system check, this indicator light/
light/warning light behaves in warning light illuminates in RED for ap- NOTE
any of the following ways, take proximately 2 seconds when the ignition
the specified appropriate mea- If the engine is restarted after a certain 3
switch is turned to the “ON” position. After driving condition, this indicator light/
sure listed below. that, this indicator light/warning light warning light may illuminate in RED.
– Blinking or illuminated in changes to BLUE and maintains illumina- However, this is not a malfunction if the
RED: tion in BLUE. This BLUE illuminated light indicator light/warning light turns off
Safely stop the vehicle as turns off when the engine is warmed up after a short time.
soon as possible, and refer to sufficiently.
the emergency steps to take in
the case of engine overheat- If the engine coolant temperature in- & Charge warning light S03AE05
ing. After that, have the sys- creases over the specified range, the
If this light illuminates when the engine is
tem checked by your nearest indicator light/warning light blinks in RED.
running, it may indicate that the charging
SUBARU dealer. Refer to “En- At this time, the engine is close to over-
system is not working properly.
gine overheating” �9-12. heating.
If the light illuminates while driving or does
– Blinking in RED and BLUE If the engine coolant temperature in-
not turn off after the engine starts, stop the
alternately: creases further, the indicator light/warning
engine at the first safe opportunity and
The electrical system may be light illuminates in RED continuously. At
check the drive belt. If the belt is loose,
malfunctioning. Contact your this time, the engine may be overheating.
broken or if the belt is in good condition but
SUBARU dealer for an inspec- the light remains illuminated, contact your
When the indicator light/warning light
tion. nearest SUBARU dealer immediately.
blinks in RED or illuminates in RED, safely
stop the vehicle as soon as possible, and
This coolant temperature low indicator & Oil pressure warning
refer to the emergency steps to take in the
light/coolant temperature high warning
light has the following three functions.
case of engine overheating. Refer to light S03AE06
“Engine overheating” �9-12. After that,
. Illumination in BLUE indicates insuffi- have the system checked by your nearest If this light illuminates when the engine is
cient warming up of the engine SUBARU dealer. running, it may indicate that the engine oil
. Blinking in RED indicates that the pressure is low and the lubricating system
engine is close to overheating Also, if the indicator light/warning light is not working properly.
– CONTINUED –

(160,1)
If the light illuminates while driving or does a SUBARU dealer. and let the engine idle until the warning
not turn off after the engine starts, stop the light turns off.
engine at the first safe opportunity and NOTE
. The oil level will be detected by the ! Transmission control system warn-
contact your nearest SUBARU dealer
system just after turning the ignition ing
immediately. S03AE0701
switch to the OFF position. If the oil If the “AT OIL TEMP” warning light flashes
CAUTION level is below the lower limit when the after the engine has started, it may indicate
ignition switch is turned to the ON that the transmission control system is not
Do not operate the engine with the position, the engine low oil level warn- working properly. Contact your nearest
oil pressure warning light illumi- ing light will turn on. SUBARU dealer for service immediately.
nated. This may cause serious en- . When the vehicle is parked on a
gine damage. steep slope, the engine low oil level & Low tire pressure
warning light may not illuminate even if warning light (U.S.-
the oil level is below the lower limit to spec. models)
& Engine low oil level avoid erroneous lighting.
S03AE08
warning light S03AE58

When the ignition switch is turned to the
“ON” position, the low tire pressure warn-
This light illuminates when the engine oil & Windshield washer ing light will illuminate for approximately 2
level decreases to the lower limit. fluid warning light S03AE42 seconds to check that the tire pressure
If the warning light illuminates, check the monitoring system (TPMS) is functioning
This light illuminates when the fluid level in
engine oil level on a level surface. When properly. If there is no problem and all tires
the windshield washer fluid tank de-
the engine oil level is not within the normal are properly inflated, the light will turn off.
creases to the lower limit (approximately
range, refill with engine oil. Refer to Each tire, including the spare (if provided),
0.6 US qt (0.6 liters, 0.5 Imp qt)).
“Engine oil” �11-8. After adding or chan- should be checked monthly when cold and
ging the engine oil, warm up the engine inflated to the inflation pressure recom-
and stop it on a level surface, then start the
& AT OIL TEMP warning
light (CVT models) mended by the vehicle manufacturer on
engine after a lapse of 1 minute or more. S03AE07
the vehicle placard or tire inflation pres-
Confirm that the warning light has turned If this light illuminates when the engine is sure label. (If your vehicle has tires of a
off after the engine has started. If the running, it may indicate that the transmis- different size than the size indicated on the
warning light does not turn off after refilling sion fluid temperature is too hot. vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure
the engine oil, or the light illuminates even label, you should determine the proper tire
though the engine oil level is within the If the light illuminates while driving, im-
inflation pressure for those tires.)
normal range, have the vehicle checked by mediately stop the vehicle in a safe place

(161,1)
As an added safety feature, your vehicle as the malfunction exists. When the mal- driving straight ahead while gradu-
has been equipped with a tire pressure function indicator is illuminated, the sys- ally reducing speed. Then slowly
monitoring system (TPMS) that illuminates tem may not be able to detect or signal low pull off the road to a safe place.
a low tire pressure telltale when one or tire pressure as intended. TPMS malfunc- Otherwise an accident involving
more of your tires is significantly under- tions may occur for a variety of reasons, serious vehicle damage and serious
inflated. Accordingly, when the low tire including the installation of replacement or personal injury could occur. 3
pressure telltale illuminates, you should alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that If this light still illuminates while
stop and check your tires as soon as prevent the TPMS from functioning prop- driving after adjusting the tire pres-
possible, and inflate them to the proper erly. Always check the TPMS malfunction sure, a tire may have significant
pressure. Driving on a significantly under- telltale after replacing one or more tires or damage and a fast leak that causes
inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the the tire to lose air rapidly. If you have
can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also replacement or alternate tires and wheels a flat tire, replace it with a spare tire
reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, allow the TPMS to continue to function as soon as possible.
and may affect the vehicle’s handling and properly.
stopping ability. When a spare tire is mounted or a
Should the warning light illuminate steadily
wheel rim is replaced without the
Please note that the TPMS is not a after blinking for approximately one min-
original pressure sensor/transmitter
substitute for proper tire maintenance, ute, have the system inspected by your
being transferred, the Low tire pres-
and it is the driver’s responsibility to nearest SUBARU dealer as soon as
sure warning light will illuminate
maintain correct tire pressure, even if possible.
steadily after blinking for approxi-
under-inflation has not reached the level
WARNING mately one minute. This indicates
to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire
the TPMS is unable to monitor all
pressure telltale.
If this light does not illuminate four road wheels. Contact your
Your vehicle has also been equipped with SUBARU dealer as soon as possible
briefly after the ignition switch is
a TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate for tire and sensor replacement and/
turned on or the light illuminates
when the system is not operating properly. or system resetting.
steadily after blinking for approxi-
The TPMS malfunction indicator is com-
mately one minute, you should have If the light illuminates steadily after
bined with the low tire pressure telltale.
your Tire Pressure Monitoring Sys- blinking for approximately one min-
When the system detects a malfunction,
tem checked at a SUBARU dealer as ute, promptly contact a SUBARU
the telltale will flash for approximately one
soon as possible. dealer to have the system inspected.
minute and then remain continuously
illuminated. This sequence will continue If this light illuminates while driving,
upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as long never brake suddenly and keep
– CONTINUED –

(162,1)
CAUTION SUBARU dealer. the ABS may be considered normal.

– The warning light does not . The warning light illuminates when
The tire pressure monitoring system illuminate when the ignition the ignition switch is turned to the “ON”
is NOT a substitute for manually switch is turned to the “ON” position and turns off approximately 2
checking tire pressure. The tire position. seconds after the engine has started.
pressure should be checked peri- . The warning light illuminates right
– The warning light illuminates
odically (at least monthly) using a after the engine is started but turns off
when the ignition switch is
tire gauge. After any change to tire immediately, remaining off.
turned to the “ON” position,
pressure(s), the tire pressure mon- . The warning light remains illumi-
but it does not turn off even
itoring system will not re-check tire nated after the engine has been started,
after the vehicle is started.
inflation pressures until the vehicle but it turns off while driving.
is first driven more than 20 mph (32 – The warning light illuminates . The warning light illuminates during
km/h). After adjusting the tire pres- during driving. driving, but it turns off immediately and
sures, increase the vehicle speed to . When the warning light is on (and remains off.
at least 20 mph (32 km/h) to start the the brake system warning light is When driving with an insufficient battery
TPMS re-checking of the tire infla- off), the ABS function shuts voltage such as when the engine is jump
tion pressures. If the tire pressures down. However, the conventional started, the ABS warning light may illumi-
are now above the severe low pres- brake system continues to oper- nate. This is due to the low battery voltage
sure threshold, the low tire pressure ate normally. and does not indicate a malfunction. When
warning light should turn off a few the battery becomes fully charged, the
minutes later. Therefore, be sure to The ABS warning light, Vehicle Dynamics light will turn off.
install the specified size for the front Control warning light, and brake system
and rear tires. warning light illuminate simultaneously if & Brake system
the EBD system malfunctions. For further warning light (red) S03AE10
details of the EBD system malfunction
& ABS warning light S03AE09 warning, refer to “Electronic Brake Force This light illuminates with the parking
Distribution (EBD) system warning” �3- brake applied while the ignition switch is
CAUTION 21. in the “ON” position. It turns off when the
parking brake is fully released.
. If any of the following conditions NOTE
occur, we recommend that you If the warning light behavior is as WARNING
have the ABS repaired at the first described in the following conditions,
available opportunity by your . Driving with the brake system

(163,1)
warning light on is dangerous. SUBARU dealer for repair. seconds, shut down the engine, apply the
This indicates your brake system ! Electronic Brake Force Distribution parking brake and check the brake fluid
may not be working properly. If (EBD) system warning level.
the light remains illuminated, S03AE1003
The EBD system may be malfunctioning if . If the brake fluid level is not below the
have the brakes inspected by a
the brake system warning light / , “MIN” mark, the EBD system may be 3
SUBARU dealer immediately.
Vehicle Dynamics Control warning light malfunctioning. Drive carefully to the
. If at all in doubt about whether the and ABS warning light / illuminate nearest SUBARU dealer and have the
brakes are operating properly, do simultaneously during driving. system inspected.
not drive the vehicle. Have your Even if the EBD system fails, the conven- . If the brake fluid level is below the “MIN”
vehicle towed to the nearest tional braking system will still function. mark, DO NOT drive the vehicle. Instead,
SUBARU dealer for repair. However, the rear wheels will be more have the vehicle towed to the nearest
prone to locking when the brakes are SUBARU dealer for repair.
The brake system warning light has the applied harder than usual and the vehicle’s
following functions. ! Vacuum pressure system warning
motion may therefore become somewhat S03AE1006
harder to control. The brake system warning light / will

! Brake fluid level warning S03AE1002
illuminate when the vacuum pressure
This light illuminates when the brake fluid If the brake system warning light / ,
sensor is malfunctioning or brake booster
level has dropped to near the “MIN” level of Vehicle Dynamics Control warning light
pressure is decreasing.
the brake fluid reservoir with the ignition and ABS warning light / illuminate
simultaneously, take the following steps. If the brake warning light continues to
switch in the “ON” position and with the illuminate for several minutes after starting
parking brake fully released. 1. Stop the vehicle in the nearest safe, flat
the engine, there may be a malfunction in
location.
If the brake system warning light should the vacuum system. In this case, drive the
2. Shut down the engine, apply the vehicle carefully and have the system
illuminate while driving (with the parking parking brake and then restart it.
brake fully released and with the ignition inspected by a SUBARU dealer.
3. Fully release the parking brake.
switch positioned in “ON”), it could be an
4. Even if all the warning lights do not
& Low fuel warning light S03AE11
indication of leaking of brake fluid or worn
brake pads. If this occurs, immediately come back on, the EBD system may have The low fuel warning light illuminates when
stop the vehicle at the nearest safe a possible malfunction. Drive carefully to the tank is nearly empty, at approximately
location and check the brake fluid level. If the nearest SUBARU dealer and have the 2.5 US gal (9.5 liters, 2.1 Imp gal). It only
the fluid level is below the “MIN” mark in system inspected. operates when the ignition switch is in the
the reservoir, do not drive the vehicle. 5. If all the warning lights stay illuminated “ON” position.
Have the vehicle towed to the nearest or come back on after approximately 2
– CONTINUED –

(164,1)
CAUTION & Door open warning powertrain damage.

light
Promptly put fuel in the tank when- S03AE12
ever the low fuel warning light The warning light illuminates if any door or NOTE
illuminates. Engine misfires as a the rear gate is not fully closed. This If the temporary spare tire is used, the
result of an empty tank could cause function is effective even if the ignition AWD warning light may flash. Use of the
damage to the engine. switch is in the “LOCK”/“OFF” or “ACC” temporary spare tire should therefore
position, or the key is removed from the be restricted to the minimum time
ignition switch. necessary. Replace the temporary
& Hill start assist warning For some models, only the open doors are spare tire with a conventional tire as
light/Hill start assist indicated by the warning lights. soon as possible.
OFF indicator light S03AE47
Always make sure this light is not illumi- & Power steering warning
! Hill start assist warning light nated before you start to drive.
S03AE4701 light S03AE53
While the engine is running, if there are
any malfunctions in the Hill start assist & All-Wheel Drive warn- While the engine is running, this warning
system, the warning light will illuminate. ing light (CVT models) S03AE13
light illuminates when a malfunction has
been detected in the electric power steer-
This light blinks if the vehicle is driven with ing system.
WARNING tires of differing diameters fitted on the
When the Hill start assist warning wheels or with an excessively low air CAUTION
light illuminates, have the vehicle pressure in any of the tires.
inspected at an authorized SUBARU When the power steering warning
dealer. WARNING light is illuminated, there may be
more resistance when the steering
If the AWD warning light flashes, wheel is operated. Drive carefully to
! Hill start assist OFF indicator light promptly park in a safe location then the nearest SUBARU dealer and
S03AE4702
While the Hill start assist system is check whether all four tires are the have the vehicle inspected immedi-
deactivated, the Hill start assist OFF same diameter and whether any of ately.
indicator light illuminates continuously to the tires has a puncture or has lost
inform the driver that the Hill start assist air pressure for some other reason.
system is not operational. Continuing to drive with the AWD
warning light flashing can lead to

(165,1)
NOTE & Vehicle Dynamics Con- NOTE

If the steering wheel is operated in the trol warning light/Vehi- . If the electrical circuit of the Vehicle
following ways, the power steering cle Dynamics Control Dynamics Control system itself mal-
control system may temporarily limit operation indicator functions, the warning light only illumi-
the power assist in order to prevent the light S03AE14
nates. At this time, the ABS (Anti-lock 3
system components, such as the con- Brake System) remains fully opera-
trol computer and drive motor, from ! Vehicle Dynamics Control warning tional.
overheating. light . The warning light illuminates when
S03AE1401
. The steering wheel is operated fre- the electronic control system of the
quently and turned sharply while the CAUTION ABS/Vehicle Dynamics Control system
vehicle is maneuvered at extremely low malfunctions.
The Vehicle Dynamics Control sys- . The Vehicle Dynamics Control warn-
speeds, such as while frequently turn-
tem provides its ABS control ing light, ABS warning light, and brake
ing the steering wheel during parallel
through the electrical circuit of the system warning light illuminate simul-
parking.
ABS. Accordingly, if the ABS is taneously if the EBD system malfunc-
. The steering wheel remains in the
inoperative, the Vehicle Dynamics tions. For further details of the EBD
fully turned position for a long period of
Control system becomes unable to system malfunction warning, refer to
time.
provide ABS control. As a result, the “Electronic Brake Force Distribution
At this time, there will be more resis- Vehicle Dynamics Control system (EBD) system warning” �3-21.
tance when steering. However this is also becomes inoperative, causing
the warning light to illuminate. The Vehicle Dynamics Control system is
not a malfunction. Normal steering
Although both the Vehicle Dynamics probably inoperative under any of the
force will be restored after the steering
Control system and ABS are inop- following conditions. Have your vehicle
wheel is not operated for a while and
erative in this case, the ordinary checked at a SUBARU dealer immedi-
the power steering control system has
functions of the brake system are ately.
an opportunity to cool down. However,
if the power steering is operated in a still available. You will be safe while . The warning light does not illuminate
non-standard way which causes power driving with this condition, but drive when the ignition switch is turned to the
assist limitation to occur too frequently, carefully and have your vehicle “ON” position.
that may result in a malfunction of the checked at a SUBARU dealer as . The warning light illuminates while the
power steering control system. soon as possible. vehicle is running.
– CONTINUED –

(166,1)
ately.
NOTE NOTE
. The light does not illuminate when the
If the warning light behavior is as . The light may remain illuminated for ignition switch is turned to the “ON”
described in the following examples, a short period of time after the engine position.
the Vehicle Dynamics Control system has been started, especially in cold
may be considered normal. weather. This does not indicate the . The light does not turn off even once
existence of a problem. The light several seconds have elapsed after the
. The warning light illuminates when ignition switch has been turned to the “ON”
the ignition switch is turned to the “ON” should turn off as soon as the engine
has warmed up. position.
position and turns off approximately 2
seconds after the engine has started. . The indicator light illuminates when
the engine has developed a problem & Warning chimes and
. The warning light illuminates right
after the engine is started but turns off and the CHECK ENGINE warning light/ warning indicator of the
immediately, remaining off. malfunction indicator light is on. keyless access with
. The warning light illuminates after The Vehicle Dynamics Control system is push-button start sys-
the engine has started and turns off probably malfunctioning under the follow- tem (if equipped) S03AE55
while the vehicle is subsequently being ing condition. Have your vehicle checked
driven. at a SUBARU dealer as soon as possible.
. The warning light illuminates during . The light does not turn off even after the
driving, but it turns off immediately and lapse of several minutes (the engine has
remains off. warmed up) after the engine has started.
. The warning light illuminates when
the engine has stalled and continues to & Vehicle Dynamics Con-
illuminate after the engine has been
restarted. However, it will turn off once
trol OFF indicator light S03AE15
the vehicle starts moving. The light illuminates when the Vehicle
Dynamics Control OFF switch is pressed
! Vehicle Dynamics Control operation to deactivate the Vehicle Dynamics Con-
indicator light trol system.
S03AE1402
The indicator light flashes during activation
The Vehicle Dynamics Control system is Access key warning indicator
of the skid suppression function and during
activation of the traction control function. probably malfunctioning under any of the The keyless access with push-button start
following conditions. Have your vehicle system sounds a warning chime and
checked at a SUBARU dealer immedi- flashes the access key warning indicator

(167,1)
on the combination meter in order to SUBARU dealer immediately.

minimize improper operations and help
protect your vehicle from theft.
When the warning chime sounds and/or NOTE
the warning indicator flashes, take the . Even when the access key fob is
appropriate action. within the operating ranges inside the 3
vehicle, the access key warning for
WARNING engine start may be provided depend-
ing on the status of the access key fob
Never drive the vehicle if the indica- and the environmental conditions.
tor on the push-button ignition . When the access key fob is taken out
switch is flashing in green when of the vehicle through an open window,
starting the engine. This indicates the access key fob takeout warning or
the status that the steering wheel is passenger access key fob takeout
not released and could result in an warning will not be provided.
accident involving serious injury or
death. ! List of warnings
S03AE5504
CAUTION
CAUTION
When any of the following warnings
. When starting the engine again occurs even if the access key warn-
after the operation indicator on ing indicator does not appear, take
the push-button ignition switch the appropriate action.
flashes in green, if the operation
indicator is still flashing in green,
there could be a steering lock
malfunction. Contact your
SUBARU dealer as soon as pos-
sible.
. When the operation indicator on
the push-button ignition switch
flashes in orange, contact a
– CONTINUED –

(168,1)
Inside warning Outside warning Operation indicator

chime chime on push-button igni- Status Action
tion switch
The driver’s door was opened while the Switch the push-button ignition switch to
push-button ignition switch is “ACC” (in “OFF”, or close the driver’s door.
CVT models, when the select lever is in When exiting the vehicle, be sure to
Ding, ding ... the “P” position). switch the push-button ignition switch to
(intermittent) — — “OFF”.
The push-button ignition switch was
switched to “OFF” while the driver’s door Close the driver’s door.
is open.
Take out the access key fob from the
Lockout warning: vehicle, and lock the doors.
Ding Short beep — An attempt was made to lock all doors The doors cannot be locked while the
(2 seconds) while the access key fob is left inside the access key fob is inside the vehicle.
vehicle. A chirp sound will be heard, and all doors
will be unlocked.
Access key fob lock-in warning: Take out the access key fob from the
Short beep The door lock sensor was touched while vehicle, and lock the doors.
— (2 seconds) — the push-button ignition switch is “OFF” If the access key fob is inside the vehicle,
and the access key fob is inside the the doors cannot be locked.
vehicle.
Door ajar warning:
Beep, beep, beep, The door lock sensor is touched while the Close the doors securely and lock them.
— beep, beep — ignition switch is in the “OFF” position and If one of the doors including the rear gate
(5 times) one of the doors including the rear gate is is opened, the doors cannot be locked.
opened.
Power warning: Return the access key fob inside the
The door lock sensor was touched while vehicle, or switch the push-button ignition
Ding Long beep (60 — carrying the access key fob, the push- switch to “OFF”.
seconds max.) button ignition switch is in a position other If the push-button ignition switch is not
than “OFF” (in CVT models, when the switched to “OFF”, the doors cannot be
select lever is in the “P” position). locked.
Ding, ding ... Access key warning: Carry the access key fob, and drive the
(7 seconds) — — The vehicle was driven while the access vehicle.
key fob is not inside the vehicle.

(169,1)

tion switch
Access key warning for engine start:
Ding — — The push-button ignition switch was Carry the access key fob, and press the
pressed while the access key fob is not push-button ignition switch.
inside the vehicle. 3
Access key takeout warning:
The driver exited the vehicle with the
Beep, beep, beep access key fob and closed the driver’s Switch the push-button ignition switch to
Ding (3 times) — door while the push-button ignition switch “OFF”, and get out of the vehicle.
is in a position other than “OFF” (in CVT
models, when the select lever is in the “P”
position).
Passenger access key takeout warn-
ing:
Beep, beep, beep A fellow passenger exited the vehicle with Return the access key fob to inside the
Ding (3 times) — the access key fob and closed a door vehicle, or switch the push-button ignition
other than the driver’s door while the switch to “OFF”.
push-button ignition switch is in a position
other than “OFF”.
Access key takeout without P position
warning (CVT models):
The driver exited the vehicle with the Shift the select lever to the “P” position,
Long beep Long beep — access key fob and closed the driver’s switch the push-button ignition switch to
(continuous) (continuous) door while the push-button ignition switch “OFF” and exit the vehicle.
is in a position other than “OFF” and the
select lever is in a position other than the
“P” position.
Select lever position warning (CVT
models): Start the engine, shift the select lever to
Long beep — — The engine is turned off by pressing the the “P” position, switch the push-button
(continuous) push-button ignition switch and the select ignition switch to “OFF” and exit the
lever is in a position other than the “P” vehicle.
position.
– CONTINUED –

(170,1)

tion switch
Select lever position warning (CVT
models): Shift the select lever to the “P” position,
Long beep — — The driver’s door was opened while the switch the push-button ignition switch to
(continuous) push-button ignition switch is in a position “OFF” and exit the vehicle.
other than “OFF” and the select lever is in
a position other than the “P” position.
Ding — — The battery of the access key fob is low. Replace the battery of the access key fob.
Flashes in green Steering lock warning: While turning the steering wheel right and
Ding — (15 seconds max.) The engine start procedure was per- left lightly, depress the brake pedal and
formed, but the steering is still locked. press the push-button ignition switch.
Flashes in orange System malfunction warning: Contact a SUBARU dealer immediately

Ding — (15 seconds max.) A malfunction was detected in the power and have the vehicle inspected.
system or steering lock.

(171,1)
& Security indicator light S03AE16

For models without “keyless access “ACC” position and the driver’s
with push-button start system”: door has not been opened or closed
This indicator light shows the status of the . Immediately after the key is pulled out.
alarm system. It also indicates operation of Models without “keyless access
the immobilizer system. . Approximately 60 seconds after the with push-button start system”:
ignition switch is turned from the “ON”
! Alarm system – While the engine is running 3
position to the “ACC” or “LOCK” position.
S03AE1601 – When the ignition switch is in the
It blinks to show the driver the operational If the indicator light does not blink in the “ON” position
status of the alarm system. For detailed above conditions, it may indicate that – For approximately 60 seconds
information, refer to “Alarm system” �2- immobilizer system may be malfunction- after the ignition switch is turned
24. ing. Contact your nearest SUBARU dealer from the “ON” position to the “ACC”
! Immobilizer system immediately. or “LOCK” position
S03AE1602
The security indicator light starts blinking In the event that an unauthorized key (for
in the following conditions. . Even if a malfunction occurs, such
example, an unauthorized duplicate) is as the security indicator light flashes
For models with “keyless access with used to start the engine, the security irregularly, it will not affect the func-
push-button start system”: indicator light illuminates. For details about tionality of the immobilizer system.
. Immediately after the push-button igni- the immobilizer system, refer to “Immobi-
tion switch is turned to the “OFF” position. lizer” �2-15.
. Immediately after the driver’s door is NOTE
opened or closed when all of the following . The security indicator light remains
conditions are met. off in the following conditions. It means
– The push-button ignition switch is in that the matching of the ID code is
the “ON” or “ACC” position. completed and the immobilizer system
– The engine is not running. is deactivated, and it does not indicate
a malfunction.
In the event that an unauthorized key is
used (for example, the key is unregistered Models with “keyless access with
or the ID code does not match), the power push-button start system”:
is not switched to “ON” and the security – While the engine is running
indicator light continues blinking. – The push-button ignition switch
has been turned to the “ON” or
– CONTINUED –

(172,1)
& SI-DRIVE indicator light (if & Select lever/gear position in-
equipped) dicator
S03AE52 S03AE43
Type B
1) Upshift indicator
2) Downshift indicator
1) Intelligent (I) mode indicator Type A 3) Select lever/gear position indicator
2) Sport (S) mode indicator 1) Gear position indicator
This indicator shows the position of the
This light indicates the current SI-DRIVE select lever.
mode.
For models with manual mode, when the
For details of SI-DRIVE mode, refer to manual mode is selected, the gear position
“SI-DRIVE” �7-33. indicator (which shows the current gear
selection) and the upshift/downshift indi-
cator light up. Refer to “Continuously
variable transmission” �7-26.

(173,1)
& Turn signal indicator & Cruise control indicator & Automatic headlight
lights S03AE20 light (if equipped) S03AE22 beam leveler warning
These lights show the operation of the turn This light illuminates when the cruise light (models with LED
signal or lane change signal. control main button is pressed to activate headlights) S03AE33
If the indicator lights do not blink or blink the cruise control function. For details, This light illuminates when the automatic 3
rapidly, the turn signal bulb may be burned refer to “To set cruise control” �7-53. headlight beam leveler does not operate
out. Replace the bulb as soon as possible. If this light blinks, do not use the cruise normally.
Refer to “Replacing bulbs” �11-38. control. In addition, if it blinks frequently, If this light illuminates during driving, have
contact your SUBARU dealer for an your vehicle inspected at your SUBARU
& High beam indicator inspection. dealer.
light S03AE21
CAUTION & LED headlight warning
This light shows that the headlights are in
the high beam mode. If the CHECK ENGINE warning light/ light (models with LED
This indicator light also illuminates when malfunction indicator light illumi- headlights) S03AE76
the headlight flasher is operated. nates, the cruise control indicator

This light illuminates if the LED headlights
light flashes at the same time. At this
malfunction. Have your vehicle inspected
& High beam assist indi- time, avoid driving at high speed and
at a SUBARU dealer as soon as possible.
cator light (if equipped) S03AE83
have your vehicle inspected at a
SUBARU dealer as soon as possi-
This light illuminates when the high beam ble.
& Steering Responsive
assist function is activated. For details Headlight warning light/
about the high beam assist function, refer Steering Responsive
to “High beam assist function” �3-72. & Cruise control set indi- Headlight OFF indicator
cator light (if equipped) S03AE23 light (if equipped) S03AE89
This light illuminates when vehicle speed This light illuminates when the Steering
has been set to use the cruise control Responsive Headlight OFF switch is
function. Refer to “To set cruise control” pressed to deactivate the Steering Re-
�7-53. sponsive Headlight. Also, the light flashes
when a malfunction occurs in the Steering
Responsive Headlight. Refer to “Steering
– CONTINUED –

(174,1)
Responsive Headlight (SRH)” �3-75. mend that you have your vehicle & Auto Start Stop indica-
inspected at a SUBARU author- tor light (green) (if
& Front fog light indicator ized dealer as soon as possible. equipped) S03AE66
light (if equipped) S03AE25 . If the Auto Start Stop warning
light is illuminated in yellow at This indicator light illuminates when the
This indicator light illuminates while the engine has been temporarily stopped by
front fog lights are illuminated. any time other than in the follow-
ing cases and will not turn off the Auto Start Stop system. It will turn off
even if the Auto Start Stop OFF when the engine is restarted.
& Headlight indicator
light (if equipped) switch is pushed and held, we
S03AE24
recommend that you have your & Auto Start Stop No
This indicator light illuminates under the vehicle inspected at a SUBARU Activity Detected indi-
following conditions. dealer as soon as possible. cator light (if equipped) S03AEA3
. The light switch is turned to the “ ” or When a vehicle is stopped, the indicator
“ ” position. The Auto Start Stop warning light will
light illuminates when the operating con-
. The light control switch is in the “AUTO” illuminate in yellow if you open the engine
dition of the Auto Start Stop system is not
position and the headlights illuminate hood when the engine has been tempora-
met. The light will turn off when the vehicle
automatically. rily stopped by the Auto Start Stop system.
starts driving.
In this case, to ensure safety, the engine
& Auto Start Stop warning will not be automatically restarted, even if
light/Auto Start Stop you release the brake pedal. Use normal
OFF indicator light (yel- operation to restart the engine.
low) (if equipped) S03AE65
! Auto Start Stop OFF indicator light
(yellow)
! Auto Start Stop warning light (yel- S03AE6502
This light will illuminate in yellow when the
low) Auto Start Stop OFF switch is pressed to
S03AE6501
prevent the Auto Start Stop system from
CAUTION operating. It will turn off when the Auto
Start Stop OFF switch is pressed once
. If the Auto Start Stop warning
more to enable operation of the Auto Start
light is flashing in yellow, there
Stop system.
may be a malfunction in the Auto
Start Stop system. We recom-

(175,1)
& X-MODE indicator (if & BSD/RCTA warning in-

equipped) dicator (if equipped) S03AE80
S03AE68
This warning indicator appears when the
BSD/RCTA is malfunctioning. In this case
the BSD/RCTA warning indicator will be 3
shown on the combination meter display
(color LCD). When this indicator appears,
have your vehicle inspected by your
SUBARU dealer as soon as possible.
& BSD/RCTA OFF indica-

tor (if equipped) S03AE86
X-MODE indicator (models with 2 modes)
1) DEEP SNOW·MUD mode indicator The indicator appears when the BSD/
2) SNOW·DIRT mode indicator RCTA OFF switch is pressed to deactivate
X-MODE indicator (models with 1 mode) the BSD/RCTA, or when the BSD/RCTA is
This indicator appears while the X-MODE suspended temporarily. In this case the
is activated. It will disappear when the BSD/RCTA OFF indicator will be shown on
X-MODE is deactivated. Refer to “To the combination meter display (color
activate/deactivate the X-MODE” �7-44. LCD). For details, refer to “BSD/RCTA”
�7-63.
& Hill descent control in-
dicator (if equipped) S03AE69 & RAB warning indica-
This indicator appears while the hill des- tor (if equipped)
S03AE91
cent control function is in standby. It will This indicator illuminates if the Reverse
flash while the hill descent control function Automatic Braking (RAB) system malfunc-
is operating. It will disappear when the hill tions. Refer to “Reverse Automatic Brak-
descent control function is not available. ing (RAB) system” �7-72.
Refer to “Hill descent control function” �7-
45.
– CONTINUED –

(176,1)
3-34 Instruments and controls/Combination meter display (color LCD)
& RAB OFF indicator (if – When starting the engine after Combination meter display
equipped) being parked for a certain period of
S03AE92
time
(color LCD) (if equipped)
S03BN
This indicator illuminates when the Re- . The icy road surface warning screen
verse Automatic Braking (RAB) system is should be treated only as a guide. Be WARNING
turned OFF, or when the Reverse Auto- sure to check the condition of the road
matic Braking (RAB) system is suspended surface before driving. Always pay adequate attention to
temporarily. Refer to “Reverse Automatic . Once the icy road surface warning safe driving when operating the
Braking (RAB) system” �7-72. screen appears, it will not disappear combination meter display (color
unless the outside temperature has LCD) while the vehicle is in motion.
& Icy road surface warn- increased to 418F (58C) or higher. When operation of the combination
ing indicator (if meter display (color LCD) interferes
equipped) S03AE82 with your ability to concentrate on
When the outside temperature is 378F driving, stop the vehicle before
(38C) or less, the icy road surface warning performing operations on the
will illuminate to inform the driver that the screen. Also, do not concentrate on
road surface may be frozen. the display while driving. Doing so
may cause you to look away from the
NOTE road and could result in an accident.
. The outside temperature indicator
shows the temperature around the Various information will be shown on the
sensor. However, the temperature may combination meter display (color LCD).
not be indicated correctly or the update Also, a warning message will appear on
may be delayed in the following condi- the display if a malfunction is detected. In
tions. addition, several settings for the displayed
– While parking or driving at low content can be performed.
speeds
– When the outside temperature
changes suddenly (example: when
going in and out of an underground
parking area or when passing
through a tunnel)

(177,1)
Instruments and controls/Combination meter display (color LCD) 3-35

5) Telltale screen (Refer to “Telltale screen”
�3-37.) & Basic operation
S03BN01
6) Select lever/gear position indicator (Re-
fer to “Select lever/gear position indica-
tor” �3-30.)
7) X-MODE indicator (if equipped) (Refer to
“X-MODE indicator” �3-33.)/SI-DRIVE 3
indicator (if equipped) (Refer to
“SI-DRIVE” �7-33.)
8) Odometer (Refer to “Odometer” �3-9.)/
Double trip meter (Refer to “Double trip
meter” �3-9.)
9) Fuel gauge (Refer to “Fuel gauge” �3-
10.)
A: Deactivating the EyeSight system or
models without the EyeSight system
B: Activating the EyeSight system
Control switch
1) (Up)
2) /SET (Enter)
3) (Down)
By operating “ ” or “ ” of the control
switch, the screens and selection items
can be switched. When the “ /SET”
switch is pulled toward you, the item can
be selected and set.
If there are some useful messages, such
Combination meter display (color LCD) as vehicle information, warning informa-
1) ECO gauge (Refer to “ECO gauge” �3- tion, etc., they will interrupt the current
10.) screen, and appear on the display accom-
2) Warning screen (Refer to “Warning panied by a beep. If such a screen is
screen” �3-36.)/Basic screen (Refer to displayed, take proper action according to
“Basic screens” �3-38.) the message shown on the screen.
3) EyeSight screen
4) Cruise control information display
– CONTINUED –

(178,1)
The warning screen will return to the

NOTE & Warning screen
original screen after a few seconds. While S03BN05
the “ ” information reminder is shown on . The welcome screen and the good-
the display, it may be possible to display bye screen may differ in the actual
the warning screen again. To recall the words and appearance.
message marked with “ ” on the display, . Once the welcome screen appears, it
pull the “ /SET” switch on the steering takes a certain period of time to display
wheel toward you. it again.
. If the ignition switch is operated
NOTE after unlocking the driver’s door, the
When the multi-function display (color welcome screen will not appear even
LCD) is set to the setting screen, the when the driver’s door is opened and
combination meter display (color LCD) closed.
cannot be controlled pulling on the . The welcome screen will disappear
“ ”, “ ” and “ /SET” on the control when you lock the driver’s door by
using the remote keyless entry system Example of warning
switch.
(all models) or the keyless access If there is a warning message or a
function (if equipped) while the wel- maintenance notification, it will appear on
& Welcome screen (opening come screen is displayed. this screen. Take the appropriate actions
animation) and Good-bye . The welcome screen including the based on the messages indicated.
screen (ending animation) multi-function display (color LCD) (if
S03BN08
When the driver’s door is opened and equipped) and the audio/navigation
closed after unlocking the door, the wel- unit can be set to on or off. For details,
come screen (opening animation) will refer to “Welcome Screen” �3-41.
appear on the combination meter display
(color LCD) for approximately 20 seconds.
“LOCK”/“OFF” position, the combination
meter display (color LCD) gradually turns
off with showing Good-bye screen (ending
animation).

(179,1)
& Telltale screen Mark Name Page

Mark Name Page
S03BN09
Auto Start Stop warning
light/Auto Start Stop 3-32
Door open warning light 3-22 OFF light (yellow) (if
equipped)
LED headlight warning Auto Start Stop No Ac- 3
light (models with LED 3-31 tivity Detected indicator 3-32
headlights) light (if equipped)
High beam assist indi- Auto Start Stop indica-
cator light (if equipped) 3-31 tor light (green) (if 3-32
equipped)
Steering Responsive
Headlight warning light 3-31 Windshield washer fluid 3-18
(if equipped) warning light
Engine low oil level 3-18 Hill descent control in-

1) Telltale screen warning light dicator (if equipped) 3-33
When the corresponding situation occurs, RAB warning indicator Icy road surface warn-
the following telltales will be displayed on (if equipped) 3-33 ing indicator (if 3-34
the telltale screen. equipped)
RAB OFF indicator (if Engine hood open
NOTE equipped) 3-34
warning light (if 3-16
When there is warning information to equipped)
display, it will be displayed in five BSD/RCTA warning in- 3-33
warning indicators, starting on the left dicator (if equipped)
in ascending order of severity. If there
are six or more warning information BSD/RCTA OFF indi- 3-33
displayed, pull the “ /SET” switch and cator (if equipped)
check the item. Automatic headlight
beam leveler warning 3-31
light (models with LED
headlights)
– CONTINUED –

(180,1)
& Basic screens Current fuel consumption screen: Driving information screen:
S03BN06
By operating the “ ” or “ ” switch on the
steering wheel, you can change the screen
that is always displayed.
Average fuel consumption screen:
: Current fuel consumption : Journey time

: Driving range on remaining fuel : Journey distance
This screen displays the rate of fuel This screen displays the journey time (the
consumption at the present moment. time that has elapsed since the ignition
switch was turned to the “ON” position)
: Average fuel consumption NOTE and journey distance (the distance that
: Driving range on remaining fuel
The driving range on remaining fuel is has been driven since the ignition switch
This screen displays the average rate of only a guide. The indicated value may was turned to the “ON” position).
fuel consumption since the trip meter was differ from the actual driving range on
last reset. remaining fuel, so you must immedi-
ately fill the tank when the low fuel
NOTE warning light illuminates.
The driving range on remaining fuel is
only a guide. The indicated value may
differ from the actual driving range on
remaining fuel, so you must immedi-
warning light illuminates.

(181,1)

Digital speed screen: Auto Start Stop screen (if equipped): . The time spent with the engine
stopped by means of the Auto Start
Stop system is also added to the
journey time.
SI-DRIVE mode screen (if equipped): 3
1) Speed limit indicator (if equipped) : The total amount of time that the engine
2) Vehicle speed was stopped by means of the Auto Start
Stop system
This screen displays the current vehicle : The total amount of fuel saved due to the
speed. engine being stopped by the Auto Start
Stop system
The indicated values are calculated from This screen indicates the current
the most recent reset of the currently SI-DRIVE mode with its throttle angle.
displayed trip meter to the current time.
The indication ranges are as follows.
. Total amount of time: from 00’00@ to
9999h59’59@
. Total amount of fuel saved: from 0 ml to
9999.999 L
NOTE
. When the trip meter is reset, the
corresponding accumulated time and
the amount of fuel saving are also reset.
– CONTINUED –

(182,1)
TPMS screen (U.S.-spec. models): When the tire pressure monitoring & Menu screens
system detects the adjusted tire pres- S03BN07
Pull and hold the “ /SET” switch to enter
sure, the warning light will turn off and the menu screens when all of the following
the tire pressure values will turn to conditions are satisfied.
white.
. For information about the specified . The menu screen entering screen is
value of the air pressure, refer to selected.
“Tires” �12-8. . The “ ” information reminder is off.
Menu screen entering screen: NOTE
. While driving, the setting items
available on the combination meter
display (color LCD) are limited.
. For function settings and adjust-
ments on the combination meter dis-
This screen displays each tire pressure. play, refer to “Function settings and
When a tire is deflated, the deflated tire adjustments on the combination meter
and the tire pressure will be displayed on display (color LCD)” �25.
the screen in yellow.
By operating the “ ” or “ ” switch on the
NOTE steering wheel, you can select the menu.
. The tire pressure values are dis- Pull the “ /SET” switch to enter the
played several minutes after driving. selected menu.
. You can set the tire pressure units. While this screen is selected, pull and hold NOTE
For details about setting the units, refer the “ /SET” switch to enter the menu If you enter the “Go Back” menu, the
to “Tire Pressure Units” �3-41. screen. system will return to the previous
. Once the tire pressure monitoring
screen.
system detects the low tire pressure,
the tire pressure values will display in ! Screen Settings
yellow until the system detects the S03BN0701
After entering the “Screen Settings” menu,
normal tire pressure.
select one of the following menus.
. Immediately adjust the tire pressure
when the warning light illuminates.

(183,1)
! Welcome Screen volume. ! Vehicle Setting

S03BN070101 S03BN0708
The welcome screen can be activated or ! Rear Seat Reminder (models with After entering the “Vehicle Setting” menu,
deactivated. combination meter display (color select one of the following menus.
LCD))
! Good-bye Screen S03BN0715 ! Keyless Entry System
S03BN070106 The Rear Seat Reminder can be activated S03BN070801
3
The good-bye screen can be activated or or deactivated. Sets the settings used when the keyless
deactivated. access function was operated.
! EyeSight (models with EyeSight . Audible Signal (if equipped)
! Gauge Initial Movement system)
S03BN070102 S03BN0702 Sets the electronic chirp that sounds when
The movement of the meter needles and NOTE the door is locked or unlocked.
gauge needles that occurs when the
For models with the EyeSight system, . Hazard Warning Flasher
ignition switch is turned to the “ON”
refer to the Owner’s Manual supple- Sets the operation of the hazard warning
position can be activated or deactivated.
ment for the EyeSight system. flasher that blinks when the door is locked
! Units or unlocked.
S03BN070108 ! RAB (if equipped)
Changes the units displayed in the combi- S03BN0712 . Driver Door Unlock (if equipped)
nation meter display (color LCD), the multi- The Sonar Audible Alarm can be set to on Select only the driver’s door to unlock or all
function display (black and white) and the or off. doors to unlock simultaneously when the
multi-function display (color LCD). NOTE driver’s door is unlocked.
! Tire Pressure Units (if equipped) For models with Reverse Automatic . Rear Gate/Trunk Unlock (if equipped)
S03BN070109
Braking (RAB) system, refer to “Re- Select only the rear gate to unlock or all
Changes the units displayed in the Tire
verse Automatic Braking (RAB) sys- doors to unlock simultaneously when
Pressure Monitoring system.
tem” �7-72. accessing from the cargo area.
! Languages
S03BN070103
Changes the language displayed in the ! Sonar Audible Alarm ! Defogger
S03BN071204 S03BN070802
combination meter display (color LCD) When the Reverse Automatic Braking Sets and customizes the operation of the
and the multi-function display (color LCD). (RAB) system is in operation, the warning defogger.
sound to notify that an obstacle is detected
! Warning Volume (if equipped) ! Interior Light
S03BN0713 in the rear can be activated or deactivated. S03BN070803
Sets the EyeSight warning volume, the Sets and customizes the interior light off
BSD/RCTA warning volume and the Re- delay timer.
verse Automatic Braking (RAB) warning
– CONTINUED –

(184,1)
3-42 Instruments and controls/Multi-function display (black and white)
! Auto Door Lock and Unlock

S03BN070808
! Welcome Lighting (if equipped)
S03BN070806
Multi-function display (black
Setting conditions for “Auto Door Lock and Sets the leaving time and approaching and white)
Unlock” time. S03BO
. Auto Door Lock: . Approaching time set NOTE

Set the condition of the following items to Sets the illumination time of the headlights For models with multi-function display
lock the door automatically. that illuminate when you approach the (color LCD), refer to “Multi-function
– Vehicle Speed: When the vehicle vehicle. display (color LCD)” �3-49.
speed reaches more than 12 mph (20 . Leaving time set
km/h). Sets the time until the headlights turn off
– Shift Into or Out of PARK: When the when you have moved away from the
select lever is shifted into a position vehicle.
other than the “P” position (CVT
models). ! One-touch lane changer
S03BN070807
– Off: When the function is set to OFF. Sets the one-touch lane changer on/off.
. Auto Door Unlock:
! Default Settings
Set the conditions of the following items to S03BN0704
unlock the door automatically. Select “Yes” to use the menu screen to
– Shift Into or Out of PARK: When the restore customized settings (except the
select lever is shifted into the “P” “Vehicle Setting” of “Keyless Entry Sys-
position (CVT models). tem”, “Defogger”, “Interior Light”, “Auto
– Ignition OFF: When the ignition Door Lock and Unlock”, “Auto Light Sen- Multi-function display (black and white)
switch is turned to OFF. sor”, “Welcome Lighting” and “One-touch 1) Clock
lane changer”) to the factory default set- 2) Auto Start Stop system (if equipped)
– Driver Door Open: When the dri-
tings. Select “No” to return to the previous 3) Outside temperature indicator
ver’s door is open.
screen without restoring to the factory 4) Driving information display
– Off: When the function is set to OFF. default settings. 5) Climate control screen
! Auto Light Sensor (if equipped) With the ignition switch in the “ACC”
S03BN070804
Sets and customizes the sensitivity of the position, the clock appears on the display.
auto light sensor. With the ignition switch in the “ON” posi-
tion, the outside temperature indicator,

(185,1)
Instruments and controls/Multi-function display (black and white) 3-43
driving information display and clock all ! How to change the information dis-
appear on the display. play
S03BO0910
NOTE
The indicated values vary in accor-
dance with changes in the vehicle’s 3
running conditions. Also, the indicated
values may differ slightly from the
actual values and should thus be
treated only as a guide.
& Driving information display

S03BO09
NOTE
You can set the units for both the multi-
function display (black and white) and 1) INFO button
the combination meter at the same
time. For details about setting the Pressing the INFO button on the steering
language and units, refer to “Type A wheel switches the display in the following *1: Models without combination meter display
(color LCD)
combination meter” �3-11 or “Menu sequence. *2: If equipped
screens” �3-40.
– CONTINUED –

(186,1)
! Driving range on remaining fuel ! Average fuel consumption

S03BO0903 S03BO0902
1) When setting the displayed unit as MPH

1) When setting the displayed unit as MPH 2) When setting the displayed unit as km/h 1) Displays the driving range per gallon of
2) When setting the displayed unit as km/h If the driving range is shown as “ ”, there fuel
is only a tiny amount of fuel left in the tank. 2) Displays the driving range per liter of fuel
The driving range indicates the distance 3) Displays the fuel consumption per 100
that can be driven taking into account the NOTE km
amount of fuel remaining in the tank and
the average rate of fuel consumption. The driving range on remaining fuel is This display shows the average rate of fuel
only a guide. The indicated value may consumption since the trip meter was last
differ from the actual driving range on reset.

(187,1)
. The units for measuring average fuel ! Journey time (models without com-
consumption cannot be changed. bination meter display (color LCD))
S03BO0904
! Current fuel consumption
S03BO0901

Press the TRIP RESET switch to switch
between the displays for the average fuel The journey time shows the time that has
consumption that corresponds to the A trip 1) Displays the driving range per gallon of
elapsed since the ignition switch was
meter mileage and the average fuel con- fuel turned to the “ON” position.
sumption that corresponds to the B trip 2) Displays the driving range per liter of fuel
meter mileage. 3) Displays the fuel consumption per 100
When the trip meter displays is reset, the km
corresponding average fuel consumption This indication shows the rate of fuel
value is also reset. consumption at the present moment.
NOTE
. When the trip meter display is reset,
the average fuel consumption corre-
sponding to that trip meter display is
not shown until the vehicle has subse-
quently covered a distance of 1 mile (or
1 km).
The journey time indication flashes each
– CONTINUED –

(188,1)
time a complete hour has elapsed. If the speed corresponding to the A trip meter This display shows the total time that the
display is giving a reading other than the display and the average vehicle speed engine was stopped by the Auto Start Stop
journey time, the display switches to the corresponding to the B trip meter display. system in the following ways.
journey time, flashes for 5 seconds, and When either of the trip meter displays is
returns to its original reading each time a Total time in conjunction with the trip
reset, the corresponding average vehicle meter: Displays the total time that the
complete hour has elapsed. speed value is also reset. engine was stopped by the Auto Start Stop
NOTE NOTE system, from the last time the currently
The journey time is reset when the displayed trip meter was reset until the
When either trip meter display is reset,
ignition switch is turned to the “ACC” current time. By pressing the TRIP RESET
the average vehicle speed correspond-
or “LOCK”/“OFF” position. switch, you can toggle the display between
ing to that trip meter display is not
the time the engine was stopped for trip A
shown until the vehicle has subse-
! Average vehicle speed and the time the engine was stopped for
S03BO0905 quently covered a distance of 1 mile
trip B.
(or 1 km).
! Auto Start Stop time (if equipped)
NOTE
S03BO0907 When the trip meter mileage is reset,
the total time in conjunction with the
trip meter is not shown until the vehicle
has subsequently covered a distance
of 1 mile (or 1 km).
Total time in conjunction with the igni-

tion switch: Displays the total time that
the engine was stopped by the Auto Start
Stop system, from the time when the
1) When units in miles is selected
ignition switch was turned to the “ON”
2) When units in km is selected position to the current time.
This display shows the average vehicle ! How to switch the display
S03BO090701
speed since the trip meter was last reset. 1) Total time in conjunction with the trip Perform the following operation to toggle
meter
Pressing the TRIP RESET switch toggles the display between the total time in
2) Total time in conjunction with the ignition
the display between the average vehicle switch conjunction with the trip meter and the

(189,1)
total time in conjunction with the ignition ! Turn off display of driving informa- & Outside temperature indica-
switch. tion display tor
S03BO0906 S03BO01
Select the blank space in the menu to exit
the driving information display selection.
NOTE 3
. The average fuel consumption and
average vehicle speed are calculated
even while the driving information dis-
play has been turned off.
. Even if you turn off the driving
information display, the display will
automatically turn on when the battery
voltage is disconnected and then re-
connected for battery replacement or
1. Press and hold the “+” button located fuse replacement. 1) U.S.-spec. models
on the side of the information display. The 2) Except U.S.-spec. models
stopped time will then flash.
2. Within 5 seconds after the stopped NOTE
time starts flashing, press and hold the “−” . The outside temperature indicator
button located on the side of the informa- shows the temperature around the
tion display. The display will then change sensor. However, the temperature may
and after flashing for 3 seconds, the not be indicated correctly or the update
stopped time selected will be displayed. may be delayed in the following condi-
3. Each time the “−” button is pressed and tions.
held during the 3 seconds that the display – While parking or driving at low
is flashing, the display will change and speeds
flash for 3 seconds. If the “−” button is not – When the outside temperature
pressed and held during the 3-second changes suddenly (example: when
period that the display is flashing, the going in and out of an underground
stopped time selected will be displayed. parking area or when passing
– CONTINUED –

(190,1)
through a tunnel)
NOTE & Climate control screen
S03BO13
– When starting the engine after The climate control status is displayed on
being parked for a certain period of The outside temperature indication
may differ from the actual outside the multi-function display (black and white)
time type A.
. The temperature unit cannot be temperature. The road surface freeze
changed. warning indication should be treated
only as a guide. Be sure to check the
! Road surface freeze warning indi- condition of the road surface before
cation driving.
S03BO0101
& X-MODE indicator (if

equipped) S03BO12
This indicator will be shown while the

X-MODE is activated. It will turn off when
the X-MODE is deactivated.
& Clock
S03BO10 Climate control screen
For details about clock setting, refer to 1) Set temperature indicator
“Clock” �3-66. 2) FULL AUTO indicator
3) AUTO indicator
4) Air conditioner ON indicator
1) U.S.-spec. models 5) Airflow mode indicator
2) Except U.S.-spec. models 6) Air inlet selection indicator
7) Fan speed indicator
When the outside temperature drops to a
certain temperature or lower, the tempera- When operating the climate control sys-
ture indication flashes for 5 seconds to tem, the basic screen switches to the
show that the road surface may be frozen. climate control screen. For details about
If the display is already indicating that the climate control operation, refer to “Climate
outside temperature is low when the control panel” �4-2.
ignition switch is turned to the “ON”
position, the indication does not flash.

(191,1)
Instruments and controls/Multi-function display (color LCD) 3-49
Multi-function display (color & Features & Welcome screen

S03BP25 S03BP07
LCD) (if equipped) The multi-function display (color LCD) has When the driver’s door is opened and
S03BP the following functions. closed, the welcome screen will appear for
NOTE a short time.
Description Page
For models with multi-function display
Displays useful messages, such
NOTE 3
(black and white), refer to “Multi-func- as notification, etc. 3-50 . The welcome screen will disappear
tion display (black and white)” �3-42. when the ignition switch is turned to the
Displays basic screens (e.g. fuel 3-51
consumption screen, etc.) “ON” position while the welcome
WARNING Sets and adjusts maintenance
screen is displayed.
3-64 . The welcome screen can be set to on
notification
Always pay adequate attention to or off. For details, refer to “Screen
safe driving when operating the Also, the multi-function display (color LCD) Settings” �3-40.
multi-function display (color LCD) can also be used to set and initialize the . For a certain period of time after the
while the vehicle is in motion. When multi-function display (color LCD) itself. welcome screen has once appeared, it
operation of the multi-function dis- may not appear again even when the
play (color LCD) is disturbing your NOTE driver’s door is opened and closed
awareness and ability to concen- . When the vehicle is in motion, again. This does not indicate a mal-
trate on driving, stop the vehicle in certain functions and selections may function.
a safe place before performing op- not be available.
erations on the screen. Also, do not . You can set the language and units
concentrate on the display while for both the multi-function display
& Self-check screen
S03BP09
driving. Doing so may cause you to (color LCD) and the combination meter NOTE
look away from the road and could at the same time. For details about When the setting is “On”, the self-
result in an accident. setting the language and units, refer to check screen appears. For details
“Menu screens” �3-40. about this setting, refer to “On/Off
. The images displayed in this Own- setting” �3-64.
er’s Manual are sample images. The
actual image may vary depending on
“ON” position, the vehicle self-check will
the market and vehicle specifications.
be performed. The screens corresponding
to the following items will appear one after
another for several seconds each.
– CONTINUED –

(192,1)
3-50 Instruments and controls/Multi-function display (color LCD)
NOTE & Interruption screen

S03BP19
. After performing the maintenance,
change the setting of the correspond-
ing maintenance item. For details, refer
to “Maintenance settings” �3-64.
. The maintenance notification screen
will be displayed under either of the
following conditions.
– The period of time remaining until
the registered notification date is 15
days or less.
– The total driving distance remain-
1) Engine oil: Checks the interval of engine ing until the registered notification
oil replacement. distance is approximately 311 miles Example
2) Oil filter: Checks the interval of oil filter (500 km) or less.
replacement. . The maintenance notification screen Useful messages, such as reminder in-
3) Tires: Checks the interval of tire rotation. formation, weather information (if
will be displayed until either of the
4) Inspection and maintenance: Checks the equipped) and traffic information (if
interval of inspection and maintenance. following conditions is satisfied.
– The period of time passed after equipped) may interrupt the current screen
When the checks are performed, the color the registered notification date is 15 and appear on the display accompanied
of the icon corresponding to the checked days or more. by a beep. Take proper action according to
item will change. the message.
– The total distance driven after the
If there is a notification, the message will registered notification distance is The interruption screen will return to the
be displayed. Take the appropriate actions approximately 311 miles (500 km) or original screen after a few seconds. Also,
based on the message indicated. more. you can press the INFO button to skip the
After the self-check is completed, today’s interruption screen.
date, the stored birthday or the stored
anniversary is displayed.

(193,1)
& Basic operation & Basic screens is in the “ACC” position.

S03BP06 S03BP10
While the ignition switch is in the “ACC” or
“ON” position, the basic screen will be
displayed.
! Outside temperature indicator 3
S03BP1016
The outside temperature is displayed on
the multi-function display (color LCD).
NOTE
. The outside temperature indicator
shows the temperature around the
sensor. However, the temperature may
not be indicated correctly or the update
Control switch may be delayed in the following condi-
1) INFO button tions.
2) – While parking or driving at low
3) /SET speeds
4) – When the outside temperature
Press the INFO button on the steering changes suddenly (example: when
wheel to switch the item displayed on the going in and out of an underground
basic screen. You can operate the items parking area or when passing
on the setting screen by using the “ ”, through a tunnel)
“ ” and “ /SET” switches. – When starting the engine after
being parked for a certain period of
time
. The temperature unit cannot be
1) Clock changed.
2) Climate control*
3) Outside temperature
4) Information screen
*: This is not displayed on the multi-function
display (color LCD) when the ignition switch
– CONTINUED –

(194,1)
! Climate control screen control panel” �4-2.

S03BP1017
The climate control status is displayed on ! Clock
S03BP1018
the multi-function display (color LCD). The clock can be displayed in either 12-
hour display or 24-hour display. For details
about the setting, refer to “Clock” �3-66.
Climate control screen

1) Set temperature indicator (driver’s side)
2) FULL AUTO indicator
3) AUTO indicator
4) Airflow mode indicator
5) Set temperature indicator (passenger’s
side)*1
6) Air inlet selection indicator
7) SYNC indicator*1
8) Fan speed indicator
9) Air conditioner ON indicator
*1: Models with the SYNC function only
When operating the climate control sys-
tem, the basic screen switches to the
climate control screen. For details about
climate control operation, refer to “Climate

(195,1)
! Information screen
S03BP1019
Press the INFO button on the steering wheel to switch the item displayed on the information screen.
Content Description Page

Electric components operating status screen Displays the operating status of the electric components and equipment. 3-54 3
Prevention safety screen Displays the status of your vehicle. 3-54
EyeSight screen*1 Displays the operating status of EyeSight. 3-55
Favorite screen Displays up to 3 optional items. 3-55
Weather information screen*2 Displays weather information. 3-56
Traffic information*2/Navigation*3 screen Displays information linked with the navigation system. 3-56
Audio screen Displays audio system information. 3-57
Fuel consumption screen Displays fuel consumption information. 3-57
Clock/date screen Displays the clock. 3-57
Guidance screen Moves to the setting screen. 3-58
*1: Models with EyeSight system

*2: Models with SiriusXM Satellite Radio
*3: Models with navigation system
– CONTINUED –

(196,1)
! Electric components operation NOTE ! Prevention safety screen

S03BP101902
screen
S03BP101901 . Indicators do not display for func-
tions that are not equipped to the
vehicle.
. The indicators of functions that are
not operating are displayed in gray.
. For models with auto on/off head-
lights; If the multi-function display
(color LCD) unit, battery, or fuse is
removed, the Auto on/off headlights
indicator turns off on the multi-function
display (color LCD). After reinstalling
the removed multi-function display
(color LCD) unit, battery, or fuse to the
vehicle, the Auto on/off headlights 1) Telltale screen
1) Lane Departure Warning indicator*1 indicator will appear once more if the 2) Steering angle
2) Pre-Collision Braking System indicator*1 light control switch is turned to the 3) Vehicle posture
3) Stop lights 4) Running condition
“AUTO” position.
4) Reverse Automatic Braking (RAB)*1
. The exterior lights indicators on the This screen displays the driving status of
5) BSD/RCTA*1
screen do not notify the driver when the the vehicle and the operation status func-
6) Headlights*2
7) Front fog lights*2
bulbs burn out. The indicators on the tions. For functions that are operating, the
8) Turn signals screen still illuminate. indicator will illuminate or flash.
9) Auto on/off headlights*1
*1: If equipped
NOTE
*2: The daytime running lights are not dis- . The vehicle posture indication may
played. differ from the actual vehicle posture.
. When X-MODE has turned on, the
This screen displays the electric compo-
screen of the multi-function display is
nents operation status of the vehicle.
switched to the prevention safety
screen.

(197,1)
! EyeSight screen (models with ! Favorite screen Item Details

S03BP101904
EyeSight system)
S03BP101903
The engine coolant temperature is

displayed.
3
The engine oil temperature is
displayed.
The average vehicle speed is

displayed.
Favorite screen (display example) The accelerator opening ratio is

1) Lead vehicle indicator This screen displays up to three optional displayed.
2) Your own vehicle indicator pieces of information that can be selected
3) Stop lights from the following items.
4) Road line indicator
The vehicle posture is displayed.
5) Lane indicator
6) Lane Centering indicator (if equipped)
7) Steering wheel indicator (if equipped)
This screen displays the status of the The current rate of fuel consump-
tion is displayed.
EyeSight system. The lead vehicle indica-
tor moves forward and backward depend-
ing on the distance with the vehicle in front.
For details, refer to the Owner’s Manual The direction of the vehicle is
displayed.*1
supplement for the EyeSight system.
The weather information is dis-

played.*2
– CONTINUED –

(198,1)
Item Details ! Weather information screen (if . The weather forecast for the set
equipped) destination remains displayed until a
The posted speed limit of the road S03BP101905 new destination is set or until you reach
you are currently driving on is the destination.
displayed.*1
. Depending on the reception timing
of XM, the display of weather informa-
tion may be delayed.
The calendar is displayed.
! Navigation screen (models with
navigation system)
S03BP101906
Nothing is displayed.
*1: If equipped
*2: Models with SiriusXM Satellite Radio
NOTE 1) Weather information for the destination*

2) Weather information for the current loca-
Some displayed items may be not tion
displayed depending on the model *: Only when a destination is set in the
and specifications. navigation system
The items shown in the favorite screen can The weather information is displayed on
be changed. For details, refer to “Favorite the screen.
setting” �3-62.
NOTE The navigation system information to the
. When all of the following conditions destination is displayed on the screen.
are satisfied, weather information is
displayed.
NOTE
– The vehicle is equipped with an When a destination is not set in the
audio and navigation system for navigation system, the compass orien-
SiriusXM satellite radio. tation, name, route sign and speed limit
of the road the vehicle is traveling on
– You have a current SiriusXM
remain displayed on the screen.
satellite radio subscription.

(199,1)
! Audio screen ! Fuel consumption screen ! Clock/date screen

S03BP101907 S03BP101908 S03BP101909
The screen of the currently selected audio 1) Driving range on remaining fuel The time and date are displayed.
source is displayed. 2) Average fuel consumption corresponding You can adjust the time and date. For
to the driving distance of each trip meter
For details about how to use the audio set, 3) Current fuel consumption
details, refer to “Clock” �3-66.
refer to the separate navigation/audio
Owner’s Manual. The fuel consumption information is dis-
played on the screen.
NOTE
The driving range on remaining fuel is
only a guide. The indicated value may
differ from the actual driving range on
– CONTINUED –

(200,1)
! Guidance screen NOTE & Setting screen

S03BP101910 S03BP28
1. Press and hold the INFO button on the
guidance screen. The top menu is dis-
played.
2. Operate the “ ” or “ ” switch to
select the preferred menu from the top
menu.
3. Pull the “ /SET” switch to enter the
selected menu.
4. Operate the “ ” or “ ” switch to
select the preferred menu from the 2nd
menu.
5. Pull the “ /SET” switch to enter the
When the INFO button on the steering selected menu.
wheel is pressed and held on this screen,
the setting screen can be displayed. When the combination meter display
For details, refer to “Setting screen” �3- (color LCD) is displaying the menu
58. screen entering screen, the system will
not move to the setting screen even if
the INFO button is pressed and held.

(201,1)
The menu lists are as follows.

Items that can be set when stopped:
Top menu 2nd menu Description Page
Birthday Set a birthday. 3-61
Date Anniversary Set an anniversary day. 3-61 3
Go Back Return to the 1st menu. —
Screen Off Turn the screen off. Yes or No 3-61
Favorite Set and customize the triple meter. 3-62
Display/Beep Bypass Screen Set the bypass screen for each item. On or Off 3-62
Beep Adjust the beep sound volume. High, Low or Off 3-62
Brightness Set and adjust the brightness of a display. 3-63
Camera Set- Contrast Set and adjust the contrast of a display. 3-63
tings Camera Shift Link Set the camera shift link. On or Off 3-63
Engine Oil Set and adjust the oil maintenance notification date. 3-64
Oil Filter Set and adjust the oil filter maintenance notification date. 3-64
Tires Set and adjust the tire maintenance notification date. 3-64
Maintenance Schedule Set and adjust the vehicle maintenance notification date. 3-64
Maintenance
Turn on or off the self-check screen that is
ON/OFF activated when the ignition switch is turned to the On or Off 3-64
“ON” position.
Clear All Settings Clear all settings for maintenance items. Yes or No 3-65
– CONTINUED –

(202,1)
Top menu 2nd menu Description Page

Initialize — Reset all settings to the default settings. Yes or No 3-65
Go Back — Return to the setting screen. —
Items that can be set while driving:

Menu Description Page
Screen Off Turn the screen off. 3-61
Go Back Return to the settings screen. —
For safety reasons, we recommend stopping the vehicle in a safe location while setting.

(203,1)
! Date and time settings want to register.

S03BP2801 NOTE
You can set the date, time and 12h or 24h You can store a maximum of 5 anniver-
format settings. saries.
! Current date and time setting
S03BP280101 ! Display/Beep settings
For details about clock setting, refer to S03BP2805 3
You can set the display settings and
“Clock” �3-66. volume settings.
! Birthday setting ! Screen OFF setting
S03BP280102
If a birthday or anniversary is approaching, S03BP280501
a message will be displayed when the 1. Select “Screen Off” from the 2nd menu
ignition switch is turned to the “ON” in setting screen. Refer to “Setting screen”
position. This function can be set to on or �3-58.
off. For details, refer to “Bypass screen
setting” �3-62. 3. Enter the date and the text by using the
1. Select “Birthday” from the 2nd menu in control switches.
the setting screen. Refer to “Setting 4. Select “Set” to exit settings. Select “Go
screen” �3-58. Back” to return to the previous screen
without applying the setting changes.
NOTE
You can store a maximum of 5 birth-
days.
! Anniversary setting
S03BP280103
1. The procedure for setting an anniver- 2. Select “Yes” to turn off the screen.
sary is the same as “Birthday setting” �3- Select “No” to return to the previous
61, except that in step 1 “Anniversary” is screen.
selected.
Restoring the screen
2. Select from the list the number that you When the INFO button is operated after
– CONTINUED –

(204,1)
the ignition switch is turned to the “ON” or 3. Select “Set” to exit settings. Select “Go switches.
“ACC” position, the screen will be restored. Back” to return to the previous screen 3. Select “Set” to exit settings. Select “Go
The screen will be restored with the basic without applying the setting changes. Back” to return to the previous screen
screen that was displayed when the without applying the setting changes.
screen was turned off. NOTE
. You can display a maximum of the 3
NOTE items. NOTE
While the screen is off, the screen . The same item cannot be selected Traffic information setting is only dis-
switches to the climate control screen for the left, center or right location. played for the audio unit with SiriusXM
only when the climate control system is . Weather information for 3 hours satellite radio.
operated. later or 6 hours later can be displayed.
! Beep setting
S03BP280504
! Favorite setting 1. Select “Beep” from the 2nd menu in the
S03BP280502 ! Bypass screen setting
1. Select the “Favorite” from the 2nd S03BP280503 setting screen. Refer to “Setting screen”
menu in setting screen. Refer to “Setting 1. Select “Bypass Screen” from the 2nd �3-58.
screen” �3-58. menu in the setting screen. Refer to
“Setting screen” �3-58.
2. Set the beep volume by using the

2. Set the desired items by using the control switches.
control switches. For details about items, 2. Select “On” or “Off” to turn the display 3. Select “Set” to exit settings. Select “Go
refer to “Favorite screen” �3-55. of items on or off by using the control Back” to return to the previous screen

(205,1)
without applying the setting changes. ! Contrast setting ! Camera shift link setting
S03BP280902 S03BP280903
! Camera Settings (if equipped) 1. Select “Contrast” from the 2nd menu in 1. Select “Camera Shift Link” from the
S03BP2809 the setting screen. Refer to “Setting 2nd menu in the setting screen. Refer to
You can set the front camera display screen” �3-58. “Setting screen” �3-58.
settings.
3
! Brightness setting
S03BP280901
1. Select “Brightness” from the 2nd menu
in the setting screen. Refer to “Setting
screen” �3-58.
2. Select the contrast level by using the 2. Select “On” or “Off” by using the control
control switches. switches.
3. Press the “ /SET” button to confirm 3. Select “Set” to exit settings. Select “Go
the setting. Back” to return to the previous screen
2. Select the brightness level by using the
control switches.
3. Press the “ /SET” button to confirm
the setting.
– CONTINUED –

(206,1)
! Maintenance settings NOTE ! Maintenance schedule setting

S03BP2803 S03BP280304
You can set maintenance reminders. . The reminder will be displayed by The setting procedure is the same as
either date or distance in accordance “Engine oil setting” �3-64, but select the
! Engine oil setting
S03BP280301 with the setting. “Maintenance Schedule” item in step 1.
1. Select “Engine Oil” from the 2nd menu . Even when either “Day” or “Dis-
in the setting screen. Refer to “Setting ! On/Off setting
tance” are displayed as “_ _” a pop-up S03BP280305
screen” �3-58. screen will appear. 1. Select “On/Off” from the 2nd menu on
. The reminder will be displayed until the setting screen. Refer to “Setting
either of the following conditions is screen” �3-58.
satisfied.
– The period of time passed after
the registered notification date is 15
days or more.
– The total distance driven after the
registered notification distance is
approximately 311 miles (500 km) or
more.
! Oil filter setting
S03BP280302
The setting procedure is the same as
2. Set the date and distance of the “Engine oil setting” �3-64, but select the
reminder by using the control switches. “Oil Filter” item in step 1.
3. Select “Set” to exit settings. Select 2. Select “On” or “Off” to turn the opening
“Update” to change the notification dis- ! Tires setting screen on or off by using the control
S03BP280303
tance to the default value. Select “Go The setting procedure is the same as switches.
Back” to return to the previous screen “Engine oil setting” �3-64, but select the 3. Select “Set” to exit settings. Select “Go
without applying the setting changes. “Tires” item in step 1. Back” to return to the previous screen

(207,1)
! Clear setting ! Initialize & How to get the source code

S03BP280306 S03BP2804
1. Select “Clear All Settings” from the 2nd You can initialize the items that have been using the open source
S03BP29
menu on the setting screen. Refer to set to your preference. Free/Open Source Software Information
“Setting screen” �3-58. 1. Select “Initialize” from the 2nd menu on
the setting screen. Refer to “Setting This product contains Free/Open Source
screen” �3-58. Software (FOSS). 3
The license information and/or the source
code of such FOSS can be found at the
following URL.
http://www.globaldenso.com/en/open-
source/ivi/subaru/
2. Select “Yes” or “No” by using the

control switches.
2. Select “Yes” or “No” by using the
control switches.

(208,1)
3-66 Instruments and controls/Clock
Clock & Setting the clock manually

S03AF03
S03AF
! Multi-function display (black and
For models with a SUBARU genuine white)
navigation and/or audio system, the clock S03AF0309
can be adjusted using either auto mode or 1. Turn the ignition switch to “ON”.
manual mode.
. Auto mode: automatic clock adjustment
. Manual mode: manual clock adjust-
ment
CAUTION
The clock in the multi-function dis-
play (color LCD) cannot be adjusted, 6. Press the “+” button or the “−” button
if the SUBARU genuine navigation beside the clock.
and/or audio system is removed.
! Setting 12-hour or 24-hour dis-
play
S03AF030901
2. Press the button. The clock can be set to 12-hour or 24-hour
3. Select “Settings”. display. Perform the following procedure to
4. Select “Vehicle”. switch the display format.
5. Select “Time/Date” and then select 1. Turn the ignition switch in the “LOCK”/
“Manual”. “OFF” position.
2. Press and hold the “−” button located
near the clock display for approximately 5
seconds. The clock display will then start
to flash.
3. While the clock display is flashing,
press and hold the “+” button for approxi-
mately 2 seconds. The clock format will
then change.

(209,1)
Instruments and controls/Clock 3-67
4. The clock display will continue to flash

for approximately 3 seconds to indicate
NOTE
that the clock display has been changed. . Adjust the time, then select 12h
display or 24h display from the format.
! Multi-function display (color LCD) . The Birthday/Anniversary and main-
S03AF0310 tenance reminder system function are 3
1. Turn the ignition switch to “ON”. based on the time and date on the
multifunction display (color LCD).
& Setting the clock automati-

cally
S03AF02
1. Turn the ignition switch to “ON”.
2. Press the button.

3. Select “Settings”.
4. Select “Vehicle”.
5. Select “Time/Date” and then select
“Manual”.
6. Set the each items plus and minus. 2. Press the button.
7. Select to complete the clock 3. Select “Settings”.
setting. 4. Select “Vehicle”.
Select “Back” to return to the previous 5. Select “Time/Date”.
screen without saving settings.
6. Select “Auto”.
– CONTINUED –

(210,1)
3-68 Instruments and controls/Light control switch
! Models with navigation system & Regulatory information Light control switch
S03AF0201 S03AF04
The clock will be set automatically where a S03AH
GPS signal is available. & Precautions and tips

S03AH06
! Models without navigation system
S03AF0202 The Bluetooth® word mark and logos are CAUTION
The clock will be set and adjusted auto- registered trademarks owned by Bluetooth
matically when a smartphone is connected SIG, Inc. . Use of any lights for a long period
via Bluetooth® for transferring phonebook of time while the engine is not
data. running can cause the battery to
1. Register the smartphone to the audio discharge.
system. For details, refer to “Bluetooth . Before leaving the vehicle, make
SETTINGS” in the supplemental Owner’s sure that the lights are turned off.
Manual for the audio/navigation system. If the vehicle is left unattended
2. Transfer phonebook data to the sys- for a long time with the lights
tem. For details, refer to “Bluetooth SET- illuminated, the battery may be
TINGS” in the supplemental Owner’s discharged.
Manual for the audio/navigation system.
The clock will be adjusted automatically.
NOTE
NOTE . Even if the key is removed from the
ignition switch, the lights can be illumi-
Depending on the model of smart-
nated by operating the light control
phone, the settings of the connected
switch from the “ ” (off) position to the
smartphone may need to be changed.
“ ” or “ ” position (models without
(ex: For iOS or other models, notifica-
“keyless access with push-button sys-
tion settings may need to be activated.)
tem”).
For details, check the instructions on . Even if the push-button ignition
connecting smartphones. switch is turned off, the lights can be
illuminated by operating the light con-
trol switch from the “ ” (off) position to
the “ ” or “ ” position (models with
“keyless access with push-button start

(211,1)
Instruments and controls/Light control switch 3-69
system”). ker lights, rear side marker lights, tail lights

. If the driver’s door is opened while and license plate lights are automatically
the lights are illuminated and the key is on or off depending on the level of the
removed from the ignition switch, the ambient light.
chirp sound will inform the driver that
the lights are illuminated. NOTE 3
. The sensitivity of the auto on/off
headlights can be changed by a
& Headlights SUBARU dealer. Consult your SUBARU
S03AH01
dealer for details. Also, for models with
a combination meter display (color
LCD), the setting can be changed using
the display. For details, refer to “Vehicle
For Canada models Setting” �3-41.
To turn on the headlights, turn the knob on . If the light control switch is in the
the end of the turn signal lever. “AUTO” position and the headlights do
not turn on when it becomes dark
“ ” position: outside, turn the light switch to the
Instrument panel illumination, headlights, “ ” position. When this happens, have
parking lights, front side marker lights, rear your vehicle inspected by your
side marker lights, tail lights and license SUBARU dealer as soon as possible.
plate lights are on. Auto-on/off wiper-linked headlights
Except for Canada models
“ ” position: While the light control switch is in the
Instrument panel illumination, parking “AUTO” position, the headlights will auto-
lights, front side marker lights, rear side matically turn on when the windshield
marker lights, tail lights and license plate wipers operate several times. The head-
lights are on. lights will automatically turn off when the
“ ” position (if equipped): wipers stop.
Auto on/off headlights
When the ignition switch is in the “ON”
position, the instrument panel illumination,
headlights, parking lights, front side mar-
– CONTINUED –

(212,1)
The function is activated while all of the When exiting:

NOTE following conditions are met. While the welcome lighting function is
The ON/OFF setting of this function can . The light control switch is in the “AUTO” activated, the low beam headlights, park-
be changed by a SUBARU dealer. position. ing lights, front side marker lights, rear side
Consult your SUBARU dealer for de- marker lights, tail lights and license plate
tails. . It is dark enough to turn on the auto on/
off headlights. lights will remain illuminated even when
“ ” position (except for Canada mod- either of the following operation is done.
els): NOTE . The push-button ignition switch is
The headlights are all off. If the engine is turned off after turning turned to the “OFF” status (models with
off the light switch, the welcome light- “keyless access with push-button start
“OFF” position (for Canada models): ing function may not operate (for system”).
The headlights are all off.*1*2 Canada models). . The key is pulled out from the ignition
*1: When the light switch is switched to the switch (models without “keyless access
When approaching:
“OFF” position while the vehicle is stopped, with push-button start system”).
While the welcome lighting function is
the lights turn off. Then the light switch will
activated, the low beam headlights, park- The lights will turn off under any of the
automatically return to the “AUTO” position.
ing lights, front side marker lights, rear side following conditions.
*2: The headlights will automatically change to marker lights, tail lights and license plate
the AUTO mode when the following condi- lights will automatically illuminate when . 3 minutes have passed since the light
tions are met: unlocking the doors and the rear gate by were illuminated by the welcome lighting
. The engine is running. using the remote keyless entry system. function.
. The parking brake is fully released. . 30 seconds have passed since the door
The lights will remain illuminated for 30 is opened and closed.*1
. For CVT models, the select lever is in a seconds*1 and then turn off. However, if . The light control switch is turned to a
position other than the “P” position. any of the following operations is done, the position other than “AUTO”.
light will turn off. . The locking procedure is performed
! Welcome lighting function (if . The doors are locked.
equipped) twice. When performing the unlocking
S03AH0103 . The light control switch is turned to a procedure after performing the locking
The welcome lighting function turns on the position other than “AUTO”. procedure, perform the locking procedure
low beam headlight for smooth approach- . The ignition switch is turned to the “ON” twice again.
ing to or exiting from the vehicle at night or position. *1: The setting for the period of time in which the
in a dark place.
lights remain on by the welcome lighting
function can be changed by a SUBARU

(213,1)
dealer. Contact your SUBARU dealer for & High/low beam change (dim- & Headlight flasher
S03AH03
details. mer)
S03AH02
! Sensor for the auto on/off head-
lights (if equipped)
S03AH0101
3
1) High beam CAUTION

2) Low beam
Do not hold the lever in the flashing
The sensor is on the instrument panel as When the headlights are on high beam, the position for more than just a few
shown in the illustration. high beam indicator light “ ” on the seconds.
combination meter is also on.
CAUTION To flash the headlights, pull the lever
If any object is placed on or near the toward you and then release it. The high
sensor, the sensor may not detect beam will stay on for as long as you hold
the level of the ambient light cor- the lever.
rectly and the auto on/off headlights When the headlights are on high beam, the
may not operate properly. high beam indicator light “ ” on the
combination meter also illuminates.
– CONTINUED –

(214,1)
& High beam assist function (if . When there is a preceding or oncoming
equipped) vehicle.
S03AH07 . When the EyeSight system is malfunc-
NOTE tioning or is temporarily stopped.
. The high beam assist function uti-
lizes the stereo camera installed at the NOTE
position of the front map lights. . Do not overestimate the capacity of
. For details on how to handle the the high beam assist function. The
stereo camera, refer to the Owner’s driver always has the responsibility to
Manual supplement for the EyeSight understand the surrounding situation,
system. to drive safely, and to change the
The high beam assist function automati- headlight mode manually if necessary.
cally changes the headlight from high . The factory setting (default setting)
beam to low beam (or vice versa). for this function is set as “operational”. High beam assist indicator light
This setting can be changed to OFF When the high beam assist function is
When all of the following conditions are (non-operation) at SUBARU dealers. activated, the high beam assist indicator
met, the headlight will change to high For more details, contact a SUBARU light on the combination meter will illumi-
beam. dealer. nate.
. When the vehicle speed increases to or
above 20 mph (32 km/h). ! How to use the high beam assist NOTE
. There is no preceding or oncoming function If the high beam assist function is
S03AH0701
vehicle. The high beam assist function will be malfunctioning or is temporarily
. The forward area of the vehicle is dark. activated when all the following conditions stopped, the headlight will be fixed at
. The road does not have a sharp curve. are met. low beam.
. The light control switch is in the “AUTO”
When any of the following conditions is position and the low beam headlights are
met, the headlight will change to low beam. on automatically.
. When the vehicle speed decreases to . The turn signal lever is pushed forward.
or below 10 mph (16 km/h).
. When the forward area of the vehicle is
bright.

(215,1)
! How to temporarily lower the sensi- the next time the ignition switch is and license plate lights will be on.
tivity of the high beam assist func- turned to the “LOCK”/“OFF” position
tion and the engine is restarted. ! Tips for the high beam assist sys-
S03AH0704 tem
The sensitivity of the high beam assist ! How to change the headlight mode S03AH0703
function can be lowered by performing the . The high beam assist function recog-
manually nizes the conditions surrounding the ve- 3
following operations. S03AH0702
Change to the low beam: hicle based on the brightness of illumina-
1. Before turning the ignition switch to the
When you return the turn signal lever to the tion ahead of your vehicle, etc. Therefore,
“ON” position, set the light control switch to
center position, the high beam assist the headlight mode may switch in some
the “AUTO” position and push the signal
function will turn off and the high beam situations that do not match to the driver’s
lever forward (high beam position).
assist indicator light will turn off. sense.
. A bicycle or cargo cycle may not be
position and within approximately 15 sec- Change to the high beam: detected.
onds, press the “ / ” (following distance When you turn the light control switch to
setting) switch more than 10 times con- . Under the following situations, the
the “ ” position, the headlight mode will brightness of ambient illumination may
secutively. be changed to the high beam. not be detected correctly and the high
At this time, the high beam assist function beam assist function may not work prop-
When the sensitivity of the high beam will turn off, the high beam assist indicator erly. As a result, the glare of the high beam
assist function is lowered, the high beam light will turn off and the high beam may disturb the oncoming vehicle or
assist indicator light “ ” on the combina- indicator light will turn on. vehicle ahead. Also, the low beam mode
tion meter will flash. may continue although there are no
NOTE oncoming vehicles and vehicles ahead.
NOTE . After manually changing the head- In the such cases, change the headlight
. The sensitivity of the high beam light mode to the high beam, if you turn mode manually.
assist function cannot be lowered in on the high beam assist function, – In bad weather (fog, snow, sand
the following conditions. return the light control switch to the storm, heavy rain, etc.).
– Cruise control or Adaptive Cruise “AUTO” position.
– When the windshield glass is dirty or
Control indicator is illuminated. . When manually changing the head-
fogged.
– The EyeSight warning indicator light mode to the high beam, if you turn
the light control switch to the “ ” – When the windshield is cracked or
(yellow) is illuminated.
position, the instrument panel illumina- damaged.
. The sensitivity of the high beam
assist function returns to normal level tion, parking lights, front side marker – When the stereo camera is de-
lights, rear side marker lights, tail lights formed or the stereo camera lenses
– CONTINUED –

(216,1)
are dirty. ged from the high beam to the low beam. – When the headlights of an oncom-
– If there are lights similar to the – When your vehicle passes an on- ing vehicle or the tail lights of a vehicle
headlights or the tail lights in the coming vehicle suddenly in a blind ahead illuminate on only one side.
surrounding area. curve. – When the oncoming vehicle or
– When an oncoming vehicle or ve- – When another vehicle passes in vehicle ahead is a motorcycle.
hicle ahead is driven without its head- front of your vehicle. – Conditions of a road (slope, curve,
lights and tail lights on. – When an oncoming vehicle or ve- road surface, etc.).
– If the headlights of an oncoming hicle ahead comes in and out of view – Number of passengers and weight
vehicle or the tail lights of a vehicle because of continuous curves, median of loaded cargo.
ahead are dirty or discolored, or if the strips, roadside trees, etc. – Limitation of the detection ability of
light beams are not aimed correctly. . If the stereo camera detects the light of the stereo camera.
– When a rapid change of brightness the front fog lights of an oncoming vehicle,
continues while driving. the headlight mode may change from the & Daytime running light system
S03AH04
– When driving on a road with many high beam to the low beam automatically.
ups and downs or uneven surfaces. . The headlight mode may change from WARNING
– When driving on a road with many the high beam to the low beam, or the low When the daytime running lights are
curves. beam mode may continue, when affected illuminated, the tail lights do not
– When there are some objects that by a street light, traffic signal, illumination illuminate. When it becomes dark
reflect light strongly, such as a road of an advertisement board, or a reflective outside, turn the light switch to the
sign or a mirror in vehicle ahead. object such as a road sign and signboard. “ ” position to illuminate the head-
– When the rear part of the vehicle . The timing of the change of headlight lights and tail lights. This will im-
ahead, such as a container, reflects mode may differ due to the following prove visibility and allow other dri-
light strongly. factors. vers to see your vehicle more easily.
– When the headlights of your vehicle – Color or brightness of the headlights
are damaged or dirty. of an oncoming vehicle or the tail lights The daytime running lights will automati-
– When your vehicle is tilted, such as of a vehicle ahead. cally illuminate when the following condi-
in case the vehicle has a flat tire or is – The headlights of the oncoming tions are fulfilled.
being towed. vehicle or the tail lights of the vehicle . The engine is running.
– Immediately after the engine has ahead are covered with mud, snow, . The parking brake is fully released.
started. etc. . The light control switch is in “AUTO” (if
. In the following conditions, the head- – Movement and direction of an on- equipped), “ ” or “ ” (except for
light mode will not be automatically chan- coming vehicle or a vehicle ahead.

(217,1)
Instruments and controls/Steering Responsive Headlight (SRH) 3-75
Canada models). Steering Responsive Head-

. The light control switch is in “AUTO”, light (SRH) (if equipped)
“ ” or “OFF” (for Canada models). S03BL
. For CVT models, the select lever is in a
position other than the “P” position.
3
NOTE
When the light switch is in the “ ”
position, the instrument panel illumina-
tion, front side marker lights, tail lights
and license plate lights are also illumi-
nated.
You can turn the SRH function on or off by

pressing the SRH OFF switch.
1) The target area of illumination when SRH

is activated
2) The target area of illumination when SRH
is not activated
SRH is a function that automatically moves
the headlight beam to the left or right in
accordance with the steering angle and
vehicle speed. This function helps to
improve the visibility at night by illuminat-
ing the road ahead at corners and inter-
sections.
1) SRH OFF indicator light

The SRH OFF indicator light on the
combination meter turns off when SRH is
turned on.
– CONTINUED –

(218,1)
3-76 Instruments and controls/Headlight beam leveler (models with LED headlights)
The SRH OFF indicator light on the Headlight beam leveler Fog light switch (if equipped)
combination meter illuminates when SRH
is turned off.
(models with LED headlights) S03BA
S03AT
If SRH is malfunctioning, the SRH OFF The LED headlights produce more light
indicator light on the combination meter than conventional halogen headlights.
flashes when the ignition switch is in the When the vehicle is carrying a heavy load
“ON” position. It indicates that SRH has and the headlight beams are angled
been deactivated. Contact a SUBARU upwards, the driver of an oncoming vehicle
dealer for an inspection. may experience glare.
NOTE To prevent this, the automatic headlight
beam leveler adjusts the headlights to the
. If you turn the ignition switch to the
optimum height automatically depending
“OFF” position with SRH turned off and
on the load the vehicle is carrying.
then start the engine again, SRH will
automatically turn on. CAUTION Except for Canada models
. When you turn the ignition switch to
1) Headlight switch
the “ON” position, the SRH OFF indi- For CVT models, in certain circum- 2) Fog light switch
cator light will illuminate and turn off stances, the headlights may become
after several seconds. misaligned, and the headlight beam
. SRH only activates when the vehicle leveler will not reset them to the
is traveling forward at the speed of proper angle. This may occur after
approximately 5 mph (8 km/h) or more. transporting your vehicle on a flat-
. SRH may not activate when the shift bed truck, or if the vehicle is parked
lever (MT models) is selected in 1st and restarted on different angles. In
gear. such cases, have the headlight
alignment checked by a SUBARU
dealer.

(219,1)
Instruments and controls/Turn signal lever 3-77
. Turn the switch to “OFF” (for Canada Turn signal lever

models). S03AI
For Canada models

1) Headlight switch
2) Fog light switch 1) Right turn
Indicator light
The front fog lights will turn on when the 2) Lane change right signal
fog light switch is placed in the “ ” position The indicator light on the combination 3) Lane change left signal
while the headlights are in the following meter will illuminate when the front fog 4) Left turn
condition. lights are illuminated.
If the lever does not return after cornering,
. The headlight switch is in the “ ” return the lever to the neutral position by
position with the low beam mode selected. hand.
. For models with the auto on/off head- To signal a lane change, push the turn
lights, while the headlight switch is in the signal lever up or down slightly and hold it
“AUTO” position and the low beam head- during the lane change. The lever will
lights turn on automatically. return automatically to the neutral position
To turn off the front fog lights, perform the when you release it.
following.
. Turn the switch to “ ” (except for
Canada models).
– CONTINUED –

(220,1)
3-78 Instruments and controls/Wiper and washer
& One-touch lane changer Wiper and washer . In freezing weather, be sure that
S03AI01
To flash the turn signal and turn signal S03AM the blade rubbers are not frozen
indicator light three times, push the turn to the windshield or rear window
signal lever up or down slightly and WARNING before switching on the wipers.
immediately release it. Attempting to operate the wiper
In freezing weather, do not use the with the blades frozen to the
NOTE windshield washer until the wind- window glass could cause not
The operational/non-operational shield is sufficiently warmed by the only the blade rubbers to be
setting of the one-touch lane changer defroster. damaged but also might cause
can be changed by a SUBARU dealer. Otherwise the washer fluid can the wiper motor to fail. If the blade
Contact the nearest SUBARU dealer for freeze on the windshield, blocking rubbers are frozen to the window
details. For models with the combina- your view. glass, be sure to operate the
tion meter display (color LCD), the defroster, windshield wiper dei-
setting can also be changed by operat- cer (if equipped) or rear window
ing the combination meter display CAUTION defogger before turning on the
(color LCD). For details, refer to “Vehi- wiper.
cle Setting” �3-41. . Do not operate the washer con- . If the wipers stop during opera-
tinuously for more than 10 section because of ice or some other
onds, or when the washer fluid obstruction on the window, this
tank is empty. This may cause might cause the wiper motor to
overheating of the washer motor. fail even if the wiper switch is
Check the washer fluid level fre- turned off. If this occurs,
quently, such as at fuel stops. promptly stop the vehicle in a
. Do not operate the wipers when safe place, turn the ignition
the windshield or rear window is switch to the “LOCK”/“OFF” po-
dry. This may scratch the glass, sition and clean the window glass
damage the blade rubbers and to allow proper wiper operation.
might cause the wiper motor to . Use clean water if windshield
fail. Before operating the wiper washer fluid is unavailable. In
on a dry windshield or rear win- areas where water freezes in
dow, always use the windshield winter, use SUBARU Windshield
washer. Washer Fluid or the equivalent.

(221,1)
Instruments and controls/Wiper and washer 3-79
Refer to “Windshield washer streaking on the glass. If you cannot high speed operation position. Contact
fluid” �11-29. remove the streaks after operating the your SUBARU dealer to have your
. Do not clean the blade rubbers windshield washer or if the wiper windshield wipers inspected.
with gasoline or a solvent, such operation is jerky, clean the outer sur-
as paint thinner or benzine. This face of the windshield and rear window & Windshield wiper and washer
will cause deterioration of the using a sponge or soft cloth with a switches 3
blade rubbers. neutral detergent or mild-abrasive clea- S03AM01
ner. Do not, however, use detergent to The wiper operates only when the ignition
clean the blade rubbers. Use only a switch is in the “ON” position.
NOTE sponge or soft cloth (and no neutral ! Operating the wiper lever
. The windshield wiper motor is pro- detergent or mild abrasive cleaner) S03AM0106
tected against overloads by a circuit when you clean the blade rubbers. If
breaker. If the motor operates continu- you wipe the rubber of the blade
ously under an unusually heavy load, strongly, the black coating component
the circuit breaker may trip to stop the will peel off, which will cause the wiper
motor temporarily. If this happens, park to judder. Also, after wiping it off, check
your vehicle in a safe place, turn off the that the rubber has not come loose.
wiper switch, and wait for approxi- After cleaning the window glass and
mately 10 minutes. The circuit breaker wiper blade rubbers, be sure to rinse
will reset itself, and the wipers will them with clean water. Rinse the win-
again operate normally. dow until the water does not form
. Clean your blade rubbers and win- beads on the glass. This indicates that
dow glass periodically with a washer the glass is clean.
solution to prevent streaking, and to . If you cannot eliminate the streaking
remove accumulations of road salt or even after following this procedure, : Mist operation (for a single wipe)
road film. Operate the windshield replace the blade rubbers with new
ones. For replacement instructions, : Off
washer for at least 1 second so that
refer to “Replacement of wiper blades” : Intermittent operation
washer solution will be sprinkled all
over the windshield or rear window. �11-30. : Low speed operation
. Grease, wax, insects, or other mate- . If the wipers do not operate when the
: High speed operation
rial on the windshield or the wiper blade wiper switch is in the low speed opera-
results in jerky wiper operation and tion position, they may be malfunction-
ing. In this case, turn the switch to the
– CONTINUED –

(222,1)
3-80 Instruments and controls/Wiper and washer
For a single wipe of the wipers, push the ! Windshield washer

lever up. The wipers operate until you S03AM0104 NOTE
release the lever.
! Wiper intermittent time control
S03AM0103
To wash the windshield, pull the wiper

control lever toward you. The washer fluid Windshield washer fluid warning light
sprays until you release the lever. The
wipers operate while you pull the lever. The windshield washer fluid warning
When the wiper switch is in the “ ” light illuminates when the washer fluid
position, turn the dial to adjust the operat- level in the tank has dropped to the
ing interval of the wiper. The operating lower limit. If the warning light illumi-
interval can be adjusted in several steps nates, refill the tank with fluid. For the
from the shortest interval to the longest. refilling procedure, refer to “Wind-
shield washer fluid” �11-29.

(223,1)
Instruments and controls/Wiper and washer 3-81
& Rear window wiper and ! Rear wiper CAUTION

S03AM0201
washer switch With the switch turned to the “ ” position,
S03AM02
the rear wiper will operate intermittently at Do not attach anything that disturbs
intervals corresponding to the vehicle the rear wiper operation on the rear
speed. In this position, when you move gate. Doing so may damage the rear
the select lever to the “R” position (CVT wiper when it operates. 3
models) or the shift lever to the reverse
position (MT models), the rear wiper will ! Washer
switch to continuous operation. When you S03AM0202
To wash the rear window, turn the knob to
move the select lever/shift lever from the the “ ” position. The washer fluid sprays
“R” (reverse) position to another position, and the wiper operates until you release
the rear wiper will return to intermittent the knob.
operation.
Reverse gear interlocked rear wiper:
Even if the rear wiper switch is in the off
“ ” position, if the front windshield wiper is
: Washer operation (accompanied by
wiper operation) operating continuously, the rear wiper will
operate intermittently when you move the
: Continuous operation
select lever/shift lever to the “R” (reverse)
: Intermittent operation position.
: Off
The factory setting (default setting) of the
: Washer operation (accompanied by reverse gear interlocked rear wiper is as
wiper operation) follows.
. U.S.-spec. models: Non-operational
. Other models: Operational
This setting can be changed by a SUBARU
dealer. Consult your SUBARU dealer for
details.

(224,1)
3-82 Instruments and controls/Mirrors
Mirrors & Auto-dimming mirror/com- ! To Operate the Auto-Dimming Fea-

S03AP pass (if equipped) ture
S03AP0205
S03AP02
Always check that the inside and outside Press the “ ” switch to turn the auto-
mirrors are properly adjusted before you dimming feature on/off. The auto-dimming
start driving. feature is enabled when the switch’s green
LED indicator is on. The auto-dimming
& Inside mirror feature will default to on with each ignition
S03AP01 cycle.
! To Operate the Compass Feature
S03AP0206
1. To turn the compass feature on/off,
press and hold the “ ” switch for more
than 3 seconds or until the display turns
on/off. The compass feature will default to
on with each ignition cycle.
1) Compass 2. If the display reads “C”, slowly drive the
2) Switch vehicle in circles until compass is cali-
brated.
During nighttime driving, the auto-dimming
feature senses distracting glare from
vehicle headlights behind you and auto-
1) Normal position matically dims to eliminate the glare and
2) Anti-glare position preserve your vision.
Push the tab on the mirror for normal use.
To reduce glare from the headlights of the
vehicle behind you, pull the tab to the anti-
glare position.
Compass calibration zones

(225,1)
Instruments and controls/Mirrors 3-83
3. To adjust for compass zone variance: & Auto-dimming mirror/com- cycle.

(1) Find your current location and pass with HomeLink® (if ! To Operate the Compass Feature
zone number on the map. equipped) S03AP0706
(2) Press and hold the “ ” switch for S03AP07 1. To turn the compass feature on/off,
more than 6 seconds or until a zone press and hold the “ ” switch for more
number appears in the display. than 3 seconds or until the display turns 3
on/off. The compass feature will default to
(3) Once the zone number appears in
on with each ignition cycle.
the display, toggle the “ ” switch
again until your current location zone 2. If the display reads “C”, slowly drive the
number appears. After you stop press- vehicle in circles until compass is cali-
ing the switch, your new zone number brated.
will be saved. Within a few seconds,
the display will show a compass direc-
tion.
4. If the vehicle’s magnetics have chan-
ged or if the compass appears inaccurate,
recalibrate the compass. Press and hold 1) Compass
the “ ” switch for more than 9 seconds or 2) HomeLink Buttons
until a “C” appears in the display. Once a 3) Switch
“C” appears in the display, slowly drive the
vehicle in circles until compass is cali- During nighttime driving, the auto-dimming
brated. feature senses distracting glare from
vehicle headlights behind you and auto-
matically dims to eliminate the glare and
preserve your vision. Compass calibration zones
! To Operate the Auto-Dimming Fea- 3. To adjust for compass zone variance:
ture (1) Find your current location and
S03AP0705
Press the “ ” switch to turn the auto- zone number on the map.
dimming feature on/off. The auto-dimming (2) Press and hold the “ ” switch for
feature is enabled when the switch’s green more than 6 seconds or until a zone
LED indicator is on. The auto-dimming number appears in the display.
feature will default to on with each ignition (3) Once the zone number appears in
– CONTINUED –

(226,1)
the display, toggle the “ ” switch CAUTION gramming and/or operation of

again until your current location zone HomeLink.
number appears. After you stop press- . Before programming HomeLink . Keep the hand-held remote (gar-
ing the switch, your new zone number to a garage door opener or gate age door opener remote) of the
will be saved. Within a few seconds, operator, make sure that people device you are programming for
the display will show a compass direc- and objects are out of the way of use in other vehicles as well as
tion. the device to prevent potential for future HomeLink program-
4. If the vehicle’s magnetics have chan- harm or damage. ming. It is also suggested that
ged or if the compass appears inaccurate, . When programming a garage upon the sale of the vehicle, the
recalibrate the compass. Press and hold door opener, it is advised to park programmed HomeLink buttons
the “ ” switch for more than 9 seconds or outside of the garage. be erased for security purposes.
until a “C” appears in the display. Once a Refer to “Erasing HomeLink But-
“C” appears in the display, slowly drive the . Do not use HomeLink with any
garage door opener that lacks tons” �3-87.
vehicle in circles until compass is cali-
brated. safety stop and reverse features
as required by U.S. federal safety ! Programming a New HomeLink
standards (this includes any gar- Button
! HomeLink® Wireless Control Sys- S03AP070409
tem age door opener model manufac-
S03AP0704 tured before April 1, 1982). A
The HomeLink® Wireless Control System garage door that cannot detect
provides a convenient way to replace up to an object signaling the door to
three hand-held radio-frequency remotes stop and reverse does not meet
used to activate devices such as gate current U.S. federal safety stan-
operators, garage door openers, entry dards.
door locks, security systems, even home
lighting. The below steps are generic . It is also recommended that a new
programming instructions; for Genie and battery be placed in the hand-
Sommer garage door openers please go held remote (garage door opener
directly to the HomeLink website. Addi- remote) of the device for quicker
tional information and programming vi- and more accurate training.
deos can be found at . Some vehicles may require the
1) Indicator Light
www.HomeLink.com and ignition switch to be turned to the
2) HomeLink Buttons
www.youtube.com/HomeLinkGentex. “ON” or “ACC” position for pro-

(227,1)
1. Press and release the HomeLink but-

ton that you would like to program. The
HomeLink indicator light will flash orange
slowly (if not, refer to “Erasing HomeLink
Buttons” �3-87).
3
3. While the HomeLink indicator light is 1) Indicator Light

flashing orange, press and hold the hand- 4. Press the HomeLink button that you
held remote button. Continue pressing the would like to program and observe the
hand-held remote button until the indicator light.
HomeLink indicator light changes from . If the indicator light remains constant
1) Garage door opener remote orange to green. You may now release green, your device should operate
the hand-held remote button. when the HomeLink button is pressed.
2. Position the hand-held remote (garage
door opener remote) 1 to 3 inches (2 to 8 NOTE At this point, if your device operates,
cm) away from the HomeLink button that programming is complete.
Some devices may require you to re-
you would like to program. . If the indicator light rapidly flashes
place this “Programming a New
HomeLink Button” step 3 with proce- green, firmly press, hold for two sec-
NOTE onds and release the HomeLink button
dures noted in the “Gate Operator /
Some hand-held remotes (garage door up to three times to complete the
Canadian Programming” section. Refer
opener remotes) may actually train programming process. At this point if
to “Gate Operator / Canadian Program-
better at a distance of 6 to 12 inches your device operates, programming is
ming” �3-87.
(15 to 30 cm). Keep this in mind if you complete. If the device does not
have difficulty with the programming operate, continue with the next step
process. of the programming instructions.
– CONTINUED –

(228,1)
1) “Learn” button 7. Return to the vehicle and firmly press, 1) Status Indicators
5. At the garage door opener motor, hold for two seconds and release the 8. If status indicator arrows appear next
(security gate motor, etc.) locate the HomeLink button up to three times. At this to the indicator light, please refer to
“Learn”, “Smart”, or “Program” button. This point programming is complete and your “Garage Door Two-Way Communication”
can usually be found where the hanging device should operate when the HomeLink �3-87.
antenna wire is attached to the motor-head button is pressed and released.
unit (see the device’s manual to identify In the event that there are still program-
this button). The name and color of the ming difficulties or questions, additional
button may vary by manufacturer. HomeLink information and programming
videos can be found at
NOTE www.HomeLink.com and
A ladder and/or second person may www.youtube.com/HomeLinkGentex. For
simplify the following steps. Genie and Sommer garage door openers
please go directly to the HomeLink web-
6. Firmly press and release the “Learn”, site.
“Smart”, or “Program” button. You now
have 30 seconds in which to complete step
7.

(229,1)
! Gate Operator / Canadian Pro- the device during the “cycling” process ! Reprogramming a Single
gramming to prevent possible overheating. HomeLink Button
S03AP070410 S03AP070406
Canadian radio-frequency laws require To program a previously trained button,
Proceed with “Programming a New
transmitter remote signals to “time-out” follow these steps:
HomeLink Button” step 4 to complete.
(or quit) after several seconds of transmis- 1. Press and hold the desired HomeLink
sion, which may not be long enough for ! Using HomeLink button. DO NOT release the button.
3
S03AP070411
HomeLink to pick up the signal during To operate, simply press and release the 2. The indicator light will begin to slowly
programming. Similar to this Canadian programmed HomeLink button. Activation flash orange after 20 seconds. The
law, some U.S. gate operators are de- will now occur for the trained device (i.e. HomeLink button can be released at this
signed to “time-out” in the same manner. garage door opener, gate operator, secur- point. Proceed with “Programming a New
The indicator LED on the hand-held ity system, entry door lock, home/office HomeLink Button” - step 3.
remote will go off when the device times lighting, etc.). For convenience, the hand- 3. If you do not complete the program-
out, indicating that it has finished transmit- held remote of the device may also be ming of a new device to the button, it will
ting. used at any time. revert to the previously stored program-
If you live in Canada or you are having ming.
! Erasing HomeLink Buttons
difficulties programming a gate operator or S03AP070412
garage door opener by using the program- To erase programming from the three ! Garage Door Two-Way Commu-
ming procedures, replace “Programming a buttons (individual buttons cannot be nication
New HomeLink Button” step 3 with the erased but can be “reprogrammed” as S03AP070413
outlined below), follow the step noted: HomeLink has the capability of commu-
following: nicating with your garage door opener.
While the HomeLink indicator light is Press and hold the two outer HomeLink HomeLink can receive and display “clos-
flashing orange, press and release (“cy- buttons for at least 10 seconds. The LED ing” or “opening” status messages from
cle”) your device’s hand-held remote every indicator will change from continuously lit compatible garage door opener systems.
two seconds until the HomeLink indicator to rapidly flashing. Release both buttons. At any time, HomeLink can also recall and
light changes from orange to green. You Do not hold for longer than 20 seconds. display the last recorded status commu-
may now release the hand-held remote HomeLink is now ready to be programmed nicated by the garage door opener to
button. at any time beginning with “Programming a indicate your garage door being “closed”
New HomeLink Button” - step 1. or “opened”.
NOTE HomeLink has the capability of receiving
If programming a garage door opener this communication from the garage door
or gate operator, it is advised to unplug opener at a range up to 820 feet (250 m).
– CONTINUED –

(230,1)
Range may be reduced by obstacles such online at www.HomeLink.com and

as houses or trees. You may have to slow www.youtube.com/HomeLinkGentex.
your vehicle speed to successfully receive
the garage door opener communication. ! Using Two-Way Communication
S03AP070415
! Programming Two-Way Commu-

nication
S03AP070414
1) Garage Door Opener CLOSING (Blinking

Orange)
2) Garage Door Opener CLOSED (Solid
Green)
1) Status Indicators 3) Garage Door Opener OPENING (Blink-
ing Orange)
Recall and display (at any time) the last 4) Garage Door Opener OPENED (Solid
recorded garage door status message Green)
1) Status Indicators
communicated to HomeLink by simulta- If two-way communication programming is
Within five seconds after programming a neously pressing HomeLink buttons 1 and successful, HomeLink will display the
new HomeLink button, both of HomeLink’s 2 for two seconds. HomeLink will display status of your garage door opener with
garage door status indicators will flash the last recorded status for three seconds. arrow indicators.
rapidly green indicating that the garage
door two-way communication has been ! Certification
S03AP070416
enabled. If your garage door status in- In the event that there are still program-
dicators flashed, two-way communication ming difficulties or questions, additional
programming is complete. HomeLink information and programming
If the garage door status indicators do not videos can be found at
flash, additional HomeLink information www.HomeLink.com,
and programming videos can be found www.youtube.com/HomeLinkGentex, or

(231,1)
by calling the toll-free HomeLink-hotline at . Canada-spec. models

1-800-355-3515.
. U.S.-spec. models
CAUTION
3
FCC WARNING
Changes or modifications not ex-
the user’s authority to operate the
equipment.
– CONTINUED –

(232,1)
WARNING & Outside mirrors

S03AP03
. When programming the ! Convex mirror (passenger side)

S03AP0301
HomeLink® Wireless Control Sys-
tem, you may be operating a WARNING
garage door opener or other
Objects look smaller in a convex
device. Make sure that people
mirror and farther away than when
and objects are out of the way of
viewed in a flat mirror. Do not use the
the garage door or other device
convex mirror to judge the distance
to prevent potential harm or da-
of vehicles behind you when chan-
mage.
ging lanes. Use the inside mirror (or
. Do not use the HomeLink® Wire- glance backwards) to determine the
less Control System with a gar- actual size and distance of objects
age door opener that lacks the that you view in convex mirror.
safety stop and reverse feature
as required by applicable safety
standards. A garage door opener CAUTION
which cannot detect an object,
signaling the door to stop and Make sure to adjust the mirrors
reverse, does not meet these before driving.
safety standards. Using a garage
door opener without these fea-
tures increases risk of serious
injury or death. For more infor-
mation, consult the HomeLink®
website at www.homelink.com or
HomeLink® and the HomeLink® house are call 1-800-355-3515.
registered trademarks of Gentex Corpora-
tion.

(233,1)
Instruments and controls/Defogger and deicer 3-91
! Remote control mirror switch Defogger and deicer (if The vehicle is equipped with the defogger
S03AP0302
and the deicer (if equipped) system. The
equipped) defogger and deicer system is activated
S03BI
only when the ignition switch is in the “ON”
position.
3
: Select side to adjust

: Direction control
The remote control mirrors operate only
when the ignition switch is in the “ON” or Control button
“ACC” position. 1) Models without outside mirror defogger
1. Turn the control switch to the side that 2) Models with outside mirror defogger
you want to adjust. “L” is for the left mirror,
To activate simultaneously the rear win-
“R” is for the right mirror.
dow defogger, outside mirror defogger (if
2. Move the control switch in the direction equipped) and windshield wiper deicer (if
you want to move the mirror. equipped), press the control button that is
3. Return the control switch to the neutral located on the climate control panel. The
position to prevent unintentional opera- indicator light on the control button illumi-
tion. nates while the defogger and deicer
The mirrors can also be adjusted manu- system is activated.
1) Rear window defogger
ally. 2) Outside mirror defogger (if equipped) To turn them off, press the control button
3) Windshield wiper deicer (if equipped) again. They also turn off when the ignition
switch is turned to the “ACC” or “LOCK”/
– CONTINUED –

(234,1)
3-92 Instruments and controls/Tilt/telescopic steering wheel
“OFF” position. the window. Tilt/telescopic steering wheel

S03BF
The defogger and deicer system will
automatically shut off after approximately NOTE WARNING
15 minutes. If the rear window and the . Turn on the defogger and deicer
outside mirrors have been cleared and the system if the wipers are frozen to the . Do not adjust the steering wheel
windshield blade rubbers have been windshield. tilt/telescopic position while driv-
deiced completely before that time, press . If the windshield is covered with ing. This may cause loss of
the control button to turn them off. snow, remove the snow so that the vehicle control and result in per-
For climate control system, it is possible windshield wiper deicer works effec- sonal injury.
for the defogger and deicer system to be tively. . If the lever cannot be raised to the
set to continuous operation mode by a . While the defogger and deicer sys- fixed position, adjust the steering
SUBARU dealer. Consult your SUBARU tem is in the continuous operation wheel again. It is dangerous to
dealer for details. Also, for models with a mode: drive without locking the steering
combination meter display (color LCD), it – If the vehicle speed remains at 9 wheel. This may cause loss of
is possible to set the defogger and deicer mph (15 km/h) or lower for 15 vehicle control and result in per-
system for the continuous operation mode. minutes, the windshield wiper dei- sonal injury.
For details, refer to “Vehicle Setting” �3- cer system automatically stops op-
41. erating. However, the rear window
defogger system and outside mirror
CAUTION defogger system maintain continu-
ous operation in this condition.
. To prevent the battery from being – If the vehicle battery voltage
discharged, do not operate the drops below the permissible level,
defogger and deicer system con- continuous operation of the defog-
tinuously for any longer than ger system and deicer system is
necessary. canceled and the system stops
. Do not use sharp instruments or operating.
window cleaner containing abra-
sives to clean the inner surface of
the rear window. They may da-
mage the conductors printed on

(235,1)
Instruments and controls/Tilt/telescopic steering wheel 3-93
& Heated Steering Wheel sys- CAUTION

tem (if equipped)
The Heated Steering Wheel system
S03BF01
. Use the Heated Steering Wheel
warms the steering wheel at a constant system with the engine running.
temperature. Otherwise, the battery voltage
may drop below the permissible 3
level and it may not be possible to
start the engine.
. There is a possibility that people
with delicate skin may suffer
slight burns even at low tempera-
tures if they use the Heated
Steering Wheel for a long period
1) Tilt adjustment
of time. When using the Heated
2) Telescopic adjustment
Steering Wheel, always be sure to
3) Tilt/telescopic lock lever
warn the persons concerned.
1. Adjust the seat position. Refer to “Front . Do not cover the Heated Steering
seats” �1-5. Wheel with an object such as a
2. Pull the tilt/telescopic lock lever down. 1) Heated Steering Wheel switch steering wheel cover. Doing so
3. Move the steering wheel to the desired 2) Indicator light may cause the Heated Steering
level. 3) Heated area Wheel to overheat.
4. Pull the lever up to lock the steering To turn on the Heated Steering Wheel . Do not spill liquid on the steering
wheel in place. system, pull the Heated Steering Wheel wheel. If liquid is spilled, wipe it
5. Make sure that the steering wheel is switch when the ignition switch is in the off immediately and dry it before
securely locked by moving it up and down, “ON” or “ACC” position. Then the steering using the Heated Steering Wheel
and forward and backward. wheel will be warmed and the indicator system.
light on the switch will illuminate. To turn off
the Heated Steering Wheel system, pull
the switch again. Then the indicator light
will turn off.
– CONTINUED –

(236,1)
3-94 Instruments and controls/Horn
NOTE Horn
S03AR
. If the surface temperature of the
steering wheel is approximately above
1048F (408C) when the switch is turned
on, the system will not heat the steering
wheel. Then, the indicator light will
continue to illuminate.
. The Heated Steering Wheel system
will automatically turn off approxi-
mately 30 minutes after the system
has been turned on.
. The temperature of the Heated Steer-
ing Wheel system cannot be adjusted.
To sound the horn, push the horn pad.

(237,1)
Climate control
Ventilator control .................................................... 4-2 To turn off the climate control system.....................4-8
S04
Center ventilators .................................................. 4-2 Defrosting................................................................ 4-9
Side ventilators...................................................... 4-2 Operating tips for heater and air conditioner ...... 4-9
Climate control panel ............................................. 4-2 Cleaning ventilation grille .......................................4-9
Type A ................................................................... 4-3 Efficient cooling after parking in direct sunlight ......4-9
Type B ................................................................... 4-4 Lubrication oil circulation in the refrigerant
Automatic climate control operation..................... 4-5 circuit................................................................ 4-10
Sensors ................................................................. 4-5 Checking air conditioning system before summer 4
season .............................................................. 4-10
Manual climate control operation.......................... 4-6 Cooling and dehumidifying in high humidity and
Airflow mode selection........................................... 4-6 low temperature weather conditions................... 4-10
MAX A/C mode ...................................................... 4-7 Air conditioner compressor shut-off when
Temperature control............................................... 4-7 engine is heavily loaded .................................... 4-10
Fan speed control .................................................. 4-8 Refrigerant for your climate control system .......... 4-10
Air conditioner control ........................................... 4-8 Air filtration system.............................................. 4-10
Air inlet selection................................................... 4-8 Replacing the cabin air filter ................................. 4-11

(238,1)
4-2 Climate control/Ventilator control
Ventilator control & Side ventilators Climate control panel

S04AF02
S04AF S04AG
& Center ventilators
S04AF01 WARNING
. The cooling function operates
only when the engine is running.
. Do not leave children or adults
who would normally require the
support of others alone in your
vehicle. Pets should not be left
alone either. On hot, sunny days,
temperatures in a closed vehicle
could quickly become high en-
Side ventilators ough to cause severe or possibly
1) Close fatal injuries to people or ani-
Center ventilators 2) Open mals.
To adjust the airflow direction, move the To adjust the flow direction, move the tab.
tab. To close the ventilator, move the tab all
the way down.

(239,1)
Climate control/Climate control panel 4-3

4) Air inlet selection button (Refer to “Air
& Type A inlet selection” �4-8.)
S04AG01
5) MAX A/C button (Refer to “MAX A/C
mode” �4-7.)
6) Defroster button (Refer to “Defrosting”
�4-9.)
7) Rear window defogger button and out-
side mirror defogger button (if equipped)
(Refer to “Defogger and deicer” �3-91.)
8) Airflow mode selection dial (Refer to 4
“Airflow mode selection” �4-6.)
9) Fan speed control dial (Refer to “Fan
speed control” �4-8.)
10) ON/OFF button (Refer to “Automatic
climate control operation” �4-5.)
NOTE
The climate control screen is displayed
on the multi-function display (color
LCD). Refer to “Climate control screen”
�3-52.
As for the multi-function display (black
and white), refer to “Climate control
screen” �3-48.
1) Temperature control dial (Refer to “Auto- 2) AUTO button (Refer to “Automatic cli-
matic climate control operation” �4-5 mate control operation” �4-5.)
and/or “Temperature control” �4-7.) 3) Air conditioner button (Refer to “Air
conditioner control” �4-8.)
– CONTINUED –

(240,1)
4-4 Climate control/Climate control panel
4) Air inlet selection button (Refer to “Air

& Type B inlet selection” �4-8.)
S04AG02
5) MAX A/C button (Refer to “MAX A/C
mode” �4-7.)
6) Defroster button (Refer to “Defrosting”
�4-9.)
7) Rear window defogger button and out-
side mirror defogger button (Refer to
“Defogger and deicer” �3-91.)
8) Passenger’s side temperature control
dial (Refer to “Temperature control” �4-
7.)
9) SYNC button (Refer to “SYNC mode
(type B)” �4-8.)
10) Fan speed control dial (Refer to “Fan
speed control” �4-8.)
11) Airflow mode selection button (Refer to
“Airflow mode selection” �4-6.)
12) ON/OFF button (Refer to “Automatic
climate control operation” �4-5.)
NOTE
The climate control screen is displayed
on the multi-function display (color
LCD). Refer to “Climate control screen”
�3-52.
1) Driver’s side temperature control dial 2) AUTO button (Refer to “Automatic cli-
(Refer to “Automatic climate control mate control operation” �4-5.)
operation” �4-5 and/or “Temperature 3) Air conditioner button (Refer to “Air
control” �4-7.) conditioner control” �4-8.)

(241,1)
Climate control/Automatic climate control operation 4-5
Automatic climate control . The controllable temperature range & Sensors

may vary depending on the regional S04AI03
operation specifications of the vehicle.
The sensors are located as follows.
S04AI
. If you operate any of the buttons on
When this mode is selected, the fan speed, the control panel other than the ON/
airflow mode, air-inlet control, and air OFF button, rear window defogger
conditioner operation are automatically button, SYNC button and temperature
controlled. To activate this mode, perform control dial(s) during FULL AUTO mode
the following. 4
operation, the “FULL” indicator light on
1. Press the AUTO button. The indicator the multi-function display (color LCD)/
light “FULL AUTO” on the multi-function multi-function display (black and white)
display (color LCD)/multi-function display type A will turn off and the “AUTO”
(black and white) illuminates. indicator light will remain illuminated.
2. Set the preferred temperature using You can then manually control the
the temperature control dial. system as desired using the button
you operated. To change the system
NOTE back to the FULL AUTO mode, press
. Operate the automatic climate con- the AUTO button.
trol system when the engine is running.
. Even when cooling is not necessary, To turn off the climate control system,
the air conditioner will automatically press the ON/OFF button. Then the air
turn on if the temperature is set much inlet selection will be set to the following.
lower than the current outlet air tem- . When the air inlet selection is set to
perature. Even in this case, the “A/C” auto mode: Outside air circulation
indicator light on the control panel . When the air inlet selection is set to
illuminates. manual mode: No change
. The air conditioner may not operate
in the following cases:
– When the cabin temperature is 1) Interior air temperature sensor
low 2) Solar sensor
– When the ambient temperature
The automatic climate control system
decreases close to 328F (08C)
employs several sensors. These sensors
– CONTINUED –

(242,1)
4-6 Climate control/Manual climate control operation
are delicate. If they are not treated properly Manual climate control op-
and become damaged, the system may
not be able to control the interior tempera-
eration
S04AJ
ture correctly. To avoid damaging the & Airflow mode selection
sensors, observe the following precau- S04AJ01
tions. Select the airflow mode by using the
. Do not subject the sensors to impact. airflow mode selection dial (type A) or the
airflow mode selection button (type B).
. Keep water away from the sensors.
. Do not cover the sensors. Airflow modes are as follows.
Ventilation 2: Instrument panel outlets

and foot outlets
Ventilation: Instrument panel outlets
Bi-level: Instrument panel outlets and foot

outlets

(243,1)
Climate control/Manual climate control operation 4-7
& MAX A/C mode

S04AJ06
For quicker cooling, press the MAX A/C
button.
When the MAX A/C mode is on, the
following settings will be changed auto-
matically.
. The air conditioner will turn on.
. The temperature will be set on the
4
lowest.
. The fan speed will be set on the
maximum speed.
. The air inlet will be set to recirculation.
Heat: Foot outlets, both side outlets of the Heat-def: Windshield defroster outlets, . The air flow mode setting will be set to
instrument panel and some through wind- foot outlets and both side outlets of the ventilation mode.
shield defroster outlets (A small amount of instrument panel (Refer to “Defrosting”
air flows to the windshield and both side �4-9.) To turn off MAX A/C mode and return the
windows to prevent fogging.) previous setting, press the MAX A/C
button again.
& Temperature control

S04AJ02
Turn the temperature control dial to set the
preferred interior temperature.
NOTE
The controllable temperature range
may vary depending on the regional
specifications of the vehicle.
– CONTINUED –

(244,1)
4-8 Climate control/Manual climate control operation
! SYNC mode (type B) – When the interior has cooled to a

S04AJ0207 NOTE comfortable temperature
When the SYNC mode is turned on, both For efficient defogging or dehumidify-
the driver’s and passenger’s side tem- ing in cold weather, turn on the air
peratures are synchronized using the
WARNING
conditioner. If the ambient temperature
driver’s side temperature control dial. decreases to approximately 328F (08C), Continued operation in the ON posi-
Press the SYNC button to turn on the the air conditioner and dehumidifica- tion may fog up the windows. Switch
SYNC mode. The SYNC button indicator tion system may not operate properly. to the OFF position as soon as the
will illuminate. outside conditions are no longer
Press the SYNC button again or turn the dusty.
passenger’s side temperature control dial
& Air inlet selection
S04AJ05
to cancel the SYNC mode. The SYNC Select the air inlet by pressing the air inlet
button indicator will not illuminate. In this selection button. NOTE
case, temperature control on the driver’s . Recirculation: When outside air circulation is se-
side and passenger’s side is separated. lected, the system may automatically
When the indicator light on the air inlet adjust the air inlet setting depending on
The temperature will be controlled indivi-
selection button illuminates, interior air is such factors as the temperature
dually using the driver’s and passenger’s
recirculated inside the vehicle. Press the setting, the temperature inside the
temperature control dials.
air inlet selection button to the ON position vehicle, or conditions outside the ve-
in the following cases. hicle.
& Fan speed control – When driving on a dusty road
S04AJ03
Select the preferred fan speed by turning – When you want cooling perfor-
the fan speed control dial. mance to increase (for example, in & To turn off the climate control
particularly hot weather) system
& Air conditioner control S04AJ07
To turn off the climate control system,
S04AJ04
The air conditioner operates only when the . Outside air circulation: press the ON/OFF button.
engine is running. When the indicator light on the air inlet
Press the air conditioner button while the selection button does not illuminate, out-
fan is in operation to turn on the air side air is drawn into the passenger
conditioner. When the air conditioner is compartment. Press the air inlet selection
on, the “A/C” indicator light illuminates. button to the OFF position in the following
cases.
To turn off the air conditioner, press the
button again. – When the road is no longer dusty

(245,1)
Climate control/Defrosting 4-9
Defrosting pressing the button again returns the Operating tips for heater and
system to the setting that had been
S04AH
selected before the defroster was acti-
air conditioner
S04AD
vated. & Cleaning ventilation grille
S04AD01
Select the “ ” or “ ” mode to defrost or

dehumidify the windshield and front door
windows. 1) Front ventilation inlet grille
NOTE Always keep the front ventilation inlet grille
. When the “ ” or “ ” mode is free of snow, leaves, or other obstructions
selected, the air conditioner operates to ensure efficient heating and defrosting.
automatically regardless of the posi- Since the condenser is located in front of
tion of the air conditioner button to the radiator, this area should be kept clean
defrost the windshield more quickly. because cooling performance is impaired
However the indicator on the air condi- by any accumulation of insects and leaves
tioner button may not illuminate. At the on the condenser.
same time, the air inlet selection is
automatically set to the outside air & Efficient cooling after parking
mode. in direct sunlight
. After defrosting the windshield by S04AD02
After parking in direct sunlight, drive with
pressing the defroster button “ ”,
the windows open for a few minutes to
– CONTINUED –

(246,1)
4-10 Climate control/Air filtration system
allow outside air to circulate into the any problem with the air conditioning Air filtration system
heated interior. This results in quicker system. S04AE
cooling by the air conditioner. Keep the
Your vehicle’s air conditioning system is
windows closed during the operation of the & Air conditioner compressor equipped with an air filtration system.
air conditioner for maximum cooling effi- shut-off when engine is Replace the cabin air filter according to
ciency. heavily loaded
S04AD06
the replacement schedule found in the
To improve acceleration and gas mileage, “Warranty and Maintenance Booklet”. This
& Lubrication oil circulation in the air conditioner compressor is designed schedule should be followed to maintain
the refrigerant circuit to temporarily shut off during air condi- the filter’s dust collection ability. Under
S04AD03
Operate the air conditioner compressor at tioner operation whenever the accelerator extremely dusty conditions, the filter
a low engine speed (at idle or low driving is fully depressed such as during rapid should be replaced more frequently. Have
speeds) a few minutes each month during acceleration or when driving on a steep your filter checked or replaced by your
the off-season to circulate its oil. upgrade. SUBARU dealer. For replacement, use
only a genuine SUBARU air filter kit.
& Checking air conditioning & Refrigerant for your climate
system before summer sea- control system CAUTION
son S04AD07
Your air conditioner uses ozone friendly Contact your SUBARU dealer if the
S04AD04
Check the air conditioner unit for refriger- refrigerant R-1234yf (HFO-1234yf). Con- following occurs, even if it is not yet
ant leaks, hose conditions, and proper sult your SUBARU dealer for service. time to change the filter:
operation each spring. Have the air con- Repairs needed as a result of using the . Reduction of the airflow through
ditioning system checked by your wrong refrigerant are not covered under the vents.
SUBARU dealer. warranty.
. Windshield gets easily fogged or
misted.
& Cooling and dehumidifying in
high humidity and low tem-
perature weather conditions NOTE
S04AD05
Under certain weather conditions (high The filter can influence the air condi-
relative humidity, low temperatures, etc.) a tioning, heating and defroster perfor-
small amount of water vapor emission mance if not properly maintained.
from the air outlets may be noticed. This
condition is normal and does not indicate

(247,1)
Climate control/Air filtration system 4-11
& Replacing the cabin air filter doing this, be careful not to damage
S04AE01 the hinge.
1. Remove the glove box.
NOTE
We recommend that you take measures
to protect the center console with
masking tape first, so that you avoid
scratching the center console with the 4
glove box.
(1) Open the glove box.
(3) Push in the stoppers located on

both sides of the glove box and then
pull down the glove box as far as it will
go. 2. Remove the cabin air filter according to
the following procedure in order to prevent
dust on the air cleaner from falling to the
inside of its housing.
(1) Pinch both tabs and remove the
filter cover.
(2) Gently tilt down the end of the filter
and slowly pull it out 0.4 in (1 cm).
(2) Remove the damper shaft from the (3) Slowly pull out the rest of the filter.
glove box.
(4) Pull out the glove box horizontally

and remove the hinge portion. When
– CONTINUED –

(248,1)
4-12 Climate control/Air filtration system
3. Replace the cabin air filter with a new 4. Reinstall the glove box, and connect
one and then reinstall the cover. the damper shaft.
5. Close the glove box.
CAUTION
The arrow mark on the filter must
point UP.

(249,1)
Audio
Antenna ................................................................... 5-2 Roof antenna (for Shark fin type) ............................5-2
S05
Roof antenna (for Rod type) ................................... 5-2 Audio set ................................................................. 5-3

(250,1)
5-2 Audio/Antenna
Antenna & Roof antenna (for Shark fin

S05AA type)
& Roof antenna (for Rod type) S05AA04
S05AA03
CAUTION
. Be sure to remove the antenna
rod before entering garages,
parking towers and other loca-
tions with low ceilings.
. Remove the antenna rod before
washing your car at a car wash. If
the antenna rod remains at-
1) Unscrew
tached, it may scratch the roof.
2) Remove
. When reinstalling the removed
antenna rod, be sure to fully The roof antenna is installed on the roof. The roof antenna is installed on the roof.
tighten it. The antenna rod can be removed by
unscrewing it from its base.

(251,1)
Audio/Audio set 5-3
Audio set
S05AC
If your vehicle is equipped with a genuine

SUBARU navigation system or audio
system, refer to the separate navigation/
audio Owner’s Manual for details.

(252,1)
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————

(253,1)
Interior equipment
Interior lights........................................................... 6-2 Floor mat ............................................................... 6-12
S06
Map lights.............................................................. 6-2 Assist grip............................................................. 6-12
Dome light ............................................................. 6-2 Coat hook.............................................................. 6-13
Cargo area light ..................................................... 6-3 Shopping bag hook .............................................. 6-14
Rear gate light (if equipped) ................................... 6-3 Cargo area cover (if equipped)............................ 6-14
OFF delay timer ..................................................... 6-3 Using the cover .................................................... 6-14
Sun visors ............................................................... 6-4 To remove the cover housing................................ 6-15
Sun visor extension plate (if equipped) .................. 6-4 Stowage of the cargo area cover........................... 6-15
Vanity mirror.......................................................... 6-5 To install the cover housing.................................. 6-16
Vanity mirror with light (if equipped) ...................... 6-5 Cargo tie-down hooks (if equipped) ................... 6-16
Storage compartment ............................................. 6-5 Front View Monitor (if equipped)......................... 6-16
Glove box .............................................................. 6-6 How to access the Front View Monitor .................. 6-17 6
Center console ...................................................... 6-6 How to cancel the Front View Monitor................... 6-17
Cup holders ........................................................... 6-6 How to adjust the display contrast and
Bottle holders ........................................................ 6-7 brightness ......................................................... 6-18
Accessory power outlets........................................ 6-7 Range of image on screen .................................... 6-18
Use with a cigarette lighter (dealer option) ............. 6-9 Guiding line.......................................................... 6-19
USB power supply .................................................. 6-9 Handling of camera .............................................. 6-19
How to use the USB power supply ........................ 6-10 Rear view camera ................................................. 6-20
Ashtray (dealer option)......................................... 6-11

(254,1)
6-2 Interior equipment/Interior lights
Interior lights ! Automatic illumination & Dome light

S06AA0603 S06AA01
S06AA When the door interlock switch is in the
“DOOR” position, the map lights illuminate
CAUTION automatically in the following cases.
. Any of the doors other than the rear
When leaving your vehicle, make gate is opened.
sure the lights are turned off to
. The doors are unlocked using the
avoid battery discharge.
keyless access function (if equipped).
Refer to “Locking and unlocking by holding
& Map lights the access key fob” �2-6.
S06AA06 . The doors are unlocked using the
remote keyless entry system. Refer to
“Remote keyless entry system” �2-17.
. The ignition switch is turned from the 1) ON
“ACC” position to the “LOCK”/“OFF” posi- 2) DOOR
tion. 3) OFF
The dome light switch has the following
positions.
ON: The light remains on continuously.
OFF: The light remains off.
DOOR: The dome light illuminates auto-
matically in the following cases.
1) Door interlock switch
. Any of the doors or the rear gate is
To turn on the map light, push the lens. opened.
To turn it off, push the lens again. . The doors or the rear gate are unlocked
using the keyless access function (if
equipped). Refer to “Locking and unlock-
ing by holding the access key fob” �2-6.

(255,1)
Interior equipment/Interior lights 6-3
. The doors or the rear gate are unlocked & Rear gate light (if equipped) When the interior light switch is set to the
using the remote keyless entry transmitter. S06AA04 “DOOR” position, the light will automati-
Refer to “Remote keyless entry system” cally turn on and turn off depending on the
�2-17. locking and unlocking of the doors, the
. The ignition switch is turned from the opening and closing of the doors including
“ACC” position to the “LOCK”/“OFF” posi- the rear gate, as well as the position of the
tion. ignition switch.
& Cargo area light NOTE

S06AA02 The setting for the period of time in
which the lights remain on (OFF delay
timer) can be changed by a SUBARU
dealer. Contact your SUBARU dealer 6
for details. For models with the combi-
nation meter display (color LCD), the
1) DOOR
2) OFF setting can also be changed by operat-
ing the combination meter display
DOOR: The light illuminates when the rear (color LCD). For details, refer to “Vehi-
gate is opened. The light remains illumi- cle Setting” �3-41.
nated for several seconds and gradually
turns off after the rear gate is closed.
OFF: The light remains off.
1) DOOR
2) OFF & OFF delay timer
S06AA07
The following lights have an automatic
DOOR: The light illuminates when the rear illumination function.
gate is opened. The light remains illumi-
nated for several seconds and gradually . Dome light
turns off after the rear gate is closed. . Map light
OFF: The light remains off. . Cargo area light
. Rear gate light (if equipped)

(256,1)
6-4 Interior equipment/Sun visors
Sun visors & Sun visor extension plate (if

S06AC equipped)
S06AC01
CAUTION
To block out glare, swing down the visors. With the sun visor positioned over the side Do not pull out the extension plate
To use the sun visor at a side window, window, you can use the sun visor exten- with the sun visor positioned over
swing it down and move it sideways. sion plate to prevent glare through the gap the windshield. The extension plate
between the sun visor and center pillar. To would obstruct your view of the
use the extension plate, pull it toward the rearview mirror.
rear of the vehicle. When you have
finished using it, stow it by pushing it
toward the front of the vehicle.

(257,1)
Interior equipment/Storage compartment 6-5
& Vanity mirror & Vanity mirror with light (if Storage compartment
S06AC03
equipped) S06AD
S06AC02
CAUTION
CAUTION CAUTION
Keep the vanity mirror cover closed
while the car is being driven to avoid Keep the vanity mirror cover closed . Always keep the storage com-
being temporarily blinded by the while the car is being driven to avoid partment closed while driving to
glare of bright light. being distracted by the light. reduce the risk of injury in the
event of a sudden stop or an
accident.
. Do not store spray cans, contain-
ers with flammable or corrosive
liquids or any other dangerous 6
items in the storage compart-
ment.
To use the vanity mirror, swing down the To use the vanity mirror, swing down the
sun visor and open the vanity mirror cover. sun visor and open the vanity mirror cover.
The light beside the vanity mirror illumi-
nates when the mirror cover is opened.
NOTE
Use of the vanity mirror light for a long
period of time while the engine is not
running can cause battery discharge.
– CONTINUED –

(258,1)
6-6 Interior equipment/Storage compartment
& Glove box & Center console and/or your passengers. Spilled
S06AD01 S06AD02
The center console box provides a storage beverages may also damage up-
space. holstery or carpets.
. When a cup in the rear passen-
ger’s cup holder contains a bev-
erage, do not fold down the rear
seatback. Otherwise, the bever-
age could spill and, if the bev-
erage is hot, it could scald you
and/or your passengers.
1) Rotate the key clockwise to lock.

2) Rotate the key counterclockwise to un-
lock. 1) Card holder
To open the glove box, pull the handle. The top of the console can be used as an
To close it, push the lid firmly upward. armrest.
NOTE
& Cup holders
. The emergency key is directional. If S06AD16
the key cannot be inserted, change the
direction that the grooved side is facing CAUTION
Front passenger’s cup holder
and insert it again. . Do not pick up a cup from the cup
. For models with the “keyless access A dual cup holder is built into the center
holder or put a cup in the holder
with push-button start system”, use the console.
while you are driving, as this may
emergency key to lock or unlock the distract you and lead to an acci-
glove box. dent.
. Take care to avoid spills. Bev-
erages, if hot, might scald you

(259,1)
Interior equipment/Accessory power outlets 6-7
Accessory power outlets

S06AF
Electrical power (12 V DC) is available at

any of the accessory power outlets when
the ignition switch is in either the “ACC” or
“ON” position. Accessory power outlets
are located in the following places.
6
Rear passenger’s cup holder (if equipped) The bottle holder equipped on each door
A dual cup holder is built into the armrest. trim can be used to hold beverage bottles
and other items.
& Bottle holders
S06AD17
CAUTION
. Do not pick up a bottle from the Power outlet below the climate control
bottle holder or put a bottle in the panel
holder while you are driving, as
this may distract you and lead to
an accident.
. When placing a beverage in a
bottle holder, make sure it is
capped. Otherwise, the beverage
could spill when opening/closing
the door or while driving and, if
the beverage is hot, it could scald
you and/or your passengers.
– CONTINUED –

(260,1)
6-8 Interior equipment/Accessory power outlets
. Use only electrical appliances interfere with your shifting gears

which are designed for 12 V DC. and operating the accelerator
The maximum power rating of an and brake pedals. If they do, do
appliance that can be connected not use the electrical appliance
is 120 W. Do not use an appliance while driving.
which exceeds the indicated wat-
tage for each outlet.
. When using appliances con-
nected to two outlets simulta-
neously, the total power con-
sumed by them must not exceed
120 W. Overloading the acces-
Power outlet in the center console sory power outlet can cause a
short circuit. Do not use double
You can use an in-vehicle electrical appli- adapters or more than one elec-
ance by connecting it to an outlet. trical appliance.
The maximum power rating of an appli-
ance that can be connected is 120 W. . If the plug on your electric appli-
ance is either too loose or too
CAUTION tight for the accessory power NOTE
outlet, this can result in a poor
contact or cause the plug to get When the lid of the center console is
. Do not attempt to use a cigarette
stuck. Only use plugs that fit closed, an opening remains between
lighter in the accessory power
properly. the center console and the lid to allow
outlets.
the power outlet in the center console
. Do not place any foreign objects, . Use of an electric appliance in the to be used. Pass the cord of the
especially metal ones such as accessory power outlet for a long electrical appliance through this open-
coins or aluminum foil, into the period of time while the engine is ing.
accessory power outlet. That not running can cause battery
could cause a short circuit. Al- discharge.
ways put the cap on the acces- . Before driving your vehicle, make
sory power outlet when it is not in sure that the plug and the cord on
use. your electrical appliance will not

(261,1)
Interior equipment/USB power supply 6-9
& Use with a cigarette lighter cigarette lighter plug in the sock- USB power supply
(dealer option) et. Doing so may cause a short- S06AY
S06AF01 circuit and overheating, resulting
To use the accessory power outlet as a
in a fire. CAUTION
cigarette lighter socket, purchase the
cigarette lighter plug, which is an optional . If the socket is ever used for a . The specification of a USB term-
accessory. A cigarette lighter plug is plug-in accessory such as a cell inal that can be used is the A-
available from your SUBARU dealer. phone, that may damage the type. If a different specification of
The cigarette lighter operates only when portion of the socket’s internal terminal is connected, power
the ignition switch is in the “ON” or “ACC” mechanism that causes a cigar- supply or charging may not be
position. ette lighter plug to “pop out” after possible, or the device may mal-
its lighter element is heated. function.
To use the cigarette lighter, push in the
Therefore, do not place a cigar-
knob and wait a few moments. It will
ette lighter plug in a socket that . There is a risk that a connected 6
automatically spring up when ready for device may malfunction or data
has been used, even once, to
use. may be damaged. The connec-
power a plug-in accessory. Doing
so may cause the plug to stick tion of a device shall be per-
WARNING formed at your responsibility.
and overheat, creating a potential
To avoid being burned, never grasp fire hazard. . To avoid an electric shock or a
the lighter by the end with the malfunction, observe the follow-
heating element. Doing so could ing precautions.
result in injury and could also da- – Do not connect a USB hub.
mage the heating element. – Do not insert any metal or
other foreign object into the
USB terminal.
CAUTION
– Do not spill water or other
. Do not hold the lighter pushed in, liquid on the USB terminal.
because it will overheat. . Be careful not to pull the con-
. The electrical power socket is nected cable. Doing so could
originally designed to use a gen- break the USB terminal and the
uine SUBARU cigarette lighter connected device.
plug. Do not use a non-genuine
– CONTINUED –

(262,1)
6-10 Interior equipment/USB power supply
. If a device is connected for a long . When a device that communicates

time when the engine is not with a PC is connected, power supply
running, the battery may be dis- or charging may not be possible.
charged. Even when the engine is . When connect a device for charging,
running, we recommend that you disconnect the device promptly after
do not connect a device for an charging is completed.
unnecessarily long time.
. Do not connect a malfunctioning & How to use the USB power
device. Doing so may cause the supply
S06AY01
risk of smoke and fire. Use the USB terminal to use or charge an
electronic device. When the ignition switch
NOTE is in the “ACC” or “ON” position, the power
can be supplied to the electronic device.
. The USB power supply is designed Up to DC 5 V can be supplied from each to
to supply a maximum rated power of DC terminal.
5 V/2.1 A or DC 5 V/1 A. Before
connecting a device, be sure to read
the instruction manual of the device
and check whether or not this specifi-
cation of the output is supported by the
device. If a device that requires power
exceeding the maximum rating is con-
nected, power supply or charging may
not be possible. Even if charging could
be completed, the time required for
charging may be longer than when the
Front seat 1 terminal type USB power
genuine charger for that device is used.
supply
. Depending on the device, charging
may be possible only when a special – DC 5 V/1 A
cable is used. In this case, be sure to – Audio devices can be connected and
connect the device using the special used.
cable.

(263,1)
Interior equipment/Ashtray (dealer option) 6-11
Front seat 2 terminal type USB power Ashtray (dealer option)

supply S06AG
– DC 5 V/2.1 A*
– Audio devices can be connected and CAUTION
used.
. Do not use ashtrays as waste
*: The available electricity of the two USB receptacles or leave a lighted
terminals is a maximum of 4.2 A. cigarette in an ashtray. This could
cause a fire.
. Always extinguish matches and
cigarettes before putting them
into the ashtray, and then close
the ashtray securely. If you keep 6
the ashtray open, the fire of the The portable ashtray can be installed in
cigarette may spread to another each cup holder or bottle holder. For the
cigarette butt and start a fire. locations of the cup holders, refer to “Cup
. Do not put flammable material in holders” �6-6. For the locations of the
the ashtray. bottle holders, refer to “Bottle holders” �6-
7.
. Do not leave a lot of cigarette
butts in the ashtray. When using the ashtray, open the lid of the
ashtray. Fully close the lid after using the
Console USB power supply (if ashtray to help reduce residual smoke.
equipped) NOTE
– DC 5 V/2.1 A* Particles of ash and tobacco will accu-
– Power supply function only mulate around the hinges of the ash-
*: The available electricity of the two USB tray’s inner lid. Clean them off using a
terminals is a maximum of 4.2 A. toothbrush or a similar narrow-ended
implement.

(264,1)
6-12 Interior equipment/Floor mat
Floor mat . Do not use more than one floor Assist grip
S06AJ mat. S06BD
1) Assist grip
CAUTION Retaining pins are located on the driver’s
The assist grip is to be held to support the
side floor.
If the floor mat slips forward and body of the passengers when they are in
The floor mat should be properly secured the seat and the vehicle is moving.
interferes with the movement of the using the built-in grommets, by placing the
pedals during driving, it could cause grommets over the pins and pushing them
an accident. Observe the following WARNING
downward.
precautions to prevent the floor mat Do not hold the assist grip when
from slipping forward. getting up from the seat. Holding
. Be sure to use a genuine and pulling the assist grip in the
SUBARU floor mat or an equiva- wrong way could break the grip and
lent designed with grommets in possibly cause injury.
the correct locations.
. Make sure that the driver’s floor
mat is placed in its proper loca- CAUTION
tion and is correctly secured on
Do not attach heavy objects to the
its retaining pins.
assist grip. Doing so could break it

(265,1)
Interior equipment/Coat hook 6-13
and damage the object. Coat hook WARNING

S06AH
Obey the following instructions.

. Do not hang coat hangers or
other hard or pointed objects on
the coat hooks. Hang clothing
directly on the coat hooks with-
out using hangers.
. Before hanging clothing on the
coat hooks, make sure there are
no pointed objects in the pock-
ets. 6
If these instructions are ignored, the
following may occur in sudden
A coat hook is attached to the rear stops or in a collision.
passenger’s assist grip. . Serious injuries by the items
thrown through the cabin
. Incorrect SRS curtain airbag de-
ployment
CAUTION
Never hang anything on the coat
hook that might obstruct the driver’s
view or that could cause injury in
sudden stops or in a collision. And
do not hang items on the coat hook
that weigh 11 lbs (5 kg) or more.

(266,1)
6-14 Interior equipment/Shopping bag hook
Shopping bag hook Cargo area cover (if WARNING

S06AI equipped)
S06AK
Do not place anything on the ex-
CAUTION tended cover. Putting excessive
The cargo area cover is provided for weight on the extended cover can
Do not hang items on the shopping covering the cargo area and to protect its break it and an object on the cover
bag hook that weigh 6 lbs (3 kg) or contents from direct sunlight. This cover is could tumble forward in the event of
more. detachable to make room for additional a sudden stop or collision. This
cargo. could cause serious injury.
& Using the cover
S06AK01
CAUTION
Be careful not to scratch the rear
gate stays while extending and re-
winding the cover.
Scratches on the stays could cause
leakage of gas from the stays, which
may result in their inability to hold
the rear gate open.
A shopping bag hook is attached to each

side of the cargo area.
To extend the cover, pull the end of the
cover out of the housing, then insert its
hooks into the catches as shown. To
rewind it, unhook it from the catches and
it will rewind automatically. You should
hold on to the cover and guide it back into
the cover housing while it is rewinding.

(267,1)
Interior equipment/Cargo area cover 6-15
& To remove the cover housing & Stowage of the cargo area
S06AK02
1. Rewind the cover. cover
S06AK04
The cargo area cover can be stowed in
under the cargo floor.
6
2. Stow the cover housing in the cargo
area end.
2. Push the cover housing to the right
side and shorten it.
3. Take it off the retainer. 1. Raise and fold the rear end of the cargo
floor board.
3. Put the cargo floor board back while

hanging two retaining straps on the hooks
that are located on the rear wall of cargo
area.
– CONTINUED –

(268,1)
6-16 Interior equipment/Cargo tie-down hooks
& To install the cover housing Cargo tie-down hooks Front View Monitor (if
S06AK05
The right end of the cargo area cover is a (if equipped) equipped)
sliding structure. S06AM S06BA
1. Insert the right end of the cover into the The cargo area is equipped with two or The image from the camera mounted
recessed portion with the arrow mark four tie-down hooks so that cargo can be inside the front grille is displayed in the
facing upward. secured with a cargo net or ropes. multi-function display (color LCD). This
When using the front tie-down hooks, turn eliminates blind spots and allows the driver
2. Hold the cover housing securely and
them down out of the storing recesses. to check the forward direction of both
insert the left end of the cover into the
sides.
recessed portion.
CAUTION
WARNING
The cargo tie-down hooks are de-
signed only for securing light cargo. . Never rely on only the Front View
Never try to secure cargo that ex- Monitor when driving the vehicle.
ceeds the capacity of the hooks. The The image on the monitor screen
maximum load capacity is 22 lbs (10 may be different from the actual
kg) per hook. situation. If you drive the vehicle
by viewing only the monitor im-
age, a collision or an unexpected

(269,1)
Interior equipment/Front View Monitor 6-17
accident may occur. When driv- & How to access the Front View & How to cancel the Front View
ing the vehicle, always check the Monitor Monitor
traffic around the vehicle directly S06BA01 S06BA02
with your eyes and the mirrors. ! Manual cancellation

S06BA0201
. Always operate the vehicle as . Press the VIEW monitor switch again.
you would without the Front View . Press the INFO button on the steering
Monitor. wheel.
. Do not use the Front View Monitor ! Automatic cancellation
S06BA0202
in the following situations. If any of the following conditions are met,
– You are driving on a dirt road the Front View Monitor is canceled auto-
or a road covered in snow. matically.
– The camera malfunctions (e.g. After accessing the Front View Monitor 6
the lens or bracket is broken). by pressing the VIEW monitor switch:
. If the outside temperature is low, . Approximately 3 minutes have passed
the monitor screen may become 1) VIEW monitor switch since the last operation.
dark or the image may become . The vehicle speed becomes 12.5 mph
To change over to the camera screen, (20 km/h) or more.*
dim. In particular, the image of a
perform either of the following operations
moving object may be distorted . The select lever is shifted to the “P”
when the ignition switch is in the “ACC” or
or disappear from the screen. position.
“ON” position.
You must always check the traffic . The parking brake is applied.
around the vehicle directly with . Press the VIEW monitor switch.
*: The Front View Monitor can be activated
your eyes when driving it. . Shift the select lever to the “R” position,
and then shift into the other position except when pressing the VIEW monitor switch,
the “P” position when the reverse interlock regardless of the vehicle speed.
function is on.*1 After accessing the Front View Monitor
*1: The reverse interlock function can be using the select lever:
switched on or off. Refer to “Camera shift . Shift the select lever into the “P”
link setting” �3-63. position.
. The vehicle speed becomes 5 mph (8
km/h) or more.*
– CONTINUED –

(270,1)
6-18 Interior equipment/Front View Monitor
. Approximately 9 seconds have passed & Range of image on screen WARNING

since the last operation. S06BA03
. The parking brake is applied. Because the range of the image

*: When the Front View Monitor is activated at captured by the camera is limited,
speeds of more than 12.5 mph (20 km/h), to always check the traffic around the
cancel the Front View Monitor, the vehicle vehicle directly with your eyes when
speed needs to be decreased to less than driving the vehicle.
12.5 mph (20 km/h) and then increased to
more than 12.5 mph (20 km/h). NOTE
. The range of the displayed image
& How to adjust the display may differ depending on the vehicle
contrast and brightness status or the road surface status.
S06BA06
The contrast and brightness of the front . Because the Front View Monitor
view monitor display can be adjusted. For system uses a specially designed lens,
details, refer to “Camera Settings” �3-63. the sense of distance in the displayed
image is different from the actual dis-
tance.
. The camera image may be difficult to
view in the following situations. This is
not a malfunction.
– Dark place (at night)
– High or low temperature around
the lens
– Water contacts lens or in high
humidity (rainy weather)
– There is foreign materials (such
A) Traffic intersection with a poor visibility as mud) around the camera.
view
B) Parking facing a wall
– Sunlight or headlight beam di-
1) Range of displayed image rectly shines towards the camera
2) Obstacles (e.g., buildings, fences or lens.
other vehicles)

(271,1)
Interior equipment/Front View Monitor 6-19
. Under an artificial light such as a & Guiding line . The camera unit is a waterproof
fluorescent lamp, sodium-vapor lamp S06BA04
structure. Do not attempt to re-
or mercury lamp, the lighted portion move, disassemble or modify the
may look like it is flickering (flicker unit.
phenomenon). . Do not rub strongly or polish the
. While the display has cooled down, camera lens with a hard brush or
the image may leave traces or become abrasive compounds. The lens
darker than usual, causing a difficulty may be scratched resulting in an
in viewing the screen. Always check the adverse effect to the camera
traffic around the vehicle directly with image.
your eyes while driving the vehicle.
. The following incidents should not . The camera lens is made of glass
be deemed a malfunction. or plastic. Do not allow any 6
– The camera lens may become organic solvent, body wax, oil
foggy when the humidity is high on film remover or glass coating
1) Guiding line agent to become attached on the
a rainy day. 2) Warning message lens surface. If any becomes
– The light from a vehicle or build-
The guiding line that indicates the width attached, remove it immediately.
ing located ahead may be reflected
towards the camera image while and the front end of your vehicle is . Do not expose the camera lens to
driving at night. displayed on the display. any sudden temperature change,
– In a dark place or while driving at for example, spraying hot water
night, the camera image may be & Handling of camera on it in cold weather.
S06BA05
adjusted to make noises less visi- . Do not apply the water jet of a
ble. Therefore, the image may look CAUTION high pressure washer to the cam-
like a monochromatic image or the era or the surrounding area when
image colors may differ from the Observe the following instructions. cleaning the vehicle. The impact
actual colors. The camera image Otherwise, the system may malfunc- by the strong water pressure may
may be deteriorated in regard to tion. cause the camera to come off.
sharpness at the center and four . Do not apply any strong impact to Also, water may enter inside the
corners of the screen. This is not a the camera such as banging it or camera and cause a malfunction.
malfunction. hitting it with an object. The . If the camera is exposed to any
mounting angle may change. impact, it may lead to malfunction
– CONTINUED –

(272,1)
6-20 Interior equipment/Rear view camera
of the camera. Have the camera Rear view camera

inspected by your SUBARU deal- S06AW
er as soon as possible. Refer to the separate navigation/audio
. Do not use a steam cleaner under Owner’s Manual.
any circumstances. Some types
of steam cleaners inject hot
steam.
. The camera surface may be da-
maged by a flying stone.
NOTE
If the camera lens is contaminated, no
sharp image will be available. When the
camera is contaminated with water
drops, snow or mud, wash it with water
and wipe away any moisture with a soft
cloth. If it heavily gets dirty, wash it with
a neutral detergent.

(273,1)
Starting and operating

Fuel .......................................................................... 7-3 Pre-heating or pre-cooling the interior of
S07
Fuel requirements .................................................. 7-3 the vehicle......................................................... 7-21
Fuel filler lid and cap ............................................. 7-5 Remote transmitter program (Remote engine
starter transceiver) ............................................ 7-21
State emission testing (U.S. only) ......................... 7-7 System maintenance............................................. 7-22
Preparing to drive ................................................... 7-9 Certification for remote engine starter................... 7-23
Starting and stopping the engine (models Manual transmission ............................................ 7-24
without push-button start system) ..................... 7-9 Shifting speeds .................................................... 7-25
Starting engine ..................................................... 7-10 Driving tips........................................................... 7-25
Stopping the engine.............................................. 7-11 Continuously variable transmission ................... 7-26
Steering lock ........................................................ 7-12 Continuously variable transmission features ......... 7-26
Starting and stopping engine (models with Select lever .......................................................... 7-27
push-button start system)................................. 7-12 Selection of manual mode (if equipped) ................ 7-29
Safety precautions ................................................ 7-12 Selection of “L” (if equipped)................................ 7-30
Operating range for push-button start system ....... 7-12 Shift lock function ................................................ 7-31 7
Starting engine ..................................................... 7-12 Driving tips........................................................... 7-32
Stopping engine.................................................... 7-14 SI-DRIVE (if equipped) ......................................... 7-33
When access key fob does not operate properly ... 7-15
Intelligent (I) mode................................................ 7-33
Steering lock ........................................................ 7-15
Sport (S) mode ..................................................... 7-33
Remote engine start system (dealer option) ...... 7-16 SI-DRIVE switches ................................................ 7-34
Remote engine starter transceiver (fob)................. 7-16 Power steering...................................................... 7-35
Alternate operation method for models with
“keyless access with push-button start Power steering warning light ................................ 7-35
system” .............................................................. 7-20 Power steering system features ............................ 7-35
Entering the vehicle while it is running via Braking .................................................................. 7-36
remote start (models without “keyless access Braking tips.......................................................... 7-36
with push-button start system”) .......................... 7-20 Brake system ....................................................... 7-36
Entering the vehicle while it is running via Disc brake pad wear warning indicators................ 7-37
remote start (models with “keyless access with ABS (Anti-lock Brake System)............................. 7-37
push-button start system”).................................. 7-21
ABS self-check ..................................................... 7-38
Entering the vehicle following remote engine
start shutdown.................................................... 7-21 ABS warning light................................................. 7-38

(274,1)
Starting and operating
Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD) Cruise control set indicator light........................... 7-57
system ................................................................ 7-38 Auto Start Stop system (if equipped) ................. 7-57
Steps to take if EBD system malfunctions ............. 7-39 System operation ................................................. 7-57
Vehicle Dynamics Control system....................... 7-40 Displaying the Auto Start Stop system status ....... 7-62
Safety precautions ................................................ 7-40 System warning.................................................... 7-62
System features .................................................... 7-40 BSD/RCTA (if equipped)....................................... 7-63
Vehicle Dynamics Control system monitor............. 7-41 System features.................................................... 7-63
Vehicle Dynamics Control OFF switch ................... 7-41 System operation ................................................. 7-65
X-MODE (if equipped) ........................................... 7-43 BSD/RCTA approach indicator light/warning
To activate/deactivate the X-MODE ........................ 7-44 buzzer ............................................................... 7-67
Hill descent control function ................................. 7-45 BSD/RCTA OFF indicator ...................................... 7-68
Tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) BSD/RCTA warning indicator ................................ 7-69
(U.S.-spec. models)............................................ 7-46 BSD/RCTA OFF switch.......................................... 7-69
Parking your vehicle............................................. 7-48 Certification for the BSD/RCTA ............................. 7-70
Parking brake ....................................................... 7-48 Handling of radar sensors .................................... 7-71
Parking tips .......................................................... 7-48 Reverse Automatic Braking (RAB) system
Hill start assist system......................................... 7-50 (if equipped) ....................................................... 7-72
To activate/deactivate the Hill start assist Reverse Automatic Braking (RAB) system
system................................................................ 7-51 overview............................................................ 7-73
Hill start assist warning light/Hill start assist Operating conditions ............................................ 7-74
OFF indicator light .............................................. 7-52 Reverse Automatic Braking (RAB) system
operation........................................................... 7-77
Cruise control (if equipped) ................................. 7-53
Canceling the Reverse Automatic Braking (RAB)
To set cruise control ............................................. 7-53 system operation............................................... 7-80
To temporarily cancel the cruise control................ 7-55 Reverse Automatic Braking (RAB) system
To turn off the cruise control................................. 7-55 ON/OFF setting.................................................. 7-80
To change the cruising speed ............................... 7-55 RAB warning indicator.......................................... 7-82
Cruise control indicator light................................. 7-57 Handling of the sonar sensors .............................. 7-82

(275,1)
Starting and operating/Fuel 7-3
Fuel knocks heavily or persistently. happens, return to your authorized

SUBARU Dealer for service. If it is
S07AA
! RON determined that the condition is caused
S07AA010301
CAUTION This octane rating is the Research Octane by the type of fuel used, repairs may not be
Number. covered by your warranty.
. Use of a fuel which is low in
quality or use of an inappropriate ! AKI ! Gasoline for cleaner air (2.0 L engine
S07AA010302
fuel additive may cause damage This octane rating is the average of the models)
S07AA0130
to the engine and/or fuel system. Research Octane and Motor Octane num- Your use of gasoline with detergent ad-
. Some gas stations, particularly bers and is commonly referred to as the ditives will help prevent deposits from
those in high altitude areas, offer Anti Knock Index (AKI). forming in your engine and fuel system.
fuels posted as regular octane ! Unleaded gasoline This helps keep your engine in tune and
gasoline with an octane rating S07AA0104 your emission control system working
The neck of the fuel filler pipe is designed properly, and is a way of doing your part
below 87 AKI (90 RON). Use of to accept only an unleaded gasoline filler for cleaner air. If you continuously use a
those fuels are not recom- nozzle. Under no circumstances should high quality fuel with the proper detergent
7
mended. leaded gasoline be used because it will and other additives, you should never
damage the emission control system and need to add any fuel system cleaning
may impair driveability and fuel economy. agents to your fuel tank.
& Fuel requirements
S07AA01 ! Reformulated gasoline
The engine is designed to operate using S07AA0128 Many gasolines are now blended with
unleaded gasoline with an octane rating SUBARU supports the use of reformulated materials called oxygenates. Use of these
of 87 AKI (90 RON) or higher. gasoline when available. Reformulated fuels can also help keep the air cleaner.
gasoline has been blended to burn more Oxygenated blend fuels, such as ethanol
! Fuel octane rating cleanly and reduce vehicle emissions. (ethyl or grain alcohol) may be used in your
S07AA0103
Using a gasoline with a lower octane rating ! MMT vehicle, but should contain no more than
can cause persistent and heavy knocking, S07AA0106
15% ethanol for the proper operation of
Some gasoline contains an octane-enhan-
which can damage the engine. Do not be your SUBARU.
cing additive called MMT (Methylcyclo-
concerned if your vehicle sometimes
pentadienyl Manganese Tricarbonyl). If Do not use any gasoline that contains
knocks lightly when you drive up a hill or
you use such fuels, your emission control more than 15% ethanol, including from any
when you accelerate. Contact your
system performance may deteriorate and pump labeled E30, E50 or E85 (which are
SUBARU dealer if you use a fuel with the
the CHECK ENGINE warning light/Mal- only some examples of fuel containing
specified octane rating and your vehicle
function indicator light may turn on. If this more than 15% ethanol).
– CONTINUED –

(276,1)
7-4 Starting and operating/Fuel
In addition, some gasoline suppliers are SUBARU dealer. In addition, some gasoline suppliers are
now producing reformulated gasolines, . Fuel system damage or driveability now producing reformulated gasolines,
which are designed to reduce vehicle problems which result from the use of which are designed to reduce vehicle
emissions. SUBARU approves the use of improper fuel are not covered under the emissions. SUBARU approves the use of
reformulated gasoline. SUBARU Limited Warranty. reformulated gasoline.
If you are not sure what the fuel contains, ! Gasoline for cleaner air (2.5 L engine If you are not sure what the fuel contains,
you should ask your service station op- models) you should ask your service station op-
S07AA0107
erators if their gasolines contain deter- Your use of gasoline with detergent ad- erators if their gasolines contain deter-
gents and oxygenates and if they have ditives will help prevent deposits from gents and oxygenates and if they have
been reformulated to reduce vehicle emis- forming in your engine and fuel system. been reformulated to reduce vehicle emis-
sions. This helps keep your engine in tune and sions.
As additional guidance, only use fuels your emission control system working As additional guidance, only use fuels
suited for your vehicle as explained in the properly, and is a way of doing your part suited for your vehicle as explained in the
following. for cleaner air. If you continuously use a following.
high quality fuel with the proper detergent
. Fuel should be unleaded and have an . Fuel should be unleaded and have an
and other additives, you should never
octane rating no lower than that specified octane rating no lower than that specified
need to add any fuel system cleaning
in this manual. in this manual.
agents to your fuel tank.
. Methanol (methyl or wood alcohol) is . Methanol (methyl or wood alcohol) is
sometimes mixed with unleaded gasoline. Many gasolines are now blended with sometimes mixed with unleaded gasoline.
Methanol can be used in your vehicle materials called oxygenates. Use of these Methanol can be used in your vehicle
ONLY if it does not exceed 5% of the fuel fuels can also help keep the air cleaner. ONLY if it does not exceed 5% of the fuel
mixture AND if it is accompanied by Oxygenated blend fuels, such as ethanol mixture AND if it is accompanied by
sufficient quantities of the proper cosol- (ethyl or grain alcohol) may be used in your sufficient quantities of the proper cosol-
vents and corrosion inhibitors required to vehicle, but should contain no more than vents and corrosion inhibitors required to
prevent damage to the fuel system. Do not 10% ethanol for the proper operation of prevent damage to the fuel system. Do not
use fuel containing methanol EXCEPT your SUBARU. use fuel containing methanol EXCEPT
under these conditions. under these conditions.
Do not use any gasoline that contains
. If undesirable driveability problems are more than 10% ethanol, including from any . If undesirable driveability problems are
experienced and you suspect they may be pump labeled E15, E30, E50 or E85 (which experienced and you suspect they may be
fuel related, try a different brand of gaso- are only some examples of fuel containing fuel related, try a different brand of gaso-
line before seeking service at your more than 10% ethanol). line before seeking service at your

(277,1)
Starting and operating/Fuel 7-5
SUBARU dealer. WARNING

. Fuel system damage or driveability
problems which result from the use of Before opening the fuel filler cap,
improper fuel are not covered under the first touch the vehicle body or a
SUBARU Limited Warranty. metal portion of the fuel pump or
similar object to discharge any sta-
& Fuel filler lid and cap tic electricity that may be present on
S07AA02
your body. If your body is carrying
! Locations of the fuel filler lid and the an electrostatic charge, there is a
lid release lever possibility that an electric spark
S07AA0202
could ignite the fuel, which could
burn you. To avoid acquiring a new
static electric charge, do not get
Fuel filler lid release lever back into the vehicle while refueling
! Refueling is in progress. 7
S07AA0201
Only one person should be involved in
refueling. Do not allow others to approach
the area of the vehicle near the fuel filler
pipe while refueling is in progress.
Be sure to observe any other precautions
that are posted at the service station.
1. Stop the vehicle and turn the ignition
Fuel filler lid
switch to the “LOCK”/“OFF” position and
turn off all the other electrical components.
2. To open the fuel filler lid, pull the fuel
filler lid release lever up. The lever is on the
floor at the left of the driver’s seat.
– CONTINUED –

(278,1)
7-6 Starting and operating/Fuel
firmly and turn it slowly to the left. fully inserted, its automatic stop-
Do not remove the cap quickly. ping mechanism may not func-
Fuel may be under pressure and tion, causing fuel to overflow the
spray out of the fuel filler neck, tank and creating a fire hazard.
especially in hot weather. If you . Stop refueling when the auto-
hear a hissing sound while you matic stop mechanism on the
are removing the cap, wait for the fuel nozzle activates. If you con-
sound to stop and then slowly tinue to add fuel, temperature
open the cap to prevent fuel from changes or other conditions
spraying out and creating a fire may cause fuel to overflow from
hazard. the tank and create a fire hazard.
5. Stop filling the tank after the fuel filler

1) Open
pump automatically stops. Do not add any
2) Close
more fuel.
3. Remove the fuel filler cap by turning it 6. Put the cap back on, turn it clockwise
slowly counterclockwise. until you hear a clicking noise. Be certain
not to catch the tether under the cap while
WARNING tightening.
. Gasoline vapor is highly flam- CAUTION
mable. Before refueling, always
turn the ignition switch to the Make sure that the cap is tightened
“LOCK”/“OFF” position first and until it clicks to prevent fuel spillage
then close all vehicle doors and in the event of an accident.
windows. Make sure that there 4. Set the fuel filler cap on the cap holder
are no lighted cigarettes, open inside the fuel filler lid. 7. Close the fuel filler lid completely.
flames or electrical sparks in the
adjacent area. Only handle fuel WARNING CAUTION
outdoors. Quickly wipe up any
spilled fuel. . When refueling, insert the fuel If you spill any fuel on the painted
nozzle securely into the fuel filler surface, rinse it off immediately.
. When opening the cap, grasp it pipe. If the nozzle is lifted or not

(279,1)
Starting and operating/State emission testing (U.S. only) 7-7
Otherwise, the painted surface . Do not let fuel spill on the exterior State emission testing
could be damaged. surfaces of the vehicle. Because (U.S. only)
fuel may damage the paint, be S07AB
sure to wipe off any spilled fuel
NOTE quickly. Paint damage caused by WARNING
spilled fuel is not covered under
. You will see the “ ” sign in the fuel the SUBARU Limited Warranty.
gauge. This indicates that the fuel filler Only use a four-wheel dynamometer
lid is located on the right side of the . Always use a genuine SUBARU when testing an All-Wheel Drive
vehicle. fuel filler cap. If you use the (AWD) model.
. If the fuel filler cap is not tightened wrong cap, it may not fit or have Testing of an AWD model must
until it clicks or if the tether is caught proper venting and your fuel tank NEVER be performed on a single
under the cap, the CHECK ENGINE and emission control system two-wheel dynamometer. Attempt-
warning light/malfunction indicator may be damaged. It could also ing to do so will result in uncon-
light may illuminate. Refer to “CHECK lead to fuel spillage and a fire. trolled vehicle movement and may
ENGINE warning light/Malfunction in- . Immediately put fuel in the tank cause an accident or injuries to
7
dicator light” �3-15. whenever the low fuel warning persons nearby.
light illuminates. Engine misfires
CAUTION as a result of an empty tank could
cause damage to the engine. CAUTION
. Never add any cleaning agents to Continuing to operate your vehi-
the fuel tank. The addition of a cle at an extremely low fuel level . At state inspection time, remem-
cleaning agent may cause da- may result in a reduction of ber to tell your inspection or
mage to the fuel system. engine performance. service station in advance not to
place your SUBARU AWD vehicle
. After refueling, turn the cap to the on a two-wheel dynamometer.
right until it clicks to ensure that Otherwise, serious transmission
it is fully tightened. If the cap is damage will result.
not securely tightened, fuel may
leak out while the vehicle is being . Resultant vehicle damage due to
driven or fuel spillage could oc- improper testing is not covered
cur in the event of an accident, under the SUBARU Limited War-
creating a fire hazard. ranty and is the responsibility of
the state inspection program or
– CONTINUED –

(280,1)
7-8 Starting and operating/State emission testing (U.S. only)
its contractors or licensees. served, there are no stored diagnostic on a dynamometer, tell your emission
trouble codes, and the OBDII readiness inspector not to place your SUBARU
California and a number of federal states monitors are all complete. AWD vehicle on a two-wheel dynam-
have Inspection/Maintenance programs to . A vehicle fails the OBDII inspection if ometer. Otherwise, serious transmis-
inspect your vehicle’s emission control the “CHECK ENGINE” warning light is not sion damage will result.
system. If your vehicle does not pass this properly operating (light is illuminated or is The U.S. Environmental Protection
test, some states may deny renewal of not working due to faulty LED [Light Agency (EPA) and states using two-wheel
your vehicle’s registration. Emitting Diode]) or there is one or more dynamometers in their emission testing
diagnostic trouble codes stored in the program have EXEMPTED SUBARU
Your vehicle is equipped with a computer
vehicle’s computer. AWD vehicles from the portion of the
that monitors the performance of the
engine’s emission control system. Certi- . A state emission inspection may reject testing program that involves a two-wheel
fied emission inspectors will inspect the (not pass or fail) a vehicle if the number of dynamometer. There are some states that
On-Board Diagnostic (OBDII) system as OBDII system readiness monitors “NOT use four-wheel dynamometers in their
part of the state emission inspection READY” is greater than one. If the testing program. When properly used, this
process. The OBDII system is designed vehicle’s battery has been recently re- equipment should not damage a SUBARU
to detect engine and transmission pro- placed or disconnected, the OBDII system AWD vehicle.
blems that might cause the vehicle emis- inspection may indicate that the vehicle is
not ready for the emission test. Under this Under no circumstances should the rear
sions to exceed allowable limits. OBDII
condition, the vehicle driver should be wheels be jacked off the ground, nor
inspections apply to all 1996 model year
instructed to drive his/her vehicle for a should the driveshaft be disconnected in
and newer passenger cars and trucks.
few days to reset the readiness monitors an attempt to bypass AWD for state
Over 30 states plus the District of Colum-
and return for an emission re-inspection. emission testing. An AWD vehicle must
bia have implemented emission inspection
. Owners of rejected or failing vehicles be tested using an AWD dynamometer
of the OBDII system.
should contact their SUBARU Dealer for with all 4 wheels driven and loaded.
. The inspection of the OBDII system
consists of a visual operational check of service.
the “CHECK ENGINE” warning light/mal- Some states still use dynamometers in
function indicator light (MIL) and an ex- their emission inspection program. A
amination of the OBDII system with an dynamometer is a treadmill or roller-like
electronic scan tool. testing device that allows your vehicle’s
. A vehicle passes the OBDII system wheels to turn while the vehicle remains in
inspection if proper operation of the one place. Prior to your vehicle being put
“CHECK ENGINE” warning light is ob-

(281,1)
Starting and operating/Preparing to drive 7-9
Preparing to drive CAUTION Starting and stopping the en-

S07AC gine (models without push-
Trapping small animals in the cool-
You should perform the following checks
ing fan and belts of the engine may
button start system)
and adjustments every day before you S07BD
start driving. result in a malfunction. Check that
no small animal enters the engine CAUTION
1. Check that all windows, mirrors, and
compartment and under the vehicle
lights are clean and unobstructed.
before starting the engine. Do not operate the starter motor
2. Check the appearance and condition
of the tires. Also check tires for proper continuously for more than 10 sec-
inflation. NOTE onds. If the engine fails to start after
3. Look under the vehicle for any sign of operating the starter for 5 to 10
. Engine oil, engine coolant, brake
leaks. seconds, wait for 10 seconds or
fluid, washer fluid and other fluid levels
more before trying again.
4. Check that no small animals enter the should be checked daily, weekly or at
engine compartment. fuel stops. 7
5. Check that the hood and rear gate are . When towing a trailer, refer to “Trai- NOTE
fully closed. ler hitch” �8-16. It may be difficult to start the engine
6. Check the adjustment of the seat. when the battery has been discon-
7. Check the adjustment of the inside and nected and reconnected (for mainte-
outside mirrors. nance or other purposes). This diffi-
8. Fasten your seatbelt. Check that your culty is caused by the electronically
passengers have fastened their seatbelts. controlled throttle’s self-diagnosis
9. Check the operation of the warning function. To overcome it, keep the
and indicator lights when the ignition ignition switch in the “ON” position
switch is turned to the “ON” position. for approximately 10 seconds before
starting the engine.
10. Check the gauges, indicator and warn-
ing lights after starting the engine.
– CONTINUED –

(282,1)
7-10 Starting and operating/Starting and stopping the engine (models without push-button start system)
& Starting engine . When starting the engine, be sure ! MT models

S07BD01 S07BD0101
to sit in the driver’s seat (except 1. Apply the parking brake.
! General precautions when starting when using the remote engine
engine start system). 2. Turn off unnecessary lights and acces-
S07BD0105 sories.
WARNING 3. Depress the clutch pedal to the floor
NOTE and shift the shift lever into neutral. Hold
. Never start the engine from out- . Avoid rapid racing and rapid accel- the clutch pedal to the floor while starting
side the vehicle (except when eration immediately after the engine the engine.
using the remote engine start has started. The starter motor will only operate when
system). It may result in an acci- . After the engine starts, the engine the clutch pedal is depressed fully to the
dent. speed will be kept high. floor.
. Do not leave the engine running . On rare occasions, it may be difficult 4. Turn the ignition switch to the “ON”
in locations with poor ventilation, to start the engine depending on the position and check the operation of the
such as a garage and indoors. fuel and the usage condition (repeated warning and indicator lights. Refer to
The exhaust gas may enter the driving of a distance in which the “Warning and indicator” �3-12.
vehicle or indoors, and it may engine has not warmed up sufficiently). 5. Turn the ignition switch to the “START”
result in carbon monoxide poi- In such a case, it is recommended that position without depressing the accelera-
soning. you change to a different brand of fuel. tor pedal. Release the key immediately
. Do not start the engine near dry . On rare occasions, transient knock- after the engine has started.
foliage, paper, or other flammable ing may be heard from the engine when If the engine does not start, try the
substances. The exhaust pipe the accelerator is operated rapidly such following procedure.
and exhaust emissions can cre- as a rapid start-up and a rapid accel- (1) Turn the ignition switch to the
ate a fire hazard at high tempera- eration. This is not a malfunction. “LOCK”/“OFF” position and wait for at
tures. . The engine starts more easily when least 10 seconds. After checking that
the headlights, air conditioner and rear the parking brake is firmly set, turn the
window defogger are turned off. ignition switch to the “START” position
CAUTION . Do not shift the select lever (CVT while depressing the accelerator pedal
models) or shift lever (MT models) slightly (approximately a quarter of the
. If the engine is stopped during while the starter is cranking. full stroke). Release the accelerator
driving, the catalyst may over-
pedal as soon as the engine starts.
heat and burn.
(2) If this fails to start the engine, turn

(283,1)
Starting and operating/Starting and stopping the engine (models without push-button start system) 7-11
the ignition switch back to the “LOCK”/ position and check the operation of the (4) If the engine still refuses to start,
“OFF” position and wait for at least 10 warning and indicator lights. Refer to contact your nearest SUBARU dealer
seconds. Then fully depress the accel- “Warning and indicator” �3-12. for assistance.
erator pedal and turn the ignition 5. Turn the ignition switch to the “START” 6. Confirm that all warning and indicator
switch to the “START” position. If the position without depressing the accelera- lights have turned off after the engine has
engine starts, quickly release the ac- tor pedal. Release the key immediately started. The fuel injection system auto-
celerator pedal. after the engine has started. matically lowers the idle speed as the
(3) If this fails to start the engine, turn engine warms up.
the ignition switch again to the “LOCK”/ If the engine does not start, try the
“OFF” position. After waiting for 10 following procedure. While the engine is warming up, make sure
seconds or longer, turn the ignition (1) Turn the ignition switch to the that the select lever is at the “P” or “N”
switch to the “START” position without “LOCK”/“OFF” position and wait for at position and that the parking brake is
depressing the accelerator pedal. least 10 seconds. After checking that applied.
(4) If the engine still fails to start, the parking brake is firmly set, turn the
contact your nearest SUBARU dealer ignition switch to the “START” position CAUTION 7
for assistance. while depressing the accelerator pedal
slightly (approximately a quarter of the If you restart the engine while the
6. Confirm that all warning and indicator vehicle is moving, shift the select
full stroke). Release the accelerator
lights have turned off after the engine has lever into the “N” position. Do not
pedal as soon as the engine starts.
started. The fuel injection system auto- attempt to place the select lever of a
matically lowers the idle speed as the (2) If this fails to start the engine, turn
the ignition switch back to the “LOCK”/ moving vehicle into the “P” position.
engine warms up.
“OFF” position and wait for at least 10
! CVT models seconds. Then fully depress the accel- & Stopping the engine
S07BD0104 erator pedal and turn the ignition S07BD02
The ignition switch should be turned off
1. Apply the parking brake. switch to the “START” position. If the only when the vehicle is stopped and the
2. Turn off unnecessary lights and acces- engine starts, quickly release the ac- engine is idling.
sories. celerator pedal.
3. Shift the select lever to the “P” or “N” (3) If this fails to start the engine, turn WARNING
position (preferably the “P” position). the ignition switch again to the “LOCK”/
The starter motor will only operate when “OFF” position. After waiting for 10 Do not stop the engine when the
the select lever is at the “P” or “N” position. seconds or longer, turn the ignition vehicle is moving. This will cause
4. Turn the ignition switch to the “ON” switch to the “START” position without loss of power to the power steering
depressing the accelerator pedal. and the brake booster, making steer-
– CONTINUED –

(284,1)
7-12 Starting and operating/Starting and stopping engine (models with push-button start system)
ing and braking more difficult. It If you cannot unlock the steering wheel by Starting and stopping engine
could also result in accidental acti- doing the steps, contact your nearest
SUBARU dealer.
(models with push-button
vation of the “LOCK”/“OFF” posi-
tion on the ignition switch, causing start system)
S07BE
the steering wheel to lock.
S07BE06
Refer to “Safety precautions” �2-3.
& Steering lock
S07BD07
After stopping the engine and the key is & Operating range for push-
removed from ignition switch, the steering button start system
S07BE01
wheel will be locked due to the steering Refer to “Operating range for push-button
lock function. start system” �3-6.
When the engine is restarted, the steering
lock will be automatically released. & Starting engine
S07BE03
! When the steering lock cannot be
released WARNING
S07BD0701
When you cannot unlock the steering . There are some general precau-
wheel, perform the following steps. tions when starting the engine.
1. Check that the parking brake is ap- Carefully read the precautions
plied. described in “Starting engine”
2. Turn off unnecessary lights and acces- �7-10.
sories. . If the indicator on the push-but-
3. Check that the select lever is set in the ton ignition switch flashes in
“P” position. green after the engine has
4. Depress the brake pedal and keep it started, never drive the vehicle.
depressed. The steering is still locked, and it
5. Turn the ignition switch to the “ON” may result in an accident.
position while turning the steering wheel
left and right.

(285,1)
Starting and operating/Starting and stopping engine (models with push-button start system) 7-13
more than 10 seconds. Doing so to switch the power to “OFF” and then
NOTE try to start the engine again.
could cause a malfunction. If the
It may be difficult to start the engine engine does not start, stop push- . If the engine does not start, press the
when the battery has been discon- ing the push-button ignition push-button ignition switch without
nected and reconnected (for mainte- switch. Instead, press the push- depressing the clutch pedal (MT mod-
nance or other purposes). This diffi- button ignition switch without els) or the brake pedal (CVT models) to
culty is caused by the electronically depressing the brake pedal to switch the power to “OFF”. Then, while
controlled throttle’s self-diagnosis switch the power status to depressing the clutch pedal (MT mod-
function. To overcome it, keep the “OFF”. Wait 10 seconds, and then els) or the brake pedal (CVT models)
ignition switch in the “ON” position push the push-button ignition more forcefully, press the push-button
for approximately 10 seconds before switch to start the engine. ignition switch.
starting the engine. . The engine start procedures may not
function depending on the radio wave
CAUTION NOTE conditions around the vehicle. In such
. After the engine starts, the engine a case, refer to “Starting engine” �9- 7
. When the operation indicator on speed will be kept high. 18.
the push-button ignition switch is . When the push-button ignition . If the vehicle battery is discharged,
flashing in orange, there may be a switch is pressed while depressing the steering cannot be unlocked.
malfunction with the vehicle. the clutch pedal (MT models) or the Charge the battery.
Contact a SUBARU dealer imme- brake pedal (CVT models), the engine . Do not shift the select lever while the
diately. starter operates for a maximum of 10 starter is cranking.
. If the indicator on the push-but- seconds and after starting the engine,
ton ignition switch is flashing in the starter stops automatically.
green after the engine has . When the push-button ignition
started, it means that the steering switch is pressed while depressing
is still locked. Depress the brake the clutch pedal (MT models) or the
pedal while moving the steering brake pedal (CVT models), the engine
wheel to the right and left, and can be started regardless of the status
press the push-button ignition of the push-button ignition switch.
switch. . If the security indicator light illumi-
. Do not continue pushing the nates when you attempt to start the
push-button ignition switch for engine but the engine does not start,
press the push-button ignition switch
– CONTINUED –

(286,1)
7-14 Starting and operating/Starting and stopping engine (models with push-button start system)
NOTE NOTE
In case the engine does not start by the . While pressing the select lever but-
normal engine start procedure, move ton in, the indicator on the push-button
the shift lever to the neutral position, ignition switch will not turn green even
and switch the power to “ACC”. De- when the select lever is in the “P”
press the clutch pedal, and press the position.
push-button ignition switch for at least . In case the engine does not start by
15 seconds. The engine may start. Only the normal engine start procedure,
use this engine start procedure in case move the select lever to the “P” posi-
of emergency. tion, and switch the power to “ACC”.
Depress the brake pedal, and press the
! CVT models push-button ignition switch for at least
S07BE0304
1) Operation indicator 1. Carry the access key fob, and sit in the 15 seconds. The engine may start. Only
2) Push-button ignition switch driver’s seat. use this engine start procedure in case
When the push-button ignition switch is 2. Apply the parking brake. of emergency.
pressed while depressing the clutch pedal 3. Shift the select lever into the “P” . When the engine is not started, the
(MT models) or the brake pedal (CVT position. The engine can also start when brake pedal may feel stiff. In such a
models), the engine will start. The starting the select lever is in the “N” position, case, depress the brake pedal more
procedure for the engine is as follows. however, for safety reasons, start in the “P” forcefully than usual. Check that the
position. operation indicator on the push-button
! MT models ignition switch turns green, and press
S07BE0301 4. Depress the brake pedal until the the push-button ignition switch to start
1. Carry the access key fob, and sit in the operation indicator on the push-button
driver’s seat. the engine.
ignition switch turns green. When starting
2. Apply the parking brake. with the select lever in the “N” position, the & Stopping engine
3. Shift the shift lever to neutral. indicator does not turn green. S07BE04
4. Depress the brake pedal. 5. While depressing the brake pedal, 1. Stop the vehicle completely.
5. Depress the clutch pedal until the press the push-button ignition switch. 2. Move the select lever to the “P”
indicator on the push-button ignition switch position (CVT models).
turns green. 3. Press the push-button ignition switch.
6. While depressing the clutch pedal, The engine will stop, and the power will be
press the push-button ignition switch. switched off.

(287,1)
Starting and operating/Starting and stopping engine (models with push-button start system) 7-15
WARNING CAUTION lock will be automatically released.

! When the steering lock cannot be
. Do not touch the push-button For CVT models released
ignition switch during driving. . Do not stop the engine while the S07BE0701
When the push-button ignition select lever is in a position other

switch is operated as follows, than the “P” position.
the engine will stop. . If the engine is stopped while the
– The switch is pressed and held select lever is in a position other
for 3 seconds or longer. than the “P” position, the power
– The switch is pressed briefly 3 will be in “ACC”. If the vehicle is
times or more in succession. left in this condition, the battery
may be discharged.
When the engine stops, the brake
booster will not function. A great-
er foot pressure will be required NOTE 7
on the brake pedal. Although you can stop the engine by
The power steering system will operating the push-button ignition 1) Operation indicator
not operate either. A greater force switch, do not stop the engine during 2) Push-button ignition switch
will be required to steer, and it driving except in an emergency.
may result in an accident. When you cannot restart the engine due to
& When access key fob does the steering lock, check the status of
. If the engine stops during driving, operation indicator and perform the follow-
do not operate the push-button not operate properly
S07BE05 ing steps.
ignition switch or open any of the Refer to “Access key fob – if access key
doors until the vehicle is stopped fob does not operate properly” �9-17. ! Operation indicator flashing in
in a safe location. It is dangerous green
S07BE070101
because the steering lock may be & Steering lock 1. Check that the select lever is set in the
activated. Stop the vehicle in a S07BE07
“P” position.
After stopping the engine and any door
safe place, and contact a
including the rear gate is opened, the 2. Depress the brake pedal and keep it.
SUBARU dealer immediately.
steering wheel will be locked due to the 3. Press the push-button ignition switch
steering lock function. while turning the steering wheel left and
When the engine is restarted, the steering right.
– CONTINUED –

(288,1)
7-16 Starting and operating/Remote engine start system (dealer option)
! Operation indicator flashing in Remote engine start system mote engine start system.
orange (dealer option)
S07BE070102 NOTE
There may be a malfunction in the steering S07AZ
. The length of time for which it is
lock function. Immediately contact your
WARNING acceptable to allow the engine to
nearest SUBARU dealer.
remain idling may be bound by local
. There are some general precau- laws and regulations. Check the local
tions when starting the engine. rules when using the remote engine
Carefully read the precautions start system.
described in “General precau- . When taking your vehicle in for
tions when starting engine” �7- service, it is recommended that you
10. inform the service personnel that your
. Do not remote start a vehicle in an vehicle is equipped with a remote
enclosed environment (e.g. engine start system.
closed garage). Prolonged opera-
tion of a motor vehicle in an & Remote engine starter trans-
enclosed environment can cause ceiver (fob)
a harmful build-up of Carbon S07AZ21
Monoxide. Carbon Monoxide is

harmful to your health. Exposure
to high levels of Carbon Monox-
ide can cause headaches, dizzi-
ness or in extreme cases uncon-
sciousness and/or death.
The remote engine start system allows you

to start the engine from outside the vehicle.
In addition, the remote engine start system
can activate the heater or air conditioner,
providing you with a comfortable cabin
upon entry. For more details, refer to the 1) Fob button
Owner’s Manual supplement for the re-

(289,1)
Starting and operating/Remote engine start system (dealer option) 7-17
! Starting the engine . The side marker lights, tail lights, and ! Remote start safety features
S07AZ2101
parking lights flash once. S07AZ2103
NOTE For safety and security reasons, the
All vehicle doors (including rear gate) While the engine is idling via the remote remote engine start system will prevent
and the engine hood must be closed engine start system, the following phe- starting (or stop the engine if running) and
prior to activating the remote engine nomena will occur. sound the horn twice if any of the following
start system. Any open entry point will . The side marker lights, tail lights, and conditions is detected. In addition, the fob
prevent starting or cause the engine to parking lights remain illuminated. will flash and beep 3 times.
stop. . The fob button flashes once every 3 . The total run-time has exceeded 20
seconds. minutes.
The remote engine start system is acti- . The brake pedal is depressed.
. The power windows are disabled.
vated by pressing the fob button on your . A key is in the ignition switch.
remote engine starter transceiver (fob) If the engine turns over but does not start . The engine hood is open.
twice within 3 seconds. If the fob is within (or starts and stalls) the remote engine . The engine idle speed exceeds 3,500
operating range of the system and the start start system will power off and then 7
rpm.
request is received, the following phenom- attempt to start the engine 3 additional
ena will occur. . The security alarm is triggered.
times. The system will not attempt to
. The fob flashes and beeps once. restart the engine if it determines a vehicle . The select lever is not in the “P” position
malfunction is preventing starting. If the (CVT models).
. The horn sounds once.
. The side marker lights, tail lights, and engine does not start after 3 additional If the system detects any door (including
parking lights flash once. attempts, the remote engine start request the rear gate) open during operation, it will
will be aborted. prevent starting or stop the engine, and
If the fob is not within range (the user is too ! Stopping the engine sound the horn and flash side marker
far away from the vehicle), the fob will S07AZ2102
lights, tail lights, and parking lights 6 times.
indicate two long flashes without beeping. Press and hold the fob button for at least 2
seconds to stop the engine. The fob will In addition to the items above, if the
The system will check certain safety flash and beep three times, indicating the vehicle’s engine management system
preconditions before starting, and if all engine has stopped. If the stop request is determines there is a safety risk due to a
conditions are met, the engine will start not received (for example, if the user is too vehicle-related problem, the vehicle will
within 5 seconds. After the engine starts, far away from the vehicle), the fob will power down and the horn will sound 3
the following phenomena will occur. continue to flash once every 3 seconds. times.
. The fob flashes and beeps twice. The system will automatically stop the
. The horn sounds once. engine after 15 minutes.
– CONTINUED –

(290,1)
NOTE
. If the alarm system is armed at the
time of remote engine starter activation
(the security indicator light on the
combination meter is flashing), the
alarm system will remain armed
throughout the remote start run cycle.
. If the alarm system is disarmed at
the time of remote engine starter acti-
vation (the security indicator light on
the combination meter is not flashing),
the alarm system will remain disarmed
throughout the remote start run cycle.
! Remote start operation - fob con-
firmation
S07AZ2104
Your remote engine starter fob is a
bidirectional transceiver that can confirm
system operation with several different
visual and audible indications. The fob’s
LED-backlit button and internal piezo
buzzer will indicate status of the system
using the following flash and beep se-
quences, provided the fob is within opera-
tional range of the system.

(291,1)
Fob Indication
Precondition Meaning
Flash Beep
Fob start button is being pressed Continuous while button is — The fob is transmitting an RF signal
held down
1 flash 1 beep Engine start request received
2 flashes 2 beeps Engine started successfully
User attempts to start engine by pressing fob 1 flash every 3 sec — Engine idling
button twice within 3 sec
3 flashes 3 beeps Vehicle is in range but engine not started
2 long flashes — Vehicle not in range (engine not started)
1 flash every 3 sec — Engine idling
Engine idling by remote engine start operation Engine stopped by system timeout or for safety
3 flashes 3 beeps reasons (see sections above) 7
User attempts to stop engine by pressing and 3 flashes 3 beeps Engine stopped by user request
holding fob button for at least 2 sec 1 flash every 3 sec — Stop request not received. Engine still idling.
– CONTINUED –

(292,1)
& Alternate operation method closed. ! Remote start safety features

S07AZ2204
for models with “keyless ac- . The engine hood is closed. For detailed information, refer to “Remote
cess with push-button start . The push-button ignition switch is in the start safety features” �7-17.
system” “OFF” position.
S07AZ22 & Entering the vehicle while it is
! When starting the engine running via remote start
S07AZ2202
To start the engine with remote engine (models without “keyless ac-
start system, briefly press the lock button cess with push-button start
twice within 2 seconds, then press and system”)
hold the lock button for 3 seconds. S07AZ03
1. Unlock the vehicle doors using the
1. Press the lock button briefly. The remote keyless entry system.
hazard warning flashers then flash once
and the keyless buzzer chirps once. NOTE
2. Within 2 seconds, press the lock button If the vehicle’s doors are unlocked
briefly again. The hazard warning flashers manually using the key, the vehicle’s
then flash once again, and the keyless alarm system will trigger (if the alarm
buzzer chirps once again. system is armed prior to activating the
Access key fob 3. After step 2, immediately press and remote engine start system) and the
1) Lock button hold the lock button. The horn will honk engine will turn off. Perform either of
An access key fob can be used as the once and some exterior lights illuminate. the following procedures to disarm the
remote engine start transmitter. Operate 4. Approximately 3 seconds after step 3, alarm system. Refer to “Alarm system”
the lock button to start or stop the engine release the lock button. The engine will �2-24.
as follows. then start successfully. – Insert the key into the ignition
switch and turn it to the “ON”
! Before starting the engine ! When stopping the engine position.
S07AZ2201
S07AZ2203
Before using the remote engine start Press and hold the lock button to stop the – Press any button on the remote
system to start the engine, confirm the engine with remote engine start system. keyless entry transmitter.
following conditions.
2. Enter the vehicle. The engine will shut
. The select lever is in the “P” position down when any door or rear gate is
(CVT models). opened.
. All doors including the rear gate are

(293,1)
3. Insert the key into the ignition switch 3. Press the push-button ignition switch damaged or additional transmitters are
and turn it to the “START” position to once while depressing the brake pedal desired (the system will accept up to eight
restart the engine. before driving your vehicle. The remote transmitters). New remote engine start
engine starter transceiver (fob) will flash transmitters can be programmed accord-
& Entering the vehicle while it is and beep 3 times to indicate that the ing to the following procedure.
running via remote start remote start system has been shut down. 1. Open the driver’s door (the driver’s
(models with “keyless access door must remain opened throughout the
with push-button start sys- & Entering the vehicle following entire process).
tem”) remote engine start shut- 2. Depress and hold the brake pedal.
S07AZ24 down 3. Turn the ignition switch to “ON” then
1. Unlock the vehicle doors using the S07AZ10
“LOCK”/“OFF”, back to “ON” then “LOCK”/
keyless access function and remote key- An alarm trigger may occur if the vehicle is
opened by the remote keyless entry “OFF”, back to “ON” then “LOCK”/“OFF”,
less entry system. then back to “ON” again and leave the
transmitter within a few seconds immedi-
NOTE ately following remote engine start shut- ignition “ON” throughout the programming
down. process. 7
If the vehicle’s doors are unlocked
manually using the key, the vehicle’s 4. The system will flash the side marker
alarm system will trigger (if the alarm & Pre-heating or pre-cooling lights, tail lights and parking lights and
system is armed prior to activating the the interior of the vehicle honk the horn three times, indicating that
remote engine start system) and the S07AZ04 the system has entered the transmitter
Before exiting the vehicle, set the tem- learn mode.
engine will turn off. Perform either of perature controls to the desired setting and
the following procedures to disarm the 5. Press and release the “ ” button on
operation. After the system starts the
alarm system. Refer to “Alarm system” the transmitter that you want to program.
engine, the heater or air conditioning will
�2-24. activate and heat or cool the interior to 6. The system will flash the side marker
– Turn the push-button ignition your setting. lights, tail lights and parking lights and
switch to the “ACC” or “ON” posi- honk the horn one time, indicating that the
tion. & Remote transmitter program system has learned the transmitter. Upon
– Press any button on the access successful programming, the remote start
(Remote engine starter confirmation transmitter button will flash
key fob. transceiver)
S07AZ13
one time.
2. Enter the vehicle. The engine will New transmitters can be programmed to 7. Repeat step 5 for any additional
remain running provided the access key the remote engine start system in the transmitters (the system will accept up to
fob is present and detected by the vehicle. event that a transmitter is lost, stolen, eight transmitters).
– CONTINUED –

(294,1)
8. The system will exit the transmitter moved parts; children could
learn mode if the key is turned to the swallow them.
“LOCK”/“OFF” position, the door is closed . There is a danger of explosion if
or after 2 minutes. an incorrect replacement battery
is used. Replace only with the
& System maintenance same or equivalent type of bat-
S07AZ09
NOTE tery.
For remote engine starter transceiver: . Battery should not be exposed to
In the event that the vehicle’s battery is excessive heat such as sunshine,
replaced, discharged or disconnected, fire or the like.
it will be necessary to start the vehicle a
minimum of one time using the key For models with “keyless access with
prior to activating the remote engine push-button start system”:
1. Remove the small phillips screw lo-
start system. This is required to allow Perform the procedure described in “Re-
cated on the back side lower left corner of
the vehicle electronic systems to replacing battery of access key fob” �11-46.
the transmitter.
synchronize. For remote engine starter transceiver:
2. Carefully pry the remote engine start
The 3-volt lithium battery (model CR-2450) transmitter halves apart using a small flat-
! Changing the battery supplied in your remote engine start
S07AZ0901 head screwdriver.
transmitter should last approximately one
CAUTION year, depending on usage. When the
battery begin to weaken, you will notice a
. Do not let dust, oil or water get on
decrease in range (distance from the
or in the remote engine start
vehicle that your remote control operates).
transmitter when replacing the
Follow the instructions below to change
battery.
the remote engine start transmitter battery.
. Be careful not to damage the
printed circuit board in the re-
mote engine start transmitter
when replacing the battery.
. Be careful not to allow children to
touch the battery and any re-

(295,1)
should be pointed away from the transmit- ! Canada-spec. models

ter circuit board on battery). S07AZ2302
4. Carefully snap the case halves back

together, reinstall the phillips screw and
test the remote engine start system.
& Certification for remote en-

gine starter
S07AZ23
! U.S.-spec. models
S07AZ2301
CAUTION
FCC WARNING
Changes or modifications not ex- 7
the user’s authority to operate the
equipment.
NOTE
vice may not cause harmful interfer-
3. Remove the circuit board from the ence, and (2) this device must accept
bottom half of the case and remove the any interference received, including
battery and replace with new one. Be sure interference that may cause undesired
to observe the (+) sign on the old battery operation.
before removing it to ensure that the new
battery is inserted properly (battery “+”

(296,1)
7-24 Starting and operating/Manual transmission
Manual transmission To change the shift lever position: WARNING

S07AF 1. Depress the clutch pedal.
2. To shift into all positions other than “R”, . Do not drive the vehicle with the
move the shift lever accordingly. clutch disengaged (i.e., when the
clutch pedal is depressed) or with
the shift lever in the neutral
position. Engine braking has no
effect in either of these condi-
tions and the risk of an accident
is consequently increased.
. Do not engage the clutch (i.e.,
release the clutch pedal) sud-
denly when starting the vehicle.
By doing so the vehicle might
unexpectedly accelerate or the
The manual transmission is a fully syn- transmission could malfunction.
chromeshed, 6-forward-speed and 1-re-
verse-speed transmission. 1) Slider
The shift pattern is shown on the shift lever CAUTION
knob. 3. To shift into the “R” position, hold up the
slider, move the lever to the “R” position, Shift into reverse ONLY when the
then release the slider. vehicle has completely stopped. It
4. Gradually release the clutch pedal. may cause damage to the transmis-
sion to try shifting into reverse when
If it is difficult to shift into gear, put the the vehicle is moving.
transmission in neutral, release the clutch
pedal momentarily, and then try again.

(297,1)
Starting and operating/Manual transmission 7-25
& Shifting speeds Gear mph (km/h) & Driving tips

S07AF01 S07AF02
! Recommended shifting speeds 1st 26 (42)
S07AF0101 CAUTION
The best compromise between fuel econ- 2nd 52 (84)
omy and vehicle performance during If the accelerator and brake pedals
3rd 78 (126)
normal driving is ensured by shifting up are depressed at the same time,
at the speeds listed in the following table. 4th driving torque may be restrained.
5th Legal speed limit This is not a malfunction.
Shift up mph (km/h) (Posted limit speed)
6th
1st to 2nd 15 (24) Do not drive with your foot resting on the
2nd to 3rd 25 (40) clutch pedal and do not use the clutch to
WARNING hold your vehicle at a standstill on an
3rd to 4th 40 (64) upgrade. Either of those actions may
4th to 5th 45 (72) When shifting down a gear, ensure cause clutch damage.
5th to 6th 50 (81)
that the vehicle is not travelling at a Do not drive with your hand resting on the 7
speed exceeding the Maximum Al- shift lever. This may cause wear on the
lowable Speed for the gear which is transmission components.
! Maximum allowable speeds about to be selected. Failure to
S07AF0102
The following table shows the maximum observe this precaution can lead to When it is necessary to reduce vehicle
speeds that are possible with each differ- engine overrevving and this in turn speed due to slow traffic, turning corners,
ent gear. The tachometer’s needle will can result in engine damage. or driving up steep hills, downshift to a
enter the red area if these speeds are In addition, sudden application of lower gear before the engine starts to
exceeded. engine brakes when the vehicle is labor.
With the exception of cases where sudden travelling on a slippery surface can On steep downgrades, downshift the
acceleration is required, the vehicle should lead to wheel locking; as a conse- transmission to 5th, 4th, 3rd or 2nd gear
not be driven with the tachometer’s needle quence, control of the vehicle may as necessary; this helps to maintain a safe
inside the red area. Failure to observe this be lost and the risk of an accident speed and to extend brake pad life.
precaution can lead to excessive engine increased.
wear and poor fuel economy. In this way, the engine provides a braking
effect. Remember, if you “ride” (over use)
NOTE the brakes while descending a hill, they
may overheat and not work properly.
Never exceed the posted speed limit.
– CONTINUED –

(298,1)
7-26 Starting and operating/Continuously variable transmission
The engine may, on rare occasions, knock Continuously variable trans- . Never move the vehicle rearward
when the vehicle rapidly accelerates or by inertia with the select lever set
rapidly pulls away from a standstill. This
mission
S07BG
in a forward driving position or
phenomenon is not an indication of a move the vehicle forward by
problem in your vehicle. WARNING inertia with the select lever set
in the “R” position. Doing so may
Do not shift from the “P” or “N” result in an unexpected accident
position into the “D” or “R” position or malfunction.
while depressing the accelerator . When parking the vehicle, first
pedal. This may cause the vehicle securely apply the parking brake
to jump forward or backward. and then place the select lever in
the “P” position. Do not park for a
long time with the select lever in
CAUTION any other position as doing so
could result in a dead battery.
. Observe the following precau-
tions. Otherwise, the transmis-
sion could be damaged. & Continuously variable trans-
– Shift into the “P” or “R” posi- mission features
tion only after the vehicle has S07BG06
The continuously variable transmission is
completely stopped. electronically controlled and provides an
– Do not shift from the “D” infinite number of forward speeds and 1
position into the “R” position reverse speed. For some models, it also
or vice versa until the vehicle has a manual mode or an “L” position.
has completely stopped.
. Do not race the engine for more NOTE
than 5 seconds in any position . When the engine coolant tempera-
except the “N” or “P” position ture is still low, the transmission will
when the brake is applied or shift at higher engine speeds than
when chocks are used in the when the coolant temperature is suffi-
wheels. This may cause the ciently high in order to shorten the
transmission fluid to overheat. warm-up time and improve driveability.

(299,1)
Starting and operating/Continuously variable transmission 7-27
The gearshift timing will automatically . The continuously variable transmis-

shift to the normal timing after the sion is a chain type system that pro-
engine has warmed up. vides superior transmission efficiency
. Immediately after transmission fluid for maximum fuel economy. At times,
is replaced, you may feel that the depending on varying driving condi-
transmission operation is somewhat tions, a chain operating sound may be
unusual. This results from invalidation heard that is characteristic of this type
of data which the on-board computer of system.
has collected and stored in memory to
allow the transmission to shift at the & Select lever
most appropriate times for the current S07BG01
condition of your vehicle. Optimized ! Select lever positions
shifting will be restored as the vehicle S07BG0105
continues to be driven for a while. 1) Models with “L” position

. When driving a CVT model under 2) Models with manual mode 7
continuous heavy load conditions such
as when towing a camper or climbing a : With the brake pedal depressed, shift
long, steep hill, the engine speed or the while pressing the select lever button
in.
vehicle speed may automatically be : Shift while pressing the select lever
reduced. This is not a malfunction. This button in.
phenomenon results from the engine : Shift without pressing the select lever
control function maintaining the cool- button.
ing performance of the vehicle. The
engine and vehicle speed will return to
The select lever has four positions, “P”,
a normal speed when the engine is able
“R”, “N”, “D” and it also has an “L” or “M”
to maintain the optimum cooling per- 1) Select lever button position.
formance after the heavy load de-
creases. Driving under a heavy load NOTE
must be performed with extreme care. For some models, to protect the engine
Do not try to pass a vehicle in front while the select lever is in the “P” or “N”
when driving on an uphill slope while position, the engine is controlled so
towing. that the engine speed may not become
– CONTINUED –

(300,1)
too high even if the accelerator pedal is ! N (Neutral) When more acceleration is required in “D”
depressed hard. S07BG0103
This position is for restarting a stalled position, depress the accelerator pedal
engine. In this position, the transmission is fully to the floor and hold that position. The
! P (Park) transmission will automatically downshift.
S07BG0101 neutral, meaning that the wheels and
This position is for parking the vehicle and transmission are not locked. Therefore, In this case, the transmission will operate
starting the engine. In this position, the the vehicle will roll freely, even on the like a conventional automatic transmis-
transmission is mechanically locked to slightest incline unless the parking brake sion. When you release the pedal, the
prevent the vehicle from rolling freely. or foot brake is applied. transmission will return to the original gear
position.
When you park the vehicle, first apply the Avoid coasting with the transmission in
parking brake firmly, then shift into the “P” neutral. Engine braking has no effect in For models with manual mode, if one of the
position. Do not hold the vehicle with only this condition. shift paddles behind the steering wheel is
the mechanical friction of the transmission. operated while driving in the “D” position,
WARNING the transmission will temporarily switch to
To shift the select lever from the “P” the manual mode. In this mode, you can
position to any other position, you should shift into any gear position using the shift
Do not drive the vehicle with the
depress the brake pedal fully then move paddles. For details about the manual
select lever in the “N” (neutral)
the select lever. This prevents the vehicle mode, refer to “Selection of manual mode”
position. Engine braking has no
from lurching when it is started. �7-29. Once the vehicle speed stabilizes,
effect in this condition and the risk
! R (Reverse) of an accident is consequently in- the transmission will switch from the
S07BG0102
This position is for backing the vehicle. To creased. manual mode back to the “D” position for
shift from the “N” to “R” position, stop the normal driving.
vehicle completely then move the lever to ! D (Drive)
the “R” position while pressing the select S07BG0104
This position is for normal driving. The
lever button in.
transmission shifts automatically and con-
When the ignition switch has been turned tinuously into a suitable gear according to
to the “ACC” position, the movement of the the vehicle speed and the acceleration you
select lever from the “N” to “R” position is require. Also, while driving up and down a
only possible by depressing the brake hill, the transmission assists and controls
pedal. For details, refer to “Shift lock the driving performance and engine brak-
function” �7-31. ing while corresponding to the road grade.

(301,1)
& Selection of manual mode (if

equipped)
S07BG02
Type A Type B
1) Upshift indicator 1) Upshift indicator 7
2) Downshift indicator 2) Downshift indicator
With the vehicle either moving or station- 3) Gear position indicator 3) Gear position indicator
ary, move the select lever from the “D”
position to the “M” position to select the When the manual mode is selected, the
manual mode. gear position indicator and upshift indica-
tor and/or downshift indicator on the
combination meter illuminate.
The gear position indicator shows the
currently selected gear in the 1st-to-8th-
gear range. The upshift and downshift
indicators show when a gear shift is
possible. When the upshift indicator “ ”
illuminates, upshifting is possible. When
the downshift indicator “ ” illuminates,
downshifting is possible. When both in-
dicators illuminate, upshifting and down-
shifting are both possible. When the
vehicle stops (for example, at traffic
– CONTINUED –

(302,1)
signals) the gear will be automatically accidental gear shifting. & Selection of “L” (if equipped)
shifted to the 1st position and the down- S07BG03
shift indicator will turn off.

NOTE
Gearshifts can be performed using the Please read the following points care-
shift paddle behind the steering wheel. fully and bear them in mind when using
the manual mode.
. If you attempt to shift down when the
engine speed is too high, i.e., when a
downshift would push the tachometer
needle beyond the red zone, beeps will
be emitted to warn you that the down-
shift is not possible.
. If you attempt to shift up when the
vehicle speed is too low, the transmis- “L” is for using engine braking when going
sion will not respond. down a hill, etc. To select this mode, move
. You can perform a skip-shift (for the select lever from the “D” position to the
example, from 4th to 2nd) by operating “L” position.
the shift paddle twice in rapid succes-
To upshift to the next higher gear position, sion.
pull the shift paddle that has “+” indicated . The transmission automatically se-
on it. To downshift to the next lower gear lects 1st gear when the vehicle stops
position, pull the shift paddle that has “–” moving.
indicated on it. . If the temperature of the transmis-
To deselect the manual mode, return the sion fluid becomes too high, the “AT
select lever to the “D” position from the “M” OIL TEMP” warning light on the combi-
position. nation meter will illuminate. Immedi-
ately stop the vehicle in a safe location
CAUTION and let the engine idle until the warning
light turns off.
Do not place or hang anything on the
shift paddles. Doing so may result in Type A

(303,1)
. Only the “P” position allows you to turn If the select lever still does not move, refer
the ignition switch from the “ACC” position to “Shift lock release using the shift lock
to the “LOCK”/“OFF” position and remove release button” �7-31.
the key from the ignition switch.
If the shift lock cannot be released without
. If the ignition switch is turned to the using the shift lock release button in the
“ACC” position while the select lever is in above cases, there may be a malfunction
the “N” position, the select lever may not in the shift lock system or the vehicle
be moved to the “P” position without control system. Contact a SUBARU dealer
depressing the brake pedal and pressing for an inspection as soon as possible.
the select lever button.
! Shift lock release using the shift
! Shift lock release lock release button
S07BG0402
S07BG0401
If the select lever cannot be operated, turn Perform the following procedure to release
Type B the shift lock.
the ignition switch back to the “ON”
When selected, the indicator “L” will position, then move the select lever to 1. Apply the parking brake and turn the 7
illuminate on the combination meter. the “P” position with the select lever button ignition switch to the “LOCK”/“OFF” posi-
pressed and the brake pedal depressed. tion.
To deselect “L”, move the select lever to
the “D” position. If the select lever does not move after
performing the above procedure, check
& Shift lock function and confirm the following and release the
S07BG04
The shift lock function helps prevent the shift lock accordingly.
improper operation of the select lever. . When the select lever cannot be
. The select lever cannot be operated shifted from “P” to “N”:
unless the ignition switch is turned to the Refer to “Shift lock release using the shift
“ON” position and the brake pedal is lock release button” �7-31.
depressed. . When the select lever cannot be
. The select lever cannot be moved from shifted from “N” to “R”, “P”:
the “P” position to any other position before Place the ignition switch in the “ACC”
the brake pedal is depressed. Depress the position, then move the select lever to the
brake pedal first, and then operate the “P” position with the brake pedal de- 2. Wrap the tip of a flat-head screwdriver
select lever. pressed. with vinyl tape or a cloth and use it to
– CONTINUED –

(304,1)
remove the shift lock cover. The shift lock & Driving tips
release button is located under the shift S07BG05
lock cover. CAUTION

If the accelerator and brake pedals
are depressed at the same time,
driving torque may be restrained.
This is not a malfunction.
. Always apply the foot or parking brake

when the vehicle is stopped in the “D” or
“R” position.
. Always apply the parking brake when
4. While depressing the brake pedal, parking your vehicle. Do not hold the
insert a screwdriver into the hole, move it vehicle with only the mechanical friction
right and left while pushing the shift lock of the transmission.
3. Remove the grip portion of the screw- release button using a screwdriver, and . Do not keep the vehicle in a stationary
driver. then move the select lever. position on an uphill grade by using the “D”
position. Use the brake instead.
If the select lever does not move after
. The engine may, on rare occasions,
performing the above procedure, the shift
knock when the vehicle rapidly acceler-
lock system may be malfunctioning. Con-
ates or rapidly pulls away from a standstill.
tact a SUBARU dealer for an inspection as
This phenomenon does not indicate a
soon as possible.
malfunction.

(305,1)
Starting and operating/SI-DRIVE 7-33
SI-DRIVE (if equipped) & Sport (S) mode

S07BC03
S07BC
! For all-around performance driving
SI-DRIVE (SUBARU Intelligent Drive) S07BC0301
works to maximize engine performance,

control and efficiency.
This system consists of the following
modes:
. Intelligent (I) mode
. Sport (S) mode
By operating the SI-DRIVE switches, the
character of the power unit changes.
Type B
& Intelligent (I) mode The linear acceleration characteristic of 7
S07BC02
! For smooth, efficient performance this versatile mode is ideal for normal
driving use. Type A
driving
S07BC0201
The Intelligent (I) mode provides well-
balanced performance with greater fuel
efficiency and smooth driveability without
stress. Power delivery is moderate during
acceleration for maximum fuel efficiency.
This is ideal for around-town driving and
situations that do not require full power
output. It provides better control in difficult
driving conditions, such as slippery roads
or loose surfaces, due to gentler throttle
response.
Type B
Type A
The Sport (S) mode provides the engine
– CONTINUED –

(306,1)
7-34 Starting and operating/SI-DRIVE
power desired by those who want to make ! Models without the VIEW monitor ! Models with the VIEW monitor
the driving experience their own personal switch switch
adventure. S07BC0109 S07BC0110
& SI-DRIVE switches

S07BC01
NOTE
. If any of the SI-DRIVE indicators
blink, the SI-DRIVE system may be
malfunctioning. We recommend that
you contact your SUBARU dealer.
. The default mode of the SI-DRIVE
system is the Intelligent (I) mode. Once
you turn off the engine, the previous
setting mode is canceled and the
SI-DRIVE system returns to the Intelli-
SI-DRIVE switches SI-DRIVE switch
gent (I) mode the next time you turn on
the engine. To select the Intelligent (I) mode, press the (I) mode and (S) mode are switched every
. While the engine is running, if the “I” switch. To select the Sport (S) mode, time the “S/I” switch is pressed.
CHECK ENGINE warning light/Malfunc- press the “S” switch.
tion indicator light illuminates, the
SI-DRIVE mode changes to the intelli-
gent (I) mode. In this case, it is not
possible to change to another mode.

(307,1)
Starting and operating/Power steering 7-35
Power steering CAUTION wheel is not operated for a while and

S07AJ
the power steering control system has
& Power steering warning light When the power steering warning an opportunity to cool down. However,
S07AJ10
light is illuminated, there may be if the power steering is operated in a
more resistance when the steering non-standard way which causes power
wheel is operated. Drive carefully to assist limitation to occur too frequently,
the nearest SUBARU dealer and this may result in a malfunction of the
have the vehicle inspected immedi- power steering control system.
ately.
NOTE
If the steering wheel is operated in the
following ways, the power steering
control system may temporarily limit 7
the power assist in order to prevent the
system components, such as the con-
trol computer and drive motor, from
& Power steering system fea- overheating.
tures . The steering wheel is operated fre-
S07AJ11
The vehicle is equipped with an electric quently and turned sharply while the
power steering system. When the ignition vehicle is maneuvered at extremely low
switch is turned to the “ON” position, the speeds, such as while frequently turn-
power steering warning light on the coming the steering wheel during parallel
bination meter illuminates to inform the parking.
driver that the warning system is function- . The steering wheel remains in the
ing properly. Then, if the engine started, fully turned position for a long period of
the warning light turns off to inform the time.
driver that the steering power assist is
operational. At this time, there will be more resis-
tance when steering. However this is
not a malfunction. Normal steering
force will be restored after the steering

(308,1)
7-36 Starting and operating/Braking
Braking a loss of control of the vehicle. Keep ! Supplemental booster function

S07AK
driving straight ahead while gradually when vacuum pressure fails
& Braking tips reducing speed. Then slowly pull off the S07AK0205
While the ignition switch is turned “ON”
S07AK01 road to a safe location.
and the engine is running, the supple-
WARNING mental booster function operates when the
& Brake system brake booster performance is decreased
S07AK02
Never rest your foot on the brake due to insufficient vacuum boost.
pedal while driving. This can cause ! Two separate circuits
S07AK0201
Your vehicle has two separate circuit brake When the brake pedal is depressed while
dangerous overheating of the
systems. Each circuit works diagonally the supplemental booster function is oper-
brakes and needless wear on the
across the vehicle. If one circuit of the ating, an operation sound and brake pedal
brake pads and linings.
brake system should fail, the other half of vibration may be generated. This is not a
the system still works. If one circuit fails, malfunction.
! When the brakes get wet
S07AK0101 the brake pedal will go down much closer ! Brake assist system
When driving in rain or after washing the to the floor than usual and you will need to S07AK0203
vehicle, the brakes may get wet. As a press it down much harder. And a much WARNING
result, brake stopping distance will be longer distance will be needed to stop the
longer. To dry the brakes, drive the vehicle vehicle. Do not be overconfident about the
at a safe speed while lightly depressing the brake assist. It is not a system that
brake pedal to heat up the brakes. ! Brake booster
S07AK0202 brings more braking ability to the
! Use of engine braking The brake booster uses an engine mani- vehicle beyond its braking capabil-
S07AK0102 fold vacuum and a vacuum pump to assist ity. Always use the utmost care
Remember to make use of engine braking braking force. Do not turn off the engine when driving regarding vehicle
in addition to foot braking. When descend- while driving because that will turn off the speed and safe distance.
ing a grade, if only the foot brake is used, brake booster, resulting in poor braking
the brakes may start working improperly power.
because of brake fluid overheating, The brakes will continue to work even CAUTION
caused by overheated brake pads. To help when the brake booster completely stops
prevent this, shift into a lower gear to get functioning. If this happens, you will have When you need to brake suddenly,
stronger engine braking. to depress the pedal much harder than continue depressing the brake pedal
! Braking when a tire is punctured during normal braking, and the braking strongly to bring the effect of the
S07AK0103
distance will increase. brake assist.
Do not depress the brake pedal suddenly
when a tire is punctured. This could cause

(309,1)
Starting and operating/ABS (Anti-lock Brake System) 7-37
Brake assist is a driver assistance system. & Disc brake pad wear warning ABS (Anti-lock Brake Sys-
It assists the brake power when the driver indicators
cannot depress the brake pedal strongly S07AK03
tem)
S07AL
and the brake power is insufficient.
Brake assist generates the brake power The ABS prevents the lock-up of wheels
according to the speed at which the driver which may occur during sudden braking or
depresses the brake pedal. braking on slippery road surfaces. This
helps prevent the loss of steering control
NOTE and directional stability caused by wheel
When you depress the brake pedal lock-up.
strongly or suddenly, the following When the ABS is operating, you may hear
phenomena occur. However, even a chattering noise or feel a slight vibration
though these occur, they do not indi- in the brake pedal. This is normal when the
cate any malfunctions, and the brake ABS operates.
assist system is operating properly. 7
. You might feel that the brake pedal is The ABS will not operate when the vehicle
The disc brake pad wear warning indica- speed is below approximately 6 mph (10
applied by lighter force and generates a tors on the disc brakes give a warning
greater braking force. km/h).
noise when the brake pads are worn.
. You might hear an ABS operating
noise from the engine compartment. If a squeaking or scraping noise is heard WARNING
from the disc brakes while braking, im-
mediately have your vehicle checked by Always use the utmost care in driv-
your SUBARU dealer. ing – overconfidence because you
are driving a vehicle with the ABS
could easily lead to a serious acci-
dent.
– CONTINUED –

(310,1)
7-38 Starting and operating/Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD) system
CAUTION & ABS self-check Electronic Brake Force Dis-

S07AL01
Just after the vehicle is started, you may tribution (EBD) system
. The ABS does not always de- feel on the brake pedal a vibration similar S07AM
crease stopping distance. You to when the ABS operates, and you may
should always maintain a safe The EBD system maximizes the effective-
also hear the sound of the ABS working ness of the brakes by allowing the rear
following distance from other from the engine compartment. This is
vehicles. brakes to supply a greater proportion of the
caused by an automatic functional test of braking force. It functions by adjusting the
. When driving on badly surfaced the ABS being carried out and does not distribution of braking force to the rear
roads, gravel roads, icy roads, or indicate a malfunction. wheels in accordance with the vehicle’s
over newly fallen snow, stopping loading condition and speed.
distances may be longer for a & ABS warning light The EBD system is an integral part of the
vehicle with the ABS than one Refer to “ABS warning light” �3-20.
S07AL02
ABS and uses some of the ABS compo-
without. When driving under nents to perform its function of optimizing
these conditions, therefore, re- the distribution of braking force. If any of
duce your speed and leave ample the ABS components used by the EBD
distance from other vehicles. system malfunction, the EBD system also
. When tire chains are installed, stops working.
stopping distances may be long-
er for a vehicle with the ABS than When the EBD system is operating, you
one without. Be sure to reduce may hear a chattering noise or feel a slight
your speed and maintain a safe vibration in the brake pedal. This is normal
distance from the vehicle in front. and does not indicate a malfunction.
. When you feel the ABS operating,
you should maintain constant
brake pedal pressure. Do not
pump the brake pedal since
doing so may defeat the opera-
tion of the ABS.

(311,1)
Starting and operating/Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD) system 7-39
& Steps to take if EBD system If all the warning lights illuminate simulta- have the vehicle towed to the nearest
malfunctions neously, take the following steps. SUBARU dealer for repair.
S07AM01 1. Stop the vehicle in the nearest safe, flat
location. WARNING
2. Apply the parking brake and turn off the . Driving with the brake system
engine. warning light illuminated is dan-
3. Restart the engine. gerous. This indicates your brake
4. Release the parking brake. system may not be working prop-
erly. If the light remains illumi-
If all the warning lights do not come
nated, have the brakes inspected
back on:
by a SUBARU dealer immedi-
The EBD system have a possible malfunc- ately.
tion. Drive carefully to the nearest
SUBARU dealer and have the system . If at all in doubt about whether the
inspected. brakes are operating properly, do 7
not drive the vehicle. Have your
If a malfunction occurs in the EBD system, If all the warning lights stay illuminated vehicle towed to the nearest
the system stops working and the following or come back on after approximately 2 SUBARU dealer for repair.
warning lights illuminate simultaneously. seconds:
. Brake system warning light 1. Turn off the engine again.
. ABS warning light 2. Apply the parking brake.
. Vehicle Dynamics Control warning light 3. Check the brake fluid level. For details
The EBD system may be malfunctioning if about checking the brake fluid level, refer
all the warning lights illuminate simulta- to “Checking the fluid level” �11-15.
neously during driving. . If the brake fluid level is not below the
Even if the EBD system malfunctions, the “MIN” mark, the EBD system may be
conventional braking system will still func- malfunctioning. Drive carefully to the
tion. However, the rear wheels will be more nearest SUBARU dealer and have the
prone to locking when the brakes are system inspected.
applied harder than usual and the vehicle’s . If the brake fluid level is below the “MIN”
motion may therefore become somewhat mark, DO NOT drive the vehicle. Instead,
harder to control.

(312,1)
7-40 Starting and operating/Vehicle Dynamics Control system
Vehicle Dynamics Control namics Control is no guarantee Vehicle Dynamics Control

system that full vehicle control will be system is reduced and this
S07AN
maintained at all times and under should be taken into account
& Safety precautions all conditions, its activation when driving the vehicle in
S07AN05 should be seen as a sign that such a condition.
the speed of the vehicle should . If non-matching tires are used,
WARNING
be reduced considerably. the Vehicle Dynamics Control
Always use the utmost care in driv- . Whenever suspension compo- system may not operate cor-
ing – overconfidence because you nents, steering components, or rectly.
are driving a vehicle with the Vehicle an axle are removed from a . The Vehicle Dynamics Control
Dynamics Control system could ea- vehicle, have an inspection of system helps prevent unstable
sily lead to a serious accident. that system performed by an vehicle motion such as skidding
authorized SUBARU dealer. using control of the brakes and
. The following precautions should engine power. Do not turn off the
CAUTION be observed in order to ensure Vehicle Dynamics Control sys-
. Even if your vehicle is equipped that the Vehicle Dynamics Con- tem unless it is absolutely neces-
with Vehicle Dynamics Control trol system is operating properly: sary. If you must turn off the
system, winter tires should be – All four wheels should be Vehicle Dynamics Control sys-
used when driving on snow-cov- fitted with tires of the same tem, drive very carefully accord-
ered or icy roads; in addition, size, type, and brand. Further- ing to the road surface condi-
vehicle speed should be reduced more, the amount of wear tions.
considerably. Simply having a should be the same for all four
Vehicle Dynamics Control sys- tires.
tem does not guarantee that the – Keep the tire pressure at the
& System features
S07AN06
vehicle will be able to avoid proper level as shown on the In the event of wheelspin and/or skidding
accidents in any situation. vehicle placard attached to on a slippery road surface and/or during
. Activation of the Vehicle Dy- the driver’s side door pillar. cornering and/or an evasive maneuver,
namics Control system is an the Vehicle Dynamics Control system
– Use only the specified tempor-
indication that the road being adjusts the engine’s output and the
ary spare tire to replace a flat
travelled on has a slippery sur- wheels’ respective braking forces to help
tire. With a temporary spare
face; since having Vehicle Dy- maintain traction and directional control.
tire, the effectiveness of the

(313,1)
Starting and operating/Vehicle Dynamics Control system 7-41
. Traction Control Function engine. & Vehicle Dynamics Control

The traction control function is designed to . In the circumstances shown in the system monitor
prevent spinning of the driving wheels on following list, the vehicle may be less S07AN01
Refer to “Vehicle Dynamics Control warn-
slippery road surfaces, thereby helping to stable than it feels to the driver. The
ing light/Vehicle Dynamics Control opera-
maintain traction and directional control. Vehicle Dynamics Control System may
tion indicator light” �3-23 and “Vehicle
Activation of this function is shown by therefore operate. Such operation does
Dynamics Control OFF indicator light” �3-
flashing the Vehicle Dynamics Control not indicate a system malfunction.
24.
operation indicator light. – On gravel-covered or rutted
roads
. Skid Suppression Function & Vehicle Dynamics Control
– On unfinished roads
The skid suppression function is designed OFF switch
– When the vehicle is towing a S07AN02
to help maintain directional stability by trailer
suppressing the wheels’ tendency to slide – When the vehicle is fitted with
sideways during steering operations. Acti- snow tires or winter tires
vation of this function is shown by flashing . Activation of the Vehicle Dynamics 7
the Vehicle Dynamics Control operation Control system will cause operation of
indicator light. the steering wheel to feel slightly
NOTE different compared to that for normal
conditions.
. The Vehicle Dynamics Control sys-
. It is always important to reduce
tem may be considered normal when
speed when approaching a corner,
the following conditions occur.
even if your vehicle is equipped with
– Slight twitching of the brake the Vehicle Dynamics Control system.
pedal is felt. . Always turn off the engine before
– The vehicle or steering wheel replacing a tire. Failure to do so may Press the Vehicle Dynamics Control OFF
shakes to a small degree. render the Vehicle Dynamics Control switch to deactivate the Vehicle Dynamics
– An operating sound from the system unable to operate correctly. Control system. Creating adequate driving
engine compartment is heard briefly wheel slip by deactivating the Vehicle
when starting the engine and when Dynamics Control system may help to
driving off after starting the engine. recover from the loss of traction. Use the
– The brake pedal seems to jolt Vehicle Dynamics Control OFF switch as
when driving off after starting the necessary.
– CONTINUED –

(314,1)
7-42 Starting and operating/Vehicle Dynamics Control system
. A standing start on a steeply sloping hancement offered by Vehicle Dynamics . Even when the Vehicle Dynamics
road with a snowy, gravel-covered, or Control system is unavailable. Therefore Control system is deactivated, compo-
otherwise slippery surface you should not deactivate the Vehicle nents of the brake control system may
. Extrication of the vehicle when its Dynamics Control system except under still activate. When the brake control
wheels are stuck in mud or deep snow above-mentioned situations. system is activated, the Vehicle Dy-
namics Control operation indicator
NOTE light flashes.
. When the switch has been pressed
to deactivate the Vehicle Dynamics
Control system, the Vehicle Dynamics
Control system automatically reacti-
vates itself the next time the ignition
switch is turned to the “LOCK”/“OFF”
position and the engine is restarted.
. If the switch is held down for 30
seconds or longer, the indicator light
turns off, the Vehicle Dynamics Control
system is activated, and the system
ignores any further pressing of the
When the switch is pressed during engine switch. To make the switch usable
operation, the Vehicle Dynamics Control again, turn the ignition switch to the
OFF indicator light “ ” on the combination “LOCK”/“OFF” position and restart the
meter illuminates. The Vehicle Dynamics engine.
Control system will be deactivated and the . When the switch is pressed to
vehicle will behave like a model not deactivate the Vehicle Dynamics Con-
equipped with the Vehicle Dynamics Con- trol system, the vehicle’s running per-
trol system. When the switch is pressed formance is comparable with that of a
again to reactivate the Vehicle Dynamics vehicle that does not have a Vehicle
Control system, the Vehicle Dynamics Dynamics Control system. Do not de-
Control OFF indicator light turns off. activate the Vehicle Dynamics Control
With the Vehicle Dynamics Control system system except when absolutely neces-
deactivated, traction and stability en- sary.

(315,1)
Starting and operating/X-MODE 7-43
X-MODE (if equipped) X-MODE does not guarantee that – Use only the special tempor-
S07BI the vehicle will be able to avoid ary spare tire to replace a flat
accidents in any situation. tire. With a normal temporary
WARNING . Activate the X-MODE when you spare tire, the effectiveness of
encounter a very slippery surface the X-MODE is reduced and
. Always use the utmost care in this should be taken into ac-
driving – overconfidence be- at low speed. However, having
X-MODE is no guarantee that full count when driving the vehi-
cause you are driving a vehicle cle in such a condition.
with X-MODE could easily lead to vehicle control will be maintained
a serious accident. at all times and under all condi- . If the hill descent control function
tions. When activating X-MODE, has operated continuously for a
. Always use the utmost care in the speed of the vehicle should long time, the temperature of the
driving – overconfidence be- be reduced considerably. brake disc may increase and the
cause you are driving a vehicle hill descent control function may
with hill descent control function . Whenever suspension compo-
nents, steering components, or be temporarily disabled. In this
could easily lead to a serious
an axle are removed from a case, the hill descent control 7
accident. Be especially careful, indicator will disappear. When
and depress the brake pedal if vehicle, have the system in-
spected by an authorized the hill descent control indicator
necessary when driving on ex- disappears, the hill descent con-
tremely steep downhill, frozen, SUBARU dealer.
trol function is disabled.
muddy or sandy roads. Failure . Observe the following precau-
to control the vehicle’s speed tions in order to ensure that the X-MODE is the integrated control system
may cause a loss of control and X-MODE is operating properly: of the engine, AWD and Vehicle Dynamics
result in a serious accident. – All four wheels should be Control system, etc. for driving with bad
fitted with tires of the same road conditions. Using X-MODE, you can
size, type, and brand. Further- drive more comfortably even in slippery
CAUTION more, the amount of wear road conditions including uphill and down-
should be the same for all four hill.
. Even if your vehicle is equipped
tires.
with X-MODE, winter tires should
be used when driving on snow- – Keep the tire pressure at the
covered or icy roads; in addition, proper level as shown on the
vehicle speed should be reduced label attached to the vehicle’s
considerably. Simply having door pillar.
– CONTINUED –

(316,1)
7-44 Starting and operating/X-MODE
X-MODE has the following functions. ! Type B combination meter ! To activate

S07BI0104 S07BI0101
. Hill descent control function: Models with 2 modes
Using the hill descent control function, you Press the X-MODE switch to turn to
can keep the vehicle at a consistent speed “SNOW·DIRT”, “DEEP SNOW·MUD” or
driving downhill. If the vehicle speed is to deactivate the system.
likely to increase, the brake control system While the X-MODE is activated, the
will be activated to adjust the vehicle X-MODE indicator appears.
speed.
. Driving ability control: Models with 1 mode
This mode increases the hill-climbing Press the X-MODE switch. While the
ability and driving ability as well as X-MODE is activated, the X-MODE indi-
enabling smooth application of torque for cator appears.
easier control of the steering wheel. ! To deactivate
S07BI0102
X-MODE indicator (models with 1 mode) Models with 2 modes
& To activate/deactivate the Press the X-MODE switch until it turns off.
X-MODE The X-MODE indicator will disappear
S07BI01 when the X-MODE is deactivated.
Models with 1 mode
Press the X-MODE switch again. The
X-MODE indicator will disappear when
the X-MODE is deactivated.
NOTE
. For models with 2 modes: SNOW·-
DIRT is suitable for driving on a snow-
covered road where the points of con-
tact between the tires and road surface
X-MODE indicator (models with 2 modes) are visible, or for driving on an unpaved
1) DEEP SNOW·MUD mode indicator
road.
X-MODE switch 2) SNOW·DIRT mode indicator
. For models with 2 modes: DEEP
SNOW·MUD is suitable for driving on

(317,1)
Starting and operating/X-MODE 7-45
a road covered with deep snow where . For models with Auto Start Stop & Hill descent control function
the points of contact between the tires system, the system will be stopped S07BI03
The hill descent control function will be in
and road surface are not visible, or for while the X-MODE is activated. standby mode when the X-MODE is
driving on a muddy road. . While the engine is running, if any of activated and the vehicle speed is less
. For models with 2 modes: When the the following conditions is met, the than approximately 12 mph (20 km/h).
X-MODE is ON, the Vehicle Dynamics X-MODE will be deactivated. In this
Control system cannot be switched ON case, it is not possible to activate the The function will operate when the vehicle
and OFF using the Vehicle Dynamic X-MODE. Also, for models with speed is less than approximately 12 mph
Control OFF switch. The Vehicle Dy- SI-DRIVE, the mode will change to the (20 km/h) and the accelerator ratio is less
namics Control system is fixed to ON in Intelligent (I) mode and it will not be than approximately 10%.
“SNOW·DIRT” and OFF in “DEEP possible to change to the other modes. The function will turn off when the vehicle
SNOW·MUD”. – The CHECK ENGINE warning speed is more than approximately 12 mph
. Even if you try to activate the light/Malfunction indicator light illu- (20 km/h) and the accelerator pedal is
X-MODE by pressing the X-MODE minates. depressed.
switch when the vehicle speed is 12 – The AT OIL TEMP warning light
CAUTION
7
mph (20 km/h) or more, the X-MODE will flashes.
not be activated. At this time, a buzzer – The ABS warning light illumi- The braking power of the hill des-
will sound twice. nates. cent control function may not be
. If the vehicle speed reaches 25 mph – The Vehicle Dynamics Control sufficient when strong braking
(40 km/h) or more while the X-MODE is warning light illuminates. power is needed (e.g., when towing
activated, a buzzer will sound once and . If there is a possibility that the a trailer).
the X-MODE will be deactivated. engine could overheat because of a
. For models with SI-DRIVE, the temperature increase of the engine
SI-DRIVE mode will change to the coolant, it is not possible to activate NOTE
Intelligent (I) mode when the X-MODE the X-MODE. Even while the X-MODE is . Even while the hill descent control
is deactivated. activated, the X-MODE will be deacti- function is operating, you can vary the
. For models with SI-DRIVE, the vated when the engine coolant tem- vehicle speed by using the brake pedal
SI-DRIVE mode will not be affected perature increases. In this case, the or accelerator pedal.
even if the SI-DRIVE switch is pressed mode will change to the Intelligent (I) . During braking by the hill descent
while the X-MODE is activated. At this mode (models with SI-DRIVE). control function, the stop lights will
time, the buzzer will sound twice. illuminate.
– CONTINUED –

(318,1)
7-46 Starting and operating/Tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) (U.S.-spec. models)
. The hill descent control function is This indicator appears while the hill des- Tire pressure monitoring
operable regardless of the gradient of cent control function is in the standby
the road. mode. It flashes while the function is
system (TPMS) (U.S.-spec.
. The hill descent control function operating. It will disappear when the models)
may be considered normal when the function is in the disabled mode. When S07AO
following conditions occur. this function is changed from operational

– An operating sound is heard to non-operational, it will disappear when
briefly from the engine compart- the vehicle speed reaches more than
ment while the hill descent control approximately 18 mph (30 km/h).
function is operating.
– The sensation of depressing the
brake pedal is different, (harder than
usual etc.) when the brake pedal is
depressed during hill descent con-
trol function operation.
! Hill descent control indicator
S07BI0301
The tire pressure monitoring system pro-

vides the driver with a warning message
when tire pressure is severely low.
The tire pressure monitoring system will
activate only when the vehicle is driven at
speeds above 20 mph (32 km/h). Also, this
system may not react immediately to a
sudden drop in tire pressure (for example,
a blow-out caused by running over a sharp
object).
Hill descent control indicator (type B)

(319,1)
Starting and operating/Tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) (U.S.-spec. models) 7-47
WARNING The tire pressure monitoring system resetting.

tem does not function when the . When a tire is repaired with liquid
. If the low tire pressure warning vehicle is stationary. After adjust- sealant, the tire pressure warning
light illuminates while driving, ing the tire pressures, increase valve and transmitter may not
never brake suddenly. Instead, the vehicle speed to at least 20 operate properly. If a liquid sea-
perform the following procedure. mph (32 km/h) to start the TPMS lant is used, contact your nearest
Otherwise, an accident involving rechecking of the tire inflation SUBARU dealer or other qualified
serious vehicle damage and ser- pressures. If the tire pressures service shop as soon as possi-
ious personal injury could occur. are now above the severe low ble. Make sure to replace the tire
(1) Keep driving straight ahead pressure threshold, the low tire pressure warning valve and
while gradually reducing pressure warning light should transmitter when replacing the
speed. turn off a few minutes later. tire. You may reuse the wheel if
(2) Slowly pull off the road to a If this light still illuminates while there is no damage to it and if the
safe location. driving after adjusting the tire sealant residue is properly
pressure, a tire may have signifi- cleaned off. Do not inject any tire 7
(3) Check the pressure for all four cant damage and a fast leak that liquid or aerosol tire sealant into
tires and adjust the pressure causes the tire to lose air rapidly. the tires, as this may cause a
to the COLD tire pressure If you have a flat tire, replace it malfunction of the tire pressure
shown on the tire inflation with a spare tire as soon as sensors. If the light illuminates
pressure label. The tire infla- possible. steadily after blinking for ap-
tion pressure label is located proximately one minute,
on the door pillar on the . When a spare tire is mounted or a
wheel rim is replaced without the promptly contact a SUBARU
driver’s side. dealer to have the system in-
original pressure sensor/trans-
Even when the vehicle is driven a mitter being transferred, the low spected.
very short distance, the tires get tire pressure warning light will
warm and their pressures in- illuminate steadily after blinking
crease accordingly. Be sure to for approximately one minute.
let the tires cool thoroughly be- This indicates the TPMS is unable
fore adjusting their pressures to to monitor all four road wheels.
the standard values shown on the Contact your SUBARU dealer as
tire inflation pressure label. Refer soon as possible for tire and
to “Tires and wheels” �11-21. sensor replacement and/or sys-
– CONTINUED –

(320,1)
7-48 Starting and operating/Parking your vehicle
CAUTION Parking your vehicle CAUTION

S07AP
Do not place metal film or any metal & Parking brake Never drive while the parking brake
S07AP01
parts in the cargo area. This may To set the parking brake, depress the is set because this will cause un-
cause poor reception of the signals brake pedal firmly and hold it down until necessary wear on the brake linings.
from the tire pressure sensors, and the parking brake lever is fully pulled up. Before starting to drive, always
the tire pressure monitoring system make sure that the parking brake
will not function properly. has been fully released.
NOTE & Parking tips

This device complies with part 15 of the S07AP02
When parking your vehicle, always per-
form the following items.
vice may not cause harmful interfer- . Apply the parking brake firmly.
ence, and (2) this device must accept . For MT models, put the shift lever in the
any interference received, including “1” (1st) for upgrade or “R” (Reverse) for a
interference that may cause undesired downgrade.
operation. . For CVT models, put the select lever in
the “P” (Park) position.
FCC CAUTION To release the parking brake, pull the lever
Changes or modifications not ex- up slightly, press the release button, then Never rely on the mechanical friction of the
pressly approved by the party respon- lower the lever while keeping the button transmission alone to hold the vehicle.
sible for compliance could void the pressed.
user’s authority to operate the equip- When the parking brake is set while the
ment. engine is running, the parking brake
warning light illuminates. After starting
the vehicle, be sure that the warning light
has turned off before the vehicle is driven.
Refer to “Brake system warning light (red)”
�3-20.

(321,1)
Starting and operating/Parking your vehicle 7-49
WARNING tions on the ground when park-

ing. The underspoiler could be
. Never leave unattended children damaged by contact with them.
or pets in the vehicle. They could . The braking power of the parking
accidentally injure themselves or brake may not be sufficient when
others through inadvertent op- stronger braking power is
eration of the vehicle. Also, on needed (e.g., when parking on a
hot or sunny days, the tempera- steep slope while towing a trai-
ture in a closed vehicle could ler).
quickly become high enough to
cause severe or possibly fatal
injuries to people.
. Do not park the vehicle over
When parking on a hill, always turn the flammable materials such as dry
steering wheel. When the vehicle is grass, waste paper or rags, as 7
headed up the hill, the front wheels should they may burn easily if they come
be turned away from the curb. near hot engine or exhaust sys-
tem parts.
. Be sure to stop the engine if you
take a nap in the vehicle. If engine
exhaust gas enters the passen-
ger compartment, occupants in
the vehicle could die from carbon
monoxide (CO) contained in the
exhaust gas.
CAUTION
. If your vehicle has a bumper
When facing downhill, the front wheels under guard (optional), pay atten-
should be turned into the curb. tion to blocks and other obstruc-

(322,1)
7-50 Starting and operating/Hill start assist system
Hill start assist system ditions.

S07AU . The clutch pedal is depressed while the
brake pedal is also depressed (MT mod-
WARNING els).
. The vehicle has stopped with the brake
. The Hill start assist system is a
pedal depressed (CVT models).
device only for helping the driver
to START the vehicle on an uphill Braking power is maintained temporarily
grade. To prevent accidents (for approximately 2 seconds) by the Hill
when the vehicle is parked on a start assist system after the brake pedal is
slope, be sure to firmly set the released. The driver is therefore able to
parking brake. When setting the start the vehicle in the same way as on a
parking brake, make sure that the level grade, just using the clutch pedal (MT
vehicle remains stationary when models only) and accelerator pedal (all
the clutch pedal (MT models) and models).
brake pedal (both MT and CVT
models) are released. If the braking power of the Hill start assist
system is insufficient after the brake pedal
. Do not turn the ignition switch to
is released, apply more braking power by
the “LOCK”/“OFF” position while
depressing the brake pedal again.
the Hill start assist system is
operating. The Hill start assist The Hill start assist system may not
system will be deactivated and operate on slight grades. Also, the Hill
may lead to an accident. start assist system does not operate in the
following cases.
The Hill start assist system is a device to
make the following vehicle operations
1) Starting forward facing uphill
easier.
2) Starting backward facing downhill
A) Brake pedal (both MT models and CVT
models)
B) Clutch pedal (MT models only)
In both these cases, the Hill start assist
system operates under the following con-

(323,1)
Starting and operating/Hill start assist system 7-51
Hill start assist OFF indicator light is & To activate/deactivate the Hill
illuminated. Refer to “Hill start assist start assist system
warning light/Hill start assist OFF indicator S07AU02
light” �3-22.
. While the Auto Start Stop warning light
is illuminated. Refer to “Auto Start Stop
warning light/Auto Start Stop OFF indica-
tor light (yellow)” �3-32.
When using the Hill start assist system, a
braking effect may be felt even after the
brake pedal has been released. However,
for MT models, this braking effect should
disappear once the clutch pedal is re-
leased. 7
CAUTION Hill start assist OFF indicator light
The braking power of the Hill start CAUTION

assist system may not be sufficient
when strong braking power is When starting on an up hill grade,
needed (e.g., when towing a trailer). make sure the Hill start assist OFF
indicator light is off.
If the Hill start assist OFF indicator
NOTE light is on, make sure the parking
A slight jolt may be felt when the brake is applied.
vehicle begins to move forward after
. When starting backward facing uphill
being reversed. To activate or deactivate the Hill start
. When starting forward facing downhill
assist system, perform the following steps.
. While the parking brake is applied
. While the ignition switch is in the “ACC” NOTE
or “LOCK”/“OFF” position If you make an error when performing
. While the Hill start assist warning light/ any steps in the following procedure,
– CONTINUED –

(324,1)
7-52 Starting and operating/Hill start assist system
place the ignition switch in the “LOCK”/ indicator light illuminates.

“OFF” position once and then start
over again. ! To reactivate
S07AU0202
To reactivate Hill start assist system,
! To deactivate repeat steps 1 to 8. When the Hill start
S07AU0201
1. Park your vehicle in a flat and safe assist system is activated, the Hill start
location and apply the parking brake. assist OFF indicator light turns off.
2. Turn the ignition switch to the “LOCK”/ & Hill start assist warning light/
“OFF” position. Hill start assist OFF indicator
3. Restart the engine. light
S07AU01
Refer to “Hill start assist warning light/Hill
start assist OFF indicator light” �3-22.
5. Press and hold the Vehicle Dynamics
Control OFF switch for 30 seconds until
the Vehicle Dynamics Control OFF indica-
tor light on the combination meter turns
on and off.
6. Within 5 seconds, release the Vehicle
Dynamics Control OFF switch.
7. Within 2 seconds, press back the
Vehicle Dynamics Control OFF switch.
The Hill start assist OFF indicator light
4. Confirm the following items. turns on and off.
(1) The brake system warning light 8. Turn the ignition switch to the “LOCK”/
illuminates. “OFF” position. Hill start assist is deacti-
(2) The Vehicle Dynamics Control vated.
warning light turns off.
(3) The Vehicle Dynamics Control NOTE
OFF indicator light turns off. When the Hill start assist system is
(4) The ABS warning light turns off. deactivated, the Hill start assist OFF

(325,1)
Starting and operating/Cruise control 7-53
Cruise control (if equipped) NOTE

S07AQ
Make sure the cruise control system is
NOTE turned off when the cruise control is not
For models with EyeSight system: in use to avoid unintentionally setting
Refer to the Owner’s Manual supple- of the cruise control.
ment for the EyeSight system.
Cruise control enables you to maintain a & To set cruise control
S07AQ01
constant vehicle speed without holding
your foot on the accelerator pedal and it is
operative when the vehicle speed is 20
mph (30 km/h) or more.
WARNING Cruise control indicator light (type A)

7
. Do not use the cruise control
under any of the following condi-
tions. These may cause loss of
vehicle control.
– Driving up or down a steep
grade
– Driving on slippery or winding Cruise control main button
roads 1. Press the cruise control main button.
– Driving in heavy traffic
– Towing a trailer
. When using the cruise control,
always set the speed appropri- Cruise control indicator light (type B)
ately according to the speed limit, The cruise control indicator light on the
traffic flow, road conditions, and combination meter will illuminate.
other conditions. 2. Depress the accelerator pedal until the
vehicle reaches the desired speed.
– CONTINUED –

(326,1)
7-54 Starting and operating/Cruise control
3. Press the “RES/SET” switch to the Cruise control set indicator light (type A) Cruise control set indicator light (type B)
“SET” side and release it. Then release the 1) When setting the displayed unit as “MPH” 1) When setting the displayed unit as “MPH”
2) When setting the displayed unit as “km/h” 2) When setting the displayed unit as “km/h”
accelerator pedal.
At this time, the cruise control set indicator
NOTE light is illuminated in the combination
When setting a cruise speed for the first meter. The set speed will be shown on
time during a drive, both “SET” and the combination meter. You can change
“RES” may be used to set the initial the displayed unit by operating the combi-
cruise speed. nation meter display.
. For type A meter details, refer to
“Combination meter settings” �3-11.
. For type B meter details, refer to
“Screen Settings” �3-40.
The vehicle will maintain the desired
speed.
Vehicle speed can be temporarily in-
creased while driving with the cruise
control activated. Simply depress the

(327,1)
Starting and operating/Cruise control 7-55
accelerator pedal to accelerate the vehi- WARNING switch to the “RES” side to return to the
cle. When the accelerator pedal is re- original cruising speed automatically.
leased, the vehicle will return to and For CVT models, you can cancel the The cruise control set indicator light in the
maintain the previous cruising speed. cruise control by shifting the select combination meter will automatically illu-
lever into the “N” position. However, minate at this time.
& To temporarily cancel the do not shift the lever into the “N”
cruise control position while driving except in case & To turn off the cruise control
S07AQ02
The cruise control can be temporarily of emergency. If the select lever is S07AQ03
There are two ways to turn off the cruise
canceled in the following ways. shifted into the “N” position, the control:
engine brake will no longer work.
. Press the cruise control main button
This could result in an accident.
again.
The cruise control set indicator light in the . Turn the ignition switch to the “ACC” or
combination meter turns off when the “LOCK”/“OFF” position (but only when the
cruise control is canceled. vehicle is completely stopped). 7
& To change the cruising speed
S07AQ04
! To increase the speed (by the “RES/

SET” switch)
S07AQ0405
. Press the “CANCEL” button.

. Press the X-MODE switch to activate
the X-MODE (models with X-MODE).
. Depress the brake pedal.
. Depress the clutch pedal (MT models
only).
To resume the cruise control after it has
been temporarily canceled and with vehi-
cle speed of approximately 20 mph (30
km/h) or more, press the “RES/SET”
– CONTINUED –

(328,1)
7-56 Starting and operating/Cruise control
Press the “RES/SET” switch to the “RES” ! To increase the speed (by accelera- ! To decrease the speed (by the “RES/
side and hold it until the vehicle reaches tor pedal) SET” switch)
the desired speed. Then, release the S07AQ0402 S07AQ0406
switch. The vehicle speed at that moment 1. Depress the accelerator pedal to ac-
will be memorized and treated as the new celerate the vehicle to the desired speed.
set speed.
When setting the displayed unit as
“MPH”:
The set speed can be increased 1 mph
(1.6 km/h) each time by pressing the “RES/
SET” switch to the “RES” side.
“km/h”:
The set speed can be increased 1 km/h
(0.6 mph) each time by pressing the “RES/ Press the “RES/SET” switch to the “SET”
SET” switch to the “RES” side. side and hold it until the vehicle reaches
2. Press the “RES/SET” switch to the the desired speed. Then, release the
“SET” side once. Now the desired speed is switch. The vehicle speed at that moment
set and the vehicle will keep running at that will be memorized and treated as the new
speed without depressing the accelerator set speed.
pedal. When setting the displayed unit as
“MPH”:
The set speed can be decreased 1 mph
(1.6 km/h) each time by pressing the “RES/
SET” switch to the “SET” side.
“km/h”:
The set speed can be decreased 1 km/h
(0.6 mph) each time by pressing the “RES/
SET” switch to the “SET” side.

(329,1)
Starting and operating/Auto Start Stop system 7-57
! To decrease the speed (by brake & Cruise control indicator light Auto Start Stop system (if
S07AQ05
pedal) Refer to “Cruise control indicator light” �3- equipped)
S07AQ0404
1. Depress the brake pedal to release 31. S07BH
cruise control temporarily. The Auto Start Stop system is designed to

& Cruise control set indicator automatically stop and restart the engine
light when the vehicle is stationary for a short
S07AQ06
Refer to “Cruise control set indicator light” period of time (while waiting for a traffic
�3-31. light or in a traffic jam, etc.) after the engine
has warmed up. The system operates in
order to reduce fuel consumption and
exhaust emissions, as well as undesired
idling noise.
& System operation 7

S07BH01
CAUTION
2. When the speed decreases to the The Auto Start Stop system is de-
desired speed, press the “RES/SET” signed to automatically stop and
switch to the “SET” side once. Now the restart the engine for a short period
desired speed is set and the vehicle will of time during idling. Do not use the
keep running at that speed without depres- system when parking the vehicle
sing the accelerator pedal. normally.
So that it can be used safely and comfor-

tably, in addition to driver operations, the
Auto Start Stop system is designed to
constantly monitor the vehicle conditions
as well as the environment inside and
outside the vehicle, in order to control
stopping and restarting of the engine.
After the vehicle has been completely
– CONTINUED –

(330,1)
7-58 Starting and operating/Auto Start Stop system
stopped by depressing the brake pedal equipped with the Auto Start Stop
with the select lever in the “D” position, the system. For details, we recommend
engine will be automatically stopped. that you consult your SUBARU dealer.
If you release the brake pedal with the
select lever kept in the “D” position, the ! Operational conditions
S07BH0105
engine will be automatically restarted. The Auto Start Stop system will automa-
tically stop the engine when all of the
following conditions are met.
. The engine is sufficiently warmed up.
. The engine hood is closed.
. The driver’s door is closed.
. The driver’s seatbelt is fastened.
Auto Start Stop indicator light (green) . The CHECK ENGINE warning light/
(type B) Malfunction indicator light is off.
If the engine is temporarily stopped by the . Airflow mode selection is set to a mode
system, the Auto Start Stop indicator light other than “ ” mode.
on the combination meter will illuminate in . The rear window defogger is not in use.
green. This indicator light will turn off when . The X-MODE has been turned off (if
Auto Start Stop indicator light (green) the system restarts the engine. equipped).
(type A)
NOTE After the vehicle is stopped, the engine will
. After starting the engine, if the be automatically stopped when the follow-
vehicle is left idling without being ing conditions are met.
driven, the Auto Start Stop system will . The steering wheel is in the straight
not operate. ahead position.
. Your vehicle is equipped with a . The steering wheel is not being oper-
special high-performance battery. ated.
When replacing the vehicle battery, be
sure to replace it with a genuine NOTE
SUBARU battery (or equivalent) de- . After the vehicle is stopped, the
signed specifically for use in a vehicle engine may not automatically stop

(331,1)
under the following conditions. . When the engine hood is opened . When further depressing the brake
– The vehicle is stopped on a road . When the vehicle is at an altitude of pedal
with a steep slope. more than approximately 10,000 ft (3,000 . When depressing the accelerator pedal
– The vehicle is stopped by hard m) . When you move the select lever to the
braking. . When the CVT fluid is not sufficiently “R” position
– Negative pressure in the brake warmed up . When turning the steering wheel
booster is not sufficient. . When the temperature of the CVT fluid . When airflow mode selection set to
. After the vehicle is stopped, the is abnormally high “ ” mode
engine may not automatically stop if . When the vehicle battery is not in good . When the climate control system can
the brake pedal is not fully depressed. condition no longer maintain the set temperature
Make sure to depress the brake pedal . When using the climate control system,
firmly when stopping the vehicle. . When unbuckling the driver’s seatbelt
the temperature difference between the . When opening the driver’s door
. In the following cases, it may take setting temperature and the temperature
some time for the Auto Start Stop . When turning on the X-MODE
inside the vehicle is significant 7
system to operate. . When activating the rear window de-
. When using the climate control system, fogger
– The battery is discharged be-
the amount of air flow is significant
cause the vehicle has not been used ! Engine restart non-operational
for a long period of time, etc. NOTE conditions
– The coolant temperature is low. The Auto Start Stop system may not
S07BH0108
– The battery terminals have been operate if the CHECK ENGINE warning WARNING
reconnected after replacing the bat- light/Malfunction indicator light or
tery, etc. other warning lights on the combina- Do not open the engine hood when
tion meter are illuminating or flashing. the Auto Start Stop system is in
! Non-operational conditions operation. It may cause the vehicle
S07BH0106
In any of the following cases, the Auto ! Engine restart operational condi- to move while on a slope, the steer-
Start Stop system will not operate. tions ing wheel operation may become
S07BH0107
. When the Auto Start Stop warning light/ In any one of the following cases, the heavy, or the brakes may not work
Auto Start Stop OFF indicator light (yellow) engine will be automatically restarted even well, which can create dangerous
is illuminating or flashing if the brake pedal is kept depressed. conditions.
. When the CHECK ENGINE warning . When slightly releasing the brake pedal
light/Malfunction indicator light is illuminat- on road with a steep slope and the vehicle To ensure safety, the engine will not be
ing begins rolling automatically restarted if you open the
– CONTINUED –

(332,1)
engine hood when the Auto Start Stop sory power outlet will be reduced.
system is in operation, even if you release Depending on the connected appli-
the brake pedal. In this case, check the ance, the power of the appliance may
surrounding area and restart the engine by temporarily turn off.
normal operation.
! Auto Start Stop warning light
NOTE S07BH0109
. When the Auto Start Stop system is

in operation, the brake pedal may feel
stiff. However, this is not a malfunction.
. In the following conditions, the en-
gine will be automatically restarted
even if you keep the brake pedal
depressed. Auto Start Stop warning light (yellow)
– When the battery is discharged (type B)
– When the negative pressure in The Auto Start Stop warning light will
the brake booster has lowered illuminate in yellow when initially turning
. In the following cases, the length of the push-button ignition switch to the “ON”
time that the engine is temporarily position. The light will turn off after the
stopped by the Auto Start Stop system Auto Start Stop warning light (yellow) engine has started.
(type A)
may be shorter. The Auto Start Stop warning light will flash
– When the climate control system when the Auto Start Stop system is
is in operation malfunctioning. We recommend that you
– When the outside temperature is contact your authorized SUBARU dealer
high, or when it is low (because the for an inspection.
climate control system can no long-
er maintain the set temperature) CAUTION
– When consumption of electricity
If the Auto Start Stop warning light
by electrical components is high
does not turn off after the engine has
. When the engine is automatically
started, the Auto Start Stop system
restarted by the Auto Start Stop sys-
may be malfunctioning. We recom-
tem, the power provided via the acces-
mend that you contact your author-

(333,1)
ized SUBARU dealer for an inspec- system will be disabled. The Auto Start
tion. Stop OFF indicator light on the combina-
tion meter will then illuminate in yellow. If
! Auto Start Stop OFF switch the switch is pressed once more, the Auto
S07BH0104 Start Stop system will turn on again. The
Auto Start Stop OFF indicator light will then
turn off.
While the engine is temporarily stopped by
the system, if the Auto Start Stop OFF
switch is pressed, the engine will be
restarted even if you do not release the
brake pedal.
Auto Start Stop OFF indicator light (yel- NOTE
low) (type A) 7
. If the engine is restarted when the
Auto Start Stop system is not opera-
tional and the ignition switch has been
Auto Start Stop OFF switch turned to the “LOCK”/“OFF” position,
the Auto Start Stop system will turn on
again.
. Be sure to turn the ignition switch to
the “LOCK”/“OFF” position when leav-
ing the vehicle. Failure to do so could
result in the battery discharging.
Auto Start Stop OFF indicator light (yel-

low) (type B)
If the Auto Start Stop OFF switch is
pressed, operation of the Auto Start Stop
– CONTINUED –

(334,1)
! Auto Start Stop No Activity Detected If the operational conditions are not met (green)” �3-32.
indicator light when the vehicle is stopped, the engine
! Warning buzzer
S07BH0110
does not stop and the Auto Start Stop No S07BH0301
Activity Detected indicator light will illumi- The buzzer will sound when the engine
nate. It will turn off when the vehicle begins hood is opened while the engine is
to drive. stopped by the Auto Start Stop system.
When this occurs, the buzzer will stop
& Displaying the Auto Start sounding when the following operations
Stop system status are performed.
S07BH02 . The engine is restarted by normal
Approximate indications of the time that
operation (refer to “Preparing to drive”
the engine has been stopped by the Auto
�7-9).
Start Stop system and/or the amount of
fuel saved can be displayed on the multi- . The ignition switch is turned to the
function display (black and white) or “LOCK”/“OFF” position.
combination meter display (color LCD). ! Display of warning messages
Auto Start Stop No Activity Detected For details, refer to “Auto Start Stop time” (models with combination meter
indicator light (type A) �3-46 or “Basic screens” �3-38. display (color LCD))
S07BH0302
If a warning message is displayed on the
& System warning combination meter display (color LCD)
S07BH03
So that it can be used safely and comfor- while the vehicle is being driven, a
tably, the Auto Start Stop system is malfunction may have occurred in the Auto
designed to constantly monitor the vehicle Start Stop system. In this case, the Auto
conditions as well as the environment Start Stop warning light will illuminate or
inside and outside the vehicle in addition flash in yellow. We recommend that you
to driver operations, and to provide various have your vehicle inspected at a SUBARU
warnings to the driver via the warning light dealer as soon as possible.
and/or indicator light illuminating or flash-
ing and a buzzer sounding. For details
about the warning light and indicator light,
Auto Start Stop No Activity Detected
refer to “Auto Start Stop warning light/Auto
indicator light (type B) Start Stop OFF indicator light (yellow)”
�3-32 and “Auto Start Stop indicator light

(335,1)
Starting and operating/BSD/RCTA 7-63
BSD/RCTA (if equipped) at all even when a vehicle is present ! Blind Spot Detection (BSD)
S07BM0101
S07BM in a neighboring lane or approach-
The BSD/RCTA consists of rear corner ing from either side.
radars with Blind Spot Detection and Rear The driver is responsible for paying
Cross Traffic Alert. attention to the rear and side areas
of the vehicle.
These functions enable the system to
detect objects or vehicles to the rear,
drawing attention to the driver when & System features
changing a lane or when driving in reverse. S07BM01
BSD/RCTA consists of the following func-
WARNING tions.
. To detect a vehicle in a blind spot on an
The driver is responsible for driving adjacent lane or a vehicle approaching at
safely. Always be sure to check the high speed while driving the vehicle (Blind 7
1) Operating range
surroundings with your eyes when Spot Detection)
changing lanes or reversing the . To detect a vehicle approaching from The system warns the driver of dangers as
vehicle. the right or left while reversing the vehicle follows.
The system is designed to assist the (Rear Cross Traffic Alert) . If the system detects a vehicle existing
driver to change lanes or reverse in the blind spot, the BSD/RCTA approach
safely by monitoring the rear and The system uses radar sensors for the indicator light(s) on the outside mirror(s)
side areas of the vehicle. However, above functions. will illuminate.
you cannot rely on this system alone NOTE
in assuring the safety during a lane
The BSD/RCTA radar sensor has been
change or reversing. Overconfi-
certified by the radio wave related laws
dence in this system could result in
of the U.S. and Canada. When driving in
an accident and lead to serious
other countries, certification of the
injury or death. Since the system
country where the vehicle is driven
operation has various limitations,
must be obtained. For certification in
the flashing or illumination of the
the U.S. and Canada, refer to “Certifica-
BSD/RCTA approach indicator light
tion for the BSD/RCTA” �7-70.
may be delayed or it may not operate
– CONTINUED –

(336,1)
7-64 Starting and operating/BSD/RCTA
! Lane Change Assist (LCA) ! Rear Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA)

S07BM010101 S07BM0103
BSD/RCTA approach indicator light

. If the driver operates the turn signal 1) Operating range 1) Operating range
lever in the direction which the BSD/RCTA
The system warns the driver of dangers as The system notifies the driver of another
approach indicator light is illuminating, the
follows. vehicle approaching from either side when
corresponding BSD/RCTA approach indi-
cator light will flash. . If the system detects a vehicle ap- driving in reverse. This feature helps the
proaching at a high speed in the neighbor- driver check the rear and side areas of the
ing lanes, the BSD/RCTA approach indi- vehicle when moving backward.
cator light(s) on the outside mirror(s) will
If the system detects a vehicle approach-
illuminate.
ing from either side while moving back-
. If the driver operates the turn signal ward, it warns the driver of dangers in the
lever in the direction which the BSD/RCTA following way.
approach indicator light is illuminating, the
. The BSD/RCTA approach indicator
corresponding BSD/RCTA approach indi-
light(s) on the outside mirror(s) flashes.
cator light will flash.
. A warning buzzer sounds.
. An icon appears on the rear view
camera screen (audio/navigation monitor).

(337,1)
! Limitations of the detectability of reversing the vehicle. & System operation

RCTA S07BM02
S07BM010301 ! Operating conditions
Since the detectability of RCTA is limited, S07BM0201
the RCTA may not operate properly in The BSD/RCTA will operate when all of the
angled parking. following conditions are met.
. The ignition switch is in the “ON”
position.
. The BSD/RCTA warning indicator and
BSD/RCTA OFF indicator are turned off.
. The vehicle is driven at speeds above 7
mph (12 km/h) (except when reversing).
. The shift lever/select lever is in the “R”
position (when reversing).
The BSD/RCTA will not operate in the 7
Example 2 following situations.
1) The detection range of the radar sensors
. The BSD/RCTA OFF indicator is on.
C) Vehicle that may be detected
. The vehicle speed is below 6 mph (10
Example 1 km/h) even when the BSD/RCTA OFF
1) The detection range of the radar sensors NOTE indicator remains off (except when rever-
2) Area out of detection range of the radar The system may detect that a vehicle sing).
sensors (C) is passing in front of your vehicle.
A) Vehicle that may not be detected Always be sure to check the surround- NOTE
B) Parked vehicle ings with your eyes when reversing the . In the following case, the BSD/RCTA
vehicle. will stop operating and the BSD/RCTA
WARNING warning indicator will appear. If the
BSD/RCTA warning indicator appears,
An approaching vehicle (A) may not have your vehicle inspected at a
be detected because the detection SUBARU dealer as soon as possible.
range is limited by the parked vehi- – When a malfunction occurs in the
cle (B). Always be sure to check the system, including the BSD/RCTA
surroundings with your eyes when approach indicator light
– CONTINUED –

(338,1)
. In the following cases, the BSD/ eration and the BSD/RCTA OFF indica- with a low body height such as
RCTA will temporarily stop operating tor will disappear. However, if the BSD/ sports cars or a trailer with no
(or may stop operating) and the BSD/ RCTA OFF indicator has appeared for a cargo)
RCTA OFF indicator will appear. prolonged time, have the system in- – Vehicles that are not approaching
– When the radar sensor becomes spected at a SUBARU dealer as soon as your vehicle even though they are in
significantly misaligned (If the or- possible. the detection area (either on a
ientation of the radar sensor is . The detectability of the radar sen- neighboring lane to the rear or be-
shifted for any reason, readjust- sors is restricted. The BSD/RCTA de- side your vehicle when reversing)
ment is required. Have the sensor tection may be impaired and the system (The system determines the pre-
adjusted at a SUBARU dealer.) may not operate properly under the sence of approaching vehicles
– When a large amount of snow or following conditions. based on data detected by the radar
ice sticks to the rear bumper sur- – When the rear bumper around the sensors.)
face around the radar sensors radar sensors is distorted – Vehicles traveling at significantly
– When the vehicle is driven on a – When ice, snow or mud adheres different speeds
snow-covered road or in an envir- to the rear bumper surface around – Vehicles driving in parallel at al-
onment in which there are no ob- the radar sensors most the same speed as your vehi-
jects around (such as in a desert) for – When stickers, etc. are affixed on cle for a prolonged time
a long time the areas of the radar sensors on – Oncoming vehicles
– When the temperature around the the rear bumper – Vehicles in a lane beyond the
radar sensors increased exces- – During adverse weather condi- neighboring lane
sively due to long driving on uphill tions such as rain, snow or fog – Vehicles travelling at a signifi-
grades in summer, etc. – When driving on wet roads such cantly lower speed that you are
– When the temperature around the as snow-covered roads and through trying to overtake
radar sensors becomes extremely puddles . On a road with extremely narrow
low . The radar sensors may not detect or lanes, the system may detect vehicles
– When the vehicle battery voltage may have difficulty detecting the fol- driving in a lane next to the neighboring
lowers lowing. lane.
– When the vehicle battery be- – Small motorcycles, bicycles, pe- . When the 8-inch audio/navigation
comes overvoltage destrians, stationary objects on the system is performing a software up-
road or road side, etc. date, the RCTA warning icons may not
When the above conditions are cor- be displayed on the audio/navigation
– Vehicles with body shapes that
rected, the BSD/RCTA will resume op- screen until the update is complete.
the radar may not reflect (vehicles

(339,1)
& BSD/RCTA approach indica- driver of dangers under the following ! BSD/RCTA approach warning buz-
conditions. zer (only when reversing)
tor light/warning buzzer S07BM0302
S07BM03 . While the indicator light illuminates, if A warning buzzer sounds along with
When the BSD/RCTA is active, the BSD/ you operate the turn signal lever toward
RCTA approach indicator light will operate flashing of the BSD/RCTA approach in-
the side in which this light turned on. dicator light to warn the driver of dangers.
to alert the driver when there are vehicles
. When reversing the vehicle while the
in the neighboring lanes. When reversing The setting of the warning buzzer volume
system detects a vehicle approaching
the vehicle, the BSD/RCTA approach can be changed by operating the combi-
from either side.
indicator light and warning buzzer will nation meter display (color LCD). For
operate to alert the driver that a vehicle is details, refer to “Menu screens” �3-40.
! BSD/RCTA approach indicator
approaching from the left or right side.
light dimming function ! Safety tips regarding the BSD/RCTA
S07BM030101
! BSD/RCTA approach indicator light When the headlights are turned on, the approach indicator light/warning
S07BM0301
brightness of the BSD/RCTA approach buzzer
S07BM0303
indicator light will be reduced. . In the following cases, operation of the
BSD/RCTA approach indicator light and
7
NOTE the warning buzzer may be delayed or the
. You may have difficulty recognizing system may fail to issue these warnings.
the BSD/RCTA approach indicator light – When a vehicle moves to the neigh-
under the following conditions. boring lane from a lane next to the
– When affected by direct sunlight neighboring lane
– When affected by the headlight – When driving on a steep incline or
beams from the vehicles behind on repeated sharp uphill and downhill
. While the illumination brightness grades
control dial is in the fully upward – When going beyond a pass
position, even if the headlights are – When both your vehicle and a
BSD/RCTA approach indicator light turned on, the brightness of the BSD/ vehicle driving on a neighboring lane
It is mounted in each side of the outside RCTA approach indicator light will not are driving on the far side of each lane.
mirrors. be reduced. For details about the – When several narrowly-spaced ve-
The indicator light will illuminate when a illumination brightness control dial, hicles are approaching in a row
vehicle approaching from behind is de- refer to “Illumination brightness con-
– In low radius bends (tight bends or
tected. trol” �3-12.
when making turns at an intersection)
The indicator light will flash to warn the
– CONTINUED –

(340,1)
– When there is a difference in height away is driving on the near side of its
between your lane and the neighboring lane from your vehicle
lane
– Immediately after the BSD/RCTA is & BSD/RCTA OFF indicator
S07BM08
activated by pressing the BSD/RCTA
OFF switch ! System temporary stops
S07BM0801
– Immediately after the shift lever/
select lever is shifted to the “R” position
– When extremely heavy cargo is
loaded in the cargo area
. During reversing, operation of the BSD/
RCTA approach indicator light and the
warning buzzer may be delayed or the
system may fail to issue these warnings . The BSD/RCTA approach indicator
under the following conditions. light may illuminate when driving close to
– When backing out of an angled solid objects on the road or road side (such
parking space as guardrails, tunnels and sidewalls).
– When a large-sized vehicle is . The BSD/RCTA approach indicator
parked next to your vehicle (That light may flash when turning at an inter-
section in urban areas or a multilane 1) BSD/RCTA temporary stop message
vehicle prevents the propagation of
2) BSD/RCTA OFF indicator
radar waves.) intersection.
– When reversing on sloped roads . The BSD/RCTA approach indicator This display appears when the system is
– When reversing at a high speed light may flash and the warning buzzer used under the following conditions.
may sound if a building or a wall exists in . Extremely high or low temperatures
the reversing direction. . When abnormal voltage exists for the
. In the following cases, the system may vehicle battery
detect a vehicle driving two lanes away . When the radar sensor is significantly
from your vehicle. misaligned
– When you are driving on the near
side of its lane from the corresponding Once the above conditions are corrected,
vehicle the system will recover from the temporary
– When the vehicle driving two lanes stop condition and the indicator will dis-

(341,1)
appear. If the indicator remains displayed & BSD/RCTA warning indicator & BSD/RCTA OFF switch
for a prolonged time, have the system S07BM04 S07BM05
inspected at a SUBARU dealer. ! System malfunction

S07BM0403
! System temporary stops due to
reduced radar sensitivity
S07BM0802
BSD/RCTA OFF switch 7

1) BSD/RCTA malfunction message
2) At first, this message will appear
3) Then this message will appear
1) BSD/RCTA temporary stop message due 4) BSD/RCTA warning indicator
to reduced radar sensitivity
2) BSD/RCTA OFF indicator This display appears when a malfunction
occurs in the system. Contact a SUBARU
This display appears when the detectabil-
dealer and have the system inspected.
ity of the radar sensors is reduced. Once
the condition is corrected, the system will
recover from the temporary stop condition
and the indicator will disappear. If the
indicator remains displayed for a pro-
longed time, have the system inspected
at a SUBARU dealer. BSD/RCTA OFF indicator
If the BSD/RCTA OFF switch is pressed,
the BSD/RCTA OFF indicator appears on
the combination meter, and the BSD/
– CONTINUED –

(342,1)
RCTA is deactivated. position. ! Canada-spec. models

S07BM0602
Press the switch again to activate the BSD/
RCTA. The BSD/RCTA OFF indicator will & Certification for the BSD/
disappear. RCTA
When this occurs, the BSD/RCTA ap- S07BM06
proach indicator light on the side of the ! The U.S. and other FCC compliant
rearview mirror illuminates for a few countries
S07BM0601
seconds and then turns off. FCC ID: OAYSRR3A
NOTE CAUTION
. In the following cases, the system
may not operate properly due to FCC WARNING
blocked radar waves. Press the BSD/ Changes or modifications not ex-
RCTA OFF switch to deactivate the pressly approved by the party re-
system. sponsible for compliance could void
– When towing a trailer the user’s authority to operate the
– When a bicycle carrier or other equipment.
carrier item is fitted to the rear of the
vehicle
– When using a chassis dynam- NOTE
ometer or free roller device, etc. This device complies with part 15 of the
– When running the engine and FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the
making the wheels rotate while following two conditions: (1) This de-
lifting up the vehicle vice may not cause harmful interfer-
. If the ignition switch is turned to the ence, and (2) this device must accept
“LOCK”/“OFF” position, the last known any interference received, including
status of the system is maintained. For interference that may cause undesired
example, if the ignition switch is turned operation.
to the “LOCK”/“OFF” position with the
BSD/RCTA deactivated, the BSD/RCTA
will remain deactivated the next time
the ignition switch is turned to the “ON”

(343,1)
& Handling of radar sensors sensor becomes misaligned, a system

S07BM07 malfunction may occur, including the in-
ability to detect vehicles entering the
detection areas. If any strong shock is
applied to the bumper, be sure to contact
your SUBARU dealer for inspection.
. Do not disassemble the radar sensors.
NOTE
If the radar sensors require repair or
replacement, or the bumper area
around the radar sensors requires
repair, paintwork or replacement, con-
tact your SUBARU dealer for assis-
1) Sensors tance. 7
The radar sensors, one on each side of the
vehicle, are mounted inside the rear
bumper.
To ensure correct operation of the BSD/
RCTA, observe the following precautions.
. Always keep the bumper surface near
the radar sensors clean.
. Do not affix any stickers or other items
on the bumper surface near the radar
sensors.
. Do not modify the bumper near the
radar sensors.
. Do not paint the bumper near the radar
sensors.
. Do not expose the bumper near the
radar sensors to strong impacts. If a

(344,1)
7-72 Starting and operating/Reverse Automatic Braking (RAB) system
Reverse Automatic Braking present. NOTE

(RAB) system (if equipped) . The system is not designed to The Reverse Automatic Braking (RAB)
S07BN detect people (including chil- system records and stores the follow-
Reverse Automatic Braking (RAB) system dren), animals or other moving ing data when automatic braking oper-
is a system designed to help avoid colli- objects. ates. It does not record conversations,
sions or reduce collision damage when . Depending on the vehicle condi- personal information or other audio
reversing the vehicle. If a wall or an tion or the surrounding environ- data.
obstacle is detected in the reversing ment, the sonar sensor’s ability . Distance from the object
direction, the system will notify the driver to detect objects may be compro- . Vehicle speed
with a warning sound and may activate the mised. . Accelerator pedal operation status
vehicle’s brakes automatically. . Do not remove the SUBARU gen- . Brake pedal operation status
uine navigation and/or audio sys- . Select lever position
WARNING tem. If the SUBARU genuine . Outside temperature
navigation and/or audio system . The sensitivity setting of the sonar
. Reverse Automatic Braking sensors
is removed, the rear view camera
(RAB) system is not a system
image and help lines (distance
intended to replace the driver’s SUBARU and third parties contracted
marker, dynamic guidelines and
responsibility to check surround- by SUBARU may acquire and use the
vehicle width lines) will no longer
ing areas for vehicles or obsta- recorded data for the purpose of vehi-
be displayed.
cles to avoid a collision. cle research and development.
. Even if the Reverse Automatic SUBARU and third parties contracted
. The driver is responsible for driv-
Braking (RAB) system and object by SUBARU will not disclose or provide
ing safely. Before reversing, be
detection warning is ON, the the acquired data to any other third
sure to first depress the brake
visible alert of Reverse Auto- party except under the following con-
pedal and visually check the
matic Braking (RAB) system will ditions.
surroundings.
not be displayed. However, the
. There are some cases in which . The vehicle owner has given his/her
audible alert and its function will
the vehicle cannot avoid colli- consent.
operate.
sion, because the system opera- . The disclosure/provision is based
tion has limitations. The warning on a court order or other legally en-
sound or automatic braking may forceable request.
be delayed or may not operate at
all even when an obstacle is

(345,1)
Starting and operating/Reverse Automatic Braking (RAB) system 7-73
. Data that has been modified so that

the user and vehicle cannot be identi-
fied is provided to a research institution
for statistical processing or similar
purposes.
& Reverse Automatic Braking

(RAB) system overview
S07BN01
The system detects objects using sonar
sensors installed in the rear bumper.
. If the system determines a possible
collision with an object in the reversing
direction, automatic deceleration will be
activated. Also, beeping sounds will acti- 7
vate.
. If the vehicle is further reversed, auto-
matic hard braking will be applied and a
continuous beeping sound will activate.
1) When reversing 3) When the vehicle is stopped by the

2) When either strong automatic braking or system (in this case, the continuous
torque control is applied to prevent beep will remain sounding)
collision (in this case, short warning 4) Object (e.g., a wall)
beeps or continuous warning beeps will
sound)
– CONTINUED –

(346,1)
! Detecting range cancel the system, refer to “Cancel- system is set to on.
S07BN0101
ing the Reverse Automatic Braking . The select lever is in the “R” position.
(RAB) system operation” �7-80. . The vehicle speed is between 1 to 9
mph (1.5 to 15 km/h).
& Operating conditions NOTE

S07BN02
The Reverse Automatic Braking (RAB) . In the following cases, the Reverse
system will operate when all of the follow- Automatic Braking (RAB) system will
ing conditions are met. not operate. Promptly contact a
SUBARU dealer to have the system
inspected.
– The EyeSight warning indicator
is illuminated.
– The RAB warning indicator is
1) Detecting range (width): Approximately 6 illuminated.
in (15 cm) outside of the vehicle width . When the RAB OFF indicator is
2) Range that the system cannot detect: illuminated, the Reverse Automatic
Approximately 20 in (50 cm) behind the
rear of the vehicle Braking (RAB) system cannot be oper-
3) Detecting range (length): Approximately ated.
5 ft (1.5 m) from the rear of the vehicle . In the following cases, the system
may not be able to properly detect an
WARNING obstacle. Promptly contact a SUBARU
1) EyeSight warning indicator dealer to have the system inspected.
If your vehicle is trapped on a rail- 2) RAB warning indicator – A sticker, paint, or a chemical is
road crossing and you are trying to 3) RAB OFF indicator applied to the sonar sensor or the
escape by reversing through the . The ignition switch is in the “ON” rear bumper near the sonar sensor.
crossing gate, the system may re- position. – The rear bumper is modified.
cognize the crossing gate as an – The rear bumper has been re-
. The EyeSight warning indicator is off.
obstacle and the brake may activate. moved and reattached.
In this case, remain calm and either . The RAB warning indicator is off.
– The ground clearance is changed
continue to depress the accelerator . The RAB OFF indicator is off. due to the vehicle’s loading condi-
pedal or cancel the system. To . The Reverse Automatic Braking (RAB) tion or modification.

(347,1)
– The sonar sensor and the area poles, fences and ropes which may . The system may not be able to
near the sonar sensor are being not reflect the sound wave emitted properly detect objects or may cause
damaged. from the sonar sensor. a system malfunction when the follow-
– The rear bumper is exposed to – Objects that are too close to the ing conditions exist.
strong impact, or the rear bumper is rear bumper when the select lever is
deformed. set to the “R” position. High frequency sound from other
. When the 8-inch audio/navigation sources are nearby:
– Objects with a surface which may
system is performing a software up- not reflect the sound wave emitted – Horn sound from another vehicle
date, the Reverse Automatic Braking from the sonar sensor such as a – Engine sound from other vehi-
(RAB) system may not display the chain link fence. cles
following items on the audio/navigation . Objects the system is not designed – Sound of an air brake
screen until the update is complete. to detect. – Vehicle detection equipment or a
– Display Icon on/off Function – Pedestrians sonar from another vehicle
– Distance Indicator Image – Moving objects including moving – A sound wave with a frequency
– Warning Message vehicles similar to the vehicle’s system is 7
. On a steep hill, the system’s auto- – Objects which absorb sound transmitted nearby.
matic braking ability will be reduced. waves such as cloth or snow. – A vehicle equipped with the same
. The system is designed to avoid – Objects whose surface has a system is reversing toward your
collisions by automatic hard braking diagonal angle. reversing direction.
when the vehicle’s reversing speed is – Objects that are low to the ground Weather conditions:
less than approximately 3 mph (5 km/h). such as parking blocks.
However, the system does not guaran- – Extremely high or extremely low
– Objects that are high above the temperatures in which the area near
tee that the vehicle will be able to avoid ground such as objects hanging
collisions in any situation. the sonar sensor becomes too hot
from above. or too cold to operate.
. If the vehicle is reversed at an – Objects that are out of range of
extremely slow speed, the driver’s – The rear bumper near the sonar
the center of the vehicle in the sensors is exposed to heavy rain or
operation may be prioritized. In this horizontal direction.
case, automatic braking will not oper- a significant amount of water.
– Objects that are not perpendicu- – Fog, snow or sandstorm, etc.
ate.
lar to the ground. – Air is moving rapidly such as
. The system may not be able to detect
– The surface of the object is when a strong wind is blowing.
the following objects.
uneven or wavy.
– Sharp or thin objects such as
– CONTINUED –

(348,1)
Parts attached to the rear bumper objects or walls are adjacent to the
near the sonar sensor: vehicle such as narrow tunnels,
– Commercial electronic parts (fog narrow bridges, narrow roads or
light, fender pole, radio antenna) or narrow garages.
commercial attachment parts (trai- – Wheel tracks or a hole is present
ler hitch, bicycle carrier, bumper in the ground of the reversing
guard) are attached direction.
– Parts that emit high frequency – When reversing over a drainage
sound, such as a horn or speaker, cover (grate cover).
are attached.
Vehicle conditions:
– Ice, snow or mud is adhered to
the rear bumper near the sonar – The path of the reversing direc-
sensor. tion is inclined such as on a steep
– The vehicle is significantly in- uphill.
clined. – A curb is present in the reversing
– The ground clearance is signifi- direction.
cantly reduced due to the vehicle’s – When reversing downhill.
loading condition, etc.
– When the sonar sensor is mis-
aligned due to a collision or an
accident.
Surrounding environment:
– A cloth banner, flag, hanging
branch or railroad crossing bars
are present in the reversing direc-
tion.
– When reversing on a gravel or
grassy area.
– When reversing in an area where

(349,1)
– When reversing on an uneven & Reverse Automatic Braking

road. (RAB) system operation
S07BN03
. In circumstances such as the follow- When the Reverse Automatic Braking
ing, it may not be possible to avoid a (RAB) system is in operation, the range
collision even when the system oper- between the vehicle and the detected
ates normally. object will be indicated on the audio/
– Roads are slippery. navigation monitor. Also, warning sounds
– The tire air pressure is not cor- will activate in 3 levels to warn the driver of
rect. a potential collision.
– The tires have become worn. While the Reverse Automatic Braking
– Tires which are not the desig- (RAB) system is operating, a warning
nated size are installed. message is displayed on the audio/navi-
gation monitor and the combination meter
– Emergency repairs were per-
display (color LCD). 7
formed using a puncture repair kit.
– The suspension was modified.
– Tire chains are installed.
– Vehicle driving is unstable due to
accident or malfunction.
– The brake warning light is illumi-
nated.
– CONTINUED –

(350,1)
Guideline of detecting range ! Obstacle detected and alert level

Alert level Range of detected object* Distance indicator Alarm pattern S07BN0301
Long proximity (ob- 35 in (90 cm) or more Green No warning sound

ject detected)
Medium proximity
alert (approaching the 28 to 35 in (70 to 90 cm) Yellow Short beeps
object)
Short proximity alert
(approaching closer 20 to 28 in (50 to 70 cm) Orange Rapid short beeps
to the object)
Closest proximity
alert (too close to the 20 in (50 cm) or less Red Continuous beep
object)
*: Range of detection may vary depending on the environmental condition.

Long proximity alert (object detected)
1) Green: 35 in (90 cm) or more
Medium proximity alert (approaching the

object)
1) Yellow: 28 to 35 in (70 to 90 cm)

(351,1)
When an object is detected in the rever-

sing direction, the range of detected object
will be shown on the audio/navigation
monitor.
A warning alarm will sound and, depend-
ing on the speed, either torque control to
generate engine braking or automatic
braking will be applied.
! Object close behind warning
S07BN0302
Short proximity alert (approaching the Depress brake pedal warning

object closer) 1) Warning message 7
1) Orange: 20 to 28 in (50 to 70 cm)
Make sure to depress the brake pedal
once the vehicle has been stopped by
automatic braking. Until the brake pedal is
depressed, a message will be displayed
on the audio/navigation monitor and the
continuous beep will remain sounding.
At this time, a warning message is also
Automatic braking warning displayed on the combination meter dis-
1) Warning message play (color LCD).
If the vehicle continues to go in reverse, NOTE
the system may determine the risk of The Sonar Audible Alarm function and
collision with the object. In this case, short Automatic Braking function are differ-
warning beeps or continuous warning ent in operation conditions. Therefore,
Closest proximity alert (too close to the beeps will sound and either strong auto- there are cases in which only one of
object) matic braking or torque control will be these functions will activate.
1) Red: 20 in (50 cm) or less applied to prevent collision.
– CONTINUED –

(352,1)
WARNING the select lever is shifted to a position other & Canceling the Reverse Auto-
than the “R” position. matic Braking (RAB) system
Depress the brake pedal immedi- The system will operate again the next operation
ately after the system stops the time the select lever is shifted to “R” S07BN04
The Reverse Automatic Braking (RAB)
vehicle by automatic braking. De- position.
system can be temporarily canceled by
pending on the conditions of the
NOTE any of the following operations.
road surface and tires, the vehicle
may not remain stopped, possibly . Automatic braking only holds the . While the vehicle is stopped by the
leading to an unexpected accident. vehicle for 2 seconds. Before the auto- operation of automatic braking, the brake
matic brake is released, a warning pedal is depressed.
sound (3 short beeps followed by a . While the vehicle is stopped by the
! After the vehicle is stopped by the operation of automatic braking, the accel-
system long beep) will activate to alert the
S07BN0304 driver that the automatic will be re- erator pedal is depressed.
leased. . The accelerator pedal is kept de-
. The Reverse Automatic Braking pressed. (In this case, limited acceleration
(RAB) system may stop operating tem- will be canceled and the vehicle will
porarily in the following cases and the continue reversing.)
RAB OFF indicator will illuminate. . The select lever is shifted to a position
– Ice, snow or mud is adhered to other than the “R” position.
the sonar sensors or the rear bum-
per near the sonar sensor. NOTE
– Objects are too close to the rear The system will be canceled if the
bumper when the select lever is set object is no longer detected.
to the “R” position.
– The system detects sounds of a & Reverse Automatic Braking
RAB OFF indicator: illuminates when the
similar frequency to the Reverse (RAB) system ON/OFF setting
Reverse Automatic Braking (RAB) system is Automatic Braking (RAB) system S07BN05
turned OFF. sonar. While the select lever is shifted to the “R”
– The Vehicle Dynamics Control position, the below functions of the Re-
After the brake pedal is depressed, the verse Automatic Braking (RAB) system
RAB OFF indicator will illuminate and the OFF is selected.
can be set by operating the audio/naviga-
system will temporarily stop operating. tion monitor.
The RAB OFF indicator will turn off when

(353,1)
position again, consult your SUBARU

dealer.
. The settings will be restored as
follows when the select lever is shifted
to the “R” position next time.
– Reverse Automatic Braking
(RAB) system settings: default (ON
setting)
– Object detection warning beep-
ing sound: the setting selected by
operating the combination meter
display (color LCD)
Also, the following settings can be chan-
1) ON setting key of Reverse Automatic RAB OFF indicator: illuminates when the
Braking (RAB) Reverse Automatic Braking (RAB) system is ged by operating the combination meter
turned OFF. display (color LCD). 7
2) OFF setting key of Reverse Automatic
Braking (RAB) . Warning volume
3) ON setting key of the object detection RAB OFF indicator will turn off when the
Reverse Automatic Braking (RAB) system . Sonar Audible Alarm ON/OFF
warning beeping sound
4) OFF setting key of the object detection is turned ON. For details, refer to “Menu screens” �3-
warning beeping sound
NOTE 40.
When the ON setting key is shown, the
. When the settings cannot be chan-
corresponding setting is ON.
ged, the ON/OFF setting key will be
Touch and hold the ON setting key to turn grayed out.
the setting OFF. . The ON/OFF setting key may be
When the OFF setting is shown, the grayed out if the Reverse Automatic
corresponding setting is OFF. Braking (RAB) system malfunctions,
Touch and hold the OFF setting key to turn etc. In this case, turn the ignition switch
the setting ON. to the “LOCK”/“OFF” position and then
turn it to the “ON” position again. If the
When the Reverse Automatic Braking setting cannot be changed even after
(RAB) system is turned OFF, the following turning the ignition switch to the “ON”
indicator will illuminate.
– CONTINUED –

(354,1)
& RAB warning indicator & Handling of the sonar sen- washing machine.
S07BN07
sors . Do not apply strong impacts to the rear
S07BN06
The 4 sonar sensors are located in the rear bumper near the sonar sensors. If a sensor
bumper. To ensure the proper operation of becomes misaligned, a system malfunc-
the Reverse Automatic Braking (RAB) tion may occur, including inability to detect
system, observe the following precau- objects in the reversing direction. If any
tions. strong impact is applied to the rear
bumper, contact a SUBARU dealer to
have the system inspected.
. Do not disassemble the sonar sensors.
NOTE
If the sonar sensors require repair or
replacement, or if the area of the rear
1) RAB malfunction message bumper near the sonar sensors re-
2) RAB warning indicator quires repair, paintwork or replace-
If the Reverse Automatic Braking (RAB) ment, contact your SUBARU dealer for
system malfunctions, the above indicator assistance.
illuminates on the combination meter.
Contact the nearest SUBARU dealer for
details. . Do not affix any stickers or other items
on the sonar sensor or the bumper surface
near the sonar sensors.
. Always keep the sonar sensor and the
rear bumper surface near the sonar
sensors clean.
. Do not modify the rear bumper.
. Do not paint the bumper near the sonar
sensors.
. Do not apply high pressure water to the
sonar sensors with a high pressure car-

(357,1)
Driving tips
New vehicle break-in driving – the first 1,000 Tire chains ........................................................... 8-10
S08
miles (1,600 km) ................................................... 8-2 Rocking the vehicle .............................................. 8-11
Fuel economy hints ................................................ 8-2 Loading your vehicle.............................................8-11
Engine exhaust gas (carbon monoxide) ............... 8-2 Vehicle capacity weight ........................................ 8-12
Catalytic converter.................................................. 8-3 GVWR and GAWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating
and Gross Axle Weight Rating) .......................... 8-13
Periodic inspections ............................................... 8-4 Roof rail ............................................................... 8-13
Driving in foreign countries ................................... 8-4 Roof tent .............................................................. 8-14
Driving tips for AWD models ................................. 8-4 Trailer hitch ........................................................... 8-16
On-road and off-road driving ................................. 8-6 Connecting a SUBARU genuine trailer hitch.......... 8-17
Before driving ........................................................ 8-6 If not towing a trailer ............................................ 8-18
During driving........................................................ 8-6 Trailer towing ........................................................ 8-18
After driving........................................................... 8-7 Warranties and maintenance ................................. 8-19
Winter driving.......................................................... 8-7 Maximum load limits............................................. 8-19
Operation during cold weather ............................... 8-7 Trailer Hitches ...................................................... 8-22
Driving on snowy and icy roads ............................. 8-9 When you do not tow a trailer ............................... 8-23
Corrosion protection ............................................. 8-10 Connecting a trailer .............................................. 8-23 8
Snow tires ............................................................ 8-10 Trailer towing tips................................................. 8-24

(358,1)
8-2 Driving tips/New vehicle break-in driving – the first 1,000 miles (1,600 km)
New vehicle break-in driving – Fuel economy hints Engine exhaust gas (carbon
the first 1,000 miles (1,600 km) S08AB monoxide)
S08AA The following suggestions will help to save S08AC
The performance and long life of your fuel.

vehicle are dependent on how you handle . Select the proper gear position for the WARNING
and care for your vehicle while it is new. speed and road conditions. . Never inhale engine exhaust gas.
Follow these instructions during the first . Avoid sudden acceleration or decelera- Engine exhaust gas contains
1,000 miles (1,600 km): tion. Always accelerate gently until you carbon monoxide, a colorless
. Do not race the engine. And do not reach the desired speed. Then try to and odorless gas which is dan-
allow engine speed to exceed 4,000 rpm maintain that speed for as long as possi- gerous, or even lethal, if inhaled.
except in an emergency. ble.
. Always properly maintain the en-
. Do not drive at one constant engine or . Do not pump the accelerator and avoid gine exhaust system to prevent
vehicle speed for a long time, either fast or racing the engine. engine exhaust gas from entering
slow. . Avoid unnecessary engine idling. the vehicle.
. Avoid starting suddenly and rapid ac- . Keep the engine properly tuned. . Never run the engine in a closed
celeration, except in an emergency. . Keep the tires inflated to the correct space, such as a garage, except
. Avoid hard braking, except in an emer- pressure shown on the tire inflation pres- for the brief time needed to drive
gency. sure label, which is located under the door the vehicle in or out of it.
latch on the driver’s side. Low pressure will
The same break-in procedures should be . Avoid remaining in a parked ve-
increase tire wear and fuel consumption.
applied to an overhauled engine, newly hicle for a lengthy time while the
. Use the air conditioner only when engine is running. If that is un-
mounted engine or when brake pads or
necessary. avoidable, then use the ventila-
brake linings are replaced with new ones.
. Keep the front and rear wheels in tion fan to force fresh air into the
proper alignment. vehicle.
. Avoid carrying unnecessary luggage or . Always keep the front ventilator
cargo. inlet grille free from snow, leaves
or other obstructions to ensure
that the ventilation system al-
ways works properly.

(359,1)
Driving tips/Catalytic converter 8-3
. If at any time you suspect that Catalytic converter your vehicle checked and repaired by an
exhaust fumes are entering the S08AD
authorized SUBARU dealer.
vehicle, have the problem . Do not apply undercoating or rust
checked and corrected as soon prevention treatment to the heat shield of
as possible. If you must drive catalytic converter and the exhaust sys-
under these conditions, drive tem.
only with all windows fully open. . Do not drive with an extremely low fuel
. Keep the rear gate closed while level.
driving to prevent exhaust gas
from entering the vehicle. WARNING
. Avoid fire hazards. Do not drive
NOTE or park the vehicle anywhere
Due to the expansion and contraction near flammable materials (e.g.,
of the metals used in the manufacture grass, paper, rags or leaves),
of the exhaust system, you may hear a The catalytic converter is installed in the because the catalytic converter
exhaust system. It serves as a catalyst to operates at very high tempera-
crackling sound coming from the ex-
tures.
8
haust system for a short time after the reduce HC, CO and NOx in exhaust gases,
engine has been shut off. This sound is thus providing cleaner exhaust. . Keep everyone and flammable
normal. materials away from the exhaust
To avoid damage to the catalytic converter: pipe while the engine is running.
. Use only unleaded fuel. Even a small The exhaust gas is very hot.
amount of leaded fuel will damage the
catalytic converter.
. Never start the engine by pushing or
pulling the vehicle.
. Avoid racing the engine.
. Never turn the ignition switch to the
“OFF” position while the vehicle is moving.
. Keep your engine tuned-up. If you feel
the engine running rough (misfiring, back-
firing or incomplete combustion), have

(360,1)
8-4 Driving tips/Periodic inspections
Periodic inspections Driving in foreign countries Driving tips for AWD models
S08AE S08AF S08AG
To keep your vehicle in the best condition When planning to use your vehicle in
at all times, always have the recom- another country:
WARNING
mended maintenance services listed in . Confirm the availability of the correct . Always maintain a safe driving
the maintenance schedule in the “War- fuel. Refer to “Fuel requirements” �7-3. speed according to the road and
ranty and Maintenance Booklet” per- . Comply with all regulations and require- weather conditions in order to
formed at the specified time or mileage ments of each country. avoid having an accident on a
intervals. sharp turn, during sudden brak-
ing or under other similar condi-
tions.
. Always use the utmost care in
driving – overconfidence be-
cause you are driving an All-
Wheel Drive vehicle could easily
lead to a serious accident.
. When replacing or installing
tire(s), all four tires must be the
same for the following items.
(a) Size
(b) Speed symbol
(c) Load index
(d) Circumference
(e) Construction
(f) Manufacturer
(g) Brand (tread pattern)
(h) Degrees of wear
For items (a) to (c), you must
obey the specification that is

(361,1)
Driving tips/Driving tips for AWD models 8-5
printed on the tire inflation pres- conditions than a two wheel drive vehicle.
sure label. The tire inflation pres- There is little difference in handling, how-
sure label is located on the dri- ever, during extremely sharp turns or
ver’s door pillar. sudden braking. Therefore, when driving
If all the four tires are not the down a slope or turning corners, be sure to
same for items (a) to (h), serious reduce your speed and maintain an ample
mechanical damage could be distance from other vehicles.
caused to the drivetrain of the . Always check the cold tire pressure
car, and affect the followings. before starting to drive. The recommended
tire pressure is provided on the tire inflation
– Ride
pressure label, which is located under the
– Handling door latch on the driver’s side.
– Braking . Frequent driving of an AWD vehicle
– Speedometer/Odometer cali- All-Wheel Drive distributes the engine under hard-driving conditions such as
bration power to all four wheels. AWD models steep hills or dusty roads will necessitate
provide better traction when driving on more frequent replacement of the follow-
– Clearance between the body slippery, wet or snow-covered roads and ing items than that specified in the “War- 8
and tires when moving out of mud, dirt and sand. By ranty and Maintenance Booklet”.
It also may be dangerous and shifting power between the front and rear – Engine oil
lead to loss of vehicle control, wheels, SUBARU AWD can also provide – Brake fluid
and it can lead to an accident. added traction during acceleration and – Rear differential gear oil
added engine braking force during decel-
– Manual transmission oil (MT mod-
eration.
CAUTION els)
Therefore, your SUBARU AWD vehicle – Continuously variable transmission
If you use a temporary spare tire to may handle differently than an ordinary fluid (CVT models)
replace a flat tire, be sure to use the two wheel drive vehicle and it contains – Front differential gear oil (CVT
original temporary spare tire stored some features unique to AWD. For safety models)
in the vehicle. Using other sizes may purposes as well as to avoid damaging the . There are some precautions that you
result in severe mechanical damage AWD system, you should keep the follow- must observe when towing your vehicle.
to the drive train of your vehicle. ing tips in mind. For detailed information, refer to “Towing”
. An AWD model is better able to climb �9-13.
steeper roads under snowy or slippery

(362,1)
8-6 Driving tips/On-road and off-road driving
On-road and off-road driving CAUTION But please keep in mind that an AWD
S08AH
SUBARU is a passenger car and is neither
. Frequent driving of an AWD mod- a conventional off-road vehicle nor an all-
WARNING el under hard-driving conditions terrain vehicle. If you do take your
such as rough roads or off roads SUBARU off-road, certain common sense
. Always maintain a safe driving will necessitate more frequent precautions such as those in the following
speed according to the road and replacement of the following list should be taken.
weather conditions in order to items than that specified in the
avoid having an accident on a maintenance schedule described & Before driving
sharp turn, during sudden brak- in the “Warranty and Mainte- S08AH09
ing or under other similar condi- . Make certain that you and all of your
nance Booklet”. passengers are wearing seatbelts.
tions.
– Engine oil . Carry some emergency equipment,
. Always use the utmost care in
– Brake fluid such as a towing rope or chain, a shovel,
driving – overconfidence be-
wheel blocks, first aid kit and cell phone or
cause you are driving an All- Remember that damage done to
citizens band radio.
Wheel Drive model could easily your SUBARU while operating it
lead to a serious accident. off-road and not using common . Secure all cargo carried inside the
sense precautions such as those vehicle and make certain that it is not piled
. Never attempt to drive through higher than the seatbacks. During sudden
pools and puddles, or roads listed here is not eligible for
warranty coverage. stops or jolts, unsecured cargo could be
flooded with water. Water enter- thrown around in the vehicle and cause
ing the engine air intake or the . After driving on gravel roads or injury. Do not pile heavy loads on the roof.
exhaust pipe or water splashing rough roads, check the under- Those loads raise the vehicle’s center of
onto electrical parts may damage carriage of the vehicle body for gravity and make it more prone to tip over.
your vehicle and may cause it to any damage, deformation, or
. Never equip your vehicle with tires
stall. In this case, contact your paint removal. If you notice any
larger than those specified in this manual.
SUBARU dealer immediately. Re- irregularities, contact a SUBARU
gardless of its depth, it can wash dealer for an inspection as soon
away the ground from under your as possible. & During driving
S08AH10
tires, resulting in possible loss of General precautions:
traction and even vehicle roll- Because of the AWD feature and higher . Drive carefully. Do not take unneces-
over. ground clearance, you can drive your sary risks by driving in dangerous areas or
SUBARU on ordinary roads or off-road. over rough terrain.

(363,1)
Driving tips/Winter driving 8-7
. Slow down and employ extra caution at engine. For the best possible traction, Winter driving
all times. When driving off-road, you will avoid spinning the wheels when trying to S08AI
not have the benefit of marked traffic free the vehicle. & Operation during cold weath-
lanes, banked curves, traffic signs and . When the road surface is extremely er
the like. slippery, you can obtain better traction by S08AI01
. Do not drive across steep slopes. starting the vehicle with the transmission in ! Maintenance
S08AI0105
Instead, drive either straight up or straight 2nd than 1st (both for MT and CVT). For Carry some emergency equipment, such
down the slopes. A vehicle can much more CVT models, refer to “Selection of manual as a window scraper, a bag of sand, flares,
easily tip over sideways than it can end mode” �7-29. a small shovel and jumper cables.
over end. Avoid driving straight up or down
slopes that are too steep. & After driving Check the battery and cables. Cold tem-
. Avoid sharp turning maneuvers, espe- S08AH11 peratures reduce battery capacity. The
. Always check your brakes for effective- battery must be in good condition to
cially at higher speeds. ness immediately after driving in sand, provide enough power for cold winter
. Do not grip the inside or spokes of the mud or water. Do this by driving slowly and starts.
steering wheel. A bad bump could jerk the stepping on the brake pedal. Repeat that
wheel and injure your hands. Instead, process several times to dry out the brake It normally takes longer to start the engine
drive with your fingers and thumbs on the discs and brake pads. in very cold weather conditions. Use an 8
outside of the rim. . After driving through tall grass, mud, engine oil of a proper grade and viscosity
. Do not drive or park over or near rocks, sand, rivers, etc., check that there is for cold weather. Using heavy summer oil
flammable materials such as dry grass or no grass, bush, paper, rags, stones, sand, will make it harder to start the engine.
fallen leaves, as they may burn easily. The etc. adhering to or trapped on the under- Keep the door locks from freezing by
exhaust system is very hot while the body. Clear off any such matter from the squirting them with deicer or glycerin.
engine is running and right after the engine underbody. If the vehicle is used with these
stops. This could create a fire hazard. Forcing a frozen door open may damage
materials trapped or adhering to the or separate the rubber weather strips
underbody, a mechanical breakdown or around the door. If the door is frozen, use
Precautions when driving under espe-
fire could occur. hot water to melt the ice, and afterwards
cially dangerous situations:
. Wash the vehicle’s underbody after off- thoroughly wipe the water away.
. If you must rock the vehicle to free it
road driving. Suspension components are
from sand or mud, depress the accelerator Use a windshield washer fluid that con-
particularly prone to dirt buildup, so they
pedal slightly and move the shift lever/ tains an antifreeze solution. Do not use
need to be washed thoroughly.
select lever back and forth between “1”/“D” engine antifreeze or other substitutes
and “R” repeatedly. Do not race the because they may damage the paint of
– CONTINUED –

(364,1)
8-8 Driving tips/Winter driving
the vehicle. or washer system. CAUTION

If you fill the reservoir tank with a fluid with
a different concentration from the one ! Before driving your vehicle . Do not use the parking brake
used previously, purge the old fluid from
S08AI0101 when parking for long periods in
Before entering the vehicle, remove any
the piping between the reservoir tank and cold weather since it could freeze
snow or ice from your shoes because that
washer nozzles by operating the washer in that position.
could make the pedals slippery and driving
for a certain period of time. Otherwise, if dangerous. . When the vehicle is parked in
the concentration of the fluid remaining in snow or when it snows, raise the
the piping is too low for the outside While warming up the vehicle before wiper blades off the glass to
temperature, it may freeze and block the driving, check that the accelerator pedal, prevent damage to them.
nozzles. brake pedal, and all other controls operate . When the vehicle has been left
smoothly. parked after use on roads heavily
CAUTION Clear away ice and snow that has accu- covered with snow, or has been
mulated under the fenders to avoid making left parked during a snowstorm,
. Adjust the washer fluid concen-
steering difficult. During severe winter icing may develop on the brake
tration appropriately for the out-
driving, stop when and where it is safe to system, which could cause poor
side temperature. If the concen-
do so and check under the fenders braking action. Check for snow or
tration is inappropriate, sprayed
periodically. ice buildup on the suspension,
washer fluid may freeze on the
disc brakes and brake hoses
windshield and obstruct your ! Parking in cold weather
S08AI0102 underneath the vehicle. If there
view, and the fluid may freeze in
is caked snow or ice, remove it,
the reservoir tank. WARNING being careful not to damage the
. State or local regulations on disc brakes and brake hoses and
volatile organic compounds may Snow can trap dangerous exhaust
gases under your vehicle. Keep ABS harness.
restrict the use of methanol, a
common windshield washer anti- snow clear of the exhaust pipe and
from around your vehicle if you park When parking for long periods in cold
freeze additive. Washer fluids weather, you should observe the following
containing non-methanol anti- the vehicle in snow with the engine
running. tips.
freeze agents should be used 1. For MT models, place the shift lever in
only if they provide cold weather the “1” or “R” position. For CVT models,
protection without damaging place the select lever in the “P” position.
your vehicle’s paint, wiper blades

(365,1)
Driving tips/Winter driving 8-9
2. Use tire stops under the tires to prevent Avoid shifting down abruptly. Such beha- ! Wiper operation when snowing
the vehicle from moving. vior can cause the wheels to lock, possibly S08AI0201
Before driving in cold weather, make sure
leading to loss of vehicle control. the wiper blade rubbers are not frozen to
! Refueling in cold weather the windshield or rear window.
S08AI0103 An anti-lock brake system (ABS) en-
To help prevent moisture from forming in hances your vehicle’s braking perfor-
the fuel system and the risk of its freezing, If the wiper blade rubbers are frozen to the
mance on snowy and icy roads. For windshield or rear window, perform the
use of an antifreeze additive in the fuel information on braking on slippery sur-
tank is recommended during cold weather. following procedure.
faces, refer to “ABS (Anti-lock Brake
Use only additives that are specifically . To thaw the windshield wiper blade
System)” �7-37 and “Vehicle Dynamics
designed for this purpose. When an anti- rubbers, use the defroster with the airflow
Control system” �7-40.
freeze additive is used, its effect lasts selection in “ ” and the temperature set
longer if the tank is refilled whenever the WARNING for maximum warmth until the wiper blade
fuel level reaches half empty. rubbers are completely thawed. Refer to
For models with cruise control: “Climate control” �4-1.
If your SUBARU is not going to be used for . If your vehicle is equipped with a wiper
an extended period, it is best to have the Do not use the cruise control on
slippery roads such as snowy or icy deicer, use it. It is helpful to thaw the
fuel tank filled to capacity. windshield wiper blade rubbers. Refer to
roads. This may cause loss of vehi- 8
& Driving on snowy and icy cle control. “Defogger and deicer” �3-91.
roads . To thaw the rear wiper blade rubbers,
S08AI02 use the rear window defogger. Refer to
To prevent skidding and slipping, avoid
CAUTION “Defogger and deicer” �3-91.
sudden braking, abrupt acceleration, high-
speed driving, and sharp turning when Avoid prolonged continuous driving When driving in snow, if frozen snow starts
driving on snowy or icy roads. in snowstorms. Snow will enter the to stick on the surface of the windshield
Always maintain ample distance between engine’s intake system and may despite wiper operation, use the defroster
your vehicle and the vehicle ahead of you hinder the airflow, which could re- with the airflow selection in “ ” and the
to avoid the need for sudden braking. sult in engine shutdown or even temperature set for maximum warmth.
To supplement the foot brake, use the breakdown. After the windshield gets warmed enough
engine brake effectively to control the to melt the frozen snow on it, wash it away
vehicle speed. (Shift into a lower gear using the windshield washer. Refer to
when necessary.) “Windshield washer” �3-80.
– CONTINUED –

(366,1)
8-10 Driving tips/Winter driving
Snow stuck on the wiper arm prevents the sure label is located on the dri- for winter driving conditions.
wiper from working effectively. If snow is ver’s door pillar. When you choose to install winter tires on
stuck on the wiper arm, pull off the road to If all the four tires are not the your vehicle, be sure to use the correct tire
a safe place, then remove it. If you stop the same for items (a) to (h), serious size and type. You must install four winter
vehicle at road side, use the hazard mechanical damage could be tires that are of the same size, construc-
warning flasher to alert other drivers. Refer caused to the drivetrain of the tion, brand and load range and you should
to “Hazard warning flasher” �3-8. car, and affect the followings. never mix radial, belted bias or bias tires
since this may result in dangerous hand-
& Corrosion protection – Ride
ling characteristics. When you choose a
Refer to “Corrosion protection” �10-4.
S08AI03 – Handling tire, make sure that there is enough
– Braking clearance between the tire and vehicle
& Snow tires – Speedometer/Odometer cali- body.
S08AI04
bration Remember to drive with care at all times
WARNING – Clearance between the body regardless of the type of tires on your
and tires vehicle.
. When replacing or installing win-
ter tire(s), all four tires must be It also may be dangerous and
lead to loss of vehicle control, & Tire chains
the same for the following items. S08AI05
and it can lead to an accident.
(a) Size CAUTION
. Do not use a combination of
(b) Speed symbol radial, belted bias or bias tires Tire chains cannot be used on your
(c) Load index since it may cause dangerous vehicle because of the lack of clear-
(d) Circumference handling characteristics and lead ance between the tires and vehicle
to an accident. body.
(e) Construction
(f) Manufacturer Your vehicle is equipped with “all season
(g) Brand (tread pattern) tires” as original equipment, which are NOTE
(h) Degrees of wear designed to provide an adequate measure When tire chains cannot be used, use of
of traction, handling and braking perfor- another type of traction device (such as
For items (a) to (c), you must mance in year-round driving. In winter, it
obey the specification that is spring chains) may be acceptable if use
may be possible to enhance performance on your vehicle is recommended by the
printed on the tire inflation pres- through use of tires designed specifically
sure label. The tire inflation pres- device manufacturer, taking into ac-

(367,1)
Driving tips/Loading your vehicle 8-11
count tire size and road conditions. 2nd than 1st (both for MT and CVT Loading your vehicle
Follow the device manufacturer’s in- models). S08AJ
structions, especially regarding max-
imum vehicle speed. If your vehicle is a CVT model, for WARNING
information about holding the transmission
To help avoid damage to your vehicle, in the 2nd position, refer to “Selection of
drive slowly, readjust or remove the . Never allow passengers to ride
manual mode” �7-29. on a folded rear seatback in the
device if it is contacting your vehicle,
and do not spin your wheels. Damage cargo area. Doing so may result
caused to your vehicle by use of a in serious injury.
traction device is not covered under . Never stack luggage or other
warranty. cargo higher than the top of the
seatback because it could tumble
Make certain that any traction device forward and injure passengers in
you use is an SAE class S device, and the event of a sudden stop or
use it on the front wheels only. Always accident. Keep luggage or cargo
use the utmost care when driving with a low, as close to the floor as
traction device. Overconfidence be- possible.
cause you are using a traction device 8
could easily lead to a serious accident.
& Rocking the vehicle

S08AI06
If you must rock the vehicle to free it from
snow, sand, or mud, depress the accel-
erator pedal slightly and move the shift
lever/select lever back and forth between
“1”/“D” and “R” repeatedly. Do not race the
engine. For the best possible traction,
avoid spinning the wheels when trying to
free the vehicle.
When the road surface is extremely
slippery, you can obtain better traction by
starting the vehicle with the transmission in
– CONTINUED –

(368,1)
8-12 Driving tips/Loading your vehicle
WARNING CAUTION
. When you carry something inside Do not carry spray cans, containers
the vehicle, secure it whenever with flammable or corrosive liquids
you can to prevent it from being or any other dangerous items inside
thrown around inside the vehicle the vehicle.
during sudden stops, sharp turns
or in an accident.
NOTE
. Do not pile heavy loads on the For better fuel economy, do not carry
roof. These loads raise the vehi- unneeded cargo.
cle’s center of gravity and make it
more prone to tip over.
& Vehicle capacity weight
. Secure lengthy items properly to S08AJ01 Vehicle placard
prevent them from shooting for- The load capacity of your vehicle is
ward and causing serious injury determined by weight, not by available
during a sudden stop. cargo space. The maximum load you can
. Never exceed the maximum load carry in your vehicle is shown on the
limit. If you do, some parts on vehicle placard attached to the driver’s
your vehicle can break, or it can side door pillar. It includes the total weight
change the way your vehicle of the driver and all passengers and their
handles. This could result in loss belongings, any optional equipment such
of control and cause personal as a trailer hitch, roof rack or bike carrier,
injury. Also, overloading can etc., and the tongue load of a trailer.
shorten the life of your vehicle.
. Do not place anything on the
extended cargo area cover. Such
items could tumble forward in the
event of a sudden stop or a
collision. This could cause ser-
ious injury.

(369,1)
& GVWR and GAWR (Gross Ve- assembly) plus the vehicle capacity & Roof rail
hicle Weight Rating and weight. S08AJ04
Gross Axle Weight Rating) In addition, the total weight applied to each
S08AJ02
axle (GAW) must never exceed the
GAWR. The front and rear GAWs can be
adjusted by relocating luggage inside the
vehicle.
Even if the total weight of your luggage is
lower than the vehicle capacity weight,
either front or rear GAW may exceed the
GAWR, depending on the distribution of
the luggage.
When possible, the load should be evenly
distributed throughout the vehicle.
1) Crossbar
If you carry heavy loads in the vehicle, you Cargo can be carried on the roof after
Certification label should confirm that GVW and front and securing the crossbars to the roof rails and 8
The certification label attached to the rear GAWs are within the GVWR and installing an appropriate carrying attach-
bottom of driver’s side door pillar shows GAWR by putting your vehicle on a vehicle ment. When installing crossbars and a
GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating) and scale, found at a commercial weighing carrying attachment, follow the manufac-
GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating). station. turer’s instructions. The roof rail system is
designed to carry loads (cargo, crossbars
The GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight) must Do not use replacement tires with a lower
and carrying attachment) of no more than
never exceed the GVWR. GVW is the load range than the originals because they
176 lbs (80 kg). Be sure not to exceed
combined total of weight of the vehicle, may lower the GVWR and GAWR limita-
your vehicle’s GVWR and GAWR.
fuel, driver, all passengers, luggage, any tions. Replacement tires with a higher load
optional equipment and trailer tongue range than the originals do not increase CAUTION
load. Therefore, the GVW changes de- the GVWR and GAWR limitations.
pending on the situation. The GVWR . When using a carrying attach-
equals Curb Weight (actual weight of your ment, make sure that the total
vehicle – including standard equipment, carrying load of the cargo, cross-
fluids, emergency tools and spare tire bars and carrying attachment
– CONTINUED –

(370,1)
8-14 Driving tips/Loading your vehicle
does not exceed 176 lbs (80 kg). & Roof tent roof tent are tightly secured to
S08AJ14
Overloading may cause damage the vehicle. If these conditions
to the vehicle. are not met, the load limit will be
. For cargo carrying purposes, the lower.
roof rails must be used together . The maximum load limit of the
with the crossbars and any ap- roof crossbars must be obtained
propriate carrying attachment from the manufacturer or retailer
that may be needed. The roof of the roof rack. When driving the
rails must never be used alone vehicle, the maximum roof rail
to carry cargo. Otherwise, da- load is 176 lbs (80 kg) or the
mage to the roof or paint, or a crossbar load limit (whichever is
dangerous road hazard due to lower).
loss of cargo could result.
Roof tents may be used under certain
conditions at your own risk.
NOTE WARNING
Remember that the vehicle’s center of ! When driving the vehicle
S08AJ1401
gravity is altered with the weight of the Adding weight to the vehicle’s roof The total weight on the roof rails, including
load on the roof, thus affecting driving can adversely affect handling, brak- the roof crossbars and roof tent, must not
characteristics. ing, and rollover resistance. The exceed the vehicle’s roof rail load of 176
Drive carefully. Avoid rapid starts, hard vehicle must never be driven with a lbs (80 kg), evenly distributed.
cornering and abrupt stops. Crosswind total roof rail load in excess of 176
effects will be increased. lbs (80 kg).
CAUTION
. The roof rail load limit for sta-
tionary vehicles (700 lbs (317 kg))
applies only when the vehicle is
parked and the load is evenly
distributed left/right and front/
rear and the roof crossbars and

(371,1)
! When the vehicle is parked on level The total weight on the roof rails –
ground including the roof crossbars, roof tent,
S08AJ1402
and all occupants and contents in the roof
tent – must not exceed either the vehicle’s
roof rail load limit (700 lbs (317 kg)), evenly
distributed, or the load limit of the roof
crossbars, whichever is lower.
Load limit of the roof rail (A).
B + C + D < 700 lbs (317 kg)
Exceeding this load limit could cause
damage to the vehicle or racking system.
The vehicle must never be driven with
occupants in the roof tent. Before the
vehicle is driven, occupants and cargo
must be removed from the roof tent and
the roof rail load must be restored to within 8
the roof rail load limit of 176 lbs (80 kg).
Refer to the user manual that accompa-
nied the roof tent for important safety
information and instructions on the proper
installation and use of the tent.
A: Roof rails
B: Roof crossbars
C: Roof tent
B + C < 176 lbs (80 kg) A: Roof rails
B: Roof crossbars
C: Roof tent
D: Occupants in the roof tent

(372,1)
8-16 Driving tips/Trailer hitch
Trailer hitch safety hazard. trailer hitch. Consult a SUBARU

S08AK . Although towing regulations for dealer for purchase of a standard
trailer or caravan vehicles vary bumper beam if you do not have
WARNING by state/region, all regulations the original.
. Never exceed the maximum agree that specifications such . Safety performance is decreased
weight specified for the trailer as the maximum gross trailer and there is increased risk of
hitch. Exceeding the maximum weight must not exceed the les- injury to passengers in the case
weight could cause an accident ser of the following: of an accident if the SUBARU
resulting in serious personal in- – Maximum gross trailer weight genuine trailer hitch or a stan-
juries. Permissible trailer weight dard bumper beam is not in-
– Maximum gross tongue stalled. One of them must always
changes depending on the situa- weight
tion. For possible recommenda- be installed on the vehicle.
– GVWR . If a trailer hitch is installed, it is
tions and limitations, refer to
“Trailer towing” �8-18. – GAWR not possible to install the rear
. Trailer brakes are required when . Failure to comply with the proce- towing hook.
the tow load exceeds 1,000 lbs dures set forth will not only
(453 kg). Be sure your trailer has compromise your safety, but will The maximum gross trailer weight and
safety chains and that each chain also negate your insurance cov- maximum gross tongue weight are indi-
will hold the trailer’s maximum erage and/or may violate the state cated in the following table.
gross weight. Towing trailers road and traffic acts and regula- When towing a trailer with brakes
without safety chains could cre- tions.
ate a traffic safety hazard if the . It is recommended to only use the Maximum gross trai- Maximum gross ton-
trailer separates from the hitch Genuine Subaru Ball Mount de- ler weight gue weight
due to coupling damage or hitch veloped for use with this trailer 1,500 lbs (680 kg) 150 lbs (68 kg)
ball damage. hitch available at your Subaru
. Be sure to check the hitch pin and dealership. Use the hitch only as When towing a trailer without brakes
safety pin for positive locking a weight carrying hitch. Do not
use with any type of weight dis- Maximum gross trai- Maximum gross ton-
placement before towing a trailer. ler weight gue weight
If the ball mount separates from tributing hitch.
1,000 lbs (453 kg) 100 lbs (45 kg)
the receiver the trailer could . The standard bumper beam must
become loose and create a traffic be installed after you remove the

(373,1)
Driving tips/Trailer hitch 8-17
When towing a trailer, refer to “Trailer & Connecting a SUBARU genu- 1. Insert the ball mount into the hitch
towing” �8-18. ine trailer hitch receiver tube.
S08AK01 2. Insert the hitch pin into the hole located
on the hitch receiver tube so that the pin
passes through the ball mount.
3. Insert the safety pin through the hole
located on the hitch pin securely.
4. Check the ball mount assembly by
pulling on it to make sure it does not come
off the hitch receiver.
1) Hitch ball installation point

2) Hooks for safety chains
5. Attach a hitch ball. Use only a hitch ball

that is appropriate for the ball mount and
1) Ball mount your trailer. The hitch ball must be securely
2) Hitch pin installed on the ball mount.
3) Safety pin 6. Connect your trailer to the hitch ball.
A) Hitch receiver tube 7. Connect the trailer and the hitch with
– CONTINUED –

(374,1)
8-18 Driving tips/Trailer towing
safety chains that will hold the trailer’s Trailer towing

maximum gross weight.
NOTE
S08AL
Always disconnect the trailer electrical
WARNING wire harness before launching or re- Your vehicle is designed and intended to
trieving a watercraft. be used primarily as a passenger-carrying
Do not connect safety chains to any vehicle. Towing a trailer puts additional
part of the vehicle other than the & If not towing a trailer loads on your vehicle’s engine, drivetrain,
safety chain hooks. S08AK02
. Remove the ball mount from the hitch brakes, tires and suspension and has an
receiver tube. adverse effect on fuel economy.
. Place the dust cap over the four-pin If you do decide to tow a trailer, your safety
connector of the hitch electrical wire and satisfaction depend upon proper use
harness to protect against possible da- of correct equipment and cautious opera-
mage. tion of your vehicle.
. Occasionally lubricate terminals of the Seek the advice of your SUBARU dealer to
four-pin connector using terminal grease. assist you in purchasing a hitch and other
necessary towing equipment appropriate
for your vehicle. Do not use towing equip-
ment other than genuine SUBARU towing
equipment. In addition, be sure to follow
the instructions for proper installation and
use provided by the trailer or caravan’s
manufacturer.
1) Hitch harness connector
SUBARU assumes no responsibility for
8. Connect the hitch wire harness’s black injuries or vehicle damage that result from
four-pin wire connector to the towing trailer towing equipment, or from any
trailer’s wire harness. errors or omissions in the instructions
9. Confirm proper function of the hitch accompanying such equipment or for your
electrical wire harness by individually failure to follow the proper instructions.
activating the brake, stop and turn signal Regularly check that the hitch mounting
lights on the trailer. bolts and nuts are tightened securely.

(375,1)
Driving tips/Trailer towing 8-19
& Warranties and maintenance total weight.

S08AL01
SUBARU warranties do not apply to . Before towing a trailer, check the
vehicle damage or malfunction caused by trailer total weight, GVW, GAWs
trailer towing. If you use your vehicle to tow and tongue load. Make sure the
a trailer, more frequent maintenance will load and its distribution in your
be required due to the additional load. vehicle and trailer are acceptable.
(Refer to “Maintenance schedule under
severe driving conditions” in the “Warranty ! Total trailer weight
and Maintenance Booklet”.) S08AL0201
Under no circumstances should a trailer be

towed with a new vehicle or a vehicle with
any new powertrain component (engine,
transmission, differential, wheel bearings,
etc.) for the first 1,000 miles (1,600 km) of
driving.
& Maximum load limits 8

S08AL02
WARNING
Never exceed the maximum load
limits explained in the following. Total trailer weight
Exceeding the maximum load limits
could cause personal injury and/or The total trailer weight (trailer weight plus
vehicle damage. its cargo load) must never exceed the
maximum total trailer weight in the follow-
ing table.
CAUTION
. Adequate size trailer brakes are
required when the trailer and its
cargo exceed 1,000 lbs (453 kg)
– CONTINUED –

(376,1)
Conditions Maximum total trailer weight

! Gross Vehicle Weight (GVW) and
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating
When towing a trailer without brakes. 1,000 lbs (453 kg) (GVWR)
S08AL0202
When towing a trailer with brakes. 1,500 lbs (680 kg)
When towing a trailer on a long uphill grade
continuously for over 5 miles (8 km) with an 750 lbs (340 kg)
outside temperature of 1048F (408C) or above.
Gross Vehicle Weight

The Gross Vehicle Weight (GVW) must
never exceed the Gross Vehicle Weight
Rating (GVWR).
Gross Vehicle Weight (GVW) is the com-
bined total of the weight of the vehicle,
driver, passengers, luggage, trailer hitch,
trailer tongue load and any other optional
equipment installed on your vehicle.
Therefore, the GVW changes depending
on the situation. Determine the GVW each
time before going on a trip by putting your
vehicle and trailer on a vehicle scale.

(377,1)
! Gross Axle Weight (GAW) and prevent a change in weight distribution

Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) while driving.
S08AL0203
! Tongue load
S08AL0204
Certification label
GVWR of your vehicle that is given by
SUBARU is shown on the certification Gross Axle Weight
label located at the bottom of driver’s side The total weight applied to each axle Tongue load 8
door pillar of your vehicle. (GAW) must never exceed the Gross Axle Ensure that the trailer tongue load is from
Weight Rating (GAWR). The front and rear 8% to 11% of the total trailer weight and
GAWs can be adjusted by relocating does not exceed the maximum value. For
passengers and luggage inside the vehi- details about the trailer tongue load, refer
cle. The front and rear GAWR of your to “Trailer hitch” “Trailer hitch” �8-16.
vehicle that is given by SUBARU are also
shown on the certification label located at
the bottom of driver’s side door pillar.
To check both GVWR and GAWR and to
confirm that the total weight and weight
distribution are within safe driving limits,
you should have your vehicle and trailer
weighed at a commercial weighing station.
Be sure that all cargo is firmly secured to
– CONTINUED –

(378,1)
This may cause the rear wheels to

skid, especially during braking or
when vehicle speed is reduced dur-
ing cornering, resulting in over-
steer, spin out and/or jackknifing.
& Trailer Hitches

S08AL03
WARNING
Never drill the frame or under-body
of your vehicle to install a commer-
1) Jack F: Front cial trailer hitch. If you do, danger-
2) Bathroom scale ous exhaust gas, water or mud may
The tongue load can be adjusted by proper
The tongue load can be weighed with a distribution of the load in the trailer. Never enter the passenger compartment
bathroom scale as shown in the illustration load the trailer with more weight in the through the drilled hole. Exhaust
above. When weighing the tongue load, be back than in the front; approximately 60 gas contains carbon monoxide, a
sure to position the towing coupler at the percent of the trailer load should be in the colorless and odorless gas which is
height at which it would be during actual front and approximately 40 percent in the dangerous, or even lethal, if inhaled.
towing, using a jack as shown. rear. Also, distribute the load as evenly as Also, drilling the frame or under-
possible on both the left and right sides. body of your vehicle could cause
deterioration of strength of your
Be sure that all cargo is firmly secured to vehicle and cause corrosion around
prevent a change in weight distribution the drilled hole.
while driving.
WARNING CAUTION
If the trailer is loaded with more . Do not modify the vehicle ex-
weight in the back of trailer’s axle haust system, brake system, or
than in the front, the load is taken off other systems when installing a
the rear axle of the towing vehicle. hitch or other trailer towing

(379,1)
equipment. & Connecting a trailer system.

S08AL04
. Do not use axle-mounted hitches ! Trailer brakes ! Trailer safety chains
S08AL0402
as they can cause damage to the S08AL0401
axle housing, wheel bearings, WARNING
wheels or tires.
WARNING
. Adequate size trailer brakes are Always use safety chains between
Do not use a trailer hitch other than a required when the trailer and its your vehicle and the trailer. Towing
genuine SUBARU trailer hitch. A genuine cargo exceed 1,000 lbs (453 kg) trailer without safety chains could
SUBARU trailer hitch is available from total weight. create a traffic safety hazard if the
your SUBARU dealer. trailer separates from the hitch due
. Do not directly connect your to coupling damage or hitch ball
trailer’s hydraulic brake system damage.
& When you do not tow a trailer to the hydraulic brake system in
S08AL14
your vehicle. Direct connection In case the trailer hitch connector or hitch
CAUTION would cause the vehicle’s brake ball should break or become discon-
. The housing should be kept dirt performance to deteriorate and nected, the trailer could get loose and
could lead to an accident. create a traffic safety hazard.
and corrosion-free at the points 8
of contact. The surfaces only For safety, always connect the towing
require cleaning with a cloth. If your trailer’s total weight (trailer weight vehicle and trailer with trailer safety
Grease or other lubricants plus its cargo weight) exceeds 1,000 lbs chains. Two chains should be used in
should never be used. (453 kg), the trailer is required to be total, one to the right side and the other to
equipped with its own brake system. the left side trailer tongue. Pass the chains
. If the ball is not installed, the Electric brakes or surge brakes are re-
plastic insert and/or bumper cov- crossing each other under the trailer
commended, and must be installed prop- tongue to prevent the trailer from dropping
er should then be installed for erly. Check that your trailer’s brakes con-
protection and to prevent it from onto the ground in the event the trailer
form with Federal, state/province and/or tongue should disconnect from the hitch
getting dirty. other applicable regulations. Your ball. Allow sufficient slack in the chains
SUBARU’s brake system is not designed taking tight turn situations into account;
When the ball is not used, place the ball to be tapped into the trailer’s hydraulic
cap and store securely. however, be careful not to let them drag on
brake system. Please ask your SUBARU the ground.
dealer and professional trailer supplier for
more information about the trailer’s brake
– CONTINUED –

(380,1)
! Outside mirrors Connection of trailer lights to your vehicle’s In the event your vehicle gets a flat tire
S08AL0403
electrical system requires modifications to when towing a trailer, ask a commercial
the vehicle’s lighting circuit to increase its road service representative or profes-
capacity and accommodate wiring sional to repair the flat tire.
changes. To ensure the trailer lights are
connected properly, please consult your If you carry a regular size spare tire in your
SUBARU dealer. Check for proper opera- vehicle or trailer as a precaution against
tion of the turn signals and the brake lights getting a flat tire, be sure that the spare tire
each time you connect a trailer to your is firmly secured.
vehicle.
& Trailer towing tips
! Tires S08AL05
S08AL0405
CAUTION
WARNING
. For models equipped with the
After hitching a trailer to your vehicle, Never tow a trailer when the tempor- BSD (Blind Spot Detection) and
check that the standard outside mirrors ary spare tire is used. The temporary RCTA (Rear Cross Traffic Alert)
provide a good rearward field of view spare tire is not designed to sustain driving support systems, when
without significant blind spots. If significant the towing load. Use of the tempor- towing a trailer, press the BSD/
blind spots occur with the vehicle’s stan- ary spare tire when towing can result RCTA OFF switch to deactivate
dard outside mirrors, use towing mirrors in failure of the spare tire and/or less the system. The system may not
that conform with Federal, state/province stability of the vehicle. operate properly due to the
and/or other applicable regulations. blocked radar waves. For details
Make sure that all the tires on your vehicle about the BSD/RCTA OFF switch,
! Trailer lights are properly inflated. Refer to “Tires” �12-
S08AL0404 refer to “BSD/RCTA OFF switch”
8. �7-69.
CAUTION
Trailer tire condition, size, load rating and . For models equipped with the
Direct splicing or other improper proper inflation pressure should be in Reverse Automatic Braking
connection of trailer lights may accordance with the trailer manufacturer’s (RAB) system, consult your
damage your vehicle’s electrical specifications. Also check federal, state, SUBARU dealer for additional
system and cause a malfunction of province and/or other applicable regula- information about towing a trai-
your vehicle’s lighting system. tions. ler.

(381,1)
. Never exceed 45 mph (72 km/h) dures set forth will not only compromise safely in position.
when towing a trailer in hilly your safety, but will also negate your – The outside mirrors provide a good
country on hot days. insurance coverage and/or may violate rearward field of view without a sig-
. When towing a trailer, steering, the state road and traffic acts and regula- nificant blind spot.
stability, stopping distance and tions. . Sufficient time should be taken to learn
braking performance will be dif- . Check that the vehicle and vehicle-to- the “feel” of the vehicle/trailer combination
ferent when compared to normal hitch mounting are in good condition. If any before starting out on a trip. In an area free
operation. For safety’s sake, you problems are apparent, do not tow the of traffic, practice turning, stopping and
should employ extra caution trailer. backing up.
when towing a trailer and you . Check that the vehicle rests horizon- ! Driving with a trailer
should never drive at excessive tally with the trailer attached. If the vehicle S08AL0502
. You should allow for considerably more
speeds. You should also keep the is tipped sharply up at the front and down
stopping distance when towing a trailer.
following tips in mind: at the rear, check the total trailer weight,
Avoid sudden braking because it may
. The braking power of the parking GVW, GAWs and tongue load again, then
result in skidding or jackknifing and loss
brake may not be sufficient when confirm that the load and its distribution are
of control.
stronger braking power is acceptable.
. Avoid abrupt starts and sudden accel-
needed (e.g., when parking on a . Check that the tire rating and pressures
erations. If your vehicle has a manual 8
steep slope while towing a trai- are correct.
transmission, always start out in first gear
ler). . Check that the vehicle and trailer are and release the clutch at moderate engine
connected properly. Confirm that: revolution.
If your vehicle is equipped with SI-DRIVE, – The trailer tongue is connected . Avoid uneven steering, sharp turns and
and when towing a trailer on an uphill properly to the hitch ball. rapid lane changes.
slope, do not drive in the Intelligent (I) – The trailer lights connector is con-
mode. It is recommend that you drive in the . Slow down before turning. Make a
nected properly and trailer’s brake
Sport (S) mode. However, it is possible to larger than normal turning radius because
lights illuminate when the vehicle’s
tow a trailer in any mode of the SI-DRIVE the trailer wheels will be closer than the
brake pedal is pressed, and that the
on a downhill slope. vehicle wheels to the inside of the turn. In a
trailer’s turn signal lights flash when
tight turn, the trailer could hit your vehicle.
! Before starting out on a trip the vehicle’s turn signal lever is oper-
S08AL0501 ated. . Crosswinds will adversely affect the
. Check the towing regulations for trailer handling of your vehicle and trailer, caus-
– The safety chains are connected
or caravan vehicles that vary by state/ ing sway. Crosswinds can be due to
properly.
region. Failure to comply with the proce- weather conditions or the passing of large
– All cargo in the trailer is secured
– CONTINUED –

(382,1)
trucks or buses. If swaying occurs, firmly 3. Turn the wheel in the opposite direc-
grip the steering wheel and promptly begin tion.
decelerating your vehicle at a gradual 4. Steer the vehicle around to be in line
pace. with the trailer, then straighten the steering
. When passing other vehicles, consider- again.
able distance is required because of the
added weight and length caused by . If the ABS warning light illuminates
attaching the trailer to your vehicle. while the vehicle is in motion, stop towing
the trailer and have repairs performed
. Reversing the vehicle with a trailer can
immediately by your nearest SUBARU
be difficult and requires experience. Never
dealer.
accelerate or steer rapidly, and grip the
bottom of the steering wheel with one ! Driving on grades
S08AL0503
hand. . Before going down a steep hill, slow
down and shift into lower gear (if neces-
sary, use 1st gear) in order to utilize the
engine braking effect and prevent over-
heating of your vehicle’s brakes. Do not
make sudden downshifts.
. When driving uphill in hot weather, the
air conditioner may turn off automatically
to protect the engine from overheating.
. When driving uphill in hot weather, pay
attention to the following indicators be-
cause the engine and transmission are
relatively prone to overheating.
: Coolant temperature high warning light
To reverse around a corner, perform the
following procedure. : AT OIL TEMP warning light
1. Reverse slowly and steer in the oppo- (CVT models)
site direction to the way you want to turn. If the coolant temperature high warning
2. Once the trailer begins to swing light and/or the AT OIL TEMP warning light
around, straighten the steering wheel. illuminates, immediately turn off the air

(383,1)
conditioner and stop the vehicle in the blocks absorb the load.
nearest safe location. For further instruc- 4. Apply the regular brakes and then
tions and additional information, refer to apply the parking brake; slowly release
the following sections. the regular brakes.
– “If you park your vehicle in case of 5. Shift into 1st or reverse gear (MT
an emergency” �9-2 models) or “P” position (CVT models)
– “Engine overheating” �9-12 and shut off the engine.
– “Coolant temperature low indicator
light/Coolant temperature high warn-
ing light” �3-16
– “AT OIL TEMP warning light (CVT
models)” �3-18
. For CVT models, avoid using the
accelerator pedal to stay stationary on an
uphill slope instead of using the parking
brake or foot brake. That may cause the 8
transmission fluid to overheat.
! Parking on a grade
S08AL0504
Always block the wheels under both
vehicle and trailer when parking. Apply
the parking brake firmly. You should not
park on a hill or slope. If parking on a hill or
slope cannot be avoided, you should take
the following steps:
1. Apply the brakes and hold the pedal
down.
2. Have someone place wheel blocks
under both the vehicle and trailer wheels.
3. When the wheel blocks are in place,
release the regular brakes slowly until the

(384,1)
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————

(385,1)
In case of emergency
If you park your vehicle in case of Towing ................................................................... 9-13
S09
an emergency....................................................... 9-2 Towing hooks and tie-down hooks/holes............... 9-13
Temporary spare tire .............................................. 9-2 Using a flat-bed truck ........................................... 9-16
Maintenance tools................................................... 9-3 Towing with all wheels on the ground ................... 9-16
Tool locations ........................................................ 9-3 Access key fob – if access key fob does not
Using the jack........................................................ 9-4 operate properly ................................................ 9-17
Flat tires................................................................... 9-5 Locking and unlocking ......................................... 9-18
Changing a flat tire ................................................ 9-5 Switching power status ........................................ 9-18
Tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) Starting engine ..................................................... 9-18
(U.S.-spec. models) .............................................. 9-8 Rear gate – if the rear gate cannot be
Jump starting ........................................................ 9-10 opened................................................................ 9-19
How to jump start ................................................. 9-10 Moonroof (if equipped) – if the moonroof
Engine overheating............................................... 9-12 does not close ................................................... 9-20
If steam is coming from the engine If your vehicle is involved in an accident........... 9-20
compartment ...................................................... 9-12 Automatic door locking/unlocking operation
If no steam is coming from the engine when involved in an accident............................. 9-20
compartment ...................................................... 9-12
9

(386,1)
9-2 In case of emergency/If you park your vehicle in case of an emergency
If you park your vehicle in NOTE Temporary spare tire

case of an emergency When the hazard warning flasher is on, S09AB
S09AA the turn signals do not work. WARNING

. Never tow a trailer when the
temporary spare tire is used.
The temporary spare tire is not
designed to sustain the towing
load. Use of the temporary spare
tire when towing can result in
failure of the spare tire and/or
less stability of the vehicle and
may lead to an accident.
. When a spare tire is mounted or a
wheel rim is replaced without the
The hazard warning flasher should be original pressure sensor/trans-
used in day or night to warn other drivers mitter being transferred, the low
when you have to park your vehicle under tire pressure warning light will
emergency conditions. illuminate steadily after blinking
for approximately one minute.
Avoid stopping on the road. It is best to This indicates the tire pressure
safely pull off the road if a problem occurs. monitoring system (TPMS) is un-
The hazard warning flasher can be acti- able to monitor all four road
vated regardless of the ignition switch wheels. Contact your SUBARU
position. dealer as soon as possible for
Turn on the hazard warning by pushing the tire and sensor replacement and/
hazard warning flasher switch. Turn it off or system resetting.
by pushing the switch again.

(387,1)
In case of emergency/Maintenance tools 9-3
CAUTION . Do not drive over obstacles. This tire Maintenance tools

has a smaller diameter, so road clearance S09AH
Never use any temporary spare tire is reduced.
Your vehicle is equipped with the following
other than the original. Using other maintenance tools.
sizes may result in severe mechan-
ical damage to the drive train of your . Jack
vehicle. . Jack handle
. Screwdriver
The temporary spare tire is smaller and . Towing hook (eye bolt)
lighter than a conventional tire and is
. Wheel nut wrench
designed for emergency use only. Re-
move the temporary spare tire and re-
install the conventional tire as soon as & Tool locations
possible because the spare tire is de- S09AH15
signed only for temporary use.

Check the inflation pressure of the tem- 1) Tread wear indicator bar
porary spare tire periodically to keep the 2) Indicator location mark
tire ready for use. For the correct pressure,
refer to “Temporary spare tires” �12-8. . When the wear indicator appears on 9
the tread, replace the tire.
When using the temporary spare tire, note . The temporary spare tire must be used
the following. only on a rear wheel. If a front wheel tire
. Drive with caution when the temporary gets punctured, replace the wheel with a
spare tire is installed. Avoid hard accel- rear wheel and install the temporary spare
eration and braking, or fast cornering, as tire in place of the removed rear wheel.
control of the vehicle may be lost.
. Do not exceed 50 mph (80 km/h). 1) Jack handle
. Do not put a tire chain on the temporary
spare tire. Because of the smaller tire size,
a tire chain will not fit properly.
. Do not use two or more temporary
spare tires at the same time.
– CONTINUED –

(388,1)
9-4 In case of emergency/Maintenance tools
A jack handle is stored under the cargo 4. Put wheel blocks at the front and rear
area. Other tools are stored in the tool of the tire diagonally opposite the tire that
bucket that is located in the recess of the you are going to replace.
spare tire wheel. 5. Take out the jack and jack handle.
Store the tools in the tool bucket as
illustrated in order that all tools are ready
for use at any time.
& Using the jack

S09AH14
1. Park on a hard, level surface, when-
ever possible, then stop the engine.
2. Apply the parking brake securely and
1) Tool bucket shift the shift lever in reverse (MT models)
2) Spare tire or the select lever to the “P” (Park) position
(CVT models).
3. Turn on the hazard warning flasher and
unload all occupants and luggage from the Jack-up points
vehicle. 6. Place the jack under the side sill at the
front or rear jack-up point closest to the tire
that you are going to replace.
1) Wheel nut wrench

2) Screwdriver
3) Jack
4) Towing hook (eye bolt)

(389,1)
In case of emergency/Flat tires 9-5
Flat tires
S09AC
If you have a flat tire while driving, never

brake suddenly; keep driving straight
ahead while gradually reducing speed.
Then slowly pull off the road to a safe
place.
& Changing a flat tire

S09AC01
WARNING
. Use only the jack and the jack
Turn the jackscrew by hand until the jack 7. Insert the jack handle into the jack- handle provided with your vehi-
head engages firmly into the jack-up point. screw, and turn the handle until the tire cle. The jack supplied with the
clears the ground. Do not raise the vehicle vehicle is designed only for chan-
higher than necessary. ging a tire. Never get under the
vehicle while supporting the ve-
hicle with this jack. 9
. Do not jack up the vehicle on an
incline or a loose road surface.
The jack can come out of the
jacking point or sink into the
ground and this can result in
. Before jacking up the vehicle, be
sure that there are no occupants
or cargo on board.
. Do not jack up the vehicle with an
object on or underneath the jack.
The jack can be unstable and this
– CONTINUED –

(390,1)
9-6 In case of emergency/Flat tires
can result in a severe accident. The tools and the spare tire are stored
NOTE under the cargo area. Refer to “Mainte-
. Always turn off the engine before Contact a SUBARU dealer when jacking
raising the flat tire off the ground nance tools” �9-3.
up the vehicle using a garage jack.
using the jack. Never swing or NOTE
push the vehicle supported with 1. Park on a hard, level surface, when-
the jack. The jack can come out of ever possible, then stop the engine. Make sure that the jack is well lubri-
the jacking point due to a jolt and 2. Apply the parking brake securely and cated before using it.
this can result in serious injury or shift the shift lever in reverse (MT models)
death. or the select lever to the “P” (Park) position
. All passengers must exit the (CVT models).
vehicle before you raise it with 3. Turn on the hazard warning flasher and
the jack. Raising the vehicle with unload all occupants and luggage from the
someone inside of it could result vehicle.
in serious injury or death.
. Do not start the vehicle while it is
supported by the jack. Doing so
could result in serious injury or
death.
CAUTION 6. Take out the tool bucket and turn the

attaching bolt counterclockwise, then take
Do not hit and bend the disc rotor the spare tire out.
backing plate when removing and
installing the tire. A bent backing NOTE
plate may scrape against the disc If the spare tire provided in your vehicle
rotor and cause noise while the 4. Put wheel blocks at the front and rear is a temporary spare tire, carefully read
vehicle is in motion. of the tire diagonally opposite the flat tire. “Temporary spare tire” �9-2 and
strictly follow the instructions.
5. Take out the jack, jack handle and
wheel nut wrench.

(391,1)
10. Remove the wheel nuts and the flat

tire.
7. Loosen the wheel nuts using the wheel Turn the jackscrew by hand until the jack
nut wrench but do not remove the nuts. head engages firmly into the jack-up point.
Jack-up points 9. Insert the jack handle into the jack- 11. Before putting the spare tire on, clean
8. Place the jack under the side sill at the screw, and turn the handle until the tire the mounting surface of the wheel and hub
front or rear jack-up point closest to the flat clears the ground. Do not raise the vehicle with a cloth.
tire. higher than necessary.
– CONTINUED –

(392,1)
9-8 In case of emergency/Flat tires
12. Put on the spare tire. Replace the For the wheel nut tightening torque, refer 16. Store the jack, jack handle and wheel
wheel nuts. Tighten them by hand. to “Tires” �12-8. Never use your foot on nut wrench in their storage locations.
the wheel nut wrench or a pipe extension
WARNING on the wrench because you may exceed
the specified torque. Have the wheel nut WARNING
Do not use oil or grease on the wheel torque checked at the nearest automotive
studs or nuts when the spare tire is Never place a tire or tire changing
service facility. tools in the passenger compartment
installed. This could cause the nuts
to become loose and lead to an after changing wheels. In a sudden
accident. stop or collision, loose equipment
could strike occupants and cause
injury. Store the tire and all tools in
13. Turn the jack handle counterclockwise
the proper place.
to lower the vehicle.
& Tire pressure monitoring

system (TPMS) (U.S.-spec.
models)
S09AC02
1) Support holder
15. Store the flat tire in the spare tire

compartment. Install with the support
holder facing upward and secure the flat
tire by firmly tightening the attaching bolt.
14. Use the wheel nut wrench to securely NOTE
tighten the wheel nuts to the specified
If you cannot fix the flat tire firmly, try
torque, following the tightening order in the
turning the support holder upside
illustration.
down.
The tire pressure monitoring system pro-
vides the driver with the warning message

(393,1)
indicated by sending a signal from a pressure, a tire may have signifi- cleaned off.
sensor that is installed in each wheel when cant damage and a fast leak that If the light illuminates steadily
tire pressure is severely low. causes the tire to lose air rapidly. after blinking for approximately
The tire pressure monitoring system will If you have a flat tire, replace it one minute, promptly contact a
activate only when the vehicle is driven. with a spare tire as soon as SUBARU dealer to have the sys-
Also, this system may not react immedi- possible. tem inspected.
ately to a sudden drop in tire pressure (for . When a spare tire is mounted or a
example, a blow-out caused running over wheel rim is replaced without the
a sharp object). original pressure sensor/trans-
mitter being transferred, the low
WARNING tire pressure warning light will
. If the low tire pressure warning illuminate steadily after blinking
light illuminates while driving, for approximately one minute.
never brake suddenly. Instead, This indicates the TPMS is unable
perform the following procedure. to monitor all four road wheels.
Contact your SUBARU dealer as
(1) Keep driving straight ahead soon as possible for tire and
while gradually reducing sensor replacement and/or sys-
speed. tem resetting.
(2) Slowly pull off the road to a
9
. When a tire is repaired with liquid
safe place. Otherwise an acci- sealant, the tire pressure warning
dent involving serious vehicle valve and transmitter may not
damage and serious personal operate properly. If a liquid sea-
injury could occur. lant is used, contact your nearest
(3) Check the pressure for all four SUBARU dealer or other qualified
tires and adjust the pressure service shop as soon as possi-
to the COLD tire pressure ble. Make sure to replace the tire
shown on the vehicle placard pressure warning valve and
on the door pillar on the transmitter when replacing the
driver’s side. tire. You may reuse the wheel if
If this light still illuminates while there is no damage to it and if the
driving after adjusting the tire sealant residue is properly

(394,1)
9-10 In case of emergency/Jump starting
Jump starting protectors, and remove metal & How to jump start
S09AD01
objects such as rings, bands or
S09AD
1. Make sure the booster battery is 12
other metal jewelry.
WARNING volts and the negative terminal is
. Be sure the jumper cables and grounded.
. Battery fluid is SULFURIC ACID. clamps on them do not have 2. If the booster battery is in another
Do not let it come in contact with loose or missing insulation. vehicle, do not let the two vehicles touch.
the eyes, skin, clothing or the Do not jump start unless cables 3. Turn off all unnecessary lights and
vehicle. in suitable condition are avail- accessories.
If battery fluid gets on you, thor- able. 4. Connect the jumper cables exactly in
oughly flush the exposed area . A running engine can be danger- the sequence illustrated.
with water immediately. Get med- ous. Keep your fingers, hands,
ical help if the fluid has entered clothing, hair and tools away
your eyes. from the cooling fan, belts and
If battery fluid is accidentally any other moving engine parts.
swallowed, immediately drink a Removing rings, watches and
large amount of milk or water, ties is advisable.
and obtain immediate medical . Jump starting is dangerous if it
help. done incorrectly. If you are un-
Keep everyone including chil- sure about the proper procedure
dren away from the battery. for jump starting, consult a com-
petent mechanic.
. The gas generated by a battery
explodes if a flame or spark is When your vehicle does not start due to a
brought near it. Do not smoke or run down (discharged) battery, the vehicle
light a match while jump starting. may be jump started by connecting your
. Never attempt jump starting if the battery to another battery (called the
discharged battery is frozen. It booster battery) with jumper cables.
could cause the battery to burst
or explode.
. Whenever working on or around a
battery, always wear suitable eye

(395,1)
In case of emergency/Jump starting 9-11
(1) Connect one jumper cable to the

positive (+) terminal on the discharged
battery.
(2) Connect the other end of the
jumper cable to the positive (+) term-
inal of the booster battery.
(3) Connect one end of the other cable
to the negative (−) terminal of the
booster battery.
(4) Connect the other end of the cable
to the strut mounting nut of the vehicle
with the discharged battery.
Make sure that the cables are not near any
moving parts and that the cable clamps are
not in contact with any other metal.
5. Start the engine of the vehicle with the
booster battery and run it at moderate
speed. Then start the engine of the vehicle
that has the discharged battery. 9
6. When finished, carefully disconnect
the cables in exactly the reverse order.
A) Booster battery
B) Strut mounting nut

(396,1)
9-12 In case of emergency/Engine overheating
Engine overheating & If no steam is coming from the If you remove the radiator cap from a hot
S09AE engine compartment radiator, first wrap a thick cloth around the
S09AE02 radiator cap, then turn the cap counter-
WARNING 1. Keep the engine running at idling clockwise slowly without pressing down
speed. until it stops. Release the pressure from
Never remove the radiator cap until 2. Open the engine hood to ventilate the the radiator. After the pressure has been
the engine has been shut off and has engine compartment. Refer to “Engine fully released, remove the cap by pressing
fully cooled down. When the engine hood” �11-5. down and turning it.
is hot, the coolant is under pressure. Confirm that the cooling fan is turning. If
Removing the cap while the engine the fan is not turning, immediately turn off
is still hot could release a spray of the engine and contact an authorized
boiling hot coolant, which could SUBARU dealer for repair.
burn you very seriously. 3. After the coolant temperature high
warning light that has blinked or illumi-
nated in RED turns off, turn off the engine.
CAUTION For details about the warning light, refer to
“Coolant temperature low indicator light/
If the engine overheats, the engine Coolant temperature high warning light”
speed or the vehicle speed may be �3-16.
reduced. Stop the vehicle in a safe 4. After the engine has fully cooled down,
place immediately. check the coolant level in the reserve tank.
If the coolant level is below the “LOW”
mark, add coolant up to the “FULL” mark.
& If steam is coming from the
engine compartment NOTE
S09AE01
. Turn the ignition switch to the “LOCK”/ For details about how to check the
“OFF” position and get everyone away coolant level or how to add coolant,
from the vehicle until it cools down. refer to “Engine coolant” �11-11.
. Contact an authorized SUBARU deal- 5. If there is no coolant in the reserve
er. tank, add coolant to the reserve tank. Then
remove the radiator cap and fill the radiator
with coolant.

(397,1)
In case of emergency/Towing 9-13
Towing & Towing hooks and tie-down with vinyl tape or cloth so that it will not
S09AF hooks/holes scratch the bumper. Insert the flat-head
S09AF01 screwdriver into the cutout of the cover and
If towing is necessary, it is best done by The towing hook should be used only in an pry open the cover.
your SUBARU dealer or a commercial emergency.
towing service. Observe the following
procedures for safety. CAUTION
Use only the specified towing hooks
and tie-down hooks/holes. Never
use suspension parts or other parts
of the body for towing or tie-down
purposes.
! Front towing hook

S09AF0112
1. Take the towing hook and screwdriver
out of the tool bucket. Take the jack handle
out of the cargo area. 3. Screw the towing hook into the thread
hole until its thread can no longer be seen. 9
WARNING
Never tow AWD models with the
front wheels raised off the ground
while the rear wheels are on the
ground, or with the rear wheels
raised off the ground while the front
wheels are on the ground. This will
cause the vehicle to spin away due
to the operation or deterioration of
the center differential.
2. Cover the tip of a flat-head screwdriver
– CONTINUED –

(398,1)
9-14 In case of emergency/Towing
CAUTION
To prevent deformation to the bum-
per and the towing hook, do not
apply an excessive load to the tow-
ing hook.
! Rear towing hook

S09AF0105
1. Take the towing hook and screwdriver
out of the tool bucket. Take the jack handle
out of the cargo area.
4. Tighten the towing hook securely using 3. Screw the towing hook into the thread
the jack handle. hole until its thread can no longer be seen.
After towing, remove the towing hook from
the vehicle and stow it in the tool bucket.
Fit the towing hook cover on the bumper.
WARNING
. Do not use the towing hook
except when towing your vehicle.
. Be sure to remove the towing
hook after towing. Leaving the 2. Cover the tip of a flat-head screwdriver
towing hook mounted on the with vinyl tape or cloth so that it will not
vehicle could interfere with prop- scratch the bumper. Pry off the cover on
er operation of the SRS airbag the rear bumper using a screwdriver, and
system in a frontal collision. 4. Tighten the towing hook securely using
you will find a threaded hole for attaching the jack handle.
the towing hook.

(399,1)
In case of emergency/Towing 9-15
After towing, remove the towing hook from ! Front tie-down hooks ! Rear tie-down holes
the vehicle and stow it in the tool bucket. S09AF0106 S09AF0107
Fit the towing hook cover on the bumper.
WARNING
. Do not use the towing hook
except when towing your vehicle.
. Be sure to remove the towing
hook after towing. Leaving the
towing hook mounted on the
vehicle could interfere with prop-
er operation of the fuel pump
shut off function when the vehi-
cle is struck from behind. The front tie-down hooks are located
between each of the front tires and the
front bumper.
CAUTION
To prevent deformation to the bum- 9
per and the towing hook, do not
apply an excessive load to the tow-
ing hook.
1) Rear tie-down hole

The rear tie-down holes are located near
each of the jack-up reinforcements.
There is a plug in each rear tie-down hole.
To use the rear tie-down holes, remove the
– CONTINUED –

(400,1)
9-16 In case of emergency/Towing
plugs. After using the rear tie-down holes, 2. Pull up the parking brake lever firmly. & Towing with all wheels on the
return the plugs to their original places. 3. Secure the vehicle onto the carrier ground
properly with safety chains. Each safety S09AF03
WARNING chain should be equally tightened and care

must be taken not to pull the chains so
Use the rear tie-down holes only for
tightly that the suspension bottoms out.
downward anchoring. If they are
used to anchor the vehicle in any
other direction, cables may slip out CAUTION
of the holes, possibly causing a
dangerous situation. . If your vehicle has a bumper
under guard (optional), be careful
not to scrape it when placing the
& Using a flat-bed truck vehicle on the carrier and when
S09AF02
removing the vehicle from the
carrier.
. For CVT models, transport by flat- 1. Release the parking brake and put the
bed truck may cause the head- transmission in the neutral position (CVT
lights to become misaligned. In and MT).
such a case, have the headlight 2. The ignition switch should be in the
alignment checked by a SUBARU “ON” position while the vehicle is being
dealer after transporting the ve- towed.
hicle by flat-bed truck. 3. Take up slack in the towline slowly to
prevent damage to the vehicle.
WARNING
This is the best way to transport your
vehicle. Use the following procedures to . Never turn the ignition switch to
ensure safe transportation. the “LOCK”/“OFF” position while
1. Shift the select lever into the “P” the vehicle is being towed be-
position for CVT models. Shift the shift cause the steering wheel and the
lever into the “1st” position for MT models. direction of the wheels will be

(401,1)
In case of emergency/Access key fob – if access key fob does not operate properly 9-17
locked. will not work while towing. Doing Access key fob – if access key
. Remember that the brake booster so could overheat the brake. fob does not operate properly
and power steering do not func- . Drive carefully and do not make S09AP
tion when the engine is not run- an impact on the towing rope by
ning. Because the engine is suddenly starting. CAUTION
turned off, it will take greater . Use a specific towing rope for
effort to operate the brake pedal towing. If wire ropes and metal Keep metallic objects, magnetic
and steering wheel. chains are needed to be used for sources and signal transmitters
towing, wrap the contact portion away from the area between the
of the bumper with cloth to pro- access key fob and the push-button
CAUTION tect it from damage. ignition switch. They may interfere
with the communication between
. If transmission failure occurs, the access key fob and the push-
transport your vehicle on a flat- button ignition switch.
bed truck.
. Sometime damaged vehicles can- The following functions may be inoperable
not be towed because of their because of strong radio signals in the
damaged condition. In that case, surrounding area or a low battery condition
use a flat-bed truck for transpor- of the access key fob.
tation.
9
. Locking/unlocking doors (including the
. For CVT models, the traveling rear gate)
speed must be limited to less . Switching power status
than 20 mph (32 km/h) and the . Starting engine
traveling distance to less than 31
miles (50 km). For greater speeds In such cases, perform the following
and distances, transport your procedure. When the battery of the access
vehicle on a flat-bed truck. key fob is discharged, replace it with a new
. Use a flat-bed truck if there are one. Refer to “Replacing battery of access
long distance downgrades or key fob” �11-46.
steep slopes. However, do not
apply the brake pedal for a long
time because the engine braking
– CONTINUED –

(402,1)
9-18 In case of emergency/Access key fob – if access key fob does not operate properly
& Locking and unlocking & Switching power status . When the keyless access with push-
S09AP01 S09AP02 button start system is deactivated:
1. Apply the parking brake. “ACC”
2. Shift the shift lever to neutral (MT . Under other conditions: “ON”
models) or the select lever to the “P”
5. When the keyless access with push-
(Park) position (CVT models).
button start system is deactivated, press
3. Depress the clutch pedal (MT models) the push-button ignition switch with the
or the brake pedal (CVT models). clutch pedal (MT models) or the brake
pedal (CVT models) released. The status
of the push-button ignition switch then
changes to “ON”.
NOTE
If the power does not switch even
1) Release button
though the above procedure was fol-
2) Emergency key
lowed precisely, contact your SUBARU
While pressing the release button of the dealer.
access key fob, take out the emergency
key. & Starting engine
S09AP03
Lock or unlock the driver’s door with the 1. Apply the parking brake.
emergency key in the procedure described 4. Hold the access key fob with the 2. Shift the shift lever to neutral (MT
in “Locking and unlocking from the out- buttons facing you, and touch the push- models) or the select lever to the “P”
side” �2-20. button ignition switch with it. (Park) position (CVT models).
NOTE When the communication between the 3. Depress the brake pedal.
access key fob and the vehicle is com- 4. Depress the clutch pedal (MT models).
After locking or unlocking, be sure to
pleted, a chime (ding) will sound. At the
attach the emergency key back to the
same time, the status of the push-button
access key fob.
ignition switch changes to either of the
following.

(403,1)
In case of emergency/Rear gate – if the rear gate cannot be opened 9-19
Rear gate – if the rear gate CAUTION

cannot be opened
S09AG
Never operate the rear gate open
lever with fingers because doing so
In the event that you cannot open the rear may cause an injury. Always use a
gate by operating the rear gate opener flat-head screwdriver or a similar
button, you can open it from inside the tool.
cargo area.
5. Hold the access key fob with the

buttons facing you, and touch the push-
button ignition switch with it.
When the communication between the
access key fob and the vehicle is com-
pleted, a chime (ding) will sound. At the 9
same time, the push-button ignition switch
turns to the “ACC” or “ON” position.
1. Remove the access cover at the 3. To open the rear gate, turn the lever to
6. After the push-button ignition switch
bottom-center of the rear gate trim using the right position using a flat-head screw-
turns to the “ACC” or “ON” position, while
a flat-head screwdriver wrapped with vinyl driver or a similar tool.
depressing the brake pedal (all models)
tape or a cloth.
and the clutch pedal (MT models), press
the push-button ignition switch. 2. Locate the rear gate open lever behind
the rear gate trim panel.
NOTE
If the engine does not start even though
the above procedure was followed
precisely, contact your SUBARU dealer.

(404,1)
9-20 In case of emergency/Moonroof – if the moonroof does not close
Moonroof (if equipped) – if the If your vehicle is involved in Models without “keyless access with
moonroof does not close an accident
S09AJ S09AR
1. Turn the ignition switch to the “LOCK”
or “ACC” position.
If the moonroof does not close, we
recommend that you have the system
CAUTION 2. Restart the engine.
checked by a SUBARU dealer.
If your vehicle is involved in an Models with “keyless access with
accident, be sure to inspect the push-button start system”:
ground under the vehicle before 1. Turn the push-button ignition switch to
restarting the engine. If you find that the “ACC” or “OFF” position.
fuel has leaked on the ground, do 2. Restart the engine.
not try to restart the engine. The fuel
system has been damaged and is in
need of repair. Immediately contact & Automatic door locking/un-
the nearest automotive service facil- locking operation when in-
ity. We recommend that you consult volved in an accident
your SUBARU dealer. S09AR03
When the automatic door locking/unlock-
Your vehicle has a fuel pump shut off ing function is ON, all the doors will be
system. When the vehicle sustains an locked automatically while driving. For
impact in an accident, etc., the fuel pump further details, refer to “Automatic door
shut off system stops supplying the fuel in locking/unlocking” �2-22.
order to minimize fuel leakage. However, When the vehicle sustains a strong impact
depending on the impact conditions at the which may trigger the airbags to deploy,
time of collision, the fuel pump shut-off the door locks may be unlocked automa-
system may not operate. tically to enable emergency escape. Gen-
Perform the following procedures to restart erally, an impact sustained from a rear end
the engine after the system is activated. collision does not trigger the airbags to
deploy. However if the impact is strong
enough to deploy the airbags, it can also
trigger the unlocking function.
Under such circumstance, the automatic

(405,1)
In case of emergency/If your vehicle is involved in an accident 9-21
door locking/unlocking function will be . The doors unlock automatically

suspended and the doors will remain while driving.
unlocked. . With all doors shut, the doors
Confirm the safety of the surroundings first unlock when pressing the lock
and carry out the following to retrieve the side of the power door locking
automatic door locking/unlocking function. switch.
Models without “keyless access with . The automatic door locking/un-
push-button start system”: locking function does not oper-
1. Turn the ignition switch to the “LOCK” ate.
position.
position.
Models with “keyless access with
1. Turn the push-button ignition switch to
the “OFF” position.
2. Turn the push-button ignition switch to
the “ON” position. 9
NOTE
Depending on the severity of the im-
pact, the emergency unlocking may not
function.
CAUTION
If the following occur, there may be a
malfunction in the system.
Have the system inspected by a
SUBARU dealer.

(406,1)
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————

(407,1)
Appearance care
Exterior care.......................................................... 10-2 Cleaning the interior............................................. 10-5
S10
Washing ............................................................... 10-2 Seat fabric ............................................................ 10-5
Waxing and polishing............................................ 10-3 Leather seat materials .......................................... 10-6
Cleaning alloy wheels ........................................... 10-4 Synthetic leather upholstery ................................. 10-6
Corrosion protection ............................................ 10-4 Seatbelt ................................................................ 10-6
Most common causes of corrosion ....................... 10-4 Climate control panel, audio panel, instrument
To help prevent corrosion ..................................... 10-5 panel, console panel, and switches.................... 10-6
Monitor................................................................. 10-7
10

(408,1)
10-2 Appearance care/Exterior care
Exterior care the cover surface may be da- to scratch the camera lens. Do not use a
S10AA maged. washing brush directly on the camera
& Washing . Since your vehicle is equipped lens. The image quality of the rear view
S10AA01
with a rear wiper, automatic car- camera may deteriorate.
CAUTION wash brushes could become The best way to preserve your vehicle’s
tangled around it, damaging the beauty is frequent washing. Wash the
. When washing the vehicle, the wiper arm and other compo- vehicle at least once a month to avoid
brakes may get wet. As a result, nents. Ask the automatic car- contamination by road grime.
the brake stopping distance will wash operator not to let the
be longer. To dry the brakes, drive brushes touch the wiper arm or Wash dirt off with a wet sponge and plenty
the vehicle at a safe speed while to fix the wiper arm on the rear of lukewarm or cold water. Do not wash the
lightly depressing the brake ped- window glass with adhesive tape vehicle with hot water and in direct sun-
al to heat up the brakes. before operating the machine. light.
. Do not wash the engine compart- . For models with a rod-type roof Salt, chemicals, insects, tar, soot, tree sap,
ment and area adjacent to it. If antenna, remove the antenna rod and bird droppings should be washed off
water enters the engine air intake before washing your car at a car by using a light detergent, as required. If
or electrical parts, it will cause wash. If the antenna rod remains you use a light detergent, make certain
engine trouble or a malfunction attached, it may scratch the roof. that it is a neutral detergent. Do not use
of electrical equipment. When reinstalling the removed strong soap or chemical detergents. All
. When washing inner fenders, un- antenna rod, be sure to fully cleaning agents should be promptly
derbody, bumpers and protrud- tighten it. flushed from the surface and not allowed
ing objects such as exhaust to dry there. Rinse the vehicle thoroughly
pipes and exhaust finishers, be with plenty of lukewarm water. Wipe the
careful to prevent injuries from NOTE remaining water off with a chamois or soft
contacting sharp ends. . When having your vehicle washed in cloth. Wear rubber gloves and use a hand
an automatic car wash, make sure brush when washing down underbody,
. Do not use any organic solvents
beforehand that the car wash is of inner fenders and suspension to effec-
when washing the surface of the
suitable type. tively remove mud and dirt off.
bulb assembly cover. However, if
a detergent with organic solvents . The rear view camera lens has a hard
is used to wash the cover sur- coating to help prevent scratches.
face, completely rinse off the However, when washing the vehicle or
detergent with water. Otherwise, cleaning the camera lens, be careful not

(409,1)
Appearance care/Exterior care 10-3
! Washing the underbody . Be careful not to flush the engine mended that a coat of wax be applied at
Chemicals, salts and gravel used for
S10AA0101
bottom for a long time. It may least once a month, or whenever the
deicing road surfaces are extremely cor- cause damage of some electrical surface no longer repels water.
rosive, accelerating the corrosion of un- parts.
If the appearance of the paint has dimin-
derbody components, such as the exhaust ished to the point where the luster or tone
system, fuel and brake lines, brake cables, ! Using a warm water washer cannot be restored, lightly polish the sur-
S10AA0102
floor pan and fenders, and suspension. . Keep a good distance of 12 in (30 cm) face with a fine-grained compound. Never
Thoroughly flush the underbody and inside or more between the washer nozzle and polish just the affected area, but include
of the fenders with lukewarm or cold water the vehicle. the surrounding area as well. Always
at frequent intervals to reduce the harmful . Do not wash the same area continu- polish in only one direction. A No. 2000
effects of such agents. ously. grain compound is recommended. Never
. If a stain will not come out easily, wash use a coarse-grained compound. Coarse-
Mud and sand adhering to the underbody
by hand. Some warm water washers are of grained compounds have a smaller grain-
components may accelerate their corro-
the high temperature, high pressure type, size number and could damage the paint.
sion.
and they can damage or deform the resin After polishing with a compound, coat with
After driving off-road or on muddy or sandy wax to restore the original luster. Frequent
roads, wash the mud and sand off the parts such as moldings, or cause water to
leak into the vehicle. polishing with a compound or an incorrect
underbody. Carefully flush the suspension polishing technique will result in removing
and axle parts, as they are particularly the paint layer and exposing the under-
prone to mud and sand buildup. Do not use & Waxing and polishing coat. When in doubt, it is always best to
S10AA02
a sharp-edged tool to remove caked mud. Always wash and dry the vehicle before contact your SUBARU dealer or an auto
waxing and polishing. paint specialist.
10
CAUTION Use a good quality polish and wax and
. Be careful not to damage brake apply them according to the manufac- CAUTION
hoses, sensor harnesses, and turer’s instructions. Wax or polish when
the painted surface is cool. Do not use any agents with organic
other parts when washing sus- solvents on the surface of the bulb
pension components. Be sure to polish and wax the chrome trim, assembly cover. However, if a polish
as well as the painted surfaces. Loss of or wax with organic solvents is
wax on a painted surface leads to loss of applied to the cover surface, com-
the original luster and also quickens the pletely wipe off the polish or wax.
deterioration of the surface. It is recom- Otherwise, the cover surface may be
– CONTINUED –

(410,1)
10-4 Appearance care/Corrosion protection
damaged. . Clean the vehicle (including the alloy Corrosion protection

wheels) with water as soon as possible S10AB
when it has been splashed with sea water,
NOTE Your SUBARU has been designed and
exposed to sea breezes, or driven on
built to resist corrosion. Special materials
. Be careful not to block the wind- roads treated with salt or other agents.
and protective finishes have been used on
shield washer nozzles with wax when
most parts of the vehicle to help maintain
waxing the vehicle.
fine appearance, strength, and reliable
. Do not wipe the rear view camera
operation.
with alcohol, benzine or paint thinner.
Otherwise, discoloration may occur. To
remove contamination, wipe the cam- & Most common causes of cor-
era with a cloth moistened with diluted rosion
S10AB01
neutral detergent and then wipe it with a The most common causes of corrosion
soft, dry cloth. are:
. When waxing the vehicle, be careful . The accumulation of moisture retaining
not to apply the wax to the rear view dirt and debris in body panel sections,
camera. If it comes in contact with the cavities, and other areas.
camera, moisten a clean cloth with . Damage to paint and other protective
diluted neutral detergent to remove coatings caused by gravel and stone chips
the wax. or minor accidents.
& Cleaning alloy wheels Corrosion is accelerated on the vehicle

S10AA04 when:
. Promptly wipe the alloy wheels clean of . It is exposed to road salt or dust control
any kind of grime or agent. If dirt is left on chemicals, or used in coastal areas where
too long, it may be difficult to clean off. there is more salt in the air, or in areas
. Do not use soap containing grit to clean where there is considerable industrial
the wheels. Be sure to use a neutral pollution.
cleaning agent, and later rinse thoroughly . It is driven in areas of high humidity,
with water. Do not clean the wheels with a especially when temperatures range just
stiff brush or expose them to a high-speed above freezing.
washing device.

(411,1)
Appearance care/Cleaning the interior 10-5
. Dampness in certain parts of the of maintenance and treatment if you need Cleaning the interior
vehicle remains for a long time, even assistance. S10AC
though other parts of the vehicle may be
Repair chips and scratches in the paint as Use a soft, damp cloth to clean the climate
dry.
soon as you find them. control panel, audio equipment, instru-
. High temperatures will cause corrosion ment panel, center console, combination
to parts of the vehicle which cannot dry Check the interior of the vehicle for water meter panel, and switches. (Do not use
quickly due to lack of proper ventilation. and dirt accumulation under the floor mats organic solvents.)
because that could cause corrosion. Oc-
& To help prevent corrosion casionally check under the mats to make CAUTION
S10AB02
Wash the vehicle regularly to prevent sure the area is dry.
corrosion of the body and suspension Keep your garage dry. Do not park your Do not use sharp instruments or
components. Also, wash the vehicle vehicle in a damp, poorly ventilated gar- window cleaner containing abra-
promptly after driving on any of the age. In such a garage, corrosion can be sives to clean the inner surface of
following surfaces. caused by dampness. If you wash the the rear window. They may damage
vehicle in the garage or put the vehicle into the conductors printed on the win-
. Roads that have been salted to prevent
the garage when wet or covered with dow.
them from freezing in winter
snow, that can cause dampness.
. Mud, sand, or gravel
. Coastal roads If your vehicle is operated in cold weather & Seat fabric
and/or in areas where road salts and other S10AC01
After the winter has ended, it is recom- corrosive materials are used, the door Remove loose dirt, dust or debris with a
mended that the underbody be given a hinges and locks, rear gate lock, and hood vacuum cleaner. If the dirt is caked on the
very thorough washing. fabric or hard to remove with a vacuum 10
latch should be inspected and lubricated
periodically. cleaner, use a soft brush then vacuum it.
Before the beginning of winter, check the Wipe the fabric surface with a tightly wrung
condition of underbody components, such cloth and dry the seat fabric thoroughly. If
as the exhaust system, fuel and brake the fabric is still dirty, wipe using a solution
lines, brake cables, suspension, steering of mild soap and lukewarm water then dry
system, floor pan, and fenders. If any of thoroughly.
them are found to be rusted, they should
be given an appropriate rust prevention If the stain does not come out, try a
treatment or should be replaced. Contact commercially-available fabric cleaner.
your SUBARU dealer to perform this kind Use the cleaner on a hidden place and
– CONTINUED –

(412,1)
10-6 Appearance care/Cleaning the interior
make sure it does not affect the fabric covered, or the windows shaded, to pre- & Seatbelt
adversely. Use the cleaner according to its vent fading or shrinkage. S10AC09
For details about how to clean the seatbelt,
instructions. Minor surface blemishes or bald patches refer to “Seatbelt maintenance” �1-21.
may be treated with a commercial leather
CAUTION spray lacquer. You will discover that each & Climate control panel, audio
leather seat section will develop soft folds
When cleaning the seat, do not use
or wrinkles, which is characteristic of
panel, instrument panel, con-
benzine, paint thinner, or any similar
genuine leather. sole panel, and switches
materials. Doing so could damage S10AC04
Use a soft, damp cloth to clean the climate
the surface and cause the color to control panel, audio equipment, instru-
deteriorate. & Synthetic leather upholstery
S10AC03 ment panel, center console, combination
The synthetic leather material used on the
meter panel, and switches.
SUBARU may be cleaned using mild soap
& Leather seat materials or detergent and water, after first vacuum- CAUTION
S10AC02 ing or brushing away loose dirt. Allow the
The leather used by SUBARU is a high
soap to soak in for a few minutes and wipe . Do not use organic solvents such
quality natural product which will retain its
off with a clean, damp cloth. Commercial as paint thinners or fuel, or
distinctive appearance and feel for many
foam-type cleaners suitable for synthetic strong cleaning agents that con-
years with proper care.
leather materials may be used when tain those solvents. Doing so
Allowing dust or road dirt to build up on the necessary. could damage the surface and
surface can cause the material to become
cause the color to deteriorate.
brittle and to wear prematurely. Regular CAUTION
cleaning with a soft, moist, natural fiber . Do not use chemical solvents that
cloth should be performed monthly, taking Strong cleaning agents such as contain silicone on the vehicle
care not to soak the leather or allow water solvents, paint thinners, window audio system, electrical compo-
to penetrate the stitched seams. cleaner or fuel must never be used nents of the air-conditioner or
A mild detergent suitable for cleaning on leather or synthetic interior ma- any switches. If silicone adheres
woolen fabrics may be used to remove terials. Doing so could damage the to these parts, it may cause
difficult dirt spots, rubbing with a soft, dry surface and cause the color to damage to electrical compo-
cloth afterwards to restore the luster. If deteriorate. nents.
your SUBARU is to be parked for a long
time in bright sunlight, it is recommended
that the seats and head restraints be

(413,1)
Appearance care/Cleaning the interior 10-7
& Monitor
S10AC05
To clean the audio/navigation/multi-func-
tion display monitor, wipe it with a silicone
cloth or with a soft cloth. If the monitor is
extremely dirty, clean it with a soft cloth
moistened with neutral detergent then
carefully wipe off any remaining detergent.
CAUTION
. Do not spray neutral detergent
directly onto the monitor. Doing
so could damage the monitor’s
components.
. Do not wipe the monitor with a
hard cloth. Doing so could
scratch the monitor.
. Do not use cleaning fluid that
contains thinner, fuel, or any
other volatile substance. Such
cleaning fluid could erase the 10
lettering on the switches at the
bottom of the monitor.

(414,1)
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————

(415,1)
Maintenance and service

Maintenance schedule.......................................... 11-3 Front differential gear oil (CVT models) and
S11
Maintenance precautions ..................................... 11-3 rear differential gear oil....................................11-15
Before checking or servicing in the engine Recommended grade and viscosity..................... 11-15
compartment ...................................................... 11-4 Brake fluid............................................................11-15
When checking or servicing in the engine Checking the fluid level ...................................... 11-15
compartment ...................................................... 11-5 Recommended brake fluid .................................. 11-16
When checking or servicing in the engine Clutch fluid (MT models).....................................11-16
compartment while the engine is running ............ 11-5 Checking the fluid level ...................................... 11-16
Engine hood .......................................................... 11-5 Recommended clutch fluid ................................. 11-17
Engine compartment overview ............................ 11-7 Brake booster ......................................................11-17
Engine oil............................................................... 11-8 Brake pedal ..........................................................11-18
Engine oil consumption ........................................ 11-8 Checking the brake pedal free play ..................... 11-18
Locations of the oil level gauge, oil filler cap Checking the brake pedal reserve distance ......... 11-18
and oil filter ........................................................ 11-8 Clutch pedal (MT models)...................................11-18
Checking the oil level............................................ 11-8
Checking the clutch function .............................. 11-18
Changing the oil and oil filter ................................ 11-9
Checking the clutch pedal free play .................... 11-19
Recommended grade and viscosity ..................... 11-10
Synthetic oil........................................................ 11-10
Hill start assist system .......................................11-19
Cooling system ................................................... 11-10 Replacement of brake pad and lining ................11-19
Breaking-in of new brake pads and linings.......... 11-20
Safety precautions .............................................. 11-10
Cooling fan, hose and connections ..................... 11-11 Parking brake stroke ...........................................11-20
Engine coolant.................................................... 11-11 Tires and wheels .................................................11-21
Air cleaner element............................................. 11-12 Types of tires ..................................................... 11-21 11
Replacing the air cleaner element........................ 11-13 Tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS)
(if equipped) .................................................... 11-21
Spark plugs ......................................................... 11-14 Tire inspection.................................................... 11-23
Recommended spark plugs ................................. 11-14 Tire pressures and wear ..................................... 11-23
Drive belt ............................................................. 11-14 Wheel balance .................................................... 11-25
Manual transmission oil ..................................... 11-14 Wear indicators .................................................. 11-25
Recommended grade and viscosity ..................... 11-14 Rotational direction of tires................................. 11-26
Continuously variable transmission fluid ......... 11-15 Tire rotation........................................................ 11-26

(416,1)
Maintenance and service
Tire replacement ................................................. 11-27 Front turn signal light ......................................... 11-40
Wheel replacement ............................................. 11-28 Parking light ....................................................... 11-40
Alloy wheels ........................................................ 11-28 Front fog light (if equipped) ................................ 11-40
Windshield washer fluid ..................................... 11-29 Rear combination lights...................................... 11-40
Adding the windshield washer fluid..................... 11-29 Backup light ....................................................... 11-42
Windshield washer fluid ...................................... 11-29 License plate light .............................................. 11-43
Replacement of wiper blades ............................ 11-30 Map light ............................................................ 11-43
Windshield wiper blade assembly........................ 11-31 Vanity mirror light (if equipped)........................... 11-43
Windshield wiper blade rubber ............................ 11-32 Dome light and cargo area light .......................... 11-43
Rear window wiper blade assembly..................... 11-33 Other bulbs ........................................................ 11-44
Rear window wiper blade rubber ......................... 11-34 Adjusting headlight aim (models with LED
headlights) ...................................................... 11-44
Battery ................................................................. 11-35
Replacing key battery .........................................11-45
Fuses ................................................................... 11-36
Safety precautions.............................................. 11-45
Installation of accessories ................................. 11-38 Replacing battery of access key fob ................... 11-46
Replacing bulbs .................................................. 11-38 Replacing transmitter battery .............................. 11-47
Headlights (models with LED headlights) ............ 11-38
Headlights (models with halogen headlights)....... 11-39

(417,1)
Maintenance and service/Maintenance schedule 11-3
Maintenance schedule Maintenance precautions may result to persons not experi-

S11AA S11AB enced in servicing vehicles.
U.S. models When maintenance and service are re- . Always use the proper tools and
The scheduled maintenance items required, it is recommended that all work be make certain that they are well
quired to be serviced at regular intervals done by an authorized SUBARU dealer. maintained.
are shown in the “Warranty and Mainte- If you perform maintenance and service by . Never get under the vehicle sup-
nance Booklet”. For details, read the yourself, you should familiarize yourself ported only by a jack. Always use
separate “Warranty and Maintenance with the information provided in this sec- safety stands to support the
Booklet”. tion on general maintenance and service vehicle.
Canada models for your SUBARU. . Never keep the engine running in
The scheduled maintenance items re- a poorly ventilated area, such as
Incorrect or incomplete service could a garage or other closed areas.
quired to be serviced at regular intervals cause improper or unsafe vehicle opera-
are shown in the “Warranty and Service tion. Any problems caused by improper . Do not smoke or allow open
Booklet”. For details, read the separate maintenance and service performed by flames around the fuel or battery.
“Warranty and Service Booklet”. you are not eligible for warranty coverage. This will cause a fire.
Except for U.S. and Canada models . Because the fuel system is under
WARNING pressure, replacement of the fuel
Some items of your vehicle are required to filter should be performed only
be serviced at scheduled intervals. For . Always select a safe area when by your SUBARU dealer.
details about your maintenance schedule, performing maintenance on your
read the separate “Warranty and Main- . Wear adequate eye protection to
vehicle. guard against getting oil or fluids
tenance Booklet”.
. Always be very careful to avoid in your eyes. If something does
NOTE injury when working on the vehi- get in your eyes, thoroughly 11
For models with a multi-function dis- cle. Remember that some of the wash them out with clean water.
play (color LCD), you can set a remin- materials in the vehicle may be . Do not tamper with the wiring of
der to be displayed when a scheduled hazardous if improperly used or the SRS airbag system or seat-
maintenance item is almost due. For handled, for example, battery belt pretensioner system, or at-
details, refer to “Maintenance settings” acid. tempt to take its connectors
�3-64. . Your vehicle should only be ser- apart, as that may activate the
viced by persons fully competent system or it can render it inop-
to do so. Serious personal injury
– CONTINUED –

(418,1)
11-4 Maintenance and service/Maintenance precautions
erative. NEVER use a circuit tes- & Before checking or servicing operation indicator on the
ter for this wiring. If your SRS in the engine compartment switch is turned off. Then take
airbag or seatbelt pretensioner S11AB01 the access key fob out from
needs service, consult your near- WARNING the vehicle.
est SUBARU dealer. – Models without push-button
. Check the inside of the engine . Always stop the engine and apply start system:
compartment to see if there are the parking brake firmly to pre- Always remove the key from
any cloths and tools left. If they vent the vehicle from moving. the ignition switch.
are left inside, they may be a . Always let the engine cool down. . Before performing any servicing
cause of malfunction and fire. Engine parts become very hot on a vehicle equipped with a
when the engine is running and remote engine start system (a
remain hot for some time after the dealer option), temporarily place
NOTE engine has stopped. the remote engine start system in
SUBARU does not endorse the use of . Do not spill engine oil, engine service mode to prevent it from
non-SUBARU approved flushing sys- coolant, brake fluid or any other unexpectedly starting the engine.
tems and strongly advises against fluid on hot engine components.
performing these services on a This may cause a fire.
SUBARU vehicle. Non-SUBARU ap-
proved flushing systems use chemi- . When the ignition switch is in the
cals and/or solvents which have not “ON” position, the cooling fan
been tested or approved by SUBARU. may operate suddenly even when
SUBARU warranties do not cover any the engine is stopped. If your
part of the vehicle which is damaged by body or clothes come into con-
adding or applying chemicals and/or tact with a rotating fan, that could
solvents other than those approved or result in serious injury. To avoid
recommended by SUBARU. risk of injury, perform the follow-
ing precautions.
– Models with push-button start
system:
Always turn the push-button
ignition switch to the “OFF”
position and confirm that the

(419,1)
Maintenance and service/Engine hood 11-5
& When checking or servicing . Do not touch the oil filter until the Engine hood
in the engine compartment engine has cooled down comple- S11AC
S11AB03 tely. Doing so may result in a burn
or other injury. Note that the oil CAUTION
filter becomes very hot when the
engine is running and remains . Be extremely careful not to catch
hot for some time after the engine fingers or other objects when
has stopped. closing the engine hood.
. Do not push the hood forcibly to
close it. It could deform the metal.
& When checking or servicing . Be extremely careful opening the
in the engine compartment engine hood when the wind is
while the engine is running strong. The engine hood could
S11AB02
close suddenly, possibly causing
WARNING injuries from slamming.
. Do not install accessories other
CAUTION A running engine can be dangerous. than genuine SUBARU parts to
Keep your fingers, hands, clothing, the engine hood. If the engine
. Do not contact the drive belt hair and tools away from the cooling hood becomes too heavy, the
cover while checking the compo- fan, drive belt and any other moving stay may not be able to support
nents in the engine compartment. engine parts. Removing rings, holding it open.
Doing so may cause your hand to watches and ties is advisable.
slip off the cover and result in an . Check that the end of the hood
stay is inserted into the slot. If it is
unexpected injury.
not inserted properly, the hood
11
may drop and cause injury.
To open the hood:

1. If the wiper blades are lifted off the
windshield, return them to their original
position.
– CONTINUED –

(420,1)
11-6 Maintenance and service/Engine hood
WARNING
Always check that the hood is
properly locked before you start
driving. If it is not, it might fly open
while the vehicle is moving and
block your view, which may cause
an accident and serious bodily in-
jury.
2. Pull the hood release knob under the 1) Grip

instrument panel. 4. Lift up the hood, release the hood prop
from its retainer and put the end of the
hood prop into the slot in the hood. Hold
the grip for handling the hood prop.
To close the hood:
1. Lift the hood slightly and remove the
hood prop from the slot in the hood and
return the prop to its retainer.
2. Lower the hood to a height of approxi-
mately 7.8 to 11.8 in (20 to 30 cm) above its
closed position and then let it drop.
3. After closing the hood, be sure the
hood is securely locked.
3. Release the secondary hood release
by moving the lever between the front grille If this does not close the hood, release it
and the hood toward the left. from a slightly higher position.

(421,1)
Maintenance and service/Engine compartment overview 11-7

1) Brake fluid reservoir/Clutch fluid reservoir
Engine compartment overview (MT models) (page 11-15)
S11AD 2) Fuse box (page 11-36)
3) Battery (page 11-35)
4) Windshield washer tank (page 11-29)
5) Radiator cap (page 11-11)
6) Engine oil filler cap (page 11-8)
7) Engine coolant reservoir (page 11-11)
8) Engine oil filter (page 11-9)
9) Engine oil level gauge (page 11-8)
10) Air cleaner case (page 11-12)
11

(422,1)
11-8 Maintenance and service/Engine oil
Engine oil . When the engine is new and within the & Locations of the oil level
S11AE
break-in period gauge, oil filler cap and oil
. When the engine oil is of lower quality filter
CAUTION . When the incorrect oil viscosity is used S11AE06
. If the level gauge cannot be . When engine braking is employed

pulled out easily, twist the level (repeatedly)
gauge right and left, then gently . When the engine is operated at high
pull it out. Otherwise, you may be engine speeds (for extended periods of
injured accidentally straining time)
yourself. . When the engine is operated under
. Use only engine oil with the heavy loads (for extended periods of time)
recommended grade and vis- . When towing a trailer
cosity. . When the engine idles for extended
. Be careful not to spill engine oil periods of time
when adding it. If oil touches the . When the vehicle is operated in stop
exhaust pipe, it may cause a bad and go and/or heavy traffic situations
1) Oil level gauge
smell, smoke, and/or a fire. If . When the vehicle is used under severe 2) Oil filler cap
engine oil gets on the exhaust thermal conditions 3) Oil filter
pipe, be sure to wipe it off. . When the vehicle accelerates and
decelerates frequently
& Checking the oil level
S11AE01
& Engine oil consumption Under these or similar conditions, you 1. Park the vehicle on a level surface and
S11AE07 should check your oil at least every 2nd turn the ignition switch to the “LOCK”/
Some engine oil will be consumed while
fuel fill-up and change your engine oil more “OFF” position. If you check the oil level
driving. The rate of consumption can be
frequently. Different drivers in the same just after turning the ignition switch to the
affected by such factors as transmission
car may experience different results. If “LOCK”/“OFF” position, wait for at least 5
type, driving style, terrain and tempera-
your oil consumption rate is greater than minutes for the oil to drain back into the oil
ture. Under the following conditions, oil
expected, contact your authorized pan before checking the level.
consumption can be increased and thus
SUBARU retailer who may perform a test
require refilling between maintenance in-
under controlled conditions.
tervals:

(423,1)
Maintenance and service/Engine oil 11-9
CAUTION judged by the lowest of the two levels. If . After adding or changing the engine
the oil level is below the low level mark, oil, warm up the engine and stop it on a
If the level gauge cannot be pulled add oil so that the full level is reached. level surface, then start the engine after
out easily, twist the level gauge right a lapse of 1 minute or more. Confirm
and left, then gently pull it out. that the warning light has turned off
CAUTION after the engine has started. Refer to
Otherwise, you may be injured acci-
dentally straining yourself. . Be careful not to touch the engine “Engine low oil level warning light” �3-
oil filter when removing the oil 18.
2. Pull out the level gauge, wipe it clean, filler cap. Doing so may result in a
and insert it again. burn, a pinched finger, or may
& Changing the oil and oil filter
S11AE02
3. Be sure the level gauge is correctly cause some other injury. Change the oil and oil filter according to
inserted until it stops. . Use only engine oil with the the maintenance schedule in the “War-
recommended grade and vis- ranty and Maintenance Booklet”.
cosity. The engine oil and oil filter must be
changed more frequently than listed in
. Be careful not to spill engine oil the maintenance schedule when driving
when adding it. If oil touches the on dusty roads, when short trips are
exhaust pipe, it may cause a bad frequently made, or when driving in ex-
smell, smoke, and/or a fire. If tremely cold weather.
engine oil gets on the exhaust
pipe, be sure to wipe it off. NOTE
. Changing the engine oil and oil filter
To add engine oil, remove the engine oil should be performed by a well-trained
filler cap and slowly pour engine oil
through the filler neck. After pouring oil
expert. Contact your SUBARU dealer 11
for changing the engine oil and oil filter.
into the engine, you must use the level Fully trained mechanics are on standby
1) Full level gauge to confirm that the oil level is
2) Low level at a SUBARU dealer to utilize the
correct. special tools, spare parts and recom-
3) Approximately 1.1 US qt (1.0 liters, 0.9
Imp qt) from low level to full level NOTE mended oil for this work, and also, used
oils are properly disposed of.
4. Pull out the oil level gauge again. . To prevent overfilling the engine oil,
5. Check the oil levels on both sides of the do not add any additional oil above the
level gauge. The engine oil level must be upper level when the engine is cold.
– CONTINUED –

(424,1)
11-10 Maintenance and service/Cooling system
. If performing oil replacement your- Warranty and Maintenance booklet. Cooling system
self, observe the local regulations and S11AF
dispose of waste oil properly. NOTE & Safety precautions
Synthetic oil of the grade and viscosity S11AF04
noted in chapter 12 is the recom- WARNING

& Recommended grade and mended engine oil for optimum engine
viscosity performance. Conventional oil may be
S11AE03 Never remove the radiator cap until
used if synthetic oil is unavailable. the engine has been shut off and has
CAUTION cooled down completely. Since the
Use only engine oil with the recom- coolant is under pressure, you may
mended grade and viscosity. suffer serious burns from a spray of
boiling hot coolant when the cap is
Refer to “Engine oil” �12-4. removed.
NOTE
Engine oil viscosity (thickness) affects CAUTION
fuel economy. Oils of lower viscosity . Vehicles are filled at the factory
provide better fuel economy. However, with SUBARU SUPER COOLANT
in hot weather, oil of higher viscosity is that does not require the first
required to properly lubricate the en- change for 11 years/137,500
gine. miles (11 years/220,000 km). This
coolant should not be mixed with
& Synthetic oil any other brand or type of cool-
S11AE05
You should use synthetic engine oil that ant during this period. Mixing
meets the same requirements given for with a different coolant will re-
conventional engine oil. When using syn- duce the life of the coolant. When
thetic oil, you must use oil of the same necessary to top up the coolant
classification, viscosity and grade shown for any reason, use only SUBARU
in this Owner’s Manual. Refer to “Engine SUPER COOLANT.
oil” �12-4. Also, you must follow the oil If SUBARU SUPER COOLANT is
and filter changing intervals shown in the diluted with another brand or

(425,1)
Maintenance and service/Cooling system 11-11
type, the maintenance interval is SUBARU dealer to check for leaks, da- Check the coolant level at each fuel stop.
shortened to that of the mixing mage, or looseness. 1. Check the coolant level on the outside
coolant. of the reservoir while the engine is cool.
. Do not splash the engine coolant & Engine coolant 2. If the level is close to or lower than the
S11AF02
over painted parts. The alcohol “LOW” level mark, add coolant up to the
! Checking the coolant level
contained in the engine coolant S11AF0201 “FULL” level mark. If the reserve tank is
may damage the paint surface. empty, remove the radiator cap and refill
WARNING coolant up to just below the filler neck as
Never remove the radiator cap until shown in the following illustration.
& Cooling fan, hose and con- the engine has been shut off and has
nections cooled down completely. Since the
S11AF03
Your vehicle employs an electric cooling coolant is under pressure, you may
fan which is thermostatically controlled to suffer serious burns from a spray of
operate when the engine coolant reaches boiling hot coolant when the cap is
a specific temperature. removed.
If the radiator cooling fan does not operate
even when the coolant temperature high
warning light blinks or illuminates in RED,
the cooling fan circuit may be defective.
Refer to “Coolant temperature low indica-
tor light/Coolant temperature high warning
light” �3-16. 1) Fill up to this level
11
Check the fuse and replace it if necessary.
Refer to “Fuses” �11-36.
If the fuse is not blown, have the cooling
system checked by your SUBARU dealer.
If the frequent addition of coolant is
necessary between vehicle service visits, 1) “FULL” level mark
it is recommended that you have your 2) “LOW” level mark
vehicle inspected by an authorized
– CONTINUED –

(426,1)
11-12 Maintenance and service/Air cleaner element
! Changing the coolant

S11AF0202
Air cleaner element
It may be difficult to change the coolant. S11AG
Have the coolant changed by your

SUBARU dealer if necessary. WARNING
The coolant should be changed according Do not operate the engine with the
to the maintenance schedule in the “War- air cleaner element removed. The air
ranty and Maintenance Booklet”. cleaner element not only filters in-
take air but also stops flames if the
engine backfires. If the air cleaner
element is not installed when the
engine backfires, you could be
burned.
3. After refilling the reserve tank and the
radiator, reinstall the cap and check that
the rubber gaskets inside the radiator cap CAUTION
are in the proper position.
When replacing the air cleaner ele-
CAUTION ment, use a genuine SUBARU air
cleaner element. If it is not used,
. Be careful not to spill engine there is the possibility of causing a
coolant when adding it. If coolant negative effect to the engine.
touches the exhaust pipe, it may
cause a bad smell, smoke, and/or The air cleaner element functions as a filter
a fire. If engine coolant gets on screen. When the element is perforated or
the exhaust pipe, be sure to wipe removed, engine wear will be excessive
it off. and engine life shortened.
. Do not splash the engine coolant It is not necessary to clean or wash the air
over painted parts. The alcohol cleaner element.
contained in the engine coolant
may damage the paint surface.

(427,1)
Maintenance and service/Air cleaner element 11-13
& Replacing the air cleaner ele- cleaner case (rear) into the slits on the air
ment cleaner case (front).
S11AG01
Replace the air cleaner element according 6. Install in the reverse order of removal.
to the maintenance schedule in the “War-
ranty and Maintenance Booklet”. Under NOTE
extremely dusty conditions, replace it Install the air cleaner element so that
more frequently. It is recommended that the surface with “UPR” printed on it
you always use genuine SUBARU parts. faces upward.
3. Remove the air cleaner element.

4. Clean the inside of the air cleaner case
(both front and rear) with a damp cloth and
install a new air cleaner element.
1) Clips
1. Unsnap the two clips holding the air 11

cleaner case (rear).
2. Open the air cleaner case and pull the
cover rearward while lifting it up.
5. To install the air cleaner case (rear),

insert the three projections on the air

(428,1)
11-14 Maintenance and service/Spark plugs
Spark plugs Drive belt Manual transmission oil

S11AH S11AI S11AJ
It may be difficult to replace the spark It is unnecessary to check the deflection of It is not necessary to check the transmis-
plugs. It is recommended that you have the the drive belt periodically because your sion oil level. Check that there are no
spark plugs replaced by your SUBARU engine is equipped with an automatic belt cracks, damage or leakage. However, the
dealer. tension adjuster. However, replacement of oil inspection should be performed accord-
the belt should be done according to the ing to the maintenance schedule in the
The spark plugs should be replaced maintenance schedule in the “Warranty “Warranty and Maintenance Booklet”.
according to the maintenance schedule and Maintenance Booklet”. Consult your Consult your SUBARU dealer for details.
in the “Warranty and Maintenance Book- SUBARU dealer for replacement.
let”.
If the drive belt is loose, cracked or worn, & Recommended grade and
CAUTION contact your SUBARU dealer. viscosity
S11AJ02
Each oil manufacturer has its own base
Make sure the cables are replaced in oils and additives. Never use different
the correct order. brands together. For details, refer to
“Manual transmission, front differential
and rear differential gear oil” �12-6.
& Recommended spark plugs
S11AH01
For the recommended spark plugs, refer to
“Electrical system” �12-7.

(429,1)
Maintenance and service/Continuously variable transmission fluid 11-15
Continuously variable trans- Front differential gear oil Brake fluid

mission fluid (CVT models) and rear differ- S11AO
S11AY ential gear oil & Checking the fluid level

S11AO01
It is not necessary to check the transmis- S11BL
sion fluid level. Check that there are no WARNING

It is not necessary to check the gear oil
cracks, damage or leakage. However, the level. Check that there are no cracks, . Never let brake fluid contact your
fluid inspection should be performed ac- damage or leakage. However, the oil eyes because brake fluid can be
cording to the maintenance schedule in inspection should be performed according harmful to your eyes. If brake
the “Warranty and Maintenance Booklet”. to the maintenance schedule in the “War- fluid gets in your eyes, immedi-
Consult your SUBARU dealer for details. ranty and Maintenance Booklet”. Consult ately flush them thoroughly with
your SUBARU dealer for details. clean water. For safety, when
performing this work, wearing
& Recommended grade and eye protection is advisable.
viscosity . Brake fluid absorbs moisture
S11BL01
Each oil manufacturer has its own base from the air. Any absorbed moist-
oils and additives. Never use different ure can cause a dangerous loss
brands together. For details, refer to of braking performance.
“Manual transmission, front differential . If the vehicle requires frequent
and rear differential gear oil” �12-6. refilling, there may be a leak. If
you suspect a problem, have the
CAUTION vehicle checked at your SUBARU
Using a differential gear oil other dealer.
11
than the specified oil may cause a
decline in vehicle performance. CAUTION
. When adding brake fluid, be care-
ful not to allow any dirt into the
reservoir.
. Never splash the brake fluid over
painted surfaces or rubber parts.
– CONTINUED –

(430,1)
11-16 Maintenance and service/Clutch fluid (MT models)
Alcohol contained in the brake reservoir is used for both the brake and Clutch fluid (MT models)
fluid may damage them. clutch systems and has chambers for each S11AP
. Be careful not to spill brake fluid system. & Checking the fluid level
S11AP01
when adding it. If brake fluid If the fluid level is below “MIN”, add the
touches the exhaust pipe, it may recommended brake fluid to “MAX”. Use WARNING
cause a bad smell, smoke, and/or only brake fluid from a sealed container.
a fire. If brake fluid gets on the Never let clutch fluid contact your
exhaust pipe, be sure to wipe it eyes because clutch fluid can be
& Recommended brake fluid harmful to your eyes. If clutch fluid
off. S11AO02
Refer to “Fluids” �12-6. gets in your eyes, immediately flush
them thoroughly with clean water.
CAUTION For safety, when performing this
work, wearing eye protection is
Never use different brands of brake
advisable.
fluid together. Also, avoid mixing
DOT 3 and DOT 4 brake fluids even if
they are the same brand. CAUTION
. Clutch fluid absorbs moisture
from the air. Any absorbed moist-
ure can cause improper clutch
operation.
. If the vehicle requires frequent
1) “MAX” level line refilling, there may be a leak. If
2) “MIN” level line you suspect a problem, have the
A) The brake fluid level must be checked in vehicle checked at your SUBARU
this area. dealer.
Check the fluid level monthly. . When clutch fluid is added, be
Check the fluid level on the outside of the careful not to allow any dirt into
reservoir. Be sure to check the fluid level the tank.
for the brake system at the shaded area in . Never splash the clutch fluid over
the illustration. For MT models, this painted surfaces or rubber parts.

(431,1)
Maintenance and service/Brake booster 11-17
Alcohol contained in the clutch Check the fluid level monthly. Brake booster
fluid may damage them. Check the fluid level on the outside of the S11AQ
. Be careful not to spill clutch fluid reservoir. Because this reservoir is used If the brake booster does not operate as
when adding it. If clutch fluid for both the brake and clutch systems and described in the following, have it checked
touches the exhaust pipe, it may has chambers for each system, be sure to by your SUBARU dealer.
cause a bad smell, smoke, and/or check the fluid level for the clutch system
1. With the ignition switch in the “LOCK”/
a fire. If clutch fluid gets on the at the shaded area in the illustration. If
“OFF” position, depress the brake pedal
exhaust pipe, be sure to wipe it the fluid level is below “MIN”, add the
several times, applying the same pedal
off. recommended clutch fluid to “MAX”.
force each time. The distance the pedal
. The fluid level for the clutch Use only clutch fluid from a sealed contain- travels should not vary.
system must be checked at the er.
2. With the brake pedal depressed, start
inboard side of the reservoir. It the engine. The pedal should move slightly
cannot be checked at the out- & Recommended clutch fluid down to the floor.
S11AP02
board side of the reservoir. Refer to “Fluids” �12-6. 3. With the brake pedal depressed, stop
the engine and keep the pedal depressed
CAUTION for 30 seconds. The pedal height should
Never use different brands of clutch not change.
fluid together. Also, avoid mixing 4. Start the engine again and run for
DOT 3 and DOT 4 brake fluids even if approximately one minute then turn it off.
they are the same brand. Depress the brake pedal several times to
check the brake booster. The brake boost-
er operates properly if the pedal stroke
decreases with each depression. 11
1) “MAX” level line

2) “MIN” level line
A) The clutch fluid level must be checked in
this area.

(432,1)
11-18 Maintenance and service/Brake pedal
Brake pedal If the free play is not within proper Clutch pedal (MT models)
S11AR
specification, contact your SUBARU deal- S11AS
er.
Check the brake pedal free play and Check the clutch pedal free play according
reserve distance according to the main- & Checking the brake pedal re- to the maintenance schedule in the “War-
tenance schedule in the “Warranty and serve distance ranty and Maintenance Booklet”.
Maintenance Booklet”. S11AR02
& Checking the clutch function

& Checking the brake pedal free S11AS01
Check the clutch engagement and disen-
play gagement.
S11AR01
1. With the engine idling, check that there
are no abnormal noises when the clutch
pedal is depressed, and that shifting into
1st or reverse feels smooth.
2. Start the vehicle by releasing the pedal
slowly to check that the engine and
transmission smoothly couple without
any sign of slippage.
1) More than 2.56 in (65 mm)

Depress the pedal with a force of approxi-
mately 66 lbf (294 N, 30 kgf) and measure
1) 0.02 – 0.11 in (0.5 – 2.7 mm)
the distance between the upper surface of
the pedal pad and the floor.
Turn the ignition switch to the “LOCK”/ When the measurement is smaller than
“OFF” position and firmly depress the the specification, or when the pedal does
brake pedal several times. Lightly pull the not operate smoothly, contact with your
brake pedal up with one finger to check the SUBARU dealer.
free play with a force of less than 2 lbf (10
N, 1 kgf).

(433,1)
Maintenance and service/Hill start assist system 11-19
& Checking the clutch pedal Hill start assist system Replacement of brake pad
free play S11BF and lining
S11AS02
Ensure that the Hill start assist system S11AT
operates properly under the following

circumstances.
1. Stop the vehicle on an uphill grade by
depressing the brake pedal (all models)
and clutch pedal (MT models only), with
the engine running.
2. Make sure that the vehicle does not
move backward for several seconds after
the brake pedal is released.
3. Then make sure the vehicle starts
climbing the grade by following the normal
starting procedures.
1) 0.16 – 0.43 in (4.0 – 11.0 mm)
If the Hill start assist system does not The disc brakes have audible wear in-
Lightly depress the clutch pedal down with
operate as described above, contact your dicators on the brake pads. If the brake
your finger until you feel resistance, and
SUBARU dealer. pads wear close to their service limit, the
check the free play.
wear indicator makes a very audible
If the free play is not within proper scraping noise when the brake pedal is
specification, contact your SUBARU deal- applied.
er.
If you hear this scraping noise each time 11
you apply the brake pedal, have the brake
pads serviced by your SUBARU dealer as
soon as possible.
– CONTINUED –

(434,1)
11-20 Maintenance and service/Parking brake stroke
CAUTION 4. Wait 5 to 10 minutes for the parking Parking brake stroke

brake to cool down. Repeat this proce- S11AU
If you continue to drive despite the dure.
scraping noise from the audible 5. Check the parking brake stroke. If the
brake pad wear indicator, it will parking brake stroke is out of the specified
result in the need for costly brake range, adjust it by turning the adjusting nut
rotor repair or replacement. located on the parking brake lever.
Parking brake stroke:

& Breaking-in of new brake
pads and linings 7 – 8 notches / 45 lbf (200 N, 20.4 kgf)
S11AT01
When replacing the brake pad or lining,
use only genuine SUBARU parts. After
replacement, the new parts must be WARNING
broken in as follows. A safe location and situation should Check the parking brake stroke according
! Brake pad and lining be selected for break-in driving. to the maintenance schedule in the “War-
S11AT0101
While maintaining a speed of 30 to 40 mph ranty and Maintenance Booklet”. When
(50 to 65 km/h), step on the brake pedal the parking brake is properly adjusted,
lightly. Repeat this five or more times.
CAUTION braking power is fully applied by pulling the
! Parking brake lining Pulling the parking brake lever too lever up 7 to 8 notches gently but firmly
S11AT0102
forcefully may cause the rear wheels (approximately 45 lbf [200 N, 20.4 kgf]). If
1. Drive the vehicle at a speed of approxi- the parking brake lever stroke is not within
to lock. To avoid this, be certain to
mately 22 mph (35 km/h). the specified range, have the brake sys-
pull the lever up slowly and gently.
2. With the parking brake release button tem checked and adjusted at your
pushed in, pull the parking brake lever SUBARU dealer.
SLOWLY and GENTLY (pulling with a
force of approximately 33.7 lbf [150 N,
15.3 kgf]).
3. Drive the vehicle for approximately 220
yards (200 meters) in this condition.

(435,1)
Maintenance and service/Tires and wheels 11-21
Tires and wheels ! Winter (snow) tires the garage and the temperature outside.
S11AV
S11AV0103
Winter tires are best suited for driving on By way of example, the following table
& Types of tires snow-covered and icy roads. However shows the required tire pressures that
S11AV01
winter tires do not perform as well as correspond to various outside tempera-
You should be familiar with type of tires
summer tires and all season tires on roads tures when the temperature in the garage
present on your vehicle.
other than snow-covered and icy roads. is 608F (15.68C).
! All season tires Example:
S11AV0101
All season tires are designed to provide an & Tire pressure monitoring Ti r e s i z e : P 2 2 5 / 6 0 R 1 7 9 8 H a n d
adequate measure of traction, handling system (TPMS) (if equipped) 225/55R18 98H
and braking performance in year-round S11AV02 Standard tire pressures:
driving including snowy and icy road The tire pressure monitoring system pro-
vides the driver with a warning message by Front: 33 psi (230 kPa, 2.3 kgf/cm2)
conditions. However all season tires do Rear: 32 psi (220 kPa, 2.2 kgf/cm2)
not offer as much traction performance as sending a signal from a sensor that is
winter (snow) tires in heavy or loose snow installed in each wheel when tire pressure Garage temperature: 608F (15.68C)
or on icy roads. is severely low. The tire pressure monitor-
ing system will activate only when the Adjusted pressure
All season tires are identified by “ALL Outside [psi (kPa, kgf/cm2)]
vehicle is driven. Also, this system may not temperature
SEASON” and/or “M+S” (Mud & Snow) on Front Rear
react immediately to a sudden drop in tire
the tire sidewall.
pressure (for example, a blow-out caused 308F (−18C) 36 (250, 2.5) 35 (240, 2.4)
! Summer tires by running over a sharp object).
S11AV0102
108F (−128C) 38 37
Summer tires are high-speed capability If you adjust the tire pressures in a warm (265, 2.65) (255, 2.55)
tires best suited for highway driving under garage and will then drive the vehicle in −108F (−238C) 41 (280, 2.8) 39 (270, 2.7)
dry conditions. cold outside air, the resulting drop in tire
Summer tires are inadequate for driving on pressures may cause the low tire pressure If the low tire pressure warning light 11
slippery roads such as on snow-covered or warning light to illuminate. To avoid this illuminates when you drive the vehicle in
icy roads. problem when adjusting the tire pressures cold outside air after adjusting the tire
If you drive your vehicle on snow-covered in a warm garage, inflate the tires to pressures in a warm garage, re-adjust the
or icy roads, we strongly recommend the pressures higher than those shown on tire pressures using the method described
use of winter (snow) tires. the tire inflation pressure label. Specifi- above. Then, increase the vehicle speed
When installing winter tires, be sure to cally, inflate them by an extra 1 psi (6.9 to at least 20 mph (32 km/h) and check to
replace all four tires. kPa, 0.07 kgf/cm2) for every difference of see that the low tire pressure warning light
108F (5.68C) between the temperature in turns off a few minutes later. If the low tire
– CONTINUED –

(436,1)
11-22 Maintenance and service/Tires and wheels
pressure warning light does not turn off, light illuminates steadily after blink- or system resetting. If the light
the tire pressure monitoring system may ing for approximately one minute, illuminates steadily after blinking
not be functioning normally. In this event, you should have your Tire Pressure for approximately one minute,
go to a SUBARU dealer to have the Monitoring System checked at a promptly contact a SUBARU dealer
system inspected as soon as possible. SUBARU dealer as soon as possi- to have the system inspected.
ble.
While the vehicle is driven, friction be-
tween tires and the road surface causes If this light illuminates while driving, ! TPMS valve self-registration
S11AV0201
the tires to warm up. After illumination of never brake suddenly and keep When the wheels are replaced (such as
the low tire pressure warning light, any driving straight ahead while gradu- when installing snow tires) or when a new
increase in the tire pressures caused by an ally reducing speed. Then slowly TPMS valve is mounted on a new installed
increase in the outside air temperature or pull off the road to a safe place. wheel, you will need to perform TPMS
by an increase in the temperature in the Otherwise an accident involving valve self-registration. Refer to the follow-
tires can cause the low tire pressure serious vehicle damage and serious ing procedure to perform TPMS valve self-
warning light to turn off. personal injury could occur. registration.
If this light still illuminates while 1. Install the wheels with TPMS valves on
It may not be possible to install TPMS
driving after adjusting the tire pres- the vehicle.
valves on certain wheels that are on the
sure, a tire may have significant 2. Adjust the tire pressure to the specified
market. Therefore, if you change the
damage and a fast leak that causes value. For information about the specified
wheels (for example, a switch to snow
the tire to lose air rapidly. If you have value of the tire pressure, refer to “Tires”
tires), use wheels that have the same part
a flat tire, replace it with a spare tire �12-8.
number as the standard-equipment
as soon as possible.
wheels. Without four operational TPMS 3. Drive at speeds above 25 mph (40
valve/sensors on the wheels, the TPMS When a spare tire is mounted or a km/h) for at least 4 miles (6 km) or until the
will not fully function and the warning light wheel rim is replaced without the low tire pressure warning light turns off.
on the combination meter will illuminate original pressure sensor/transmitter
steadily after blinking for approximately being transferred, the low tire pres-
sure warning light will illuminate NOTE
one minute.
steadily after blinking for approxi- . When installing TPMS valves, use
WARNING mately one minute. This indicates only genuine SUBARU parts.
the TPMS is unable to monitor all . Registration of TPMS valves can
If the low tire pressure warning light four road wheels. Contact your also be done at a SUBARU dealer.
does not illuminate briefly after the SUBARU dealer as soon as possible Consult your SUBARU dealer.
ignition switch is turned on or the for tire and sensor replacement and/

(437,1)
& Tire inspection . If you feel unusual vibration

S11AV03 while driving or find it difficult to
Check on a daily basis that the tires
steer the vehicle in a straight line,
are free from serious damage,
one of the tires and/or wheels
nails, and stones. At the same time,
may be damaged. Drive slowly to
check the tires for abnormal wear.
the nearest authorized SUBARU
Contact your SUBARU dealer im- dealer and have the vehicle in-
mediately if you find any problem. spected.
NOTE
. When the wheels and tires & Tire pressures and wear
S11AV04
strike curbs or are subjected to Maintaining the correct tire pres-
harsh treatment as when the sures helps to maximize the tires’ Tire inflation pressure label
vehicle is driven on a rough service lives and is essential for Check the tire pressures when the
surface, they can suffer damage good running performance. Check tires are cold. Use a pressure
that cannot be seen with the and, if necessary, adjust the pres- gauge to adjust the tire pressures
naked eye. This type of damage sure of each tire and the spare (if to the values shown on the tire
does not become evident until equipped) at least once a month inflation pressure label. The tire
time has passed. Try not to drive and before any long journey. inflation pressure label is located
over curbs, potholes or on other on the door pillar on the driver’s
rough surfaces. If doing so is side.
unavoidable, keep the vehicle’s
11
speed down to a walking pace or Driving even a short distance
less, and approach the curbs as warms up the tires and increases
squarely as possible. Also, make the tire pressures. Also, the tire
sure the tires are not pressed pressures are affected by the out-
against the curb when you park side temperature. It is best to check
the vehicle. tire pressure outdoors before driv-
ing the vehicle.
– CONTINUED –

(438,1)
When a tire becomes warm, the air 2) Under inflated tire (tread worn
inside it expands, causing the tire on shoulders)
pressure to increase. Be careful not Rolling resistance is high, so
to mistakenly release air from a fuel consumption is also high-
warm tire to reduce its pressure. er.
3) Over inflated (tread worn in the
NOTE center)
. The air pressure in a tire Ride comfort is poor. Also, the
increases by approximately 4.3 tire magnifies the effects of
psi (30 kPa, 0.3 kgf/cm2) when the road-surface bumps and dips,
tire becomes warm. possibly resulting in vehicle
. The tires are considered cold
damage.
when the vehicle has been
parked for at least three hours If the tire inflation pressure label
or has been driven less than one shows tire pressures for the vehicle
mile (1.6 km). when fully loaded, adjust the tire
pressures to the values that match
WARNING the loading conditions.
Do not let air out of warm tires WARNING
to adjust pressure. Doing so
will result in low tire pressure. Driving at high speeds with
excessively low tire pressures
Incorrect tire pressures detract from 1) Correct tire pressure (tread can cause the tires to deform
controllability and ride comfort, and worn evenly) severely and to rapidly heat
they cause the tires to wear abnor- Roadholding is good, and up. A sharp increase in tem-
mally. steering is responsive. Rolling perature could cause tread
resistance is low, so fuel con- separation, and destruction of
sumption is also lower. the tires. The resulting loss of

(439,1)
vehicle control could lead to CAUTION & Wear indicators

S11AV06
an accident.
Loss of correct wheel align-
ment causes the tires to wear
& Wheel balance on one side and reduces the
S11AV05
Each wheel was correctly balanced vehicle’s running stability.
when your vehicle was new, but the Contact your SUBARU dealer
wheels will become unbalanced as if you notice abnormal tire
the tires become worn during use. wear.
Wheel imbalance causes the steer-
ing wheel to vibrate slightly at NOTE
certain vehicle speeds and detracts The suspension system is de-
from the vehicle’s straight-line sta- signed to hold each wheel at a 1) New tread
bility. It can also cause steering and certain alignment (relative to the 2) Worn tread
suspension system problems and other wheels and to the road) for 3) Tread wear indicator
abnormal tire wear. If you suspect optimum straight-line stability
that the wheels are not correctly and cornering performance. Each tire incorporates a tread wear
balanced, have them checked and indicator, which becomes visible
adjusted by your SUBARU dealer. when the depth of the tread grooves
Also have them adjusted after tire decreases to 0.063 in (1.6 mm). A
repairs and after tire rotation. tire must be replaced when the 11
tread wear indicator appears as a
solid band across the tread.
WARNING
When a tire’s tread wear indi-
cator becomes visible, the tire
– CONTINUED –

(440,1)
is worn beyond the acceptable & Rotational direction of tires & Tire rotation
S11AV11 S11AV07
limit and must be replaced
immediately. With a tire in this
condition, driving at high
speeds in wet weather can
cause the vehicle to hydro-
plane. The resulting loss of
vehicle control can lead to an
accident.
NOTE
For safety, inspect tire tread
regularly and replace the tires Example of rotational direction Vehicles equipped with 4 non-
before their tread wear indicators marked on the sidewall unidirectional tires
become visible. 1) Front 1) Front
If the tires have specific rotational
direction, refer to the arrow marked
on the side wall.
The arrow should be pointing for-
ward direction when the wheels are
fitted.

(441,1)
miles (1,000 km), check the wheel struction, and size. You are advised to
nuts again and retighten any nut replace the tires with new ones that are
identical to those fitted as standard equip-
that has become loose. ment.
For handling alloy wheels, refer to “Alloy For safe vehicle operation, SUBARU
wheels” �11-28. recommends replacing all four tires at the
same time.
& Tire replacement
S11AV08
The wheels and tires are important and WARNING
integral parts of your vehicle’s design; they
cannot be changed arbitrarily. The tires . When replacing or installing
fitted as standard equipment are optimally tire(s), all four tires must be the
matched to the characteristics of the same for the following items.
Vehicles equipped with unidi- vehicle and were selected to give the best (a) Size
rectional tires possible combination of running perfor- (b) Speed symbol
1) Front mance, ride comfort, and service life. It is
(c) Load index
essential for every tire to have a size and
Tire wear varies from wheel to construction matching those shown on the (d) Circumference
wheel. Move the tires to the posi- tire inflation pressure label and to have a (e) Construction
tions shown in the illustration each speed symbol and load index matching (f) Manufacturer
time they are rotated. For the tire those shown on the tire inflation pressure
label. (g) Brand (tread pattern)
rotation schedule, refer to the “War-
(h) Degrees of wear
ranty and Maintenance Booklet”. Using tires of a non-specified size detracts 11
from controllability, ride comfort, braking For items (a) to (c), you must
Replace any damaged or unevenly performance, speedometer accuracy and obey the specification that is
worn tires at the time of rotation. odometer accuracy. It also creates incor- printed on the tire inflation pres-
After tire rotation, adjust the tires rect body-to-tire clearances and inappro- sure label. The tire inflation pres-
priately changes the vehicle’s ground sure label is located on the dri-
pressures and make sure the wheel ver’s door pillar.
nuts are correctly tightened. clearance.
If all the four tires are not the
All four tires must be the same in terms of same for items (a) to (h), serious
After driving approximately 600 manufacturer, brand (tread pattern), con-
– CONTINUED –

(442,1)
11-28 Maintenance and service/Alloy wheels
mechanical damage could be WARNING Alloy wheels

caused to the drivetrain of the S11BM
car, and affect the followings. Use only those wheels that are Alloy wheels can be scratched and da-
– Ride specified for your vehicle. Wheels maged easily. Handle them carefully to
not meeting specifications could maintain their appearance, performance,
– Handling
interfere with brake caliper opera- and safety.
– Braking tion and may cause the tires to rub
. When any of the wheels are removed
– Speedometer/Odometer cali- against the wheel well housing dur-
and replaced for tire rotation or to change a
bration ing turns. The resulting loss of
flat tire, always check the tightness of the
– Clearance between the body vehicle control could lead to an
wheel nuts after driving approximately 600
and tires accident.
miles (1,000 km). If any nut is loose,
It also may be dangerous and tighten it to the specified torque.
lead to loss of vehicle control, NOTE . Never apply oil to the threaded parts,
and it can lead to an accident. When any of the wheels are removed wheel nuts, or tapered surface of the
. Use only radial tires. Do not use and replaced for tire rotation or for any wheel.
radial tires together with belted other reason, always check the tight- . Never let the wheel rub against sharp
bias tires and/or bias-ply tires. ness of the wheel nuts after driving protrusions or curbs.
Doing so can dangerously re- approximately 600 miles (1,000 km). If . When wheel nuts, balance weights, or
duce controllability, resulting in any nut is loose, tighten it to the the center cap is replaced, be sure to
an accident. specified torque. replace them with genuine SUBARU parts
designed for alloy wheels.
. When stacking and storing removed
& Wheel replacement tires, place shock-absorbing material be-
S11AV09
When replacing wheels due, for example, tween the tires to protect the wheels from
to damage, make sure the replacement becoming scratched.
wheels match the specifications of the
wheels that are fitted as standard equip-
ment. Replacement wheels are available
from SUBARU dealers.

(443,1)
Maintenance and service/Windshield washer fluid 11-29
Windshield washer fluid When there is only a small amount of & Windshield washer fluid
S11AX
washer fluid remaining, the windshield S11AX02
Use windshield washer fluid. If windshield
washer fluid warning light will illuminate. washer fluid is unavailable use clean
When this occurs, refill the washer fluid. water.
In areas where water freezes in winter, use
& Adding the windshield an anti-freeze type windshield washer
washer fluid fluid.
S11AX01
If you fill the reservoir tank with a fluid with
CAUTION a different concentration from the one
Never use engine coolant as washer used previously, purge the old fluid from
fluid because it could cause paint the piping between the reservoir tank and
damage. washer nozzles by operating the washer
for a certain period of time. Otherwise, if
the concentration of the fluid remaining in
Windshield washer fluid warning light the piping is too low for the outside
(type A) temperature, it may freeze and block the
nozzles.
CAUTION
. Adjust the washer fluid concen-
tration appropriately for the out-
side temperature. If the concen-
tration is inappropriate, sprayed 11
washer fluid may freeze on the
windshield and obstruct your
view, and the fluid may freeze in
Remove the washer tank filler cap, then the reservoir tank.
add windshield washer fluid.
. State or local regulations on
Windshield washer fluid warning light
volatile organic compounds may
(type B) restrict the use of methanol, a
common windshield washer anti-
– CONTINUED –

(444,1)
11-30 Maintenance and service/Replacement of wiper blades
freeze additive. Washer fluids Replacement of wiper blades wiper blades.

containing non-methanol anti- S11AZ . While removing the wiper blades
freeze agents should be used Grease, wax, insects, or other material on from the wiper arms, do not
only if they provide cold weather the windshield or the wiper blade results in return the wiper arms to the
protection without damaging jerky wiper operation and streaking on the original positions. Otherwise,
your vehicle’s paint, wiper blades glass. If you cannot remove the streaks the windshield surface may be
or washer system. after operating the windshield washer or if scratched.
the wiper operation is jerky, clean the outer . When returning the raised wiper
surface of the windshield and rear window arms to the original positions,
using a sponge or soft cloth with a neutral carefully return the wiper arms
detergent or mild-abrasive cleaner. Do not, on the windshield by hand. You
however, use detergent to clean the blade should not return the wiper arms
rubbers. Use only a sponge or soft cloth to the windshield only by the
(and no neutral detergent or mild abrasive return spring. Otherwise, the wi-
cleaner) when you clean the blade rub- per arms may be deformed and/or
bers. If you wipe the rubber of the blade the windshield surface may be
strongly, the black coating component will scratched.
peel off, which will cause the wiper to . When you are going to raise the
judder. Also, after wiping it off, check that passenger-side wiper arm, first
the rubber has not come loose. After raise the driver-side wiper arm.
cleaning the window glass and wiper blade Otherwise, the passenger-side
rubbers, be sure to rinse them with clean wiper assembly and driver-side
water. Rinse the window until the water wiper assembly will touch each
does not form beads on the glass. This other, possibly resulting in
indicates that the glass is clean. scratches.
CAUTION . Return the passenger-side wiper
arm to its original position before
. Do not clean the wiper blades returning the driver-side wiper
with gasoline or a solvent, such arm to its original position. Other-
as paint thinner or benzine. This wise, the passenger-side wiper
will cause deterioration of the assembly and driver-side wiper

(445,1)
Maintenance and service/Replacement of wiper blades 11-31
assembly will touch each other,

possibly resulting in scratches.
If you cannot eliminate the streaking even

after following this method, replace the
wiper blades using the following proce-
dures.
& Windshield wiper blade as-

sembly
S11AZ01
1. Raise the wiper arm off the windshield.
1) Lock knob 3. When installing the wiper blade as-

2. Hold the wiper blade connection by sembly, align it with the wiper arm connec-
hand, push the lock knob to release the tion part and then slide it in the opposite
lock, and then pull out the wiper blade direction of removal to install. After instal-
assembly. ling the wiper blade assembly, check that
the connection part is locked completely.
NOTE 4. Hold the wiper arm by hand and slowly
Do not use a hard object to push the lower it in position.
lock knob. The lock knob may be
scratched.
11
CAUTION
Hold the wiper arm when replacing
the wiper blade. Holding the wiper
blade, may result in blade deforma-
tion.
– CONTINUED –

(446,1)
& Windshield wiper blade rubber

S11AZ05
Replace the wiper blade rubber according to the following procedure.
2. Pull the end of the wiper blade rubber

through the slit to remove it.
1) Slit
1. Pull the wiper blade rubber from the

right side in the order of (1), (2) and (3) until
the slit on the wiper blade can be seen
position.
3. Insert a new wiper blade rubber into

the slit. Do not insert the wiper blade
rubber into the wrong slit.

(447,1)
Maintenance and service/Replacement of wiper blades 11-33
& Rear window wiper blade as-

sembly
S11AZ03
1. Raise the wiper arm off the rear
window.
4. Insert the wiper blade rubber into the 3. Pull the wiper blade assembly toward
slit, then return to the tip of the position. you to remove it from the wiper arm.
5. Check that the wiper blade rubber is 4. Install the wiper blade assembly to the
fixed properly. If wiper blade rubbers are wiper arm. Make sure that it locks in place.
not attached properly, they may scratch 5. Hold the wiper arm by hand and slowly
the windshield. 2. Turn the wiper blade assembly coun-
lower it in position.
terclockwise.
6. Attach the wiper blade.
NOTE
It may be difficult to perform the wiper 11
blade rubber replacement. We recom-
mend that you contact your SUBARU
dealer for wiper blade rubber replace-
ment if necessary.
– CONTINUED –

(448,1)
& Rear window wiper blade 2. Pull the blade rubber assembly out of
rubber the plastic support.
S11AZ04
4. Align the claws of the plastic support

with the grooves in the blade rubber
1) Metal spines assembly, then slide the blade rubber
1. Pull out the end of the blade rubber
assembly into place.
assembly to unlock it from the plastic 3. If the new blade rubber is not provided
support. with two metal spines, remove the metal
spines from the old blade rubber and install
them in the new blade rubber.
Securely retain both ends of the rubber

with the stoppers on the plastic support

(449,1)
Maintenance and service/Battery 11-35
ends. If the rubber is not retained properly, Battery . To lessen the risk of sparks,
the wiper may scratch the rear window S11BA remove rings, metal watchbands,
glass. and other metal jewelry. Never
5. Install the wiper blade assembly to the WARNING allow metal tools to contact the
wiper arm. Make sure that it locks in place. positive battery terminal and any-
. Before beginning work on or near thing connected to it WHILE you
6. Hold the wiper arm by hand and slowly
any battery, be sure to extinguish are at the same time in contact
lower it in position.
all cigarettes, matches, and light- with any other metallic portion of
ers. Never expose a battery to an the vehicle because a short cir-
open flame or electric sparks. cuit will result.
Batteries give off a gas which is
highly flammable and explosive. . Keep everyone including children
away from the battery.
. For safety, in case an explosion
does occur, wear eye protection . Charge the battery in a well-
or shield your eyes when working ventilated area.
near any battery. Never lean over . Battery posts, terminals and re-
a battery. lated accessories contain lead
. Do not let battery fluid contact and lead compounds, chemicals
eyes, skin, fabrics, or paint be- known to the State of California
cause battery fluid is a corrosive to cause cancer and reproductive
acid. If battery fluid gets on your harm. Batteries also contain
skin or in your eyes, immediately other chemicals known to the
flush the area with water thor- State of California to cause can-
cer. Wash hands after handling.
oughly. Seek medical help imme- 11
diately if acid has entered the
eyes.
If battery fluid is accidentally
swallowed, immediately drink a
large amount of milk or water,
and seek medical attention im-
mediately.
– CONTINUED –

(450,1)
11-36 Maintenance and service/Fuses
CAUTION Fuses
S11BB
Never use more than 10 amperes
when charging the battery because CAUTION
it will shorten battery life.
Never replace a fuse with one having
a higher rating or with material other
than a fuse because serious damage
or a fire could result.
NOTE
Fuse rating and using circuit are de-
1) Cap scribed on each behind the fuse box
2) Upper level cover.
3) Lower level
The fuses are designed to melt during an
It is unnecessary to periodically check the overload to prevent damage to the wiring
battery fluid level or periodically refill with harness and electrical equipment. The
distilled water. fuses are located in two fuse boxes.
However, if the battery fluid level is below
the lower level, remove the cap. Fill to the
upper level with distilled water.
For “SUBARU STARLINK Safety and
Security” without navigation system:
When the vehicle battery is discharged or
replaced, certain internal settings can be
restored only by pairing the vehicle to a
smartphone via Bluetooth, or by visiting a
SUBARU dealer. Until those internal set-
tings are restored, certain convenience
features, including the “Service Appoint-
ment Scheduler,” may be unavailable.

(451,1)
Maintenance and service/Fuses 11-37
One is located under the instrument panel If any lights, accessories or other electrical
behind the fuse box cover on the driver’s controls do not operate, inspect the corre-
seat side. To remove the cover, pull it out. sponding fuse. If a fuse has blown, replace
it.
1. Turn the ignition switch to the “LOCK”/
“OFF” position and turn off all electrical
accessories.
2. Remove the cover.
3. Determine which fuse may be blown.
Look at the back side of each fuse box
cover.
The fuse puller is stored in the main fuse

box in the engine compartment.
Pinch the upper part of the fuse puller
1) Spare fuses when removing it from the main fuse box.
The other one (main fuse box) is housed in
the engine compartment. Also, the spare
fuses are stored in the fuse box cover.
11
4. Pull out the fuse with the fuse puller.
5. Inspect the fuse. If it has blown,
replace it with a spare fuse of the same
rating.
6. If the same fuse blows again, this
1) Good indicates that its system has a problem.
2) Blown Contact your SUBARU dealer for repairs.

(452,1)
11-38 Maintenance and service/Installation of accessories
Installation of accessories Replacing bulbs & Headlights (models with LED

S11BD S11BE headlights)
S11BE18
Always consult your SUBARU dealer
before installing fog lights or any other
WARNING
electrical equipment in your vehicle. Such
accessories may cause the electronic Bulbs may become very hot while
system to malfunction if they are incor- illuminated. Before replacing bulbs,
rectly installed or if they are not suited for turn off the lights and wait until the
the vehicle. bulbs cool down. Otherwise, there is
a risk of sustaining a burn injury.
CAUTION
Replace any bulb only with a new
bulb of the specified wattage. Using
a bulb of different wattage could LED headlight warning light (type B)
result in a fire. For the specified The LED headlight warning light illumi-
wattage of each bulb, refer to “Bulb nates if the LED headlights malfunction.
chart” �12-9. Have your vehicle inspected at a SUBARU
dealer as soon as possible.
NOTE
For models with type B combination
meter, if SRH is malfunctioning, the
SRH OFF indicator light appears on the
combination meter when the ignition
switch is in the “ON” position. It
indicates that SRH has been deacti-
vated. Contact a SUBARU dealer for an
inspection.

(453,1)
Maintenance and service/Replacing bulbs 11-39
& Headlights (models with ha-

logen headlights)
S11BE47
CAUTION
Halogen headlight bulbs become
very hot while in use. If you touch
the bulb surface with bare hands or
greasy gloves, fingerprints or
grease on the bulb surface will
develop into hot spots, causing the
bulb to break. If there are finger
prints or grease on the bulb surface,
wipe them away with a soft cloth Right-hand side
moistened with alcohol. 1. Use a screwdriver to undo the clips on
the air intake duct, then remove the air
intake duct.
NOTE
. If headlight aiming is required, con-
sult your SUBARU dealer for proper
adjustment of the headlight aim.
. It may be difficult to replace the
bulbs. Have the bulbs replaced by your
SUBARU dealer if necessary. 11
Perform the following steps to replace the
bulbs. Left-hand side
2. Use a screwdriver to remove the
secured clip of the washer tank. To make
it easy to access the bulb, turn the neck of
the washer fluid filler pipe as illustrated.
– CONTINUED –

(454,1)
11-40 Maintenance and service/Replacing bulbs
& Front turn signal light & Rear combination lights

S11BE03 S11BE05
It may be difficult to replace the bulbs.
Have the bulbs replaced by your SUBARU
dealer if necessary.
& Parking light

S11BE02
Have the bulbs replaced by your SUBARU
dealer if necessary.
& Front fog light (if equipped)

S11BE04
1) Low beam bulb Have the bulbs replaced by your SUBARU
2) High beam bulb dealer if necessary. 1. Remove the covers.
3. Disconnect the electrical connector
from the bulb and remove the bulb from
the headlight assembly by turning it
counterclockwise.
4. Replace the bulb with new one. At this
time, use care not to touch the bulb
surface.
5. To install the bulb to the headlight
assembly, turn it clockwise until it clicks.
6. Reconnect the electrical connector.
7. Install the air intake duct with clips
(right-hand side).
8. Set the washer fluid filler pipe to the
original place and secure it by clip (left- 2. Using a Phillips screwdriver, remove
hand side). the upper and lower screws that secure the
rear combination light assembly.

(455,1)
3. Slide the rear combination light as- 1) Tail light 1) Guide pins
sembly rearward and remove it from the 2) Rear side marker light 2) Catches
vehicle. 3) Rear turn signal light 3) Clips
4. Remove the bulb socket from the rear 7. Put the rear combination light assem-
combination light assembly by turning it bly into place while aligning the 2 guide
counterclockwise. pins and catches with the guide holes and
5. Pull the bulb out of the bulb socket and clips on the vehicle.
replace it with a new one.
6. Set the bulb socket into the rear
combination light assembly and turn it
clockwise until it locks. 11
– CONTINUED –

(456,1)
& Backup light

S11BE06
8. Tighten the upper and lower screws. 2. For left side light, turn the bulb socket
9. Reinstall the covers. 1. Insert a flat-head screwdriver into the clockwise and remove it.
light cover or rear gate light (if equipped) For right side light, turn the bulb socket
as shown in the illustration, then pry it off counterclockwise and remove it.
the rear gate trim.
3. Pull the bulb out of the bulb socket and

replace it with a new one.

(457,1)
4. For left side light, turn the bulb socket & Vanity mirror light (if
counterclockwise and install it. equipped)
For right side light, turn the bulb socket S11BE34
clockwise and install it. CAUTION

5. Install the light cover or rear gate light
(if equipped) on the rear gate trim. Replacing the bulb could cause
burns since the bulb may be very
& License plate light hot. Have the bulb replaced by your
S11BE07 SUBARU dealer.
& Dome light and cargo area

light
2. Turn the bulb socket counterclockwise S11BE21
and pull out the socket.

3. Pull the bulb out of the socket.
4. Install a new bulb.
5. Reinstall the bulb socket and the
license plate light cover.
& Map light

S11BE09
1. The license plate lights must be
pushed outwards, and then pulled out to CAUTION 11
be removed.
Replacing the bulb could cause
burns since the bulb may be very
hot. Have the bulb replaced by your Dome light
SUBARU dealer.
– CONTINUED –

(458,1)
& Adjusting headlight aim ! Headlight aim adjustment

S11BE5702
(models with LED headlights)
S11BE57
Cargo area light

1. Remove the lens by prying the edge of Right-hand side
the lens with a flat-head screwdriver. 1) Adjustment screw A 1. Use a screwdriver to undo the clips on
2. Pull the bulb out of the socket. 2) Adjustment screw B the air intake duct, and then remove the air
3. Install a new bulb. intake duct.
! Before checking the headlight aim-
4. Reinstall the lens.
ing
S11BE5701
& Other bulbs 1. Make sure the vehicle has a full tank of
S11BE29 gasoline and the area around the headlight
is not deformed.
Have the bulbs replaced by your
SUBARU dealer if necessary. 2. Park the vehicle on level ground.
3. Sit in the driver’s seat.
4. Bounce the vehicle several times.
1) Adjustment direction mark

(459,1)
Maintenance and service/Replacing key battery 11-45
2. Turn the screw A clockwise or counter- Replacing key battery swallow them.
clockwise to adjust it. S11BK . There is a danger of an explosion
Remember the direction of the rotation and The access key fob/transmitter battery if the battery is incorrectly re-
number of rotations. may be discharged under the following placed. Replace only with the
conditions. same or equivalent type of the
. The operation of the keyless access battery.
function is unstable. . Batteries should not be exposed
. The operating distance of the remote to excessive heat such as bright
keyless entry system is unstable. sunlight, fire or the like.
. The transmitter does not operate prop-
erly when used within the standard dis- NOTE
tance.
. Replace only with the same or
Replace the battery with a new one. equivalent type of battery recom-
mended by the manufacturer.
& Safety precautions . Dispose of used batteries according
S11BK04 to local laws.
3. Turn screw B the same number of turns CAUTION . Mount the battery in the correct
and in the same direction as step 2. orientation to prevent fluid leakage.
. Do not let dust, oil or water get on Be careful not to bend the terminals. It
NOTE or in the access key fob/transmit- may result in a malfunction.
ter when replacing battery. . It is recommended that the battery
. If the headlight aim cannot be ad-
. Before replacing the battery, re- be replaced by a SUBARU dealer.
justed, contact your SUBARU dealer. 11
move any static electricity. . Use a new battery.
. To inspect of the headlight aim
. After replacing the battery, confirm
position, consult a SUBARU dealer. . Be careful not to touch or damage that the transmitter functions properly.
the printed circuit board in the
access key fob/transmitter when
replacing the battery.
. Be careful not to allow children to
touch the battery and any re-
moved parts; children could
– CONTINUED –

(460,1)
11-46 Maintenance and service/Replacing key battery
& Replacing battery of access

key fob
S11BK01
CAUTION
When removing or reinstalling the
access key fob cover, make sure that
the plastic part does not come off or
become misaligned.
Battery: Button battery CR2032 or

equivalent
2. Wrap a flat-head screwdriver with vinyl 4. Insert a new battery with its positive (+)
tape or a cloth, and insert it in the gap to side facing upward as shown in the figure.
remove the cover.
1) Release button
2) Emergency key
1. Take out the emergency key.

5. Attach the cover to the access key fob
3. Take out the battery using a flat-head by fitting the projections and recesses
screwdriver with vinyl tape or a cloth. together.

(461,1)
Maintenance and service/Replacing key battery 11-47
& Replacing transmitter battery

S11BK02
Battery: Button battery CR1620 or
equivalent
2. Remove the transmitter case from the 1) Negative (−) side facing up
key head. 4. Replace the old battery with a new
battery making sure to install the new
1. Wrap a flat-head screwdriver with vinyl battery with the negative (−) side facing up.
tape or a cloth. Open the key head using a 5. Put together the transmitter case by
flat-head screwdriver. fitting the hooks on the case.
6. Reinstall the transmitter case in the
key head.
7. Refit the removed half of the key head.
11
3. Open the transmitter case by releasing

the hooks.

(462,1)
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————

(463,1)
Specifications
Specifications........................................................ 12-2 Electrical system .................................................. 12-7
S12
Dimensions........................................................... 12-2 Tires..................................................................... 12-8
Engine .................................................................. 12-3 Temporary spare tires ........................................... 12-8
Fuel ...................................................................... 12-3 Brake disc ............................................................ 12-8
Engine oil ............................................................. 12-4 Bulb chart.............................................................. 12-9
Manual transmission, front differential and rear Safety precautions................................................ 12-9
differential gear oil .............................................. 12-6 Bulb chart .......................................................... 12-10
Fluids ................................................................... 12-6 Vehicle identification .......................................... 12-13
Engine coolant...................................................... 12-7
12

(464,1)
12-2 Specifications/Specifications
Specifications
S12AA
These specifications are subject to change without notice.
& Dimensions
S12AA01
in (mm)
Item
Overall length 176.5 (4,485)
Models with rear gate light 71.7 (1,820)
Overall width
Models without rear gate light 71.0 (1,800)
Overall height 63.6 (1,615)
Wheel base 104.9 (2,665)
Front 61.0 (1,550)
Tread
Rear 61.2 (1,555)
Ground clearance*1 8.7 (220)
*1: Measured with vehicle empty

(465,1)
Specifications/Specifications 12-3
& Engine
S12AA02
Engine model FB20 (2.0 L, DOHC, non-turbo) FB25 (2.5 L, DOHC, non-turbo)
Engine type Horizontally opposed, liquid cooled 4 cylinder, Horizontally opposed, liquid cooled 4 cylinder,
4 stroke direct injection gasoline engine 4-stroke direct injection gasoline engine
Displacement cu-in (cc) 122 (1,995) 152 (2,498)
Bore 6 Stroke in (mm) 3.31 6 3.54 (84.0 6 90.0) 3.70 6 3.54 (94.0 6 90.0)
Compression ratio 12.5 : 1 12.0 : 1
Firing order 1–3–2–4 1–3–2–4
& Fuel
S12AA08
Fuel requirement Fuel tank capacity

Unleaded gasoline with 87 AKI (90 RON) or higher 16.6 US gal (63 liters, 13.9 Imp gal)
For more details, refer to “Fuel” �7-3.
12
– CONTINUED –

(466,1)
& Engine oil

S12AA12
For the checking, adding and replacing procedure or other details, refer to “Engine oil” �11-8.
NOTE
The procedure for changing the engine oil and oil filter should be performed by a properly-trained expert. It is recommended
that you have this service performed by your SUBARU dealer.
! Approved engine oil
S12AA1201
Always use the SUBARU approved engine oil. For further details, please contact your SUBARU dealer.
If the approved engine oil is unavailable, use the alternative engine oil described on the next page.

(467,1)
! Alternative engine oil

S12AA1202
If the SUBARU approved oil is unavailable, the following alternative oil can be used.
NOTE
Each quantity indicated here is only a guideline. The necessary quantity for replacement may differ slightly depending on the
temperature and other factors.
Oil grade SAE viscosity No. and Engine oil capacity

applicable temperature
– Adding the oil from low level to
0W-20 synthetic oil is the required oil full level:
for optimum engine performance and 1.1 US qt (1.0 liters, 0.9 Imp qt)
protection. Conventional oil may be
used if synthetic oil is unavailable. – Changing the oil and oil filter:
2.0 L engine models: 4.7 US qt
*: If 0W-20 synthetic oil is not available, (4.4 liters, 3.9 Imp qt)
5W-30 conventional oil may be used 2.5 L engine models: 4.4 US qt
if replenishment is needed but should (4.2 liters, 3.7 Imp qt)
be changed to 0W-20 synthetic oil at
the next oil change.
or
API (American Petroleum Insti-

tute) classification SN with the ILSAC (International Lubricant
words “RESOURCE CONSER- Specification Advisory Commit-
tee) GF-5 or GF-6A, which can
VING”, SN PLUS with the words be identified with the ILSAC
“RESOURCE CONSERVING” or certification mark (Starburst
SP with the words “RESOURCE mark)
CONSERVING” 12
– CONTINUED –

(468,1)
& Manual transmission, front differential and rear differential gear oil
S12AA13
Oil Manual transmission oil Front differential gear oil (CVT models) Rear differential gear oil
. SUBARU Extra MT*3 . SUBARU Extra MT*3
Oil grade . API classification . API classification GL-5 API classification GL-5 (75W-90)
GL-5 (75W-90)*4 (75W-90)
Oil capacity*1 3.5 US qt (3.3 liters, 2.9 Imp qt) 1.4 US qt (1.3 liters, 1.1 Imp qt) 0.8 US qt (0.8 liters, 0.7 Imp qt)
Remarks*2 “Manual transmission oil” �11-14 “Front differential gear oil (CVT models) and rear differential gear oil” �11-15
*1: The indicated oil quantity is only a guideline. The necessary quantity for replacement may differ slightly depending on the temperature and other
factors. After refilling the gearbox with oil, the oil level should be checked.
*2: For more details about maintenance and service, refer to the indicated section.
*3: The vehicle is filled at the factory with this type of oil.
*4: You may use this type of manual transmission oil. However, using this type of oil will detract from driveability and fuel efficiency.
& Fluids
S12AA10
Fluid Fluid type*1 Fluid capacity*2 Remarks*3

2.0 L engine models:
Continuously variable transmission Consult your SUBARU dealer. 10.8 US qt (10.2 liters, 9.0 Imp qt) “Continuously variable trans-
fluid (CVT models) 2.5 L engine models: mission fluid” �11-15
12.0 US qt (11.3 liters, 10.0 Imp qt)
Brake fluid FMVSS No. 116, DOT 3 or DOT 4 brake — “Brake fluid” �11-15
fluid
FMVSS No. 116, DOT 3 or DOT 4 brake “Clutch fluid (MT models)” �11-
Clutch fluid (MT models) fluid — 16
*1: Use one of the indicated types of fluid.

*2: The indicated fluid quantity is only a guideline. The necessary quantity for replacement may differ slightly depending on the temperature and other
factors.
*3: For more details about maintenance and service, refer to the indicated section.

(469,1)
& Engine coolant

S12AA11
Vehicle model Coolant capacity Coolant type

MT models 8.0 US qt (7.6 liters, 6.7 Imp qt)
2.0 L engine models 8.2 US qt (7.8 liters, 6.9 Imp qt) SUBARU SUPER COOLANT
CVT models
2.5 L engine models 8.8 US qt (8.3 liters, 7.3 Imp qt)
The indicated coolant quantity is only a guideline. The necessary quantity for replacement may differ slightly depending on the temperature and other
factors. For more details about maintenance and service, refer to “Cooling system” �11-10.
& Electrical system

S12AA03
Models without Auto Start Stop system 75D23L

Battery type
Models with Auto Start Stop system Q-85
2.0 L engine models 12 V-130 A
Alternator
2.5 L engine models 12 V-150 A
2.0 L engine models DILKAR7B8 (NGK)
Spark plugs
2.5 L engine models DILKAR7Q8 (NGK)
12
– CONTINUED –

(470,1)
& Tires
S12AA05
Tire size P225/60R17 98H 225/55R18 98H

Wheel size 17 6 7 J 18 6 7 J
Front 33 psi (230 kPa, 2.3 kgf/cm2)
Pressure
Rear 32 psi (220 kPa, 2.2 kgf/cm2)
Wheel nut tightening torque 89 lbf·ft (120 N·m, 12 kgf·m)*1
*1: This torque is equivalent to applying approximately 88 to 110 lbf (40 to 50 kgf) at the end of the wheel nut wrench. If you have tightened the wheel nuts
by yourself, have the tightening torque checked at the nearest automotive service facility as soon as possible. For the wheel nut tightening procedure,
refer to “Changing a flat tire” �9-5.
& Temporary spare tires

S12AA15
Temporary spare tire size T145/80 D17

Temporary spare tire inflation pressure 60 psi (420 kPa, 4.2 kgf/cm2)
(recommended cold tire inflation pressure)
& Brake disc

S12AA18
If you need information on the usage limit value of brake discs and the method for measuring them, we recommend that you consult your
SUBARU dealer.

(471,1)
Specifications/Bulb chart 12-9
Bulb chart
S12AC
S12AC03
WARNING
Bulbs may become very hot while
illuminated. Before replacing bulbs,
turn off the lights and wait until the
bulbs cool down. Otherwise, there is
a risk of sustaining a burn injury.
CAUTION
Replace any bulb only with a new
bulb of the specified wattage. Using
a bulb of different wattage could
result in a fire.
12
– CONTINUED –

(472,1)
12-10 Specifications/Bulb chart
& Bulb chart

S12AC04
NOTE
Lights indicated by letters are the LED (Light Emitting Diode) type. Consult your SUBARU dealer for replacement.

(473,1)
Specifications/Bulb chart 12-11
Wattage Bulb No.

1) Front turn signal light 12 V-8/28 W 7444NA
2) High beam headlight (models with halogen headlight) 12 V-60 W HB3
Low beam headlight (models with halogen headlight) 12 V-55 W H11
3) Vanity mirror light (if equipped) 12 V-2 W —
4) Map light 12 V-8 W —
5) Dome light 12 V-8 W —
6) Front side marker light (models with halogen headlight) 12 V-5 W W5W
7) Parking light/Front turn signal light (models with halogen 12 V-8/28 W 7444NA
headlight)/Front position light
8) Front fog light (if equipped) 12 V-19 W H16
9) Cargo area light 12 V-5 W W5W
10) Backup light 12 V-21 W W21W
11) Rear side marker light 12 V-5 W W5W
12) Tail light 12 V-5 W W5W
13) Rear turn signal light 12 V-21 W WY21W
14) License plate light 12 V-5 W W5W
12
– CONTINUED –

(474,1)
12-12 Specifications/Bulb chart

Wattage Bulb No.
A) Low and high beam headlight (models with LED headlight) — —
B) Side turn signal light (if equipped) — —
C) Front fog light (if equipped)/Daytime running light (if equipped) — —
D) Front position light (if equipped)/Daytime running light (if — —
equipped)
E) Front side marker light (models with LED head light) — —
F) High-mounted stop light — —
G) Stop light — —
H) Rear gate light (if equipped) — —

(475,1)
Specifications/Vehicle identification 12-13

1) Vehicle identification number (under the
Vehicle identification floor carpet of the right-hand front seat)
S12AD 2) Emission control label
3) Tire inflation pressure label (vehicle
placard)
4) Certification label
5) Vehicle identification number
6) Model number label
7) Fuel label
8) Air conditioner label
12

(476,1)
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————

(477,1)
Consumer information and Reporting safety defects

For U.S.A. .............................................................. 13-2 Vehicle load limit – how to determine ...............13-11
S13
Tire information..................................................... 13-2 Calculating total and load capacities varying
Tire labeling.......................................................... 13-2 seating configurations ..................................... 13-12
Recommended tire inflation pressure .................... 13-4 Uniform tire quality grading standards............. 13-14
Glossary of tire terminology.................................. 13-5 TREADWEAR...................................................... 13-15
Tire care – maintenance and safety practices ...... 13-10 TRACTION AA, A, B, C........................................ 13-15
Determining compatibility of tire and vehicle TEMPERATURE A, B, C....................................... 13-15
load capacities.................................................. 13-10 Reporting safety defects (U.S.A.) ...................... 13-16
Adverse safety consequences of overloading on How to contact Transport Canada in order to
handling and stopping and on tires ................... 13-10 report a safety concern relating to
Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit............ 13-11 the vehicle (Canada)........................................ 13-16
13

(478,1)
13-2 Consumer information and Reporting safety defects/For U.S.A.
For U.S.A. Tire information Example:

S13AA S13AB
The following information has been & Tire labeling

S13AB01
compiled according to Code of Many markings (e.g. Tire size, Tire
Federal Regulations “Title 49, Part Identification Number or TIN) are (1) P = Certain tire type used on
575”. placed on the sidewall of a tire by light duty vehicles such as passen-
tire manufacturers. These markings ger cars
can provide you with useful infor- (2) Section Width in millimeters
mation on the tire. (3) Aspect Ratio (= section height
! Tire size 7 section width).
Your vehicle comes equipped with
S13AB0101
(4) R = Radial Construction
P-Metric tire size. It is important to (5) Rim diameter in inches
understand the sizing system in ! Load and Speed Rating
selecting the proper tire for your Descriptions
vehicles. Here is a brief review of S13AB010102
The load and speed rating descrip-
the tire sizing system with a break-
tions will appear following the size
down of its individual elements.
designation.
! P Metric They provide two important facts
S13AB010101
With the P-Metric system, Section about the tire. First, the number
Width is measured in millimeters. designation is its load index. Sec-
To convert millimeters into inches, ond, the letter designation indicates
divide by 25.4. The Aspect Ratio the tire’s speed rating.
(Section Height divided by Section
Width) helps provide more dimen-
sional information about the tire
size.

(479,1)
Consumer information and Reporting safety defects/Tire information 13-3
Example: WARNING individual elements.

. Speed ratings apply only to
the tire, not to the vehicle.
(6) Load Index: A numerical code Putting a speed rated tire on (1) DOT symbol*
which specifies the maximum load any vehicle does not mean (2) Manufacturer’s Identification
a tire can carry at the speed the vehicle can be operated Mark
indicated by its speed symbol, at at the tire’s rated speed.
(3) Tire Size Code
maximum inflation pressure. . The speed rating is void if
the tires are worn out, da- (4) Tire Type Code
For example, “90” means 1,323 lbs (5) Date of Manufacture
maged, repaired, retreaded,
(600 kg), “89” means 1,278 lbs (580 The first two figures identify the
or otherwise altered from
kg). week, starting with “01” to represent
their original condition. If
WARNING tires are repaired, re- the first full week of the calendar
treaded, or otherwise al- year; the second two figures repre-
Load indices apply only to the tered, they may not be sui- sent the year. For example, 0101
tire, not to the vehicle. Putting table for original equipment means the 1st week of 2001.
a load rated tire on any vehicle tire designed loads and *: The DOT symbol certifies that the
does not mean the vehicle can speeds. tire conforms to applicable Fed-
be loaded up to the tire’s rated eral Motor Vehicle Safety Stan-
load. ! Tire Identification Number dards.
(TIN) ! Other markings
(7) Speed Rating: An alphabetical S13AB0102 S13AB0103
system describing a tire’s capability Tire Identification Number (TIN) is The following makings are also
to travel at established and prede- marked on the intended outboard placed on the sidewall. 13
termined speeds. sidewall. The TIN is composed of
For example, “V” means 149 mph four groups. Here is a brief review of
(240 km/h) the TIN with a breakdown of its
– CONTINUED –

(480,1)
13-4 Consumer information and Reporting safety defects/Tire information
! Maximum permissible infla- BELTED RADIAL” ! Vehicle placard

S13AB0202
tion pressure ! Construction
S13AB010301
The maximum cold inflation pres- The generic name of each cord
S13AB010304
sure to which this tire may be material used in the plies (both
inflated. For example, “300 kPa sidewall and tread area) of this tire.
(44 PSI) MAX. PRESS”
For example, “PLIES: TREAD 2
! Maximum load rating STEEL + 2 POLYESTER SIDE-
S13AB010302
The load rating at the maximum WALL 2 POLYESTER”
permissible weight load for this tire. ! Uniform Tire Quality Grad-
For example, “MAX. LOAD 580 kg ing (UTQG)
(1,279 LBS) @ 300 kPa (44 PSI) S13AB010305
For details, refer to “Uniform tire
MAX. PRESS.” quality grading standards” �13-14. The vehicle placard is attached to
WARNING
the driver’s side door pillar.
& Recommended tire inflation Example:
Maximum load rating applies pressure
S13AB02
only to the tire, not to the ! Recommended cold tire in-
vehicle. Putting a load rated flation pressure
tire on any vehicle does not S13AB0201
mean the vehicle can be For recommended cold tire inflation

loaded up to the tire’s rated pressure for your vehicle’s tires,
load. refer to “Tires” �12-8.
! Construction type
S13AB010303
Applicable construction of this tire.
For example, “TUBELESS STEEL

(481,1)
The vehicle placard shows original adjust the tire pressures to the steel wires, wrapped or reinforced
tire size, recommended cold tire specific values. Driving even a short by ply cords and that is shaped to fit
inflation pressure on each tire at distance warms up the tires and the rim.
maximum loaded vehicle weight, increases the tire pressures. Also, . Bead separation
seating capacity and loading infor- the tire pressures are affected by A breakdown of the bond between
mation. the outside temperature. It is best to components in the bead.
! Adverse safety conse- check tire pressure outdoors before . Bias ply tire
quences of under-inflation driving the vehicle. When a tire A pneumatic tire in which the ply
S13AB0203 becomes warm, the air inside it cords that extend to the beads are
Driving at high speeds with exces-
expands, causing the tire pressure laid at alternate angles substantially
sively low tire pressures can cause
to increase. Be careful not to mis- less than 90 degrees to the center-
the tires to flex severely and to
takenly release air from a warm tire line of the tread.
rapidly become hot. A sharp in-
to reduce its pressure. . Carcass
crease in temperature could cause
tread separation, and failure of the The tire structure, except tread and
& Glossary of tire terminology sidewall rubber which, when in-
tire(s). Possible resulting loss of . Accessory weight
S13AB03
vehicle control could lead to an flated, bears the load.

The combined weight (in excess of . Chunking
accident. those standard items which may be The breaking away of pieces of the
! Measuring and adjusting air replaced) of automatic transmis- tread or sidewall.
pressure to achieve proper sion, power steering, power brakes, . Cold tire pressure
inflation power windows, power seats, radio,
S13AB0204 The pressure in a tire that has been
Check and, if necessary, adjust the and heater, to the extent that these driven less than 1 mile or has been
pressure of each tire (including the items are available as factory-in- standing for three hours or more.
spare) at least once a month and stalled equipment (whether in- . Cord 13
before any long journey. Check the stalled or not).
The strands forming the plies in the
tire pressures when the tires are . Bead
tire.
cold. Use a pressure gauge to The part of the tire that is made of
– CONTINUED –

(482,1)
. Cord separation . Innerliner separation sure to which a tire may be inflated.

The parting of cords from adjacent The parting of the innerliner from . Maximum load rating
rubber compounds. cord material in the carcass. The load rating for a tire at the
. Cracking . Intended outboard sidewall maximum permissible inflation
Any parting within the tread, side- (1) The sidewall that contains a pressure for that tire.
wall, or inner liner of the tire whitewall, bears white lettering . Maximum loaded vehicle weight
extending to cord material. or bears manufacturer, brand, The sum of:
. Curb weight and/or model name molding that (a) Curb weight
The weight of a motor vehicle with is higher or deeper than the (b) Accessory weight
standard equipment including the same molding on the other side- (c) Vehicle capacity weight
maximum capacity of fuel, oil and wall of the tire, or (d) Production options weight
coolant, and if so equipped, air (2) The outward facing sidewall . Maximum permissible inflation
conditioning and additional weight of an asymmetrical tire that has a pressure
optional engine. particular side that must always The maximum cold inflation pres-
. Extra load tire face outward when mounting on sure to which a tire may be inflated.
A tire designed to operate at higher a vehicle. . Measuring rim
. Light truck (LT) tire The rim on which a tire is fitted for
loads and higher inflation pressure
than the corresponding standard A tire designated by its manufac- physical dimension requirements.
tire. turer as primarily intended for use . Normal occupant weight
. Groove on lightweight trucks or multipur- 150 lbs (68 kg) times the number of
The space between two adjacent pose passenger vehicles. occupants specified in the second
. Load rating column of Table 1 that is appended
tread ribs.
. Innerliner The maximum load that a tire is to the end of this section.
The layer(s) forming the inside sur- rated to carry for a given inflation . Occupant distribution
face of a tubeless tire that contains pressure. Distribution of occupants in a vehi-
. Maximum inflation pressure cle as specified in the third column
the inflating medium within the tire.
The maximum cold inflation pres- of Table 1 that is appended to the

(483,1)
end of this section. . Pneumatic tire . Reinforced tire

. Open splice A mechanical device made of rub- A tire designed to operate at higher
Any parting at any junction of tread, ber, chemicals, fabric and steel or loads and at higher inflation pres-
sidewall, or innerliner that extends other materials, that, when sures than the corresponding stan-
to cord material. mounted on an automotive wheel, dard tire.
. Outer diameter provides the traction and contains . Rim
The overall diameter of an inflated the gas or fluid that sustains the A metal support for a tire or a tire
new tire. load. and tube assembly upon which the
. Overall width . Production options weight tire beads are seated.
The linear distance between the The combined weight of those . Rim diameter
exteriors of the sidewalls of an installed regular production options Nominal diameter of the bead seat.
inflated tire, including elevations weighing over 5.1 lbs (2.3 kg) in . Rim size designation
due to labeling, decorations, or excess of those standard items Rim diameter and width.
protective bands or ribs. which they replace, not previously . Rim type designation
. Passenger car tire considered in curb weight or acces- The industry of manufacturer’s des-
A tire intended for use on passen- sory weight, including heavy duty ignation for a rim by style or code.
ger cars, multipurpose passenger brakes, ride levelers, roof rack, . Rim width
vehicles, and trucks, that have a heavy duty battery, and special trim. Nominal distance between rim
gross vehicle weight rating (GVWR) . Radial ply tire flanges.
of 10,000 lbs (4,535 kg) or less. A pneumatic tire in which the ply . Section width
. Ply cords that extend to the beads are The linear distance between the
A layer of rubber-coated parallel laid at substantially 90 degrees to exteriors of the sidewalls of an
cords. the centerline of the tread. inflated tire, excluding elevations
. Ply separation . Recommended inflation pres- due to labeling, decoration, or pro- 13
sure tective bands.
A parting of rubber compound
between adjacent plies. The cold inflation pressure recom- . Sidewall
mended by a vehicle manufacturer. That portion of a tire between the
– CONTINUED –

(484,1)
tread and bead. entially around a tire. to the end of this section) and
. Sidewall separation . Tread separation dividing by 2.
The parting of the rubber compound Pulling away of the tread from the . Wheel-holding fixture
from the cord material in the side- tire carcass. The fixture used to hold the wheel
wall. . Treadwear indicators (TWI) and tire assembly securely during
. Snow tire The projections within the principal testing.
A tire that attains a traction index grooves designed to give a visual
equal to or greater than 110, com- indication of the degrees of wear of
pared to the ASTM E1136-93 Stan- the tread.
dard Reference Test Tire, when . Vehicle capacity weight
using the snow traction test as The rated cargo and luggage load
described in ASTM F-1805-00, plus 150 lbs (68 kg) times the
Standard Test Method for Single vehicle’s designated seating capa-
Wheel Driving Traction in a Straight city.
Line on Snow-and Ice-Covered . Vehicle maximum load on the tire
Surfaces, and which is marked with Load on an individual tire that is
an Alpine Symbol “ ” on at least determined by distributing to each
one sidewall. axle its share of the maximum
. Test rim loaded vehicle weight and dividing
The rim on which a tire is fitted for by two.
testing, and it may be any rim listed . Vehicle normal load on the tire
as appropriate for use with that tire. Load on an individual tire that is
. Tread determined by distributing to each
That portion of a tire that comes into axle its share of the curb weight,
contact with the road. accessory weight, and normal oc-
. Tread rib cupant weight (distributed in accor-
A tread section running circumfer- dance with Table 1 that is appended

(485,1)
Table 1 — Occupant loading and distribution for vehicle normal load for
various designated seating capacities
Designated seating Vehicle normal load, Occupant distribution in a
capacity, number of number of occupants normally loaded vehicle
occupants
2 through 4 2 2 in front.
5 through 10 3 2 in front, 1 in second
seat.
2 in front, 1 in second
11 through 15 5 seat, 1 in third seat, 1 in
fourth seat.
2 in front, 2 in second
16 through 22 7 seat, 2 in third seat, 1 in
fourth seat.
13
– CONTINUED –

(486,1)
& Tire care – maintenance and rotation. After tire rotation, adjust axle’s GAWR are shown on the
safety practices the tire pressures and make sure vehicle certification label located at
S13AB04
. Check on a daily basis that the the wheel nuts are correctly tigh- the bottom of driver’s side door
tires are free from serious damage, tened. For information about the pillar.
nails, and stones. At the same time, tightening torque and tightening The GVWR and front and rear
check the tires for abnormal wear. sequence for the wheel nuts, refer GAWRs are determined by not only
. Inspect the tire tread regularly to “Flat tires” �9-5. the maximum load rating of tires but
and replace the tires before their also loaded capacities of the vehi-
tread wear indicators become visi- & Determining compatibility of cle’s suspension, axles and other
ble. When a tire’s tread wear in- tire and vehicle load capaci- parts of the body.
dicator becomes visible, the tire is ties
S13AB06 Therefore, this means that the
worn beyond the acceptable limit The sum of four tires’ maximum vehicle cannot necessarily be
and must be replaced immediately. load ratings must exceed the max- loaded up to the tire’s maximum
With a tire in this condition, driving imum loaded vehicle weight load rating on the tire sidewall.
at even low speeds in wet weather (“GVWR”). In addition, sum of the
can cause the vehicle to hydro- maximum load ratings of two front & Adverse safety conse-
plane. Possible resulting loss of tires and of two rear tires must quences of overloading on
vehicle control can lead to an exceed each axle’s maximum handling and stopping and on
accident. loaded capacity (“GAWR”). Original tires
S13AB07
. To maximize the life of each tire equipment tires are designed to Overloading could affect vehicle
and ensure that the tires wear fulfill those conditions. handling, stopping distance, and
uniformly, it is best to rotate the The maximum loaded vehicle vehicle and tire performance in the
tires every 6,000 miles (10,000 km). weight is referred to Gross Vehicle following ways. This could lead to
For information about the tire rota- Weight Rating (GVWR). And each an accident and possibly result in
tion order, refer to “Tire rotation” axle’s maximum loaded capacity is severe personal injury.
�11-26. Replace any damaged or referred to Gross Axle Weight Rat- . Vehicle stability will deteriorate.
unevenly worn tires at the time of ing (GAWR). The GVWR and each . Heavy and/or high-mounted

(487,1)
Consumer information and Reporting safety defects/Vehicle load limit – how to determine 13-11
loads could increase the risk of luggage load capacity. For exam- Vehicle load limit – how to
rollover. ple, if the “XXX” amount equals determine
. Stopping distance will increase. 1,400 lbs. and there will be five 150 S13BU
. Brakes could overheat and fail. lb passengers in your vehicle, the The load capacity of your vehicle is
. Suspension, bearings, axles and amount of available cargo and determined by weight, not by avail-
other body parts could break or luggage load capacity is 650 lbs. able cargo space. The load limit of
experience accelerated wear that (1,400 − 750 (5 6 150) = 650 lbs.) your vehicle is shown on the vehicle
will shorten vehicle life. 5. Determine the combined weight placard attached to the driver’s side
. Tires could fail. of luggage and cargo being loaded door pillar. Locate the statement
. Tread separation could occur. on the vehicle. That weight may not “The combined weight of occupants
. Tire could separate from its rim. safely exceed the available cargo and cargo should never exceed
and luggage load capacity calcu- XXX kg or XXX lbs” on your
& Steps for Determining Cor- lated in Step 4.
rect Load Limit vehicle’s placard.
S13AB08 6. If your vehicle will be towing a The vehicle placard also shows
1. Locate the statement “The com- trailer, load from your trailer will be seating capacity of your vehicle.
bined weight of occupants and transferred to your vehicle. Consult The total load capacity includes the
cargo should never exceed XXX this manual to determine how this total weight of driver and all pas-
kg or XXX lbs.” on your vehicle’s reduces the available cargo and sengers and their belongings, any
placard. luggage load capacity of your ve- cargo, any optional equipment such
2. Determine the combined weight hicle. as a trailer hitch, roof rack or bike
of the driver and passengers that carrier, etc., and the tongue load of
will be riding in your vehicle. a trailer. Therefore cargo capacity
3. Subtract the combined weight of can be calculated by the following
the driver and passengers from method. 13
XXX kg or XXX lbs.
4. The resulting figure equals the Cargo capacity = Load limit − (total
available amount of cargo and weight of occupants + total weight
– CONTINUED –

(488,1)
13-12 Consumer information and Reporting safety defects/Vehicle load limit – how to determine
of optional equipment + tongue load indicated on the vehicle placard further 84 lbs (38 kg) of cargo can
of a trailer (if applicable)) with the statement “The combined be carried.
weight of occupants and cargo
For information about vehicle load- Example 1B
should never exceed 900 lbs or
ing, refer to “Loading your vehicle”
408 kg”.
�8-11.
For example, if the vehicle has one
& Calculating total and load occupant weighing 154 lbs (70 kg)
capacities varying seating plus cargo weighing 662 lbs (300
configurations kg).
S13BU01
Calculate the available load capa- 1. Calculate the total weight.
city as shown in the following
examples:
Example 1A
For example, if a person weighing

2. Calculate the available load ca- 176 lbs (80 kg) now enters the same
pacity by subtracting the total vehicle (bringing the number of
weight from the vehicle capacity occupants to two), the calculations
weight of 900 lbs (408 kg). are as follows.
1. Calculate the total weight.
Vehicle capacity weight of the ve-

hicle is 900 lbs (408 kg), which is 3. The result of step 2 shows that a

(489,1)
Consumer information and Reporting safety defects/Vehicle load limit – how to determine 13-13
Example 2A trailer tongue (i.e. Tongue load =

176 lbs (80 kg)).
1. Calculate the total weight.
2. Calculate the available load ca-

pacity.
2. Calculate the available load ca-

Vehicle capacity weight of the ve- pacity.
hicle is 900 lbs (408 kg), which is
indicated on the vehicle placard
with the statement “The combined
3. The total weight now exceeds weight of occupants and cargo
the capacity weight by 92 lbs (42 should never exceed 408 kg or
kg), so the cargo weight must be 900 lbs”.
reduced by 92 lbs (42 kg) or more.
For example, the vehicle has one 3. The result of step 2 shows that a
occupant weighing 165 lbs (75 kg) further 162 lbs (73 kg) of cargo can
plus cargo weighing 375 lbs (170 be carried.
kg). In addition, the vehicle is fitted
with a trailer hitch weighing 22 lbs 13
(10 kg), to which is attached a trailer
weighing 1,764 lbs (800 kg). 10% of
the trailer weight is applied to the
– CONTINUED –

(490,1)
13-14 Consumer information and Reporting safety defects/Uniform tire quality grading standards
Example 2B Uniform tire quality grading

standards
S13AC
This information indicates the rela-

tive performance of passenger car
tires in the area of treadwear,
traction, and temperature resis-
tance. This is to aid the consumer
in making an informed choice in the
purchase of tires.
Quality grades can be found where
applicable on the tire sidewall be-
For example, if a person weighing tween tread shoulder and maximum
143 lbs (65 kg) and a child weighing 2. Calculate the available load ca- section width.
40 lbs (18 kg) now enter the same pacity. For example:
vehicle (bringing the number of
occupants to three), and a child TREADWEAR 200 TRACTION AA
restraint system weighing 11 lbs (5 TEMPERATURE A
kg) is installed in the vehicle for the The quality grades apply to new
child to use, the calculations are as pneumatic tires for use on passen-
follows. ger cars. However, they do not
1. Calculate the total weight. 3. The total weight now exceeds apply to deep tread, winter type
the capacity weight by 32 lbs (15 snow tires, space-saver or tempor-
kg), so the cargo weight must be ary use spare tires, tires with
reduced by 32 lbs (15 kg) or more. nominal rim diameters of 12 inches
or less, or to some limited produc-
tion tires.

(491,1)
Consumer information and Reporting safety defects/Uniform tire quality grading standards 13-15
All passenger car tires must con- under controlled conditions on spe- excessive temperature can lead to
form to Federal Safety Require- cified government test surfaces of sudden tire failure.
ments in addition to these grades. asphalt and concrete. The grade C corresponds to a level
A tire marked C may have poor of performance which all passenger
& TREADWEAR traction performance. car tires must meet under the
S13AC02
The treadwear grade is a compara- Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Stan-
tive rating based on the wear rate of WARNING dards No. 109.
the tire when tested under con- The traction grade assigned to Grades B and A represent higher
trolled conditions on a specified this tire is based on straight- levels of performance on the la-
government test course. ahead braking traction tests, boratory test wheel than the mini-
For example, a tire graded 150 and does not include accelera- mum required by law.
would wear one and one-half (1- tion, cornering, hydroplaning,
1/2) times as well on the govern- WARNING
or peak traction characteris-
ment course as a tire graded 100. tics. The temperature grade for this
The relative performance of tires tire is established for a tire that
depends upon the actual conditions is properly inflated and not
of their use, however, and may & TEMPERATURE A, B, C
S13AC04 overloaded. Excessive speed,
depart significantly from the norm The temperature grades are A (the underinflation, or excessive
due to variations in driving habits, highest), B, and C, representing the loading, either separately or
service practices and differences in tire’s resistance to the generation of in combination, can cause
road characteristics and climate. heat and its ability to dissipate heat heat buildup and possible tire
when tested under controlled con- failure.
& TRACTION AA, A, B, C ditions on a specified indoor labora-
S13AC03
The traction grades, from highest to tory test wheel. 13
lowest, are AA, A, B and C. Those Sustained high temperature can
grades represent the tire’s ability to cause the material of the tire to
stop on wet pavement as measured degenerate and reduce tire life, and

(492,1)
13-16 Consumer information and Reporting safety defects/Reporting safety defects (U.S.A.)
Reporting safety defects also obtain other information about How to contact Transport
(U.S.A.) motor vehicle safety from http:// Canada in order to report a
S13AH www.safercar.gov. safety concern relating to the
If you believe that your vehicle has a vehicle (Canada)
defect which could cause a crash or S13CF
could cause injury or death, you

should immediately inform the Na-
tional Highway Traffic Safety Ad-
ministration (NHTSA) in addition to
notifying Subaru of America, Inc.
If NHTSA receives similar com-
plaints, it may open an investiga-
tion, and if it finds that a safety
defect exists in a group of vehicles,
it may order a recall and remedy
campaign. However, NHTSA can-
not become involved in individual
problems between you, your dealer,
or Subaru of America, Inc.
To contact NHTSA, you may call the
Vehicle Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-
888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-
9153); go to
http://www.safercar.gov; or write to:
Administrator, NHTSA, 1200 New
Jersey Avenue, SE, West Building,
Washington, DC 20590. You can

(1,1)
Index
14

(2,1)
14-2 Index
A No Activity Detected indicator light ................ 3-32, 7-62

Abbreviation ................................................................ 3 OFF indicator light ....................................... 3-32, 7-61
ABS (Anti-lock Brake System) ................................... 7-37 Warning light .............................................. 3-32, 7-60
Warning light ....................................................... 3-20 Auto-dimming mirror/compass........................... 3-82, 3-83
Access key .............................................................. 2-2 Automatic climate control operation ............................. 4-5
Warning indicator................................................. 3-24 Automatic headlight beam leveler warning light........... 3-31
Access key fob ......................................................... 2-2 Automatic Locking Retractor/Emergency Locking
Accessories .......................................................... 11-38 Retractor (ALR/ELR)............................................. 1-14
Accessory power outlet ............................................. 6-7
Air cleaner element ................................................ 11-12 B
Air conditioner Battery ................................................................. 11-35
Automatic climate control....................................... 4-5 Drainage prevention function ................................ 2-23
Manual climate control........................................... 4-6 Jump starting ...................................................... 9-10
Air filtration system .................................................. 4-10 Replacement (access key fob) ............................ 11-46
Airflow mode ............................................................ 4-6 Replacement (transmitter) .................................. 11-47
Alarm system .......................................................... 2-24 Vehicle battery .................................................. 11-35
All-Wheel Drive warning light..................................... 3-22 Blind Spot Detection (BSD) ...................................... 7-63
Alloy wheel ........................................................... 11-28 Booster cushion ...................................................... 1-36
Cleaning ............................................................. 10-4 Booster seat ........................................................... 1-36
Antenna................................................................... 5-2 Bottle holder ............................................................. 6-7
Roof antenna (for Rod type)................................... 5-2 Brake
Roof antenna (for Shark fin type)............................ 5-2 Assist................................................................. 7-36
Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) ................................... 7-37 Booster .................................................... 7-36, 11-17
Arming the system ................................................... 2-25 Disc ................................................................... 12-8
Ashtray................................................................... 6-11 Fluid ........................................................ 11-15, 12-6
Assist grip............................................................... 6-12 Pad ................................................................. 11-20
AT OIL TEMP warning light ....................................... 3-18 Parking .................................................... 7-48, 11-20
Audio set ................................................................. 5-3 Pedal ............................................................... 11-18
Auto on/off headlights............................................... 3-69 Brake system.......................................................... 7-36
Auto Start Stop system............................................. 7-57 Warning light ...................................................... 3-20
Indicator light.............................................. 3-32, 7-57 Braking .................................................................. 7-36

(3,1)
Index 14-3
Tips.................................................................... 7-36 Coolant level...................................................... 11-11
Breaking-in of new brake pads ................................ 11-20 Fluid level (brake fluid)....................................... 11-15
BSD/RCTA.............................................................. 7-63 Fluid level (clutch fluid) ...................................... 11-16
Approach indicator light/warning buzzer.................. 7-67 Fluid level (washer fluid) .................................... 11-29
OFF indicator ............................................. 3-33, 7-68 Oil level (engine oil)............................................. 11-8
OFF switch ......................................................... 7-69 Child restraint systems............................................. 1-26
Warning indicator........................................ 3-33, 7-69 Installation of a booster cushion ............................ 1-36
Warning volume................................................... 7-67 Installation of a booster seat................................. 1-36
Bulb Installation with ALR/ELR seatbelt ......................... 1-31
Chart.................................................................. 12-9 Lower and top tether anchorages .......................... 1-37
Replacement ..................................................... 11-38 Top tether anchorages ......................................... 1-41
Child safety ................................................................. 5
C Locks................................................................. 2-27
Cargo area Chime
Cover ................................................................. 6-14 Key...................................................................... 3-5
Light.......................................................... 6-3, 11-43 Light .................................................................. 3-68
Tie-down hooks ................................................... 6-16 Seatbelt ............................................................. 3-13
Catalytic converter .................................................... 8-3 Cigarette lighter ........................................................ 6-9
Center console ......................................................... 6-6 Cleaning
Changing Alloy wheels ....................................................... 10-4
Coolant............................................................. 11-12 Interior ............................................................... 10-5
Flat tire................................................................ 9-5 Ventilation grille..................................................... 4-9
Oil and oil filter .................................................... 11-9 Climate control system............................................... 4-2
Charge warning light ................................................ 3-17 Automatic ............................................................. 4-5
CHECK ENGINE warning light/Malfunction indicator Manual................................................................. 4-6
light..................................................................... 3-15 Clock .................................................... 3-48, 3-52, 3-66
Checking Clutch
Brake pedal free play ......................................... 11-18 Fluid ................................................................ 11-16
Brake pedal reserve distance .............................. 11-18 Pedal ............................................................... 11-18
Clutch function .................................................. 11-18 Coat hook .............................................................. 6-13
Clutch pedal free play ........................................ 11-19 Combination meter display (color LCD)...................... 3-34

(4,1)
14-4 Index
Compass ....................................................... 3-82, 3-83 Driving

Continuously variable transmission (CVT)................... 7-26 AWD vehicles ....................................................... 8-4
Fluid......................................................... 11-15, 12-6 Drinking .................................................................. 6
Oil temperature warning light (AT OIL TEMP) .......... 3-18 Drugs...................................................................... 6
Control switch light................................................... 3-68 Foreign countries .................................................. 8-4
Coolant......................................................... 11-11, 12-7 Off road ............................................................... 8-6
Temperature high warning light.............................. 3-16 Pets........................................................................ 8
Temperature low indicator light .............................. 3-16 Snowy and icy roads ............................................. 8-9
Cooling system...................................................... 11-10 Tips .................................................... 7-25, 7-32, 8-4
Corrosion protection ................................................. 10-4 Tired or sleepy ......................................................... 7
Cruise control.......................................................... 7-53 Winter .................................................................. 8-7
Indicator light....................................................... 3-31
Set indicator light ................................................. 3-31 E
Cup holder ............................................................... 6-6 ECO gauge ............................................................ 3-10
Electrical system ..................................................... 12-7
D Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD) system ....... 7-38
Daytime running light system .................................... 3-74 Warning ............................................................. 3-21
Defogger ................................................................ 3-91 Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR).......................... 1-14
Defrosting ................................................................ 4-9 Engine ................................................................... 12-3
Deicer .................................................................... 3-91 Compartment overview ........................................ 11-7
Differential gear oil Coolant .................................................... 11-11, 12-7
Front ........................................................ 11-15, 12-6 Exhaust gas (carbon monoxide).......................... 6, 8-2
Rear......................................................... 11-15, 12-6 Hood ................................................................. 11-5
Dimensions ............................................................. 12-2 Hood open warning light ...................................... 3-16
Disarming the alarm system...................................... 2-26 Low oil level warning light .................................... 3-18
Disc brake pad wear warning indicators ..................... 7-37 Oil ............................................................. 11-8, 12-4
Dome light ..................................................... 6-2, 11-43 Overheating........................................................ 9-12
Door Starting & stopping ........................................ 7-9, 7-12
Locks ................................................................. 2-20 Event data recorder ...................................................... 9
Open warning light............................................... 3-22 Exterior care ........................................................... 10-2
Drive belt .............................................................. 11-14

(5,1)
Index 14-5
F Gauge................................................................ 3-10
Flat tires .................................................................. 9-5 Requirements ............................................... 7-3, 12-3
Floor mat ................................................................ 6-12 Fuses .................................................................. 11-36
Fluid....................................................................... 12-6
Fluid level G
Brake ............................................................... 11-15 GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating) ........................... 8-13
Clutch............................................................... 11-16 Glove box................................................................. 6-6
Continuously variable transmission ...................... 11-15 GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating) ....................... 8-13
Fog light
Bulb ................................................................. 11-40 H
Indicator light....................................................... 3-32 Hazard warning flasher ....................................... 3-8, 9-2
Switch ................................................................ 3-76 Headlight
Front Beam leveler ...................................................... 3-76
Differential gear oil ..................................... 11-15, 12-6 Bulb replacing................................................... 11-38
Fog light indicator light ......................................... 3-32 Bulb wattage....................................................... 12-9
Passenger’s frontal airbag ON and OFF indicators .. 3-15 Control switch ..................................................... 3-68
Seatbelt pretensioners.......................................... 1-21 Flasher .............................................................. 3-71
Turn signal light ................................................. 11-40 Indicator light ...................................................... 3-32
View Monitor ....................................................... 6-16 Welcome lighting function..................................... 3-70
Front seats............................................................... 1-5 Heated Steering Wheel system ................................. 3-93
Forward and backward adjustment ......................... 1-5 High beam
Head restraints ..................................................... 1-8 Assist function .................................................... 3-72
Manual seat ......................................................... 1-5 Assist indicator light............................................. 3-31
Power seat........................................................... 1-6 Indicator light ...................................................... 3-31
Reclining the seatback .......................................... 1-5 High/low beam change (dimmer)............................... 3-71
Seat heater ......................................................... 1-11 Hill descent control .................................................. 7-45
Seat height adjustment.......................................... 1-6 Indicator ..................................................... 3-33, 7-46
Fuel ........................................................................ 7-3 Hill start assist .............................................. 7-50, 11-19
Consumption indicator .......................................... 3-38 OFF indicator light ............................................... 3-22
Economy hints...................................................... 8-2 Warning light ...................................................... 3-22
Filler lid and cap ................................................... 7-5 HomeLink®.............................................................. 3-83

(6,1)
14-6 Index
Hook Hill start assist OFF ..................................... 3-22, 7-52

Cargo tie-down .................................................... 6-16 Intelligent (I) mode ...................................... 3-30, 7-33
Coat ................................................................... 6-13 Malfunction ......................................................... 3-15
Shopping bag...................................................... 6-14 RAB OFF ........................................................... 3-34
Towing and tie-down ............................................ 9-13 Security.............................................................. 3-29
Horn....................................................................... 3-94 Select lever/Gear position .................................... 3-30
Hose and connections ............................................ 11-11 SI-DRIVE ........................................................... 3-30
Sport (S) mode ........................................... 3-30, 7-33
I Steering Responsive Headlight OFF ...................... 3-31
Icy road surface warning indicator.............................. 3-34 Turn signal ......................................................... 3-31
Ignition switch .......................................................... 3-4 Vehicle Dynamics Control OFF ............................. 3-24
Light.................................................................... 3-5 Vehicle Dynamics Control operation ...................... 3-23
Illumination brightness control ................................... 3-12 X-MODE .................................................... 3-33, 3-48
Immobilizer ............................................................. 2-15 Inside mirror ........................................................... 3-82
Indicator light (security indicator light)..................... 3-29 Interior lights............................................................. 6-2
Indicator light
Auto Start Stop........................................... 3-32, 7-57 J
Auto Start Stop No Activity Detected ............. 3-32, 7-62 Jack-up point ............................................................ 9-5
Auto Start Stop OFF ................................... 3-32, 7-61 Jump starting .......................................................... 9-10
BSD/RCTA approach ........................................... 7-67
BSD/RCTA OFF ......................................... 3-33, 7-68 K
Coolant temperature low....................................... 3-16 Key.......................................................................... 2-2
Cruise control...................................................... 3-31 Number plate ........................................................ 2-2
Cruise control set................................................. 3-31 Reminder chime.................................................... 3-5
Front fog light ...................................................... 3-32 Replacement ...................................................... 2-15
Front passenger’s frontal airbag ON and OFF......... 3-15 Keyless access with push-button start system .............. 2-2
Headlight ............................................................ 3-32 Disabling keyless access functions........................ 2-12
High beam .......................................................... 3-31 Warning chimes and warning indicator................... 3-24
High beam assist ................................................. 3-31 When access key fob does not operate properly..... 9-17
Hill descent control ..................................... 3-33, 7-46 Keyless entry system............................................... 2-17

(7,1)
Index 14-7
L M
Lane Change Assist (LCA)........................................ 7-64 Maintenance
Lap belt pretensioner ............................................... 1-22 Precautions ........................................................ 11-3
Leather seat materials .............................................. 10-6 Schedule............................................................ 11-3
LED headlight warning light ...................................... 3-31 Seatbelt ............................................................. 1-21
LED headlights ...................................................... 11-38 Tools.................................................................... 9-3
License plate light .................................................. 11-43 Malfunction indicator light (check engine warning light) 3-15
Light Manual
Backup ............................................................. 11-42 Climate control operation ....................................... 4-6
Cargo area ................................................ 6-3, 11-43 Seat .................................................................... 1-5
Control switch ..................................................... 3-68 Transmission ...................................................... 7-24
Daytime running .................................................. 3-74 Transmission oil ................................................ 11-14
Dome ........................................................ 6-2, 11-43 Manual mode.......................................................... 7-29
Front fog................................................... 3-76, 11-40 Map light ........................................................ 6-2, 11-43
Front side marker ................................................ 3-69 Maximum load limits ................................................ 8-19
Ignition switch ...................................................... 3-5 Meters and gauges.................................................... 3-8
License plate..................................................... 11-43 Mirror defogger ....................................................... 3-91
Map .......................................................... 6-2, 11-43 Mirrors ................................................................... 3-82
Parking............................................................. 11-40 Moonroof........................................................ 2-32, 9-20
Rear combination............................................... 11-40 Multi-function display (black and white) ...................... 3-42
Rear gate ............................................................ 6-3 Multi-function display (color LCD) .............................. 3-49
Rear side marker light ........................................ 11-40
Tail................................................................... 11-40 N
Turn signal................................................ 3-77, 11-40 New vehicle break-in driving ....................................... 8-2
Vanity mirror............................................... 6-5, 11-43
Loading your vehicle ................................................ 8-11 O
Low fuel warning light............................................... 3-21 Odometer ................................................................. 3-9
Low tire pressure warning light .................................. 3-18 Oil filter .................................................................. 11-9
Lower and top tether anchorage ................................ 1-37 Oil level
Engine ............................................................... 11-8

(8,1)
14-8 Index
Front differential gear ......................................... 11-15 Push-button

Rear differential gear.......................................... 11-15 Ignition switch ....................................................... 3-6
Warning light ....................................................... 3-18 Starting and stopping engine .......................... 7-9, 7-12
Oil pressure warning light ......................................... 3-17
On-road and off-road driving ...................................... 8-6 R
One-touch lane changer ........................................... 3-78 RAB (Reverse Automatic Braking)............................. 7-72
Outside OFF indicator...................................................... 3-34
Mirror defogger.................................................... 3-91 ON/OFF setting................................................... 7-80
Mirrors................................................................ 3-90 Warning indicator ........................................ 3-33, 7-82
Temperature indicator.................................. 3-47, 3-51 Rear
Overheating engine.................................................. 9-12 Combination lights............................................. 11-40
Differential gear oil .................................... 11-15, 12-6
P Gate .......................................................... 2-30, 9-19
Parking Gate light ............................................................. 6-3
Brake ................................................................. 7-48 Turn signal light ................................................ 11-40
Brake stroke...................................................... 11-20 Rear Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA) ................................ 7-64
Light................................................................. 11-40 Rear Seat Reminder................................................ 1-26
Tips.................................................................... 7-48 Rear seats................................................................ 1-6
Periodic inspections .................................................. 8-4 Armrest ................................................................ 1-6
Petrol fuel ................................................................ 7-3 Folding down the rear seatback .............................. 1-7
Power Head restraints ..................................................... 1-9
Outlets ................................................................ 6-7 Return the rear seatback........................................ 1-7
Outside mirrors.................................................... 3-91 Rear view camera ................................................... 6-20
Seat .................................................................... 1-6 Rear window
Steering.............................................................. 7-35 Defogger ............................................................ 3-91
Steering warning light........................................... 3-22 Wiper and washer switch ..................................... 3-81
Window switches ................................................. 2-28 Wiper blades .................................................... 11-33
Windows............................................................. 2-27 Recommended
Precautions against vehicle modification............ 1-25, 1-73 Brake fluid .......................................................... 12-6
Preparing to drive ..................................................... 7-9 Continuously variable transmission fluid ................. 12-6
Engine oil ........................................................... 12-4

(9,1)
Index 14-9
Front differential gear oil ....................................... 12-6 Rear turn signal light ......................................... 11-40
Rear differential gear oil ....................................... 12-6 Tail light ........................................................... 11-40
Spark plugs......................................................... 12-7 Vanity mirror light .............................................. 11-43
Refueling ................................................................. 7-5 Rocking the vehicle ................................................. 8-11
Remote control mirror switch..................................... 3-91 Roof
Remote engine start system...................................... 7-16 Antenna (for Rod type) .......................................... 5-2
Remote keyless entry system.................................... 2-17 Antenna (for Shark fin type).................................... 5-2
Replacement Rails .................................................................. 8-13
Access key fob battery ............................... 2-14, 11-46 Tent ................................................................... 8-14
Air cleaner element ............................................ 11-13
Brake pad and lining .......................................... 11-19 S
Cabin air filter...................................................... 4-11 Safety
Lost transmitters (remote keyless entry Precautions when driving .......................................... 4
system) ............................................................ 2-19 Symbol ................................................................... 3
Remote keyless entry transmitter battery .............. 11-47 Warnings................................................................. 2
Tire .................................................................. 11-27 Seat
Wheel............................................................... 11-28 Fabric ................................................................ 10-5
Wiper blades ..................................................... 11-30 Heater................................................................ 1-11
Replacing bulbs ..................................................... 11-38 Seatbelt ............................................................. 4, 1-12
Backup light ...................................................... 11-42 Fastening ........................................................... 1-14
Cargo area light................................................. 11-43 Maintenance ....................................................... 1-21
Dome light ........................................................ 11-43 Pretensioners ..................................................... 1-21
Front fog light .................................................... 11-40 Safety tips .......................................................... 1-12
Front turn signal light ......................................... 11-40 Warning light and chime....................................... 3-13
Halogen headlight .............................................. 11-39 Security
Headlight .......................................................... 11-38 Alarm system...................................................... 2-24
License plate light .............................................. 11-43 Immobilizer ......................................................... 2-15
Map light .......................................................... 11-43 Indicator light ...................................................... 3-29
Parking light ...................................................... 11-40 Select lever
Rear combination light........................................ 11-40 Position indicator................................................. 3-30
Rear side marker light ........................................ 11-40 Shift lock function ................................................ 7-31

(10,1)
14-10 Index
Shopping bag hook .................................................. 6-14 Steering wheel

Shoulder pretensioners............................................. 1-22 Heater................................................................ 3-93
SI-DRIVE................................................................ 7-33 Lock .......................................................... 7-12, 7-15
Indicator light....................................................... 3-30 Power ................................................................ 7-35
Intelligent (I) mode indicator ......................... 3-30, 7-33 Tilt/telescopic ...................................................... 3-92
Sport (S) mode indicator.............................. 3-30, 7-33 Storage compartment ................................................ 6-5
Switches ............................................................. 7-34 Sun visors ................................................................ 6-4
SI-DRIVE mode ....................................................... 7-33 Sunshade............................................................... 2-33
Snow tires..................................................... 8-10, 11-21 Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)....................... 1-42
Snowy and icy roads................................................. 8-9 Supplemental Restraint System airbag (SRS) ............. 1-42
Sounding a panic alarm............................................ 2-19 Synthetic leather upholstery...................................... 10-6
Spark plugs................................................... 11-14, 12-7
Specifications .......................................................... 12-2 T
Speedometer............................................................ 3-8 Tachometer .............................................................. 3-8
SRS Temperature warning light
Curtain airbag ..................................................... 1-63 AT OIL TEMP ..................................................... 3-18
Frontal airbag...................................................... 1-52 Coolant .............................................................. 3-16
Side airbag ......................................................... 1-63 Temporary spare tire.......................................... 9-2, 12-8
SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint System Tether (child restraint system) ........................... 1-37, 1-41
airbag)............................................................. 4, 1-42 Tie-down hooks/holes .............................................. 9-13
SRS airbag system Tilt/telescopic steering wheel .................................... 3-92
Monitors ............................................................. 1-71 Tire.............................................................. 11-21, 12-8
Servicing ............................................................ 1-72 Chains ............................................................... 8-10
Warning light ....................................................... 3-14 Information ......................................................... 13-2
Starting & stopping engine ................................. 7-9, 7-12 Inspection......................................................... 11-23
State emission testing (U.S. only) ............................... 7-7 Pressures and wear........................................... 11-23
Steering lock .................................................. 7-12, 7-15 Replacement .................................................... 11-27
Steering Responsive Headlight.................................. 3-75 Rotation ........................................................... 11-26
OFF indicator light ............................................... 3-31 Size and pressure ............................................... 12-8
Warning light ....................................................... 3-31 Types............................................................... 11-21

(11,1)
Index 14-11
Tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) ... 7-46, 9-8, 11-21 Vehicle Dynamics Control
Warning light ....................................................... 3-18 OFF indicator light ............................................... 3-24
Tires and wheels ................................................... 11-21 OFF switch ......................................................... 7-41
Tools ....................................................................... 9-3 Operation indicator light ....................................... 3-23
Top tether anchorages..................................... 1-37, 1-41 System .............................................................. 7-40
Towing.................................................................... 9-13 Warning light ...................................................... 3-23
All wheels on the ground ...................................... 9-16 Ventilator.................................................................. 4-2
Flat-bed truck ...................................................... 9-16
Hooks................................................................. 9-13 W
Weight................................................................ 8-19 Warning and indicator lights...................................... 3-12
Trailer Warning chimes
Connecting ......................................................... 8-17 Keyless access with push-button start system ........ 3-24
Hitch ......................................................... 8-16, 8-22 Seatbelt ............................................................. 3-13
Towing tips.......................................................... 8-24 Warning indicator
Trailer towing .......................................................... 8-18 Access key ......................................................... 3-24
Trip meter ................................................................ 3-9 BSD/RCTA ................................................. 3-33, 7-69
Turn signal Icy road surface .................................................. 3-34
Indicator lights ..................................................... 3-31 Keyless access with push-button start system ........ 3-24
Lever.................................................................. 3-77 RAB .......................................................... 3-33, 7-82
Warning light
U ABS................................................................... 3-20
USB power supply .................................................... 6-9 All-Wheel Drive ................................................... 3-22
AT OIL TEMP ..................................................... 3-18
V Auto Start Stop ........................................... 3-32, 7-60
Valet mode.............................................................. 2-27 Automatic headlight beam leveler.......................... 3-31
Vanity mirror............................................................. 6-5 Brake system...................................................... 3-20
Light.......................................................... 6-5, 11-43 Charge............................................................... 3-17
Vehicle CHECK ENGINE................................................. 3-15
Capacity weight ................................................... 8-12 Coolant temperature high ..................................... 3-16
Identification...................................................... 12-13 Door open .......................................................... 3-22
Symbols ................................................................. 4 Engine hood open ............................................... 3-16

(12,1)
14-12 Index
Engine low oil level .............................................. 3-18 Winter

Hill start assist............................................ 3-22, 7-52 Driving ................................................................. 8-7
LED headlight ..................................................... 3-31 Tires ........................................................ 8-10, 11-21
Low fuel.............................................................. 3-21 Wiper and washer ................................................... 3-78
Low tire pressure ................................................. 3-18 Wiper deicer ........................................................... 3-91
Oil pressure ........................................................ 3-17
Power steering .................................................... 3-22 X
Seatbelt .............................................................. 3-13 X-MODE ................................................................ 7-43
SRS airbag system .............................................. 3-14 Indicator ..................................................... 3-33, 3-48
Steering Responsive Headlight.............................. 3-31
Vehicle Dynamics Control ..................................... 3-23
Windshield washer fluid ........................................ 3-18
Warranties .................................................................. 1
Warranties and maintenance..................................... 8-19
Washing ................................................................. 10-2
Waxing and polishing ............................................... 10-3
Wear indicators ..................................................... 11-25
Welcome lighting function ......................................... 3-70
Wheel
Alloy................................................................. 11-28
Balance ............................................................ 11-25
Nut tightening torque............................................ 12-8
Replacement ..................................................... 11-28
Windows................................................................. 2-27
Windshield
Washer fluid ...................................................... 11-29
Washer fluid warning light ..................................... 3-18
Wiper and washer switches .................................. 3-79
Wiper blades ..................................................... 11-31
Wiper deicer........................................................ 3-91

(1,1)
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
Right Page
Model "ALL_MODEL_MEMO" EDITED: 2017/ 11/ 6
(2,1)
GAS STATION REFERENCE

S99AA
& Fuel & Engine oil
S99AA01 S99AA04
Use only unleaded gasoline with an octane rating of 87 AKI (90 Use only the following oils.
RON) or higher. . API classification SN with the words “RESOURCE CON-
SERVING”, SN PLUS with the words “RESOURCE CONSER-
& Fuel octane rating VING” or SP with the words “RESOURCE CONSERVING”
S99AA02
. or ILSAC GF-5 or GF-6A, which can be identified with the
! RON ILSAC certification mark (Starburst mark)
S99AA0201
This octane rating is the Research Octane Number.
For the complete viscosity requirements, refer to “Engine oil”
! AKI F12-4.
S99AA0202
This octane rating is the average of the Research Octane and
Motor Octane numbers and is commonly referred to as the Anti & Engine oil capacity
S99AA05
Knock Index (AKI). 2.0 L engine models: 4.7 US qt (4.4 liters, 3.9 Imp qt)
2.5 L engine models: 4.4 US qt (4.2 liters, 3.7 Imp qt)
& Limit of ethanol content
S99AA09
2.0 L engine models: no more than 15% The indicated oil quantity is only a guideline and is estimated
2.5 L engine models: no more than 10% based on a case when the engine oil is changed with an oil filter.
After refilling the engine with oil, the oil level should be checked
& Fuel tank capacity using the oil level gauge. For more details about maintenance
S99AA03 and service, refer to “Engine oil” F11-8.
16.6 US gal (63 liters, 13.9 Imp gal)
& Cold tire pressure
S99AA06
Refer to “Tires” F12-8.

2023 Subaru Crosstrek

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

You might also like

2023 Subaru Crosstrek

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

2023 Subaru Crosstrek

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

(1,1)

北米Model "A1490BE-A" EDITED: 2021/ 9/ 24

北米Model "A1490BE-A" EDITED: 2021/ 9/ 24

北米Model "A1490BE-A" EDITED: 2021/ 9/ 24

北米Model "A1490BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 2/ 15

北米Model "A1490BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 2/ 15

Chapter 4: Climate control Chapter 12: Specifications WARNING

SUBARU looking good. You will find a number of WARNINGs,

北米Model "A1490BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 2/ 15

& Safety symbol & Abbreviation list Abbreviation Meaning

北米Model "A1490BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 2/ 15

北米Model "A1490BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 2/ 15

北米Model "A1490BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 2/ 15

北米Model "A1490BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 2/ 15

WARNING image and help lines (distance CAUTION

北米Model "A1490BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 2/ 15

北米Model "A1490BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 2/ 15

北米Model "A1490BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 2/ 15

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags 1

北米Model "A1490BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 2/ 15

北米Model "A1490BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 2/ 15

北米Model "A1490BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 2/ 15

北米Model "A1490BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 2/ 15

北米Model "A1490BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 2/ 15

北米Model "A1490BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 2/ 15

北米Model "A1490BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 2/ 15

北米Model "A1490BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 2/ 15

北米Model "A1490BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 2/ 15

北米Model "A1490BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 2/ 15

北米Model "A1490BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 2/ 15

北米Model "A1490BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 2/ 15

SRS airbag system 3-14 Automatic headlight

北米Model "A1490BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 2/ 15

Mark Name Page Mark Name Page

BSD/RCTA warning 3-33

Low fuel warning light 3-21 RAB OFF indicator (if

Sport (S) mode indica- 3-30

北米Model "A1490BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 2/ 15

Item Page reference

English/Español/Fran- U.S.-spec. models: Eng-

北米Model "A1490BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 2/ 15

Item Page reference

北米Model "A1490BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 2/ 15

Item Page reference

Interior Light — 10 seconds/20 seconds/ 30 seconds 6-3

Approaching Time Set 30 seconds/60 seconds/ 30 seconds 3-70

One-touch lane changer — On/Off On 3-78

*: You can also set this while driving.

北米Model "A1490BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 2/ 15

Item Function Available settings Factory default setting Page

& Function settings and adjustments performed by a dealer

北米Model "A1490BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 2/ 15

Item Function Available settings Factory default setting

北米Model "A1490BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 2/ 15

北米Model "A1490BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 2/ 15

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags

北米Model "A1490BE-A" EDITED: 2022/ 2/ 15

1-2 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/Seats

Seats upright position and a collision